JP7544178B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

As a type of gaming machine, pachinko machines and slot machines are known. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a state where medals as a gaming medium are bet, an internal lottery is performed and the reels start to rotate, and when a stop button is operated during the rotation of the reels, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is given (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-323750 A

Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above , it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard .

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game .

The present invention relates to
A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
An accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media;
a bet amount setting means for determining that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting a bet amount for a game up to a predetermined amount;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a payout means for executing a payout of a predetermined number of game media as a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A transition means for transitioning a game state to a specific state in which a winning probability of a predetermined role in the lottery by the lottery means is changed compared to a state before the transition, when a specific picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped;
A gaming machine comprising:
The bet amount set by the bet amount setting means includes a first bet amount and a second bet amount different from the first bet amount,
a condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result is satisfied in a game that is played in a state where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount;
a first effect means for executing a first specific effect by a predetermined effect means in a game that is played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount;
a second effect means for executing a second specific effect different from the first specific effect by the predetermined effect means in a game that is played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount;
Equipped with
the specific condition may be established based on a result of a lottery by the lottery means for a game to be played in a situation where the first bet number is set;
a game can be executed in a state where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount when the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established;
The game machine is characterized by comprising a means for setting a presentation mode of the second specific presentation according to a lottery result of a game to be played in a situation where the second bet number is set .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of games .

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 1A is a perspective view showing the bottom of the housing, and FIG. 1B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 14 is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 13. 4 is a perspective cross-sectional view of the auxiliary tank taken along line CC in a downward position. FIG. This is a cross-sectional view of line BB in Figure 13. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a case where the auxiliary tank is used in correspondence with manual collection. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a case where the auxiliary tank is used in response to automatic collection. 4A is a perspective view of the bottom cover, and FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the rear surface of the bottom cover. FIG. FIG. 15 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 14. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the rotation of the bottom cover is restricted. FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a support structure for a bottom cover. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a method for removing the bottom cover. FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of installation of an auxiliary tank. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control. 13 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT state. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for BB state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a display mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a mode change notification process. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification. A flowchart showing the push order processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game number management process. 13 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a specialized zone. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process by a sub-side display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a bet time effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the push order. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop time performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus notification process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for notifying a specific role. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a continuous performance. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the pay lines and the stopping symbols in a normal game mode and in a specific mode such as a free mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode and the benefit to be awarded. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode and the benefit to be awarded. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode and the benefit to be awarded. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the stopping patterns of each role in a specific mode. An explanatory diagram showing the stopping patterns of each role in a specific mode. FIG. 13 shows a lottery table for a normal gaming state in a specific mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. A figure showing an example of a presentation when switching game modes. 13 is a flowchart showing a bet time effect setting process for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning combination corresponding process for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a second specific role processing for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a third specific role processing for a specific mode. This is a flowchart showing the push order processing for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a specialized zone process for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a stop effect for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific mode game number management process. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific mode bonus end process. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit in a specific mode. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit in a specific mode. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit in a specific mode. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit in a specific mode. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit in a specific mode. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game in a normal game mode. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game in a normal game mode. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game in a specific mode. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game in a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific mode bonus notification process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying a specific role for a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process for a specific mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between successive effects in each mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display effects during the bonus and each game during the bonus. FIG. A figure showing a lottery table when a bonus is carried over in a specific mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a counting process performed by a sub-side display control device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the number of acquisitions displayed by the auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific mode switching process by a sub-side display control device. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation when switching modes by the auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific mode setting process by a sub-side display control device. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit when a specific mode is set. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit when a specific mode is set. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the lottery table for the normal gaming state in a specific mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the relationship between the display effects during the bonus and each game during the bonus. 13A is a flowchart showing a modified example of the continuous performance setting process for a specific mode, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a modified example of the end determination process. FIG. 13 shows a modified example of the lottery table for the bonus state in a specific mode. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by the auxiliary display unit when a specific mode is set. A figure showing an example of display presentation for a mobile-linked service by the auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing information input/output processing by the sub-side display control device. A flowchart showing processing for advantageous areas by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the specific mode switching process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation when switching modes by the auxiliary display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a MAX bet switching process by the main control device. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an overview of modified examples of identification displays for specific modes. FIG. 13 is a front view of a slot machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state in a specific mode. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the overview of special top-ups. 13 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing. A diagram showing a special add-on occurrence table. 13 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a specialized zone. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing various add-on tables. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the differences between normal top-up and special top-up. 13 is a flowchart showing a bet operation process by the main control device. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the differences between normal top-up and special top-up. 13 is a flowchart showing a payout determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a dispensing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a replay process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing modified examples of various top-up tables. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the lottery table for the normal gaming state in a specific mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. A diagram for explaining an overview of a modified special add-on. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing modified examples of various top-up tables. 13 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the bet operation process. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing modified examples of the credit insertion switch and the start lever. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of an auxiliary tank according to a third embodiment in a downward position. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the cross section taken along line FF in FIG. 150. FIG. 4 is a partial enlarged view of the bottom of the auxiliary tank when the auxiliary tank is in an upward position. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how the lower opening opens and closes. FIG. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an auxiliary tank according to a first modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an auxiliary tank according to a second modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a plan view of an auxiliary tank according to a fourth embodiment. 156A is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 156, and FIG. 156B is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line GG of the tank body. This is a cross-sectional view of line HH in Figure 156 and an enlarged view of the main parts. 4A is a perspective view of the bottom cover, and FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the rear surface of the bottom cover. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the cross section along line HH in FIG. 156. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state before engagement. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a disengaged state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a case where the auxiliary tank is used in response to automatic collection. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a bottom cover according to a first modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate when closed, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate when open. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an installation state of an auxiliary tank 54 according to a second modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an installation state of an auxiliary tank according to a third modified example of the fourth embodiment. 4A is a perspective view of a lower sensor unit and its surroundings, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor unit. 1A is a perspective cross-sectional view of an auxiliary tank, and FIG. 1B is a perspective cross-sectional view of a tank main body. FIG. 2 is a vertical sectional view of the auxiliary tank. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a state before engagement, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state after engagement. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a disengaged state.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings, in which the present invention is applied to a reel type gaming machine, which is one type of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, Fig. 5 is a front view of a housing 11, Fig. 6(a) is a perspective view showing the bottom of the housing 11, and Fig. 6(b) is a partially enlarged view of the cross section taken along line A-A in Fig. 6(a).

As shown in Figures 1 to 6, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when it is installed in the game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the top center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel, is controlled by this excitation pulse. In addition, reel index sensors are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31 to detect that the reel has rotated once. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has rotated once. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input.

On the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, multiple symbols are drawn in the long side direction (rotation direction) as identification information. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a specified position, it is necessary to output 24 excitation pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols). Furthermore, the main control device 101 can determine which symbols are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and stop a specified symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 7 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from 0 to 20 are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are ten types of symbols: "red bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on the left reel 32L), "first replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on the left reel 32L), "red 7" symbol (e.g., 18th on the left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (e.g., 17th on the left reel 32L), "white bell" symbol (e.g., 12th on the left reel 32L), "second replay" symbol (e.g., 11th on the left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (e.g., 10th on the left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 5th on the left reel 32L), and "young man" symbol (e.g., 0th on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 7, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 8, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a line L4 that slopes downward to the right, connecting the top symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbols on the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on a line L5 that slopes upward to the right, connecting the bottom symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbols on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6, connecting the top symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated and some are not, depending on the number of medals bet. When symbols stop in a specified combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a specified number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a specified combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, there are cases where only the downward-right line L4 is the active line as shown in FIG. 9(a), cases where the two combination lines of the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines as shown in FIG. 9(b), and cases where only the bent line L6 is the active line as shown in FIG. 9(c). More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is the active line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-right line L5 are not the active line. Hereinafter, a game started with three medals bet is also called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is also called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is also called a 1-bet game. In this embodiment, the gameplay is based on the assumption that a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game will normally be played. Therefore, the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are sometimes referred to as normal game modes, and the 1-bet game in comparison is sometimes referred to as a specific mode.

Figures 10 to 12 show the correspondence between winning symbol combinations in normal game mode and the bonuses awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

In normal game mode, the small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 32nd small prize winning.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 2nd to 17th minor prizes, although the winning symbol combinations are different, in a 3-bet game, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, i.e., the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the upper line L1. For example, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the upper row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops on the middle row, and the "2nd replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the lower row, it is the 5th minor prize. As shown in FIG. 7, the center reel 32M has the "red bell" symbol arranged adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (11th, 14th) on the upstream side (12th, 15th), and the right reel 32R has the "red bell" symbol arranged one symbol upstream (2nd, 5th) from the "second replay" symbol (0th, 3rd). Therefore, when the 5th small win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd to 17th small wins are established, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 18th minor win is a winning pattern in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row. When the 18th minor win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Red 7", "BAR" and "Watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 19th minor win is achieved. When the 19th minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 20th to 24th small wins, if they occur in a 3 bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2 bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 25th minor win is a winning pattern in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row, just like the 18th minor win. In the case of the 18th minor win, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R can stop in the middle row only if it is also won with BB (a combination of the "2nd replay" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol), but in the case of the 25th minor win, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R can stop in the middle row regardless of whether BB is won or not. When the 25th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "watermelon" or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 26th minor win is achieved. When the 26th minor win is achieved, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th minor winning combination occurs when, for example, the player operates the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, or the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, stop on an active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on an active line, resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai miss" winning combination. When the 27th minor winning combination is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7", "BAR", "White Bell", "Cherry" and "Youth" symbols on the center reel 32M and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 28th small prize is won. As shown in FIG. 7, on the left reel 32L, the "First Replay" symbols are arranged in adjacent positions (2, 6, 14 and 19) downstream of the "Red Bell" symbols (3, 7, 15 and 20), and the "Second Replay" symbol is arranged in adjacent position (11) downstream of the "White Bell" symbol (12). On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbols (2, 5, 10, 15, 20) and the "first replay" or "second replay" symbols are arranged in adjacent positions on the upstream side (3, 6, 16, 0). Therefore, when the 28th small win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "bell" and "replay" symbols are in tenpai on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, but the "bell" and "replay" symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai miss, except when the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row. When the 28th small win is established, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 29th minor win is won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch when the No. 9 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top or middle row, the 29th minor win is won when the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. When the 29th minor win is won, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 30th small win is won. Details will be explained later, but the 30th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 30th small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 31st minor win is achieved. Details will be described later, but the 31st minor win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 31st minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 32nd minor win is achieved. When the 32nd minor win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The winning combinations that grant the replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winning combination to the 8th replay winning combination. If the 2nd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st RT state, if the 3rd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 2nd RT state, and if the 4th or 5th replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 3rd RT state. The 1st replay winning combination to the 8th replay winning combination are winning combinations that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning.

When the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a first BB win is achieved. When the "white 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, or when the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a second BB win is achieved. When these BB wins are achieved, the game state transitions to the BB state. When the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win is achieved. When a CB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the CB state.

In addition, although not a winning combination, there are some winning combinations that cause the game state to transition to the first RT state. Specifically, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, all stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Also, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "first replay" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "second replay" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, all stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. In the following, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transition results.

The relationship between the winning symbol combinations in a specific mode as a 1-bet game and the bonuses awarded when a winning combination occurs will be explained in detail later.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of the patterns. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, there are provided button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that are operated to individually stop each of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the center stop switch 43 is operated, the center reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal insertion port 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to a player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. The hopper device 51 is attached to a metal hopper mounting plate 22 (see FIG. 6(a)) and is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. The hopper mounting plate 22 is fixed to the bottom plate 11a with screws and has a number of locking claws 22a that can lock the hopper device 51 (the lower end of the payout device 53). The hopper device 51 is fixed by engaging these locking claws 22a.

To the right of the hopper device 51, an auxiliary tank 54 is provided to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a is provided to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, surplus medals that overflow from the storage tank 52 are stored in the auxiliary tank 54.

The medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected by employees of the game hall. That is, the auxiliary tank 54 is stored inside the cabinet 11 while placed on the bottom plate 11a of the cabinet 11 (see FIG. 5), and can be removed from inside the cabinet 11 by pulling it out toward you (forward) with the front of the cabinet 11 open. Hereinafter, the method of removing the auxiliary tank 54 and collecting the medals may be referred to as manual collection.

In addition to the manual collection described above, medals that overflow from the storage tank 52 can also be collected by an automatic collection device installed in the game hall. That is, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the bottom plate 11a of the cabinet 11 is provided with a medal discharge hole 15 for discharging medals outside the slot machine 10, and medals discharged from the medal discharge hole 15 are supplied to an automatic collection device located below the slot machine 10. The medal discharge hole 15 penetrates the bottom plate 11a in the thickness direction, and is positioned corresponding to the drop position of medals that fall from the guide plate 52a. Hereinafter, the collection method in which medals are collected using an automatic collection device may be referred to as automatic collection.

Whether the medals that overflow from the storage tank 52 are collected manually or automatically depends on the facilities of the arcade in which the slot machine 10 is installed, i.e., whether the arcade supports automatic collection or not.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion port 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 is stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 is provided for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute an input means for inputting game media. In addition, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 only involve the action of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. Considering this, it can also be said that they constitute an indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

Regarding each of the credit insertion switches 56-58 in more detail, the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 are formed with a larger operating surface to be operated by hand or the like than the third credit insertion switch 58. This improves the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57. In other words, the second credit insertion switch 57 that can be used in a 1 bet game as a specific mode has the same degree of operability as the first credit insertion switch 56 that can be used in a 3 bet game as a normal game mode.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided a first effect switch 66 which is operated when an effect occurs. In other words, the first credit insertion switch 56 and the third credit insertion switch 58 are provided to the left of the first effect switch 66, and the second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first effect switch 66. As described above, the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are set as the normal game mode, and the 1-bet game is set as the specific mode, and it can be said that the normal game mode and the specific mode are also distinguished by the relative positions of the corresponding credit insertion switches 56-58.

In addition, below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and to the right of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a second effect switch 67 that is used to switch between the normal game mode and the specific mode. The second effect switch 67 will be described in detail later.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are configured with seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order notification unit 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. The push order notification unit 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. Note that the push order notification unit 68 can also be replaced with a liquid crystal display or the like, and LED lamps may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 to illuminate them, or LED lamps may be provided adjacent to each of the stop switches 42 to 44.

At the top of the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that gives the player various information. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. At the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, there is provided a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal payout. In other words, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

<Regarding the auxiliary tank 54>
The auxiliary tank 54 will now be described with reference to Figures 13 to 16. Figure 13 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, Figure 14 is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 13, Figure 15 is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line CC in a state where the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward orientation, and Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in Figure 13.

As shown in Figures 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 has a tank body 501 that is generally box-shaped with a bottom that opens upward. The tank body 501 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside can be seen from the outside. The tank body 501 has a bottom plate portion 501a that is generally rectangular in plan view, and a front wall portion 501b, a rear wall portion 501c, a right side wall portion 501d, and a left side wall portion 501e that stand up from the bottom plate portion 501a and surround the bottom plate portion 501a, and an upper opening portion 502 that is generally rectangular in plan view and opens upward is formed at the top of the tank body 501.

The right side wall 501d and the left side wall 501e are inclined so that the distance between them increases as they go upward. In this case, the upper opening 502 can be enlarged compared to when both walls 501d, 501e are upright. This prevents the medals from spilling and scattering around the housing 11 even when a large amount of medals is moving toward the auxiliary tank 54 all at once, such as when medals are manually scooped out of the storage tank 52 and moved to the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in Figures 14 and 16, a handle portion 503 is integrally formed on the upper part of the front wall portion 501b of the tank body 501. The handle portion 503 has a flat extension portion 503a extending forward from the upper end of the front wall portion 501b, and a hanging portion 503b hanging downward from the front end of the extension portion 503a. At both left and right ends of the hanging portion 503b, connecting portions 503c are provided that connect the hanging portion 503b to the front wall portion 501b, thereby increasing the attachment rigidity of the hanging portion 503b to the tank body 501. The handle portion 503 is open downward, and is configured so that fingers or hands can be inserted between the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b from below the handle portion 503.

The handle 503 allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be pulled forward from within the housing 11 by hooking a finger or hand on the hanging portion 503b. When the auxiliary tank 54 is removed from within the housing 11, the auxiliary tank 54 can be held stably by inserting the fingertips between the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b. This allows the series of operations of pulling the auxiliary tank 54 forward from within the housing 11 and lifting it up to be performed smoothly and continuously.

The rear wall 501c of the tank body 501 has an upper sensor insertion hole 505a and a lower sensor insertion hole 505b, each of which has a circular shape, arranged vertically. When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6(a)) attached to the housing 11 are inserted into the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b. These sensor rods 16a and 16b are used to detect the storage state of the medals in the auxiliary tank 54, and are electrically connected to the main control device 101. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the two sensor rods 16a and 16b are paired and spaced apart from each other vertically, and the base ends of each are fixed to the back plate 11b of the housing 11 and extend forward parallel to the bottom plate 11a.

The sensor insertion holes 505a, 505b of the tank body 501 are formed at positions corresponding to the sensor rods 16a, 16b in the rear wall 501c. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the sensor rods 16a, 16b pass through the sensor insertion holes 505a, 505b from the rear of the auxiliary tank 54, and the tip of each sensor rod 16a, 16b is located inside the tank body 501. Each sensor rod 16a, 16b is made of a metal material having electrical conductivity, and when the amount of medals (conductivity) stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount and a medal is interposed between the sensor rods 16a, 16b, both sensor rods 16a, 16b are conductive through the medal. This allows the main control device 101 to know that a predetermined amount of medals has been stored in the auxiliary tank 54, that is, that the auxiliary tank 54 is full.

When the main control device 101 detects that the auxiliary tank 54 is full, an external signal indicating that the tank is full is output to the amusement hall's management device (hall computer) via the external centralized terminal board 121, which will be described later. After that, the full state of the auxiliary tank 54 is notified to an employee of the amusement hall via a specified communication terminal, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 are collected by that employee.

<Configuration for supporting both manual and automatic collection>
Incidentally, when medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are to be collected by automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 gets in the way and must be removed from the cabinet 11. However, removing the auxiliary tank 54 from the cabinet 11 requires the gaming hall to secure storage space for the auxiliary tank 54, which is inconvenient. In addition, the auxiliary tank 54 may be lost or mistaken for one from another type of slot machine, which may cause inconvenience when the slot machine 10 is redistributed as a used machine.

The auxiliary tank 54 in this embodiment is compatible with both manual and automatic collection methods, and is configured to automatically collect medals that have overflowed from the storage tank 52 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed inside the housing 11. This configuration will be described in detail below with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram of the auxiliary tank 54 used in response to manual collection, Figure 18(a) is an explanatory diagram of the auxiliary tank 54 used in response to automatic collection, and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the cross section taken along line E-E in (a).

As already explained, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed, the sensor rods 16a, 16b are inserted into the tank body 501. In this embodiment, however, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down, the sensor rods 16a, 16b can still be inserted into the sensor insertion holes 505a, 505b.

In other words, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position with the bottom plate portion 501a facing downward, the upper sensor rod 16a can be inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower sensor rod 16b can be inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b, whereas when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position with the bottom plate portion 501a facing upward, the opening diameter and height position of each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b for each sensor rod 16a, 16b are set so that the upper sensor rod 16a can be inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b and the lower sensor rod 16b can be inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a.

Specifically, in relation to the lower sensor rod 16b, the distance Lb1 (see Figure 16) from the lower end position of the bottom plate portion 501a to the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b, and the distance La1 from the upper end position of the rear wall portion 501c to the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a are both less than the distance from the bottom plate 11a to the lower end position of the lower sensor rod 16b (the lower end position of the insertion portion into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b). On the other hand, in relation to the upper sensor rod 16a, the distance Lb2 from the lower end position of the bottom plate 501a to the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the distance La2 from the upper end position of the rear wall 501c to the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b are both equal to or greater than the distance from the bottom plate 11a to the upper end position of the upper sensor rod 16a (the upper end position of the insertion portion into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b). In this embodiment, the opening diameter of each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b and the above-mentioned distances La1, Lb1 are approximately equal, and each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b is set to be approximately symmetrical vertically with respect to the center line 510 in the height direction (vertical direction) of the tank body 501.

This configuration allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be installed inside the housing 11 not only in an upward position, but also in an inverted downward position.

As shown in Figures 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 is configured so that its bottom can be opened and closed. Specifically, the tank body 501 has a lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate portion 501a, and a bottom lid 514 that opens and closes the lower opening 512. The bottom lid 514 is rotatably supported by a support portion 504 (see Figure 16) provided at the connection between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e.

The lower opening 512 penetrates the bottom plate portion 501a in the thickness direction and is formed in a roughly rectangular shape in a plan view. The lower opening 512 is located in the center of the bottom plate portion 501a and is large enough to allow multiple medals to pass through at the same time.

The bottom lid 514 serves as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the lower opening 512, and can be displaced between a closed position (see FIG. 14) in which it covers and closes the lower opening 512 from above, and an open position (see FIG. 15) in which it rotates from the closed position toward the inside of the tank body 501 to open the lower opening 512. The bottom lid 514 is substantially flat and has a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view corresponding to the shape of the lower opening 512. The dimensions of the bottom lid 514 in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction are all larger than the lower opening 512 and smaller than the bottom plate portion 501a, and the bottom lid 514 can close the lower opening 512 while avoiding interference with the front wall portion 501b, the rear wall portion 501c, the right side wall portion 501d, and the left side wall portion 501e.

The support portion 504 includes a front support portion 515a, a rear support portion 515b, and an intermediate support portion 515c. Each of these support portions 515a to 515c is disposed along the longitudinal direction of the tank body 501 at the connection portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e, and is arranged at a predetermined interval from each other. The detailed structure of each of the support portions 515a to 515c and the connection structure with the bottom lid 514 will be described in detail later.

In this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual collection, as shown in Figs. 14 and 16, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in an upward orientation and the bottom cover 514 is placed in the closed position to close the lower opening 512. In this state, as shown in Fig. 17, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, and the guide plate 52a (see Fig. 5) of the hopper device 51 is positioned above the upper opening 502.

By installing the auxiliary tank 54 in this manner, medals that overflow from the storage tank 52 fall into the auxiliary tank 54, making it possible to store the medals in the auxiliary tank 54. At this time, as shown in FIG. 16, the bottom lid 514 rests on the surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, restricting the downward rotation of the bottom lid 514 and preventing the bottom lid 514 from rotating downward beyond the closed position. This prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from falling out due to the weight of the medals when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed or lifted from within the housing 11.

On the other hand, when using the auxiliary tank 54 in response to automatic collection, as shown in Figure 15, the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down to face downwards and the bottom cover 514 is placed in the open position to open the lower opening 512. In this state, as shown in Figure 18(a), the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, the induction plate 52a is positioned above the lower opening 512, and the auxiliary tank 54 is positioned above the medal discharge hole 15 (see Figure 6(a)).

By installing it in this manner, the lower opening 512, the upper opening 502, and the medal discharge hole 15 are connected, and medals that overflow from the storage tank 52 can pass through the auxiliary tank 54 and move to the medal discharge hole 15. As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is left installed, medals from the storage tank 52 can be guided to the medal discharge hole 15, making it possible to automatically collect the medals.

When switching the auxiliary tank 54 from automatic collection to manual collection, it is possible that the closing operation of the lower opening 512 may be forgotten, and the auxiliary tank 54 may be placed in the cabinet 11 facing upwards with the lower opening 512 left open. In this case, the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is removed, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 will spill out and scatter inside the cabinet 11 when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed from the cabinet 11. As a result, it becomes necessary for an employee of the amusement hall to manually remove the medals one by one, which may result in a great deal of work.

In addition, even when switching the auxiliary tank 54 from a manual collection mode to an automatic collection mode, it is conceivable that the opening operation of the lower opening 512 will be forgotten, and the auxiliary tank 54 will be placed in the cabinet 11 facing downwards with the lower opening 512 closed by the bottom lid 514. In this case, the path of medal movement to the medal discharge hole 15 will be blocked by the bottom lid 514, and if play is performed in this state, medals from the guide plate 52a will accumulate to a certain extent on the bottom of the tank body 501, and then gradually spill out. In this case, not only will medals that have overflowed from the storage tank 52 not be able to be properly automatically collected, but the medals will also be scattered inside the cabinet 11.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 is devised so that the hall staff can switch the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 between manual and automatic collection without being aware of the closing and opening operations of the bottom lid 514. Below, this configuration will be explained with reference to Figures 19 to 22, including a detailed explanation of the bottom lid 514. Figure 19(a) is a perspective view of the bottom lid 514, (b) is a perspective view of the back side of the bottom lid 514, Figure 20 is a side view of the bottom lid 514, Figure 21 is a partially enlarged view of the cross section taken along line D-D in Figure 14, and Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram showing how the rotation of the bottom lid 514 is restricted.

The bottom lid 514 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 19, includes a flat lid body 521 and a generally round rod-shaped shaft portion 522. The lid body 521 is generally rectangular in plan view, and its longitudinal and lateral dimensions are greater than those of the lower opening 512. Therefore, when the bottom lid 514 is in the closed position, the entire lower opening 512 is closed by the lid body 521, and the back surface 521b of the lid body 521 and the surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501 are in circumferential contact around the lower opening 512.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), a plurality of protrusions 523 are provided on the back surface 521b of the lid body 521. Each protrusion 523 extends along the longitudinal direction of the lid body 521 and is arranged parallel to each other at a predetermined interval in the lateral direction of the lid body 521. The provision of these protrusions 523 reinforces the strength and bending rigidity of the lid body 521, and increases the durability of the bottom lid 514.

The shaft portion 522 is integrally formed with the lid body 521 at one long side portion 521c of the lid body 521 and extends along the extension direction of the long side portion 521c. The shaft portion 522 has a front support shaft 524 and a rear support shaft 525 provided at both ends of the longitudinal direction of the long side portion 521c, and an intermediate support shaft 526 provided in the middle of each of the support shafts 524, 525. The front support shaft 524, the rear support shaft 525, and the intermediate support shaft 526 correspond to the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b, and the intermediate support portion 515c (see FIG. 13) provided on the tank body 501. That is, the front support shaft 524 and the rear support shaft 525 are connected to the front support portion 515a and the rear support portion 515b, respectively, and the intermediate support shaft 526 is connected to the intermediate support portion 515c.

The lid body 521 has a front notch 530 and a rear notch 531 cut into rectangular shapes at both ends of the shaft 522 in the axial direction. In addition, a support opening 532 is formed at a location corresponding to the intermediate support shaft 526. By forming these front notch 530, rear notch 531, and support opening 532, a predetermined gap is secured between the lid body 521 and each of the supports 515a to 515c, and interference with each of the supports 515a to 515c when the bottom lid 514 rotates is avoided.

The shaft portion 522 has a number of notched grooves 533 formed by cutting out a portion of the shaft portion 522 in the radial direction of the shaft portion 522. These notched grooves 533 correspond one-to-one to a number of ribs 506 (see Figures 14 and 16) provided at the connection between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e in the tank body 501. When the bottom cover 514 is attached to the tank body 501, as shown in Figure 21, each rib 506 is inserted into and engaged with each notched groove 533, restricting movement of the shaft portion 522 relative to the tank body 501.

In this embodiment, when the bottom lid 514 is in the closed position, the rotational position of the bottom lid 514 is not fixed or maintained. In other words, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position, the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514 is merely maintained in the closed position by resting on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and the bottom lid 514 can freely rotate toward the open position.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is inverted from an upward to a downward position, the bottom lid 514 rotates under its own weight toward the open position, and the lower opening 512 is naturally opened. In other words, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, the lower opening 512 is opened accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be opened in conjunction with the inversion of the auxiliary tank 54, eliminating the need for a separate manual opening operation. This prevents the lower opening 512 from remaining closed, and makes it possible to always maintain the appropriate state without having to be aware of whether it is open or not.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, the shaft 522 of the bottom cover 514 is covered from above by the bottom plate 501a. This prevents medals from the storage tank 52 from colliding with the shaft 522 and causing problems with support. In this case, by configuring the shaft 522 to be covered by the bottom plate 501a, there is no need to provide a dedicated part as a covering member, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), a protrusion 535 is integrally formed on the surface 521a of the lid body 521. The protrusion 535 is disposed in the center of the lid body 521 in the longitudinal direction and is adjacent to the support opening 532 in the lateral direction. The protrusion 535 protrudes from the surface 521a of the lid body 521 at a predetermined height and is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft 522 (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), when the bottom lid 514 is rotated in a first direction 537 from the closed position toward the open position, the top 535a of the protrusion 535 abuts against the left side wall 501e of the tank body 501, restricting the rotation of the bottom lid 514 in the first direction 537. This defines the rotation end position of the bottom lid 514, and limits the upper limit of the rotation angle in the first direction 537 to a predetermined rotation angle α.

In this case, the predetermined rotation angle α (maximum rotation angle in the first direction 537) of the bottom lid 514 is set to a rotation angle at which the bottom lid 514 tilts toward the closed position with respect to the imaginary vertical line 540 passing through the rotation axis 538 of the bottom lid 514 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position, as shown in FIG. 22(b). In other words, the rotation angle is set to a rotation angle at which the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 does not straddle the imaginary vertical line 540 and does not exceed the imaginary vertical line 540 in the first direction 537. Specifically, the predetermined rotation angle α is set to less than 90°, and is set to 85° in this embodiment. With this configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position, the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 is located on the closed position side with respect to the imaginary vertical line 540, and the bottom lid 514 tries to tilt toward the closed position due to its own weight.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the bottom lid 514 is in the open position, the rotational position of the bottom lid 514 is not fixed or held. In other words, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, the protrusion 535 of the bottom lid 514 abuts against the left side wall 501e of the tank body 501, and the bottom lid 514 merely rests against the left side wall 501e, and the bottom lid 514 can freely rotate toward the closed position.

Therefore, when the bottom lid 514 is tilted toward the closed position as described above, the bottom lid 514 rotates easily toward the closed position, and the lower opening 512 is naturally closed. In other words, when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in an upward position, the lower opening 512 is closed accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be closed in conjunction with the inversion operation of the auxiliary tank 54, and a separate manual closing operation is not required. This prevents the lower opening 512 from remaining open, and makes it possible to always maintain the appropriate state without having to be aware of whether it is closed or not.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, the bottom lid 514 tends to stay in a balanced position where the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 is located directly below the pivot shaft 538. However, in this embodiment, the protrusion 535 abuts against the left side wall 501e of the tank body 501, restricting the rotation of the bottom lid 514 just before the balanced position. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, the bottom lid 514 is maintained in a position rotated in the first direction 537 by the above-mentioned predetermined rotation angle α from the closed position, and this position corresponds to the open position.

As shown in FIG. 20, the protrusion 535 has a first inclined portion 535b located on the shaft 522 side and a second inclined portion 535c located on the opposite side to the shaft 522 side, with the top 535a in between. The first inclined portion 535b is inclined upward from the shaft 522 side toward the top 535a, and the second inclined portion 535c is inclined downward from the top 535a toward the opposite side to the shaft 522 side. The inclination angle of the second inclined portion 535c is smaller than that of the first inclined portion 535b.

This configuration makes it possible to ensure the strength of the protruding portion 535 by minimizing the amount of protrusion (height in the protruding direction) of the protruding portion 535. In other words, the degree of restriction of the rotation range of the bottom cover 514 is determined by the amount of protrusion of the protruding portion 535, and if the inclination angle of the second inclined portion 535c is greater than that of the first inclined portion 535b, the position of the apex 535a will be farther away from the rotation axis 538 of the bottom cover 514, and it becomes necessary to increase the amount of protrusion of the protruding portion 535. In this case, the strength of the protruding portion 535 will decrease, making the protruding portion 535 more susceptible to damage due to impact with a medal, etc.

In this embodiment, the bottom lid 514 is tilted to a predetermined rotation angle (specific rotation angle) between the closed position and the open position, and in that state, the bottom lid 514 is moved in a predetermined removal direction, thereby enabling the connection between the bottom lid 514 and the tank body 501 to be released. The configuration for this purpose will be described below with reference to Figures 23 and 24, including detailed explanations of the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b, and the middle support portion 515c. Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the support structure of the bottom lid 514, and Figure 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a method for removing the bottom lid 514.

As already explained, the bottom cover 514 is connected to the tank body 501 by connecting the front support shaft 524, rear support shaft 525, and intermediate support shaft 526 of the shaft portion 522 to the front support portion 515a, rear support portion 515b, and intermediate support portion 515c of the tank body 501. Note that the connection structures between each of the support shafts 524 to 526 and each of the support portions 515a to 515c are similar, so here, the combination of the front support shaft 524 and the front support portion 515a will be explained as an example.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the front support portion 515a includes a support upright portion 551 that stands upward from the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and a support protrusion portion 552 that protrudes toward the support upright portion 551 from the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501.

The height dimension of the support standing portion 551 is larger than the shaft diameter of the front support shaft 524, and a protruding portion 551b protruding toward the left side wall portion 501e is formed at the upper part of the support standing portion 551. The support protrusion 552 is disposed at a height position corresponding to the protruding portion 551b and faces the protruding portion 551b in the radial direction of the front support shaft 524. Between the protruding portion 551b and the support protrusion 552, an elongated slit portion 554 is formed that opens up and down and extends in the axial direction of the front support shaft 524. Below the slit portion 554, a space portion 553 into which the front support shaft 524 can be inserted is formed, and the protruding portion 551b and the wall surfaces 551a, 552a of the support protrusion 552 that define the upper part of the space portion 553 are curved in an arc shape so that the distance between them narrows as they go upward.

On the other hand, the front support shaft 524 has a shape in which part of a round bar is chamfered into a flat shape. More specifically, it has a pair of parallel flat surfaces 561 and a sliding surface 562 with an arc-shaped cross section that connects these flat surfaces 561. The distance (radial width) M between the two flat surfaces 561 is the same as or smaller than the opening width Ld (opening width in the same direction as the above direction) of the slit portion 554.

As shown in FIG. 20, the flat surface 561 is formed at an inclination angle rotated a predetermined angle around the pivot shaft 538 with respect to an imaginary plane flush with the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514. This inclination angle is set at an angle at which both flat surfaces 561 stand upright (in other words, the sliding surface 562 faces the slit portion 554) when the bottom lid 514 is tilted to a predetermined specific rotation angle β between the closed position and the open position as shown in FIG. 24.

Therefore, by tilting the bottom cover 514 to the above-mentioned specific rotation angle β, the width of the front support shaft 524 becomes the interval M of the flat surface 561, and can be made equal to or smaller than the opening width Ld of the slit portion 554. Therefore, by moving the bottom cover 514 toward the upper opening 502 in the same position, the front support shaft 524 passes through the slit portion 554 and can be removed from the front support portion 515a. Incidentally, if the bottom cover 514 is moved upward while tilted to the specific rotation angle β, the rear support shaft 525 and the intermediate support shaft 526 can be removed from the rear support portion 515b and the intermediate support portion 515c, respectively, and the bottom cover 514 can be removed from the tank body 501.

In this way, because the bottom lid 514 is configured to be removable from the tank body 501, if the bottom lid 514 is damaged, it is not necessary to replace the entire auxiliary tank 54, but rather it can be dealt with by simply replacing the bottom lid 514. In addition, when attaching the bottom lid 514 to the tank body 501, it can be easily attached by pushing the support parts 515a to 515c downward from above while the bottom lid 514 is tilted at a specific rotation angle β, which makes it easier to assemble the auxiliary tank 54.

On the other hand, when the bottom cover 514 is positioned in the closed position (see FIG. 23(a)) or the open position (see FIG. 23(b)), the width of the front support shaft 524 becomes larger than the spacing M of the slit portion 554, and the front support shaft 524 cannot pass through the slit portion 554. Therefore, even if the bottom cover 514 is moved toward the upper opening 502 in these positions, it cannot be removed from the tank body 501. As already explained, in this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position to accommodate automatic collection, the bottom cover 514 remains in a rotational position (open position) where the protrusion 535 abuts against the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501 while hanging from the tank body 501. Even in such a case, the bottom lid 514 is prevented from coming off the tank body 501 and falling because the specified rotation angle α (open position) defined by the protrusion 535 differs from the specific rotation angle β at which the bottom lid 514 can be removed.

<Configuration for fixing the auxiliary tank 54>
Incidentally, from the viewpoint of preventing the loss of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10, it is desirable to transport the slot machine 10 with the auxiliary tank 54 stored in the housing 11. However, when manually collecting medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, it is necessary to remove the auxiliary tank 54 from the housing 11, and therefore it is required to install the auxiliary tank 54 in a free state without fixing it. For this reason, if the slot machine 10 is tilted or vibrated during transportation, there is a problem that the auxiliary tank 54 moves within the housing 11 and collides with surrounding components such as the hopper device 51, causing damage.

In this embodiment, therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 is fixed when the slot machine 10 is transported, but is designed to be free when used in response to manual collection. This configuration will be described below with reference to Figures 6 and 13 to 18.

As shown in Figures 13 to 17, the upper end of the tank body 501 of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a plate-shaped flange portion 571 that protrudes outward. The flange portion 571 is integrally formed with the tank body 501 and includes a front flange portion 571a, a rear flange portion 572b, a right flange portion 571c, and a left flange portion 571d. These flange portions 571a to 571d are continuously formed in a frame shape so as to surround the upper opening 502. By providing the flange portion 571 in this way, the bending rigidity of the tank body 501 is reinforced, and deformation of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted with medals stored therein is suppressed. The front flange portion 571a also serves as the extension portion 503a of the handle portion 503.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(a) and FIG. 18(a), the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with an engagement portion 574 that engages with the right flange portion 571c of the tank body 501 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward position. The engagement portion 574 is integrally formed with the hopper mounting plate 22 and is formed by bending a part of the hopper mounting plate 22. Specifically, the hopper mounting plate 22 has a mounting plate protruding portion 575 formed so as to protrude rightward from the right end of the mounting plate main body portion 22b, and the mounting plate protruding portion 575 is bent into a crank shape to form the engagement portion 574. As shown in FIG. 6(b), the engagement portion 574 has a standing portion 577 that stands upward from the mounting plate protruding portion 575, and a protruding portion 578 that protrudes from the upper end of the standing portion 577 toward the installation area of the auxiliary tank 54.

The lower surface 578a of the protruding portion 578 is approximately parallel to the surface of the bottom plate 11a, and the length dimension of the protruding portion 578 in the protruding direction is smaller than the length dimension of the right flange portion 571c in the protruding direction. The height of the standing portion 577 is set so that the gap dimension Le between the protruding portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a is slightly larger than or equal to the plate thickness dimension of the right flange portion 571c. In addition, the distance Lh (see FIG. 6(a)) between the inner wall surface 577a of the standing portion 577 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 is set so that it is slightly larger than or equal to the width dimension Lf (see FIG. 13) of the auxiliary tank 54. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the engagement portion 574 is located at a position lowered rearward by a predetermined distance from the front end portion 11d of the bottom plate 11a, and extends in the front-rear direction over a predetermined length shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the right flange portion 571c.

With this configuration, the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward position can be placed on the bottom plate 11a in front of the engagement portion 574, and then slid toward the back plate 11b, so that the right flange portion 571c can be inserted into the gap between the overhang portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a, as shown in FIG. 18(b). This allows the right flange portion 571c to engage with the engagement portion 574, and the overhang portion 578 can restrict the auxiliary tank 54 from floating up (moving upward).

Therefore, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 as described above when transporting the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from moving upward inside the cabinet 11 and colliding with the upper guide plate 52a, etc. Furthermore, if the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward, it may become possible for the auxiliary tank 54 to get caught in an interfering position with the locking device 20 inside the cabinet 11, causing an inconvenience in which the door cannot be unlocked even when an unlocking operation is performed through the key cylinder 21; however, by restricting the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

When the right flange portion 571c and the engagement portion 574 are engaged, not only is the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 restricted, but by disposing the auxiliary tank 54 between the standing portion 577 and the right side plate 11c, the left-right movement of the auxiliary tank 54 can also be restricted. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from reciprocating left and right when the slot machine 10 is transported, and from repeatedly colliding with the right side plate 11c or the hopper device 51.

Here, when medals are manually collected, the auxiliary tank 54 is removed from the cabinet 11 by lifting a part or the whole of the auxiliary tank 54, but when the right flange 571c and the engagement portion 574 are engaged, the above removal operation becomes difficult. That is, in this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position to engage the right flange 571c and the engagement portion 574, the hanging portion 503b stands up and the handle portion 503 opens upward. In this case, it becomes difficult to insert fingers or hands from below, so that after transporting (or setting) to a game hall where medals are manually collected, employees are likely to hesitate to perform the above removal operation out of habit. This prevents forced removal operations in the engaged state and prevents damage to the right flange 571c and the engagement portion 574.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), a restricting plate 579 that restricts the forward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided at the front end 11d of the bottom plate 11a. The restricting plate 579 is made of a metal flat plate having a predetermined thickness, and at its rear end, an upward step is formed between the restricting plate 579 and the bottom plate 11a.

The length dimension of the restricting plate 579 in the front-rear direction (the sliding direction of the auxiliary tank 54) is set to a length that positions the rear end of the restricting plate 579 in front of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to the specified installation position. In other words, the distance between the rear end of the restricting plate 579 and the back plate 11b is longer than the longitudinal dimension Lg of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, after the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the specified installation position, even if the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward, it is caught by the restricting plate 579, and further forward movement is restricted. This prevents the auxiliary tank 54 from colliding with the back of the front door 12 when the slot machine 10 is transported, and prevents damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the front door 12.

The thickness dimension of the restricting plate 579 should be set to a height that allows the lower end 12a of the front door 12 (see FIG. 4; more specifically, the part of the lower end that will be located above the bottom plate 11a when the front door 12 is closed) to ride up when the front door 12 is closed. This allows the restricting plate 579 to fill the gap between the front door 12 and the bottom plate 11a. In other words, the restricting plate 579 can also function as an anti-fraud plate that prevents attempts to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 by inserting a foreign object such as a wire through the gap.

The above-mentioned predetermined installation position is set to a position where the guide plate 52a is disposed above the lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate portion 501a of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, when transporting the auxiliary tank 54 to an amusement hall for automatic collection, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward with the bottom cover 514 in the open position, the auxiliary tank 54 can be used as is after transportation or installation in the amusement hall without having to be removed or adjusted in position.

However, the bottom cover 514 does not necessarily have to be in the open position during transportation. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed with the bottom cover 514 placed on the upper sensor rod 16a. In this case, the upper sensor rod 16a abuts the bottom cover 514 at a midway point on the way to the open position, thereby restricting the rotation of the bottom cover 514 to the open position. This sets the upper limit of rotation of the bottom cover 514 from the closed position to a predetermined rotation angle γ, and even if a foreign object or hand is inserted through the medal discharge hole 15 to rotate the bottom cover 514 to the open position, this is prevented by the upper sensor rod 16a. As a result, the lower opening 512 is prevented from being completely opened, making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the positional relationship between the rotation shaft 538 and the upper sensor rod 16a is set so that the specified rotation angle γ is smaller than the specific rotation angle β (see FIG. 24) at which the bottom lid 514 can be removed. In this case, even if a foreign object or a hand is inserted through the medal ejection hole 15 to rotate the bottom lid 514, it will be impossible or difficult to rotate to the specific rotation angle β, making it difficult to remove the bottom lid 514. This makes it possible to suppress the act of removing the bottom lid 514 to completely open the lower opening 512.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, as shown in FIG. 17, the auxiliary tank 54 is not engaged with the engagement portion 574, and the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a free state. Therefore, when manually collecting medals, the auxiliary tank 54 can be easily removed from inside the housing 11.

The distance between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 corresponds to the width dimension Lf of the auxiliary tank 54, and is slightly larger than the width dimension Lf. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing upward, the auxiliary tank 54 is sandwiched between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c, and the flange portion 571 abuts against the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c, restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left-right direction.

As already explained, in this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position, the left side wall 501e and the right side wall 501d of the tank body 501 are formed in an inclined shape such that the distance between them increases as they go upward. Of these, the left side wall 501e is the wall that faces the engagement portion 574 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, and by having the above-mentioned inclination, it is possible to easily separate the lower end portion of the left side wall 501e from the engagement portion 574. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, a space can be secured between the engagement portion 574, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the auxiliary tank 54 becoming difficult to install due to interference with the engagement portion 574 or the auxiliary tank 54 tilting.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing upward, a restricting plate 579 is located in front of the auxiliary tank 54, and the auxiliary tank 54 can come into contact with the restricting plate 579 when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 15 and 16, a bulge 581 with a semicircular cross section is provided on the back surface of the bottom plate 501a of the tank body 501.

The bulge 581 is integrally formed with the tank body 501 and is disposed at the front of the tank body 501 on the back surface of the bottom plate 501a. This reduces the likelihood of the tank body 501 getting caught on the restricting plate 579, making it possible to smoothly pull out the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, by making the height dimension of the bulge 581 larger than the plate thickness dimension of the restricting plate 579, it becomes easier for the bulge 581 to come into contact with the restricting plate 579 first when the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out, making it possible to preferably exert the effect of reducing the likelihood of getting caught.

When the right flange portion 571c and the engagement portion 574 are to be disengaged, the auxiliary tank 54 can be pulled forward (toward the user) from the state shown in FIG. 18(a) to disengage the tank. When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, the hanging portion 503b of the handle portion 503 is in an upright and open upward state, so that the tank can be easily pulled out by hooking a finger or hand on the hanging portion 503b from above the handle portion 503. In this case, in order to prevent the tank from getting caught on the restricting plate 579, an inclined surface may be provided on the rear upper end of the restricting plate 579 or the front upper end 571e (see FIG. 17) of the extension portion 503a (front flange portion 571a).

As already explained, in this embodiment, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b extend in a direction parallel to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 (extending in the same direction as the tank installation surface in the height direction), and the auxiliary tank 54 can be slid forward and backward to insert and remove the sensor rods 16a, 16b into and from the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower sensor insertion hole 505b.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in the housing 11 facing upward and medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is relatively heavy, so when an employee removes the auxiliary tank 54, it is thought that the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out by sliding it over the bottom plate 11a from the front opening side of the housing 11. In this case, the sensor rods 16a, 16b inserted into the insertion holes 505a, 505b are pulled out from the auxiliary tank 54 without receiving excessive force.

In contrast, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position, the auxiliary tank 54 is empty and its weight is relatively light. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed, it is considered that the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out at a tilt so that the front end of the auxiliary tank 54 can be lifted. In this case, there is a concern that the sensor rods 16a, 16b will be subjected to excessive force from the auxiliary tank 54. In this regard, since the auxiliary tank 54 is configured to be disengaged by sliding it in the forward and backward directions, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from being pulled out in a tilted position, and the sensor rods 16a, 16b can be prevented from being subjected to excessive force. In other words, the sensor rods 16a, 16b can be protected.

The above detailed configuration provides the following excellent effects:

The auxiliary tank 54 is configured to open and close as the orientation of the auxiliary tank 54 is changed between up and down. This allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be switched between manual and automatic collection by simply turning it upside down, simplifying the switching operation. Moreover, since the switching between the closed and open states corresponds to the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, it is easy to understand which state it is in. For example, if the opening and closing are only switched in the upward attitude, it is difficult to understand which state it is in without looking into the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, there is a risk of using it in an incorrect state, such as using it in an open state when it should be used in a closed state. In this regard, in this configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be made different between the closed state and the open state, making it possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In particular, since the auxiliary tank 54 is configured to be in an open state when the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is on the upper side, it is easy to notice that the bottom is open, and it is possible to prevent use in an incorrect state.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is changed from an upward to a downward position, the bottom lid 514 rotates by its own weight toward the open position. In this case, not only is it possible to prevent the lower opening 512 from being left open, but it also eliminates the need for a drive unit for rotating the bottom lid 514 toward the open position, a sensor for detecting the position of the auxiliary tank 54, and a control configuration for controlling the drive unit in response to the detection results of the sensor, making it possible to simplify the configuration and reduce costs.

The upper limit of the rotation range of the bottom lid 514 toward the open side is limited to a predetermined rotation angle α, so that when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position, the bottom lid 514 rotates toward the closed position under its own weight. In addition to preventing the lower opening 512 from being left unclosed, a drive unit or the like for rotating the bottom lid 514 toward the closed side is no longer necessary, making it possible to simplify the configuration and reduce costs.

By installing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward, the right flange portion 571c and the engagement portion 574 engage, but when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing upward, the engagement is not performed. This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 when the slot machine 10 is transported while avoiding adverse effects on the operation of removing the auxiliary tank 54 during manual collection.

In particular, because the presence or absence of engagement is associated with the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be made different when it is engaged and when it is not engaged. For example, if the engagement point is in a blind spot for the employees of the amusement hall, they may not realize that it is engaged and may perform a forced removal operation, which may damage the right flange portion 571c, the engagement portion 574, etc. In this regard, according to this embodiment, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 is different, making it possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In this case, for example, if the employees are notified in advance that the auxiliary tank 54 is in a fixed state when it is in a downward posture, they can easily know which of the above states it is in without having to check the engagement point, and it is possible to prevent forced removal operations.

The right flange portion 571c and the engagement portion 574 engage to restrict the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54. If the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward during transportation, it is anticipated that the auxiliary tank 54 may become caught in a position that interferes with the locking device 20, and the auxiliary tank 54 may become unable to be unlocked even if an unlocking operation is performed later. In this regard, with the above configuration, the right flange portion 571c and the engagement portion 574 engage to restrict the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54, making it possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

The engagement portion 574 is provided on the surface of the bottom plate 11a (the installation surface of the auxiliary tank 54) and is configured to engage with the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated part for engagement in the auxiliary tank 54, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

Moreover, by configuring the flange portion 571 to engage, the distance between the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 can be increased when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position. This makes it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from being unintentionally engaged and restricting its movement when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position. In addition, since the hopper device 51 and the auxiliary tank 54 are arranged side by side in the housing 11, the flange portion 571 restricts the position of the auxiliary tank relative to the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is not engaged in the upward position, it is possible to restrict the auxiliary tank 54 from shifting out of position.

Focusing on the characteristic that the auxiliary tank 54 does not need to be removed during automatic collection, the downward position of the auxiliary tank 54, which is not suitable for manual collection, is adopted as the common position during transportation of the slot machine 10 and during automatic collection, and the auxiliary tank 54 is fixed to the housing 11 only when the common position is used. Furthermore, a lower opening 512 is provided on the bottom plate 501a of the tank body 501, and the bottom cover 514 is configured to be openable and closable, thereby eliminating inconvenience during transportation while suppressing adverse effects during automatic collection. In other words, according to this embodiment, by simply changing the position of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to adapt to three different usage environments, namely transportation, automatic collection, and manual collection, and it is possible to significantly improve convenience.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 26 and 27.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, there are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, the medal insertion detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, the payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the first credit insertion detection sensor 58a that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 58a, the second credit insertion detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 59a, the second credit insertion detection sensor 59b that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 59b, the first credit insertion detection sensor 59c that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 59b, the second credit insertion detection sensor 59c that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 59b, the second credit insertion detection sensor 59b that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 59c, the first credit insertion detection sensor 59b that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 59b, the second credit insertion detection sensor 59c that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 59b, the first credit insertion detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 59b, the second credit insertion detection sensor 59b that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 59b, the second credit insertion detection sensor 59c that detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 59b, the first credit insertion detection sensor 59 Various sensors are connected, such as a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 57, a third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, an upper sensor bar 16a, and a lower sensor bar 16b, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and output a power failure signal when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below. The power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to execute power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the push order notification unit 68, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, as well known in the art (not shown). The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control programs.

RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from power supply device 91 even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the results of a winning combination lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game status such as BB status.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed by the power outage processing (see Figure 28) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage flag generation process.

As shown in FIG. 27, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays indirectly related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The first effect switch 66 (more specifically, a first effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the first effect switch 66) and the second effect switch 67 (more specifically, a second effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the second effect switch 67) are connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, the processes related to the progress of the game among these processes, i.e., timer interrupt processes, and normal processes performed in the main processes will be described with reference to Figures 28 to 55.

Figure 28 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here is an overview of how power outages are handled.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power outage flag in a power outage flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power failure is resolved is calculated and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent access to the RAM. After the above process is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. Note that, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, the power failure signal is checked to see if it is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not being output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power failure signal continues to be output, the infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are carried out.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that are the reel drive motors for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 (see FIG. 26), and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as a lottery result command, to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid display unit 61, and the number of coins to be paid display unit 62. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60 to 62 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register that were saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 29.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have finished initializing. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has finished, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S213.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data (e.g., random number values used in the previous game) stored in the RAM 106 are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winning was achieved in the previous game. If any replay winning was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3 bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 1 bet game, a process to automatically insert one virtual medal is performed. Incidentally, in this embodiment, a replay winning is not achieved in a 2 bet game, but if the replay winning can be achieved in a 2 bet game as well, it is advisable to set this automatic insertion process to automatically insert two virtual medals.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay winning was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If no replay winning was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether there is an abnormality in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Also, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends as is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the CB state is set to "2", and the specified numbers in game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the BB state) are set to "1" and "3". In other words, in the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2", and in other states than the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "1" or "3". In other words, in game states other than the CB state, if medals have not been bet, or if medals have been bet but the number of medals is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such mode transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After the processing of step S206 has been performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets that was determined to be positive in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which acts as a sub-control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game, since the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that a prescribed number of medals have been bet. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process is performed to set the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the right-downward line L4 is set as an effective line, and in a 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, in a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT state process in step S214, and the bonus state process in step S215 are executed in order, and then the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 30.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, the game states in the normal game mode are broadly classified into six types of game states: a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. In addition, the game states in the specific mode are three types of game states: a normal game state in the specific mode, a BB state in the specific mode, and a CB state in the specific mode.

In this slot machine 10, the gameplay transitions between the six or three game states described above based on the results of the lottery process and the stopping results of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The specific mode in this embodiment is a mode that imitates the gameplay of the normal game mode. Therefore, the gameplay of the normal game mode will be explained first, and the specific mode will be explained in detail later.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state of the normal game mode, and a lottery table for the normal game state is selected. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probability from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the internal processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it on and performing a predetermined operation. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", a lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", a lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 31 shows a lottery table for the normal game state, which is selected in the normal game state of "Setting 3" during normal game mode. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and has a point value PV set.

After the lottery table is selected, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV to be used when judging whether the hand is a win or a loss is set. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the combination corresponding to the index value IV. In the combination win/loss determination, a determination is made as to whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and a win flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=20, in step S306, a win flag indicating that the first to fifth small wins and the fourteenth to seventeenth small wins have been won is set in the win flag storage area 106a.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (hereinafter referred to as the "first BB winning flag") or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (hereinafter referred to as the "second BB winning flag"), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning is established. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games. In addition, in step S306 in a state in which the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the first BB, second BB, or CB has been won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a combination other than the first BB, second BB, or CB has not been won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In this case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target for judgment of whether it is a hit or a miss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for judgment of whether it is a hit or a miss, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hit or miss of the hand is continued. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge whether the previous hand is a hit or a miss (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hand is judged based on the judgment value DV. Incidentally, when the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in FIG. 31, the probability of winning a normal replay (probability of winning when IV=1) is about 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning a strong cherry (probability of winning when IV=13) is about 1 in 263, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV=14) is about 1 in 183. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=15) is about 1 in 154, the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=16) is about 1 in 252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1 in 252. The probability of winning a middle bell (probability of winning when IV=18) is about 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a no-question bell (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20 to 23) is about 1 in 164, the probability of winning the center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 24 to 27) is about 1 in 16.4. The probability of winning the strong cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1 in 1770, the probability of winning the strong cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1 in 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 in 3280, and the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning Watermelon Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is approximately 1 in 3280, and the probability of winning Watermelon Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1 in 6550. The probability of winning Chance A Duplicate 1, Chance A Duplicate 2, Chance B Duplicate 1, and Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37 to 40) is approximately 1 in 3280. The probability of winning Middle Bell Duplicate 1 and Middle Bell Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41, 42) is approximately 1 in 2620. The probability of winning 1st BB and 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV = 43, 44) is approximately 1 in 65500. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV = 45) is approximately 1 in 19.9. The probability of not winning any of the roles is approximately 1 in 1.94.

In addition, in the lottery table for the normal game state in the normal game mode, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV = 2 to 12, 28 to 30, and 46 to 49. Therefore, in the normal game state in the normal game mode, these index values IV do not result in a win.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a specified period of time.

In the next step S310, a lottery result response process is performed. In the lottery result response process, a process is performed to determine whether or not to change the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S309, and a process is performed to notify the player of the push order role. The lottery result response process will be described in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the winning/losing role determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is performed to set stop information for reel stop control, and the lottery process is terminated. In the stop information setting process, if multiple roles out of the small role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the stop information is set in the order of priority shown below. If a small role and a bonus have been won, the stop information is set so that a small role win is given priority, and if a small role win cannot be won, a bonus win is won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the stop information is set so that a replay win is given priority.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 32.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the spinning of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started spinning in the previous game, and if not, it waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process is performed to set spin start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start spinning immediately. After that, it waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R spins at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the spin start process is terminated. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether or not a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command that is sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop modes are prepared as stop modes for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated: a stop mode in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. In step S407, the number of slips is calculated as a value between 0 and 4 based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop results of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=20 to 27, that is, when a win occurs on forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order bells") (see FIG. 31), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. For example, if the center push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second or fifth small win is achieved when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the first small win is achieved when the center stop switch 43 is operated first, and the stop information is set so that the second or fifth small win is achieved when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The arrangement of symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, in a game state other than the CB state in the normal game mode (3-bet game), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, and only the right-downward line L4 is set as an active line. Therefore, when the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that a section of five symbols or more is formed, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on the active line.

As an example, a case will be described in which the center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the center stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the second or fifth small win.

The second small win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. The "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the fifth small win symbols. The second small win symbols (fifth small win symbols) are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between them is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" symbol number 8 on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the "white bell" symbol number 12 stops on the upper row as shown in FIG. 34(a). As a result, there is still room for the second small win or the fifth small win to be established on the right-downward line L4.

The second minor win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is only located at the 18th position. Also, the fifth minor win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbols are located at the 11th and 14th positions. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor win symbol or the fifth minor win symbol may stop on an active line, or neither the second minor win symbol nor the fifth minor win symbol may stop on an active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "white bell" symbol (6) to the "first replay" symbol (13) has reached the bottom row, the "cherry" symbol, which is the fifth small win symbol, will stop in the middle row. As a result, there will be room for the fifth small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "cherry" symbol (14) to the "first replay" symbol (17) has reached the bottom row, the "red 7" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, will stop in the middle row, as shown in FIG. 34(b). As a result, there will be room for the second small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other time, the second and fifth small win symbols cannot be stopped in the middle row even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding four symbols. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at this time, the number 2 "BAR" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol will stop in the middle row.

When the second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second small win can be achieved.

The second small win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "watermelon" symbol (number 14) to the "red 7" symbol (number 18) has reached the bottom row, the "red 7" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, stops at the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 34(c). As a result, the second small win is established on the right-downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "cherry" symbol (number 13) has reached the bottom row, the "watermelon" symbol (number 14) stops at the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 34(d). From the left, the combination of the "white bell", "red 7" and "watermelon" symbols is a transition result, as shown in Figure 12.

When the 5th minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 5th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The fifth minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Second Replay" symbol. The "Second Replay" symbols are located at the 0th and 3rd positions on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth minor winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "BAR" symbol (17th) to the "Second Replay" symbol (3rd) has reached the bottom row, the "Second Replay" symbol, which is the fifth minor winning symbol, stops at the bottom row. As a result, the fifth minor winning symbol is established on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom row. The combination of the "white bell", "cherry" and "watermelon" symbols from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 12.

If the second and fifth minor winning symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, i.e., if the "BAR" or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second setting process of the stop information changes the stop information so that the "watermelon" symbol stops in the lower row.

The "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that there is a space of four symbols or less between each "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of "white bell", "BAR" and "watermelon" symbols from the left and the combination of "white bell", "white bell" and "watermelon" symbols from the left are transition results as shown in FIG. 12.

In this way, if center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in that order, the second small win will be achieved, the fifth small win will be achieved, or the transition result will stop.

Next, we will explain an example in which the center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small win.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor winning symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbols will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between the first minor winning symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol will stop on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, if center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order, the first small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in one or two pre-defined operating sequences, the first small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other operating sequence, a small prize will be won or the transition result will stop on an active line depending on the timing of the operation. Incidentally, if the middle bell is won, the 29th small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, the first small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning combination is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on an active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established on the active line. If a winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout number corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, a winning result response process is performed in step S414. In the winning result response process, a process for shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result response process will be described in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, in step S415, a winning result command is set to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination for this game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, it means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small winning combination was achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first replay winning combination to the eighth replay winning combination was achieved, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay winning combinations was achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if any of the replay winning combinations was achieved, a replay setting process is performed to set the game state to a replay state, and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, if it is determined that the current game state is a replay state, an automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the system pays out medals in the same number as the payout number, and ends the medal payout process. Specifically, when the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50), the system adds the payout number to the credit counter count value, and displays the added value on the credit display unit 60. When the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the system drives the medal payout rotating plate, and pays out medals from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. In addition, the medal payout process also performs a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current game state is BB state, the system subtracts the payout number from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and subtracts the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61.

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 35.

In step S501, it is determined whether the transition result has stopped on the winning line. If the transition result has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, where it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state. If the current game state is a normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. Then, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition result has not stopped on the winning line, the process proceeds to step S504, where it is determined whether the second replay winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the second replay winning has been established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. Then, this process is terminated. Furthermore, if the transition result stops on a pay line in a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the first RT state is selected.

Figure 36 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of "setting 3". When compared to the lottery table for the normal game state (see Figure 31), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 5, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when using this lottery table to determine whether a combination is a win or lose, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 49 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the normal game state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1 in 32.8. The probability of not winning any combination is approximately 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 36, if a win occurs when IV=1, a normal replay win occurs; if a win occurs when IV=2, a first promotion replay 1 win occurs; if a win occurs when IV=3, a first promotion replay 2 win occurs; if a win occurs when IV=4, a first promotion replay 3 win occurs; and if a win occurs when IV=5, a first promotion replay 4 win occurs. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning a normal replay under normal gaming conditions is also about 1 in 7.30. In other words, when the gaming condition transitions to the first RT condition, the odds of winning the small role, replay, and bonus are the same as in the normal gaming condition, while the winning mode in which the replay privilege is granted changes to one different from that in the normal gaming condition. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first replay win, which does not transition the game state, is achieved, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first replay win, the third replay win, which transitions to the second RT state, is achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412), in addition to the above-mentioned case where the push order bell is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even if the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won.

Figure 37(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. Unlike when the push order bell is won, when the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the first replay win or the third replay win is always achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. For the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4, one of the six operation sequences is associated with the third replay, and the other operation sequences are associated with the first replay.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also allocated as winning roles. However, these sixth replay to eighth replay are not associated with any of the six operation sequences described above. Therefore, even if the sixth replay to eighth replay are winning in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, they will not win regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44.

More specifically, for each of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the sixth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 3 is assigned the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 4 is assigned the eighth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, but for any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is either the first replay or the third replay. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation sequence that results in a third replay winning. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, then there will also be only one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win, and when the first promotion replay is won, it may be possible to intentionally achieve the third replay win. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S506, where it is determined whether or not the third replay winning combination has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the third replay winning combination has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and this process ends.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state transitions to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the second RT state is selected.

Figure 38 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see Figure 36), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 10, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when such a lottery table is used to determine whether a role is a winner, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is about 1 in 13.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1 in 10.5, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 and 10 is about 1 in 7.00. The probability of losing, i.e. not winning any role, is about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game transitions to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not transition the game state, the second replay win that transitions to the first RT state, and the fourth and fifth replay wins that transition to the third RT state are possible.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412), in addition to the above-mentioned cases where the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even when the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, or second promotion replay 2 are won.

Figure 37(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. If Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 1 is won, the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The numbers attached to the 4th replay in the figure correspond to the symbol combinations that result in the 4th replay winning. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a spread, "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in different color 7 symbols stopping in the middle row, "3" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in red 7, red 7, and BAR stopping in the middle row, and "4" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in white 7, white 7, and BAR stopping in the middle row (see FIG. 12). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the 2nd promotion replay 1 is won, a symbol combination that results in a spread will stop and the 4th replay winning will be established, or a symbol combination that results in different color 7 symbols stopping in the middle row will stop and the 4th replay winning will be established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S509, where it is determined whether the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has not been achieved, the process ends as is. If the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, and the process ends.

If the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state transitions to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the third RT state is selected.

Figure 39 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of "setting 3". When the lottery table for the third RT state is compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see Figure 38), the point values PV for IV = 9 to 12 are different, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when the lottery table is used to determine whether a winning combination is a winning combination, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to the winning probability in the second RT state, the winning combination is not a winning combination when IV = 9, 10, and the winning combination is about 1 in 7.00 when IV = 11, 12. The probability of losing when none of the combinations are won is about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state transitions to the third RT state, the winning combinations of small combinations, replays, and bonuses are won with the same probability as in the second RT state, while the winning combination in which the replay privilege is granted changes to one different from that in the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first replay winning event that does not result in a transition to the game state and the second replay winning event that transitions to the first RT state, the sixth replay winning event, the seventh replay winning event, and the eighth replay winning event that does not result in a transition to the game state, and the third replay winning event that transitions to the second RT state are also achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412), even if BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won, the stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 37(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, and the winning mode that is achieved. If BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, one of the first replay winning, sixth replay winning, seventh replay winning, or third replay winning will always be achieved. If BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, one of the first replay winning, sixth replay winning, eighth replay winning, or third replay winning will always be achieved.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 40.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether any of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, CB winning flag, special 1st BB flag, and special 2nd BB flag is set. The special 1st BB flag and the special 2nd BB flag are flags corresponding to the special 1st BB and the special 2nd BB that can be won in a specific mode. The special 1st BB and the special 2nd BB are bonus roles corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB in the normal game mode. If any of the winning flags is set, proceed to step S603, and determine whether or not a CB winning has been established based on the winning role set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning has been established, in step S604, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout number counter for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state, which is provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing steps S604 to S605, the game state transitions to CB state.

Here is a brief explanation of CB and CB states.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win occurs. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that there is a gap of 4 symbols or less between each CB symbol. Therefore, when a CB win occurs, the CB win occurs regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is in the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it determines whether the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the active line setting process (step S207), it sets the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 as active lines.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, the point value PV for IV=1 to 45 is set to "0", and the point value for IV=46 to 49 is set to "16384" (see FIG. 31 for the correspondence between IV and winning roles). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 1 (probability of winning when IV=46) is about 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 2 (probability of winning when IV=47) is about 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV=48) is about 1 in 4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium role 4 (probability of winning when IV=49) is about 1 in 4.00. No events of losing occur.

Figure 41 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, regardless of which of the CB small/medium roles 1 to 4 is won, some small role winning is always established. Since the CB state is a two-bet game, when the 1st small role winning, the 18th small role winning, the 19th small role winning, and the 25th small role winning are established, 15 medals are paid out, and when the 2nd small role winning to the 17th small role winning, the 20th small role winning to the 24th small role winning are established, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, when the game transitions to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, CB can only be won in normal game mode, and cannot be won in special modes.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been achieved, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether a 1st BB win, a 2nd BB win, a special 1st BB win, or a special 2nd BB win has been achieved.

If any of the BB wins is established, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. In step S612, it is determined whether the current BB win is a special 1st BB win or a special 2nd BB win in a specific mode. If the negative determination is made in step S612 and the current BB win is a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win in a normal game mode, in step S613, the remaining payout counter is set to 216 and the remaining payout number display unit 61 is caused to display 216. On the other hand, if the positive determination is made in step S612, in step S614, the remaining payout counter is set to 24 and the remaining payout number display unit 61 is caused to display 24. The numerical value set in step S613 and step S614 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state ends on the condition that medals equal to or more than that numerical value have been paid out in the BB state. In other words, the upper limit payout number for the 1st BB and 2nd BB in the normal game mode is set to 216, and the upper limit payout number for the special 1st BB and special 1st BB in the specific mode is set to 24, and the upper limit payout number for the bonus differs in each mode.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S614, the game state transitions to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected.

Figure 42 shows a lottery table for the BB state, which is selected in the BB state to which the transition occurs in the first BB or second BB during normal game mode. In the lottery table for the BB state, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 27, 31 to 49 is set to "0", and the point value for IV = 28 to 30 is set to "21845". Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB small/medium combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 28) is about 1 in 3.00, the probability of winning the BB medium red 7 combination (probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1 in 3.00, and the probability of winning the BB BAR combination (probability of winning when IV = 30) is about 1 in 3.00. The probability of not winning any combination is about 1 in 65,500.

Figure 41 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is achieved. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, whether the BB small role 1, the BB red 7 matching role, or the BB BAR matching role is won, the first small role winning, the 30th small role winning, or the 31st small role winning will always be achieved. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, when the first small role winning, the 30th small role winning, or the 31st small role winning is achieved, 9 medals are paid out. Since the probability of a miss in the BB state is about 1 in 65,500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If the game state has transitioned to the CB state or the BB state, a positive determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S615. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout counter has reached 0, and if it has reached 0, a process is performed to clear the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag. Furthermore, in the end determination process, if the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set to indicate that the BB state has ended in this game. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB winning is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state when the CB winning is established will be returned to. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the game state will be returned to the normal game state after the CB state ends, and when the CB winning is established under the third RT state, the game state will be returned to the third RT state after the CB state ends. On the other hand, when the first BB, second BB, special first BB, or special second BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB winning is established or not. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, the game state will be transitioned to the normal game state even if the first BB winning is established under the second RT state. Incidentally, when the game transitions to the CB state, the player can expect to gain an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the CB state ends. When the game transitions to the BB state, the player can expect to gain an increase of approximately 144 (=9x24-3x24) medals in normal play mode until the BB state ends.

If none of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, CB winning flag, special 1st BB winning flag, and special 2nd BB winning flag are set (if step S602 is NO), if none of the 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning, CB winning, special 1st BB winning, and special 1st BB winning are established (if step S609 is NO), if a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in step S605, step S613, or step S614, and if the end determination process is performed in step S615, proceed to step S606 and set a status command. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the game status at the end of the game (i.e., the game status of the next game) to be grasped, and in step S606, a status command corresponding to the setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is set. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set the external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. Then, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the game state in the normal game mode will be described with reference to Figure 43. Note that the CB state is not shown in the figure.

If the game state is BB state, when the number of medals paid out in that BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state transitions to the first RT state when the transition result stops on a winning line, and the game state transitions to the BB state when a BB win is made. The transition result stops on a winning line when a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, which trigger a transition to the second RT state, and the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the normal game state to the second RT state or the third RT state (see Figure 31).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning. The third replay winning is established when any of the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a specified operating sequence (see FIG. 37(a)). In the lottery process using the lottery table for the first RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the first RT state to the third RT state.

In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state. There is no transition from the first RT state to the third RT state.

When the game state is in the second RT state, the game state transitions to the third RT state by the establishment of the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning. In addition, when the second replay winning is established and when the transition result stops on the effective line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 37(b)). The second replay winning is established when any of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 37(b)). The transition result stops on the effective line when a miss occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, the game state transitions to the BB state.

When the game state is in the third RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning. In addition, when the second replay winning is established and when the transition result stops on the winning line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The third replay winning is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 37(c)). The second replay winning is established when any of Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 37(b)). The transition result stops on the winning line when a miss occurs in the game where the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB win is not achieved in the game in which the winning flag is set, i.e., if the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if the corresponding BB win is achieved in the game in which the BB winning flag is set, the game state transitions to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a carryover lottery table (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (Fig. 30). In this carryover lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the lottery table for normal game mode (Fig. 31), and the PV values from IV23 onwards are set to 0. In other words, in the carryover lottery table, bonuses and minor roles that overlap with bonuses cannot be won.

In this slot machine 10, in the normal game mode, the main control device 101 manages six game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state, and CB state, and also manages five display modes, broadly classified as normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode (including added-on specialized zone), and BB mode.

Figure 44 shows the transition between display modes.

The BB mode is a display mode that is entered when the first BB win or the second BB win is achieved, and ends when the BB state ends. In other words, the BB mode is a display mode that corresponds to the BB state. Therefore, when entering the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 medals.

When transitioning from normal mode or challenge mode to BB mode, a lottery for transitioning to challenge mode and a lottery for transitioning to attack mode are held in the BB mode. If the transition lottery for transitioning to attack mode is won, transition to attack mode will occur after the BB mode ends, and if the transition lottery for transitioning to challenge mode is won, transition to challenge mode will occur after the BB mode ends. If neither transition lottery is won, transition to normal mode will occur after the BB mode ends. If transitioning from attack mode to BB mode, return to attack mode after the BB mode ends. If transitioning from VB mode to BB mode, return to VB mode after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell is won, or when 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, and BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replays") are won. In normal mode, a lottery for transition to challenge mode and a lottery for transition to attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to challenge mode is won, the mode transitions from normal mode to challenge mode, and if the lottery for transition to attack mode is won, the mode transitions from normal mode to attack mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

Normal mode corresponds to each of the game states of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in normal mode, when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified, so it rarely transitions to the second RT state and the third RT state, and it almost corresponds to the first RT state. In normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, you can expect to lose about 1.59 medals for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, you can expect to lose about 0.06 medals for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell or push order replay is won, just like the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery is held to determine whether to switch to the attack mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which it is easy to switch to the attack mode, although the operation sequence is not notified, just like the normal mode. If the lottery to switch to the attack mode is won, the mode switches from the challenge mode to the attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) without winning the above-mentioned lottery to switch, the mode switches from the challenge mode to the normal mode. There is no transition to the VB mode from the challenge mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each of the game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when a push order replay is won, so it rarely transitions to the second RT state or the third RT state, and it almost corresponds to the first RT state. In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, you can expect to lose about 1.59 medals for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, you can expect to lose about 0.06 medals for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is made up of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to the VB mode, and the probability of transitioning to the VB mode is higher in each attack mode than in the normal mode. If the transition lottery to the VB mode is won, the mode transitions from the attack mode to the VB mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (e.g. 50 times) without winning the transition lottery to the VB mode, the mode transitions from the attack mode to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode is set to be highest for the fourth attack mode and lowest for the first attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode increases in the order of the first attack mode, the second attack mode, the third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode.

The attack mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence, it corresponds to approximately the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state transitions to the second RT state, when the attack mode is entered, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals.

VB mode, like attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or second promotion replay 2 is won, the attack mode announces the operation sequence for achieving the first replay win, whereas the VB mode announces the operation sequence for achieving the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win (see Figure 37 (b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the case of winning the push order bell and the case of winning the push order replay, and the operation sequence for establishing the fourth replay prize or the fifth replay prize in the case of winning the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is notified. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 for each game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game. In VB mode, the game state continues for at least 25 games after transitioning to the third RT state, so when transitioning to VB mode, players can expect to gain an additional 50 medals.

Regarding the transition of display modes when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is to transition from normal mode to challenge mode, from challenge mode to attack mode, and then from attack mode back to normal mode. In attack mode, a lottery is held to transition to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which attack mode transitions to VB mode and then back to attack mode, the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

As mentioned above, when comparing normal mode and challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to attack mode is set to be higher in challenge mode than in normal mode. Therefore, challenge mode is also called a chance zone that creates hope for switching to attack mode.

In addition, the attack mode is set to the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs for each attack mode. When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, the mode basically transitions to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode is held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode transitions to the second attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode is held. If the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode transitions to the third attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases. In the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is held. If you win the lottery to transition to the 4th attack mode, you will transition to the 4th attack mode, and your chances of winning the lottery to transition to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from first attack mode → second attack mode → third attack mode → fourth attack mode, increasing the probability of transitioning to VB mode, making it easier for a loop between attack mode and VB mode to occur.

As described above, in the normal play mode, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals owned in each of the display modes of the attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In addition, in conjunction with each display mode, multiple RT states and multiple states such as the BB state and CB state are switched back and forth depending on the winning of each replay or the stopping of the transition result. As described above, when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay winning is achieved or the transition result is stopped depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 43. Also, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that can achieve the first minor prize is announced, so that the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

The display mode configuration is explained below.

The configurations related to the display modes are broadly divided into (1) processing related to the lottery for switching between display modes, (2) processing for switching the game state based on the results of the lottery for switching between display modes, (3) processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result, and (4) processing related to the notification effects on the sub side. Each will be explained in order below.

<Processing for lottery for switching display modes>
<Lottery result processing>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery of (1) is performed in the lottery result response process (step S310) of the lottery process (FIG. 30) by the main control device 101. Hereinafter, the lottery result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a watermelon, chance A, B and a middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, weak cherry overlap 1, 2, watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see FIG. 31, IV=13-18, 31-42, hereinafter, these roles are collectively referred to as "special roles"). If the lottery result is a special role, processing for switching the display mode based on the special role is executed in steps S702 to S708. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that a special role has not been won, processing for switching the display mode is executed in steps S709 to S712.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that a specific role has been won, it is determined in step S702 whether the current game state is a normal game state or a first RT state. If a positive determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether an attack mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The attack mode win flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific role process is executed in step S704.

<First specific role processing>
The first specific role processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the first specific role processing is performed when the player is in the normal game state or the first RT state and has not won the attack mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific role processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the attack mode. In addition, in the first specific role processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process is performed to add to the number of continued games in the challenge mode.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in the challenge mode or not. When the current display mode is not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If the determination is negative in step S801, in step S802, a normal time table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery. On the other hand, if the determination is positive in step S801, in step S803, a chance mode table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transition to the attack mode is generally different between the normal time table and the chance mode table, and it is set so that the probability of transition to the attack mode is higher for the chance mode table than for the normal time table.

After the table for the attack mode transition lottery is acquired in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106, and the lottery counter is compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform the lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S804. If the lottery for switching to attack mode has been won, in step S806, a process for setting the attack mode winning flag is performed.

In the next step S807, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S808. In this embodiment, if the transition lottery to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won as the transition lottery for the display mode, a notification of the winning of the transition lottery is made after passing through the premonition mode. Therefore, the game in which the transition lottery is won and the game in which the notification of the winning of the transition lottery is made may be different, and the period from the game in which the transition lottery is won to the game in which the notification of the winning of the transition lottery is made is set as the premonition mode.

The number of premonition games is set to 0 to 32, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 is randomly selected by lottery. The number of premonition games selected may be set to vary depending on the specific role that triggered the winning of the attack mode or the game state. This is the same for the lottery process for the other premonition game numbers.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, a process is performed in which the number of premonition games is input to the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The premonition counter is a counter that is decremented by one for each game, and when the premonition counter reaches 0, the premonition mode ends and a notification is issued that the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device. The premonition command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the premonition mode (the display mode to be transitioned to after the premonition mode, in the case of step S810 above, attack mode) and the number of premonition games. The process on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the premonition command will be explained in detail later. After the process of step S810 is executed, the first specific role process is terminated.

In addition, if the bonus win flag is set in step S807, the first specific role processing ends without setting the premonition game count, etc. The bonus win flag is set when a specific role is won in the carryover state of the first BB or second BB and the lottery for transitioning to attack mode is won, or when a role overlapping with a bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, 2, etc.) wins the lottery for transitioning to attack mode. In this case, BB mode is prioritized as the display mode transition destination, rather than attack mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for the challenge mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the challenge mode lottery has a probability of transition to the challenge mode set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between a strong cherry and a weak cherry, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for the strong cherry than for the weak cherry.

The case where step S811 is performed includes a case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case, too, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the lottery table is a common table for the normal mode and the challenge mode. Note that, as in steps S801 to 803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the game is in the challenge mode.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been selected based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been selected, in step S813, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the normal mode and not the challenge mode, in step S814, a process is executed to set a challenge mode selection flag in the various flags storage area 106d of the RAM 106.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific role processing ends. If it is not set, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is executed in step S816, a process for setting the number of premonition games in the premonition counter is executed in step S817, a process for setting the premonition command is executed in step S818, and then the first specific role processing ends. The processes in steps S815 to S818 correspond to steps S807 to S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the player has been selected to play in challenge mode again during the challenge mode, processing for adding additional games to the challenge mode is performed in steps S819 to S823. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820, where a lottery process for the number of games to be added to the challenge mode is performed.

Here, "adding" refers to adding the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of added games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuing games. In step S820, the value to be added to the number of continuing games in challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery of the number of added games in challenge mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for lottery of the number of added games in challenge mode is set so that the number of added games increases according to the type of specific role. For example, with a strong cherry, there is an 80% probability of adding 30 challenge mode games, and a 20% probability of adding 50 games. Also, with a weak cherry, there is an 80% probability of adding 5 games, and a 20% probability of adding 20 games.

In step S821, a process of adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S820 to a counter that manages the number of continued games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106) is performed. Then, in step S822, a process of setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this first specific role process is terminated. The add-on command contains information that an add-on has occurred, the number of added games, and the target for the add-on (challenge mode or attack mode). The process on the display control device 81 side that receives the add-on command will be explained in detail later, but the display control device 81 performs an add-on notification as a notification of the information contained in the add-on command based on the reception of the add-on command.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S819, proceed to step S823. In step S823, a challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific role processing is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode has been met. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends while the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added at the end of the bonus.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (FIG. 45), if a negative judgment is made in step S702 or a positive judgment is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the second RT state. If it is the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the VB mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode win flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. If a negative judgment is made in step S706, the second specific role process is executed in step S707. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S705 or a positive judgment is made in step S706, the third specific role process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific winning process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The second specific role processing is performed when the player is in the second RT state and has not won the VB mode. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the attack mode. In the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be switched to the VB mode. In addition, in the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to upgrade the rank of the attack mode, and a process is performed to increase the number of continuing games in the attack mode.

That is, in step S901, a process is performed to determine the rank of the attack mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks are provided, from the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of transitioning to the VB mode differs for each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined whether the rank of the current attack mode is the first attack mode, the second attack mode, or the fourth attack mode.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transition to the VB mode is generally different, and is set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the second attack mode than for the first attack mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the third attack mode than for the second attack mode, and the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the fourth attack mode than for the third attack mode.

In step S903, a lottery for switching to VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to winning the VB mode.

If the result of the determination in step S904 is positive, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag is performed in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, a process for setting the premonition game number is performed in the same manner as in steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination process is terminated. If it is not set, a lottery process for the premonition game number is performed in step S907, a process for setting the premonition game number in the premonition counter is performed in step S908, and a process for setting the premonition command is performed in step S909, after which the second specific combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode win, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a table for the promotion lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for the promotion lottery according to the rank of the attack mode, and specifically, there are three tables for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode (promotion lottery is not performed when the player is in the fourth attack mode). In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of specific role. For example, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Additionally, the tables for each attack mode are set so that the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the second attack mode, so that as the attack mode rank is promoted, it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S910 was a promotion win. If a promotion win was found, in step S912, attack mode promotion processing is performed. In this processing, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank to a rank flag one rank higher. Then, in step S913, a promotion command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode to be promoted to. The display control device 81, which has received the promotion command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to perform a presentation for the attack mode of the promoted rank. As an attack mode effect in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, a different background color effect is set depending on the rank of the attack mode, and when the display control device 81 receives the above promotion command, it notifies the player that the attack mode rank has been promoted, and controls the attack mode effect to be performed in a background color according to the rank to which the player has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S911 that the player has not won the promotion lottery, or after the processing of step S913 has been executed, processing to add to the number of continuing games in attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, a lottery process for adding on the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this lottery process, a table for the attack mode add-on lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the attack mode add-on lottery is set so that the probability of winning the add-on lottery differs depending on the type of specific role. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% probability of winning the add-on lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% probability of winning the add-on lottery. The probability of winning may differ depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. If it is determined that the add-on lottery has not been won, the second specific role process is terminated.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, in step S916, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, where a lottery process for the number of additional games in attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for lottery for the number of additional games in attack mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for lottery for the number of additional games in attack mode is set so that the number of additional games differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, 20 attack mode games are added with a 90% probability, and 80 games are added with a 10% probability. Also, with a weak cherry, 5 games are added with a 95% probability, and 100 games are added with a 5% probability.

In step S918, a process of adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S917 to a counter that manages the number of continued games in attack mode (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter area 106e of RAM 106) is performed. Then, in step S919, a process of setting the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this second specific role process is terminated.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, an attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode has been met. As will be described in detail later, if the bonus ends while the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S708 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The third specific combination process is performed when the player is in the third RT state, or when the player is in the second RT state and has won the VB mode. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. The third specific combination process performs a process to add to the number of continuing games in the attack mode.

That is, in step S1001, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S1001 was a winning result for the additional bonus. If it is determined that the additional bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, where a lottery process for the number of additional bonus games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the process of setting the additional bonus command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the third specific role process is terminated. The processes in steps S1003 to S1006 are the same as the processes in steps S916 to S919. The number of additional bonus games may be different in the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If the result of step S1002 is negative, the third specific combination process is terminated. If the result of step S1003 is that the bonus win flag is set, the attack mode add-on flag is set in step S1007, and the third specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode add-on flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (Figure 45), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of this lottery process is not a win for a specific role, it is determined in step S709 whether or not the result of this lottery process is a win for a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order roles"). If a push order role is a win, push order role processing is performed in step S710, and then the lottery result response process is terminated. Such push order role processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing any of the processes of step S704, step S707, step S708, and step S710, or after a negative judgment in step S709, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is judged whether or not a specialized zone flag corresponding to the added specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the seventh replay winning, and the added specialized zone indicates a state in which the number of continued games in the attack zone is added with a high probability over multiple games. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S711, specialized zone processing is executed in step S712. The specialized zone flag, specialized zone, and specialized zone processing will be described in detail later. If a negative judgment is made in step S711, or after the processing of step S712 is executed, this lottery result response processing is terminated.

As described above, if the lottery result response process determines that a specific role has been won, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, and processing for adding to the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are performed. If the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, a premonition game will be played and then a notification that the transition lottery has been won will be made. Therefore, the process for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be explained below.

<Process for transitioning game state based on result of lottery for transition of display mode>
(2) In the process for shifting the game state based on the result of the lottery for shifting the display mode, a process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the display mode and a process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the game state are performed. First, the process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the display mode will be described.

<Mode transition notification process>
The notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 29). The mode transition notification process is performed when a predetermined betting operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether the number of premonition games is 0. The number of premonition games is counted in the winning result corresponding process described below, and the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. If the number of premonition games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of premonition games is 0, in step S1102, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode win flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a challenge mode win. If the challenge mode win flag is set, in step S1103, the challenge mode win flag is cleared. Then, in step S1104, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the user that the challenge mode is about to start by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S1106, counting the number of times the challenge mode will continue is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 10) for the number of games to continue in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1106 is performed, the processing for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the second RT state in response to the winning of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1110, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies the player that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing step S1110, the mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the third RT state in association with the winning of the VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1114, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies the player that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1114, this mode transition notification process ends. Also, if it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process ends.

That is, of the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode, which are transitioned through the premonition mode, the challenge mode is initiated based on the betting operation when the premonition game count in the premonition mode reaches 0. On the other hand, for the attack mode and VB mode, only a notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is made based on the betting operation when the premonition game count in the premonition mode reaches 0, and the attack mode or VB mode does not start even if the premonition game count reaches 0. This is due to the difference that the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve a transition in the game state, while the attack mode and VB mode involve a transition in the game state; specifically, the attack mode is initiated by transitioning to the second RT state, and the VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. And when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, it is the case that the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning these promotion replays corresponds to the third replay win, etc. Therefore, when the transition lottery to the attack mode or VB mode is won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the role that will transition these game states is won, and it is configured to enable the transition of the game state. In addition, from the time when a notification is given that the player has won the lottery to switch to attack mode or VB mode, until the attack mode or VB mode starts (until the game state switches), a notification of the preparation state (for example, a notification that says "preparing") is given.

<Explanation about display mode transition>
The notification process for changing the game state is performed in the push order role process (step S710) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 45). Prior to the explanation of the push order role process, an overview of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG.

＜Outline of the push order announcement＞
Notification of the operation order when the push order role is won (push order notification performance) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the push order notification unit 68. Here, an example will be described in which the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left, and the push order role is won.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 in the figure) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Also, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning role (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning role in the current game and that the stop switch that should be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Also, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification unit 68, three LED lamps 68a, 68b, and 68c are arranged side by side to correspond to the stop switches 42 to 44. The middle LED lamp 68b lights up, and the left and right LED lamps 68a and 68c turn off. This allows the player to know that the first stop switch to be operated in this game is the middle stop switch 43. The push order notification unit 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination along with the push order by changing the color of the LED lamps that are turned on. Also, the LED lamps corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be lit in different colors or flash so that the second and subsequent stop switches to be operated can be recognized.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification section 68, the middle LED lamp 68b goes out and the right LED lamp 68c goes on (the left LED lamp 68a remains off). This allows the player to recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is complete, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification section 68, the right LED lamp 68c goes out and the left LED lamp 68a goes on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains off). This allows the player to recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification effect, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to progress at a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order role processing executed in step S710 in the lottery result response processing (Figure 45) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 51.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is any one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. A positive determination is made in step S1201 when the first replay or the third replay wins, depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, where it is determined whether an attack notification flag has been set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after the transition lottery to the attack mode is won in the mode transition notification process (Figure 49).

If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, it is determined whether the current display mode is in attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the attack mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify that the display mode is attack mode. Incidentally, in addition to the attack mode flag, flags for identifying the display mode include a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag. In this embodiment, if the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, added specialized zone), the attack mode flag is configured to coexist with the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, in step S1203, cases in which it is determined that the attack mode flag is set include cases in which the display mode is in attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the game is not in attack mode, then in step S1204, processing is executed for notifying the push order for the third replay. Specifically, of the first and third replays, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified (see FIG. 37(a)). Then, in step S1205, processing is performed to set the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-control device, and then this push order role processing is terminated. The push order notification command contains information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the push order notification command will be explained in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the player is in attack mode, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is notified in step S1206 (see FIG. 37(a)). After that, in step S1207, the push order notification command is set, and then the push order processing is terminated. Note that a negative judgment is made in step S1203 when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won despite the player being in attack mode. For example, it is assumed that the game state falls to the first RT state during attack mode. In other words, the lottery table in the second RT state and the third RT state does not allow the first promotion replays 1 to 4 to be won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. Therefore, a negative judgment is made in step S1203 when the player is in attack mode and in the first RT state.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in a situation where the transition lottery to attack mode has been won, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win is notified, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1202, the push order role processing ends without performing the process for the push order notification. Therefore, for example, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning attack mode in the first RT state, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved.

As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won and the number of premonition games becomes 0 (a notification is made that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won). The attack mode flag is also a flag that is set when transitioning to the attack mode (transitioning to the second RT state). The attack notification flag and the attack mode flag are cleared when the attack mode ends. Therefore, when the attack notification flag is set and the attack mode flag is not set, it indicates that the preparation state for transitioning to the attack mode is in progress, and when the attack notification flag is set and the attack mode flag is set, it indicates that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, the attack notification flag may be cleared and the attack mode flag set when transitioning to the attack mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1201, in step S1205, it is judged whether the current lottery result is any of Fall Replays 1 to 3. A positive judgment is made in step S1205 when the first replay or the second replay wins based on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is judged whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, processing for notifying the push order for the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning is notified (see FIG. 37(b)). Thereafter, in step S1208, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then this push order processing is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in a situation where the transition lottery to attack mode has been won, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win is notified, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1202, the push order role processing ends without performing the process for the push order notification. Therefore, for example, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning attack mode in the first RT state, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved.

In addition, if fall replays 1 to 3 are won while the attack notification flag is set, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is notified, making it possible to prevent the game state from transitioning to the first RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1206, the push order role processing ends without performing the process for the push order notification. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode transitions to the normal mode, the second replay win may be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, if the first promotion replays 1-4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation sequence happens to correspond to the third replay win and the third replay win is achieved (even if the state transitions to the second RT state), the second replay win can be achieved by winning the fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as described above, even if the state transitions to the second RT state by chance without winning the attack mode, the state will then promptly transition to the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1205, then in step S1209 it is judged whether the current lottery result is either the second promotion replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment is made in step S1209 when the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1210 it is judged whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, then in step S1211 it is judged whether the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 49) when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after the transition lottery to the VB mode is won.

If the VB notification flag is set, processing for notifying the push order for the 4th replay or 5th replay is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the 1st replay, 4th replay, and 5th replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 37(b)). After that, in step S1213, processing is performed to set the push order notification command, and then this push order role processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1210, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1211, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the push order notification command is set in step S1208, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if the player wins the second promotion replay 1 or 2 without winning the VB mode, if the player is in attack mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, but if the player is not in attack mode, the push order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1209, then in step S1214 it is determined whether the current lottery result is either BAR Replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment is made in step S1214 when, depending on the operation sequence of the current game, any of the first replay, third replay, and sixth replay to eighth replay will win. In this case, in step S1215 it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, then in step S1216 it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, then in step S1217 processing is executed for notification of the push order for the sixth replay to the eighth replay. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth replay through the eighth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth replay winning through the eighth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 37(c)). After that, in step S1218, a push order notification command is set, and then the push order processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1215, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1216, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the push order notification command is set in step S1208, after which the push order role processing ends. Therefore, if BAR replay 1 or 2 is won without winning VB mode, if the player is in attack mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, but if the player is not in attack mode, no push order notification effect is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1214, then in step S1219 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If a push order bell win is made, then in step S1220 it is determined whether or not the current display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If it is not normal mode or challenge mode, then in step S1221 a push order notification process is executed to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor win (see FIG. 33). Then, in step S1222 a process is executed to set a push order notification command, and then the main push order role process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1219 or a positive judgment is made in step S1220, the main push order role process is terminated without executing the push order notification process.

<Processing for switching display modes based on winning results>
<Winning Result Processing>
Next, a process will be described in the case where a combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is won as a result of the notification for transition of the gaming state as described above. This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 32). The winning result corresponding process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 52.

In step S1301, a game count management process is executed. Details will be described later, but in this game count management process, in addition to counting the number of premonition games in the premonition mode, the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is also counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the current stop result is a third replay winning. As described above, if the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 35), processing is performed to transition the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, added special zone) that corresponds to a higher RT state than the attack mode, the attack mode flag coexists with the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, special zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, cases in which it is determined that the attack mode flag is set include when in attack mode, when in VB mode, and when in a special zone.

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, the display mode is already attack mode, so this winning result response process ends. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing to start attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the attack mode start command, notifies the player that the attack mode will start from the next game, using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1307, the attack mode continuation number is started to be counted. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 50) for the number of continued games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1307 is performed, this winning result response processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved as the current stop result. As described above, if the fourth and fifth replay wins have been achieved, the RT state process (FIG. 35) performs processing to transition the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag has been set. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag has been set, the display mode is already VB mode, so this winning result response process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag has not been set, processing to start the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, a process is performed to set the VB mode flag. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because VB mode is a mode that is transitioned to via attack mode, and after VB mode ends, the transition to attack mode is always made.

After that, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that VB mode will start from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 60) for the number of continued games in VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1313 has been performed, this winning result response processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the 4th and 5th replay winnings have not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not the 7th replay winnings have been achieved as the current stop result. In this embodiment, if the 7th replay winnings have been achieved, that is, if the BAR symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L, the BAR symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the BAR symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R, and the BAR symbol stops on the combination line in the middle, the configuration is such that the system transitions to the add-on special zone. In the add-on special zone, the number of continued games in the attack mode is added not only for specific roles, but also for all roles that can be won in the normal game mode (push order roles, specific roles, and bonuses). The seventh replay win occurs when BAR Replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the seventh replay win (FIG. 37(c)), and the seventh replay out of the first, sixth, and seventh replays is won in the lottery. For example, when BAR Replay 1 is won, there is a 1 in 20 chance of winning the lottery for the seventh replay.

If the seventh replay win has been achieved, in step S1315, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, a process is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that it is the above-mentioned added specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the count of the number of continued games in VB mode is stopped. In this case, the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the specialized zone transitions during VB mode, and after the specialized zone ends, the transition always occurs to VB mode.

After that, in step S1317, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the specialized zone start command, notifies the player that the specialized zone will start from the next game by using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1318, counting the number of specialization zone continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 5) for the number of specialization zone continuation games is set in the specialization zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1318 is performed, this winning result response processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result response processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, a process for switching the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (Fig. 35) based on the winning of a combination (third to fifth replay) that corresponds to a transition in the game state. This is to avoid a situation where an attack mode or the like is started based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to a transition in the game state even though the lottery for switching the display mode has not been won.

In addition, when the display mode transition is accompanied by a transition of the game state, transition to a higher mode, i.e., transition from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, transition from attack mode to VB mode, or transition from VB mode to specialized zone, is configured to transition based on the winning result of the corresponding role. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state transitions due to a second replay win as a fall replay or the stopping of a transition result, the display mode is not transitioned. When transitioning to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode may be performed in separate games.

<Game Number Management Processing>
The game count management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 53. In the game count management process, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and when the number of continued games in these display modes becomes 0, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, the game modes are a normal game mode in which 3 bet games and 2 bet games are played, and a specific mode in which 1 bet game is played. The process of step S1401 is for determining whether the game to be ended this time is a game in the normal game mode or a game in the specific mode. Then, in step S1401, if the number of bets is 1, which is the specific number, it is determined that the game to be ended this time is a game in the specific mode. If it is a game in the specific mode, the game number management process is terminated as it is. In other words, in a game in a specific mode, the number of games in the premonition mode and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, etc. are not counted.

If the game to be ended this time is a game in normal game mode rather than a specific mode, proceed to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set or whether the game is in a bonus state. If a positive determination is made in step S1402, the display mode flags, namely the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag, are cleared in step S1403, and then this game count management process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus win flag is set or during a bonus, the number of games played in attack mode, etc. is not counted. Note that if any flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, but the attack notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as attack mode, these flags will notify you of the push order to transition the game state, making it possible to return to the game state before the bonus.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1402, in step S1404, it is judged whether the number of premonition games is 0. If it is not 0, in step S1405, the number of premonition games is decremented by 1. If the number of premonition games is 0 in step S1404 (if the game is not in premonition mode), or after the processing of step S1405 has been executed, in steps S1406 to S1427, the number of continued games in each mode is counted.

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407, where the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games to be continued in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game count management process ends. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After the process of step S1410 has been performed, the game count management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1412, where the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games in the attack mode. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. Then, in step S1416, the attack mode end command is set as the output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, a notification that the attack mode will end in this game is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After step S1416 is performed, the game count management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the mode is not the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1418 to determine whether it is an add-on specialization zone. If it is not an add-on specialization zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1419, thereby decrementing the number of games in the VB mode. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. Then, in step S1423, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, a notification that the VB mode will end in this game is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notifications will be explained in detail later. After processing step S1423, the game count management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an added specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games continued in the specialized zone. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, in step S1426, the specialized zone flag is cleared, and in step S1427, the specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command, a notification that the specialized zone will end in this game is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. As such a notification, for example, a notification of the total number of games in which the addition was successful in the current specialized zone is made. After the process of step S1427 is performed, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated.

<End Determination Process>
Next, the end determination process as the process at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 54. As already described, the end determination process is a process carried out in step S615 in the bonus state process (Fig. 40). In the end determination process, it is determined whether the bonus end condition is met, and when the bonus is to be ended, a process for notifying the winning of the attack mode or the like which has been won in combination with the bonus is performed, and a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode or the like which has been won in combination with the bonus is performed.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small win has been achieved. As already explained, during the bonus, the first small win (BB medium small win 1) is achieved with a high probability (Figure 42). In addition, if the BB medium red 7 matching role (IV = 29) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the 30th small win (Figure 41 (b)), and further, if the lottery for the 30th small win of the first small win and the 30th small win is won, the 30th small win is achieved. In this embodiment, for example, when the BB medium red 7 matching role is won, the lottery for the 30th small win is won with a probability of 1 in 100. If the BAR combination during BB (IV=30) is won, the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the winning of the 31st small win (FIG. 41(b)), and if the lottery for the winning of the 31st small win of the 1st small win and the 31st small win is won, the winning of the 31st small win is established. In this embodiment, for example, if the BAR combination during BB is won, there is a 1 in 200 probability of winning the lottery for the winning of the 31st small win.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a small win has been achieved, a process is performed in step S1502 to subtract the payout amount for this game from the remaining payout amount. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the process of step S1502 has been executed, a process for adding is executed in step S1503. The process for adding is a process for granting a bonus other than the payout of gaming media based on the result of the game during this bonus. For example, if the result of this game is the 30th small win (7 reds in the lower row), if the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode, the attack mode is selected, and if the display mode is other than normal mode or challenge mode, the number of continued games in the attack mode is added (for example, 100 games). In addition, if the 31st minor win (lower BAR alignment) is achieved, if the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode, attack mode and VB mode are won, if attack mode, VB mode and specialized zone are won, if VB mode, specialized zone is won multiple times (e.g., twice), and if in specialized zone, the number of continued games in attack mode is added (e.g., 300 games). In step S1503, a flag corresponding to the transition of the display mode (attack mode win flag, etc.) is set, and a counter increment process according to the number of added games (increment process of attack mode continuation counter, etc.) is performed.

In the next step S1504, it is determined whether the remaining payout amount has reached 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated. If it is 0, in step S1505, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for notifying a win such as in attack mode and processing for adding to the number of continued games such as in attack mode are performed.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the attack mode hit flag is set. If the attack mode hit flag is set, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S1507, the number of premonition games is set in step S1508, and a premonition command is set in step S1509. The processes in steps S1507 to S1509 are the same as the processes in steps S808 to S810. After the process in step S1509 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

In other words, if the bonus ends while the attack mode has been selected, a premonition game will be played after the bonus ends, and then the player will be notified that the attack mode has been selected. This allows the player to play while hoping that the game will once again become favorable after the bonus ends.

Here, if a bonus is won during the premonition mode before any winning notification, the number of premonition games has already been set when the lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S1507. In this embodiment, the number of premonition games is reset even in such a case. In other words, regardless of the number of premonition games remaining when the bonus is won, the number of premonition games is again set to 1 out of 1 to 32 after the bonus ends. By doing this, it is possible to prolong the thrill after the bonus ends.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the premonition mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the premonition mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus ends while the challenge mode or VB mode has also been won, a premonition game is played after the bonus ends, and then a winning announcement for the challenge mode or VB mode is made.

If the VB mode win flag is not set in step S1511, proceed to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the attack mode add-on flag is set. If the attack mode add-on flag is set, a lottery process for the number of attack mode add-on games is performed in step S1513, a process for adding the number of attack mode games is performed in step S1514, and an add-on command is set in step S1515. The processes in steps S1513 to S1515 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S919. After the process in step S1515 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, then in step S1516 it is determined whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag is set, then in step S1517 a lottery process for the number of games to be added to the challenge mode is performed, in step S1518 a process for adding the number of games to the challenge mode is performed, and in step S1519 an addition command is set. The processes in steps S1517 to S1519 are the same as those in steps S820 to S822. If a negative determination is made in step S1516, or after the process in step S1519 has been executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Specialized Zone Treatment>
Next, the specialized zone process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 55. The specialized zone process is executed in step S712 in the lottery result process (Fig. 45). As already explained, the specialized zone is entered during VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of continued games in the attack mode is added for each game.

That is, in the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the following step S1602, a lottery processing for the number of added games in attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, a processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, an add-on command is set, and the specialized zone processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of games selected in the lottery processing for the number of added games in step S1602 is greater than the lottery processing for the number of added games in step S917.

<Processing related to notification performance on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification performance on the sub side, various notification processing performed by the sub side display control device 81 will be described. As the processing for various notifications, a performance setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. The performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the performance setting process, first in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1702, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. A command storage area is provided in RAM 183, and this command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, in step S1703, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a bet operation being performed, and includes the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, as well as the challenge mode start command in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 49), the attack mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, and the like. If it is one of these bet commands, in step S1704, the bet performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1703, or after the processing of step S1704 has been executed, in step S1705, it is judged whether or not the newly received command was a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery processing, as well as premonition commands and added commands set in the first to third specific role processing (Figures 46 to 48), and push order notification commands set in the push order role processing (Figure 51). If it is one of these start commands, in step S1706, the start performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 has been executed, in step S1707, it is judged whether or not the newly received command was a stop time command. A stop time command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and includes the winning result command set in step S415 of the reel control processing (FIG. 32), as well as the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialized zone end command, etc., which are set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 52). If it is one of these stop time commands, the stop time performance setting processing is executed in step S1708.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1707, or after the processing of step S1708 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1709, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1709, the settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the reel is started, or when the reel is stopped (for example, effects when the first reel stops, effects when the second reel stops, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as the first effect switch detection sensor and the second effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

The bet time effect setting process, start time effect setting process, and stop time effect setting process will be explained below. Note that when explaining each effect setting process, we will refer to the overview diagrams of the display effects in Figures 64 to 69.

<Bet time performance setting process>
The bet time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the bet command received this time is a bet command and whether the bet number information included in the bet command is a specific number (1), i.e., a specific number bet command. This process is for determining whether the game mode being executed is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and when it is determined that the command is a specific number bet command, it means that the game mode being executed this time is a specific mode. In this case, in step S1802, a bet time presentation setting process for a specific mode is executed, and then this presentation setting process is terminated. This bet time presentation setting process for a specific mode will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the command is not a specific number of coins bet command and the game mode to be executed is the normal game mode, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the currently received betting command includes a challenge mode start command. If the challenge mode start command is included, in step S1804, a process for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Challenge mode start" and displays (for example, a specified character display) a message indicating that the display mode to be transitioned to is a chance mode that is likely to win the attack mode transition lottery. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a man's rough voice saying "Grab the attack mode!").

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether the currently received bet time command includes an attack mode win notification command. If the attack mode win notification command is included, in step S1806, processing is performed to set the attack mode win notification effect. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Attack mode confirmed." In addition, in the attack mode win notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Attack number one!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, then in step S1807 it is determined whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, then in step S1808 a process is performed to set up a VB mode winning notification effect. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "VICTORY BONUS confirmed." Additionally, in the VB mode winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Victory!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

After any of the processes in steps S1804, S1806, and S1808 has been executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1807, in step S1809, other bet time effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In the process in step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56-58 for the corresponding bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, or, for example, a process for returning from a demo mode in which a certain condition is entered when no play has been made for a predetermined period of time, or a process for turning on a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been validated, etc. are performed.

<Start-time performance setting process>
Next, the start-time performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the number of bets at the start is a specific number (1). This process is for determining whether the game mode to be started is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and when it is determined that the number of bets is a specific number, it means that the game mode to be executed this time is a specific mode. In this case, in step S1902, a start-time performance setting process for a specific mode is executed, and then this performance setting process is terminated. This start-time performance setting process for a specific mode will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the number is not a specific number, a display mode setting process is performed in step S1903. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display performance of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set in the corresponding display mode. Specifically, the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side also has an area for setting a challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag as flags for grasping the display mode, and the corresponding flag is set when each mode starts and cleared when it ends. For example, in the setting process for the challenge mode start performance in the above step S1804, the challenge mode flag is set. In step S1903, by grasping these various mode corresponding flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding performance is performed.

In the next step S1904, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started is a push order role win based on the received lottery result command. If the push order role wins, in step S1905, a push order notification process is performed. Here, the push order notification process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 59.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a push order notification command. If the push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2003, the mode corresponding flag is checked to determine whether the current display mode is attack mode. If it is not attack mode, in step S2004, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order that will result in the third replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2003 that the attack mode is in progress, in step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order that will result in the first replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not the winning combination, then in step S2004 it is determined whether the current lottery result is fall replays 1 to 3. If it is fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the push order that will result in the first replay winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2004 that the result is not one of the fall replays 1 to 3, then in step S2006 it is determined whether the current lottery result is the second promotion replay 1 or 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2007 it is determined whether the VB mode winning notification effect has already been performed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notification flag indicating that a VB win has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The notification flag is cleared upon transition to VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it is preferable to determine whether or not the notification flag exists. If a VB mode winning has been notified, then in step S2008 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification in which the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, and then the push order notification process is terminated. If a win has not been notified in VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, where the push order notification for the first replay win is performed, and the push order notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S2006 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2009 it is determined whether the current lottery result is BAR replay 1 or 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, then in step S2010 the mode flag is checked to determine whether the current display mode is VB mode. If it is in VB mode, then in step S2011 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to notify the push order for the sixth to eighth replay wins, and then the push order notification process is terminated. If it is not in VB mode, then the process proceeds to step S2005, where a push order notification for the first replay win is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2009 that the result is not BAR replay 1 or 2, then in step S2012 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If a bell has been won, then in step S2013 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to notify the press order in which a bell win is achieved as the first minor win, and then the press order notification process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, then the press order notification process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 58), if it is determined in step S1904 that the push order role has not been won, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not a specific role has been won. If a specific role has been won, processing for announcing a specific role is performed in step S1907. The processing for announcing a specific role will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1906, or after the processing of step S1905 or step S1907 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1908. In step S1908, it is judged whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. If an add-on command has been received, in step S1909, the add-on effect is set in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed at the time of stopping. As an example of the add-on effect, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a number corresponding to the number of games to be added as "+10". In addition, in the add-on effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound such as "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!"). It is preferable to vary the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the number of games to be added. It is also possible to set the add-on effect as a start-up effect.

If no top-up command is received in step S1908, or after the process of step S1909 is executed, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1910, the continuous performance setting process is executed in step S1911, and then other start-up performances are set in step S1912, after which the start-up performance setting process is terminated. The bonus notification process and the continuous performance setting process will be described in detail later. The process of step S1912 performs, for example, a process of setting a performance suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, or turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Stop performance setting process>
Next, the stop time performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether the number of bets for the game that is currently ending is a specific number (1). This process is for determining whether the game mode of the current game is the normal game mode or the specific game mode, and when it is determined that the number of bets is a specific number, it means that the game mode of the current game was the specific mode. In this case, in step S2102, a stop-time presentation setting process for the specific mode is executed, and then this presentation setting process is terminated. This stop-time presentation setting process for the specific mode will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the number is not the specific number, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a challenge mode end command. If the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2104, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Challenge mode end". In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, a man's rough voice saying "Put yourself together!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2103, then in step S2105 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an attack mode start command. If the attack mode start command is included, then in step S2106 processing is performed to set the attack mode start effect. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 1". In addition, in the attack mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Attack mode start!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

The "Ver.1" display during the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. In other words, it is a display indicating that the attack mode being started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the attack mode rank is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.2" as a promotion effect. When the attack mode rank is promoted to the third attack mode, the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.3" are displayed, and when it is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.4" are displayed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether the currently received stop command includes an attack mode end command. If the attack mode end command is included, processing is performed in step S2108 to set the attack mode end effect. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "ATTACK MODE END" and displays the number of games to be continued in this attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "See you later").

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2107, then in step S2109 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If the VB mode start command is included, then in step S2110 a process is performed to set the VB mode start effect. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "777 VICTORY!!". Additionally, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Victory Bonus Start") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2109, it is determined in step S2111 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If the VB mode end command is included, in step S2112, processing is performed to set the VB mode end effect. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "VICTORY BONUS END", displays the number of continued games in the attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone) at the end of the current VB mode, and displays the total number of coins paid out in the attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "It's not over yet").

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2111, it is determined in step S2113 whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If the specialized zone start command is included, processing is performed in step S2114 to set the specialized zone start effect. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Add-on challenge!!" and displays a character indicating that this is a special mode in which attack mode add-ons are likely to occur. In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a boy's voice saying "Let's go") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a specialized zone start command is not included in step S2113, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, in step S2116, processing is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games that have been added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound such as "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64. It is preferable to vary the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of games that have been added.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2115, it is determined in step S2117 whether the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If the bonus end command is included, processing is performed in step S2118 to set the bonus end effect. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus, and if the bonus was entered into attack mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone, the total number of coins paid out in attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, depending on whether the attack mode was successful, whether the challenge mode was successful, and the number of added games, effects are performed using characters or the like that suggest these contents.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2104, S2106, S2108, S2110, S2112, S2114, S2116, and S2118, or after a negative judgment is made in step S2117, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, if an added performance is set, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to execute the added performance. As already explained, the setting of the added performance is performed in step S1909 in the start-time performance setting process.

Then, in step S2120, other stop time effects are set, and then this effect setting process is terminated. In step S2120, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout amount of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, various processes for notifying the transition of display modes are performed on the display control device 81 side based on various commands from the main control device 101, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In addition to notifying the transition of display modes, the display control device 81 side also performs various in-game presentation processes.

<Processing for various in-game effects>
In this embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. Continuous effects are effects that make the player expect a favorable result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and can be continued over multiple games (four games in this embodiment), and are effects that notify the player whether the favorable result was achieved in the final game. Bonus effects are effects that are performed in each game during a bonus state that is transitioned to based on winning the first BB, second BB, special first BB, or special second BB.

The outline of the continuous performance is explained with reference to Figure 69.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), at the start of the first game in which the consecutive performance is set, a display is made suggesting the number of times the consecutive performance will continue (the figure shows a four-stage daruma drop performance corresponding to the four consecutive performance games). Then, at the end of the first game in which the consecutive performance is set, a performance is made to notify whether the consecutive performance will continue or not (the figure shows a performance in which the first stage of the daruma drop is successful, indicating that the consecutive performance will continue). If the consecutive performance is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the consecutive performance is set, a performance is made to notify that the consecutive performance will end halfway (for example, a performance in which the first stage of the daruma drop fails, etc.). The performance regarding whether the consecutive performance will continue or not is the same for each game in the consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), at the start of the second game in which consecutive effects are set, a display is made suggesting the number of consecutive effects remaining (in the figure, a daruma drop effect with three stages remaining). Then, at the end of the second game, a display is made to notify whether the consecutive effects will continue or not (in the figure, a display is shown indicating that the second stage of the daruma drop was successful, indicating that the consecutive effects will continue).

As shown in FIG. 69(c), at the start of the third game in which consecutive effects are set, a display is made suggesting the number of consecutive effects remaining (in the figure, the remaining two stages of Daruma Drop effects are shown). Then, at the end of the third game, a display is shown to notify whether the consecutive effects will continue or not (in the figure, a display is shown indicating that the third stage of Daruma Drop was successful, indicating that the consecutive effects will continue).

As shown in FIG. 69(d), at the start of the final game (the fourth game) of the series, a display is displayed indicating that it is the final game of the series (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma Drop display). Then, at the end of the final game, a display is displayed indicating whether the result was favorable for the player (in the figure, a display indicating that the final Daruma Drop was successful).

As described above, in continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by continuing the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Also, it is possible to clearly recognize which game the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of the continuous performance, the continuation rate of the continuous performance is set to be higher as the game of the continuous performance progresses. In other words, the possibility of the continuous performance being notified that it will not continue is highest at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility of the non-continuation being notified. Therefore, in the continuous performance, the level of interest of the player varies greatly depending on which game in the continuous performance the current game is, and interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game.

The above continuous effects are set in the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 58) during the specific role notification process (step S1907), the bonus notification process (step S1910), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1911). Each process will be explained below in order.

<Bonus Notification Processing>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the currently received lottery result command. If it is a bonus winning game, in step S2202, a notification game lottery process is executed to notify the bonus winning. In this notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning will be notified is determined by lottery. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in the current game) to 10 games. In addition, when drawing the lottery for the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning role that triggered the win (whether there is a double win, and if there is a double win, the type of double minor role, etc.). For example, if a bonus is won with a strong cherry double, a small number of games may be selected, and if a bonus is won with a weak cherry double, a large number of games may be selected.

In the next step S2203, a process is performed to set the number of consecutive performance games based on the notification game determined by the process of step S2202. Specifically, in step S2203, a consecutive performance game is set in the consecutive performance counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The consecutive performance counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four consecutive games are performed, the consecutive performance is started in a game in which the consecutive performance counter is 4, and the result is notified in a game in which the consecutive performance counter is 0. More specifically, for example, if a decision is made in step S2202 to notify the bonus winning after 10 games, then in step S2203, 10 is input to the consecutive performance counter. In this case, the consecutive performance is started from the game in which the consecutive performance counter is 4. If a decision is made in step S2202 to notify the bonus winning after 5 games, then in step S2203, 5 is input to the consecutive performance counter. Even in this case, the continuous performance will start from the game where the continuous performance counter is 4.

If less than four notification games are set in step S2202, the continuous performance will start midway. For example, if a decision is made in step S2202 to notify a bonus win after two games, then in step S2203, 2 is entered into the continuous performance counter. In this case, the continuous performance will start from the current game, and will be performed from the third game of the continuous performance in FIG. 69(c).

After executing the process of step S2203, in step S2204, a continuous performance flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The continuous performance flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that a continuous performance is being executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2201, or after the processing of step S2204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is judged whether or not a bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game following the first BB, second BB, special first BB, or special second BB winning, and the game until the end of the bonus. A positive judgment is made in step S2205 when the first BB, second BB, special first BB, or special second BB winning is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2206, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter area 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus effect counter is a counter for executing an effect set for each game in accordance with the progress of the bonus game, and an effect corresponding to the counter is displayed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in the first BB or second BB bonus game, a combination in which nine medals are paid out per game is won, and the bonus ends with the payment of 216 medals. In other words, the first BB or second BB bonus game ends after 24 games. The effects in the bonus game are set to be executed over 24 games, and the bonus effect counter is a counter for determining which game out of the 24 games the effect should be executed in. Then, in step S2206, the bonus effect counter is set to 24 as the number of bonus effect games, and the bonus effect counter is decremented in each bonus game. After the process of step S2206 is performed, in step S2207, a bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The bonus effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to determine that a bonus effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, or after the process of step S2207 is performed, the bonus notification process ends.

<Processing for notifying specific roles>
Next, the specific role notification process executed in step S1907 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a premonition command is included as the current start command. If a premonition command is not included, in step S2302, it is determined whether or not an additional command is included as the current start command. If an additional command is not included, in step S2303, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won. If a bonus has not been won, that is, if a specific role has been won as a result of the lottery, and if the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode or the lottery for the additional number of continued games has not been won, and if a bonus has not been won, in step S2304, a lottery process for the pseudo premonition mode is executed. The pseudo premonition mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the premonition mode, but in the premonition mode, a result advantageous to the player (such as winning the challenge mode) is notified based on the end of the premonition game number, while in the pseudo premonition mode, the game ends without notifying the player of a result advantageous to the player based on the end of the pseudo premonition game number.

In step S2304, a table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the pseudo premonition mode. In the table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery, the probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode is set to differ depending on the type of specific role that has been won, and for example, it is set so that a strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode than a weak cherry.

In step S2305, it is determined whether or not the pseudo premonition mode lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S2304. If the lottery has been won, in step S2306, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of games in the pseudo premonition mode. This process corresponds to step S808 on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo premonition games is randomly determined by lottery to be 1 out of 1 to 32. In the following step S2307, a process is performed to set the number of pseudo premonition games determined in step S2306 to a continuous performance counter. In this embodiment, when the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode is set, the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode is ended after a continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo premonition games to the continuous performance counter in step S2307, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo premonition mode corresponds to the start of the continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance will start.

In step S2308, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo premonition mode is in the various flag storage area 183a. In the following step S2309, a continuous performance flag is set. After that, the process for notifying a specific role is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in any of steps S2301 to S2303, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2305, the process for notifying a specific role is terminated.

<Continuous performance setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S1911 of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the currently received start command includes a premonition command. If a premonition command is included, in step S2402, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode included in the premonition command is input to the continuous performance counter. When the number of remaining games in the premonition mode corresponds to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will start. In the following step S2403, the continuous performance flag is set.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2401, or after the processing of step S2403 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is judged whether or not the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, it is judged whether or not the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to the continuous performance, it is judged whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S2407. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2408, and the main premonition performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2409, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is identified from the main premonition performance table and the continuous performance counter, and the corresponding performance data is obtained from the normal game performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the process of setting it as the current continuous performance is performed. The performance data for the consecutive performances specified by this premonition performance table is such that if the consecutive performance counter is between 1 and 3, the performance data indicates that the consecutive performances will continue into the next game, and if the consecutive performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current consecutive performance will end successfully.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, a pseudo premonition effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2411, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is identified from the pseudo premonition effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is obtained from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and a process is performed to set it as the current continuous effect. The effect data of the continuous effect identified from the pseudo premonition effect table is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that it will not continue if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and effect data indicating that the current continuous effect will end in failure if the continuous effect counter is 0.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo premonition performance table includes those in which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous performance counter is 3 or 2, no continuous performance data is set, when the continuous performance counter is 1, performance data for the first game of the continuous performance is set, indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game in FIG. 69(a), and when the continuous performance counter is 0, performance data for the second game of the continuous performance is set, indicating that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 69(b). In this way, it is possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted midway in a game in which the number of pseudo premonition games in the pseudo premonition mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2409 or step S2411, in step S2412 it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, in step S2413 a process is performed to clear the continuous performance flag and the pseudo flag. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2406 or step S2412, or after performing the processing of step S2413, this continuous performance setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the continuous performance flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, it is determined whether or not the bonus performance flag is set. If it is set, in step S2415, the bonus performance counter is decremented. Specifically, the bonus performance counter is decremented by 1. In the following step S2416, a bonus performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2417, the performance data of the corresponding bonus performance is identified from the bonus performance table and the bonus performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the normal game performance data storage area 182b, and the corresponding performance data is set as the current bonus performance. In step S2418, it is determined whether or not the bonus performance counter is 0. If the bonus performance counter is 0, in step S2419, the bonus performance flag is cleared. After that, this continuous performance setting process is terminated.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the main control device 101 performs a lottery process based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the combination of symbols that stops on an active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding bonus is awarded. In this configuration, multiple RT states with different probabilities of a replay being the result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state is changed when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay is won is determined by the result of the win/lose lottery and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the operation order is made by winning the display mode transition lottery that is held according to the result of the lottery process. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning and win medals. Then, by transitioning to the second RT state or the third RT state as a gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and transitioning to a display mode in which the operation order is notified, in that RT state, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning in a state in which the replay probability is improved, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

In a game with the above-mentioned flow, for example, a player who is not accustomed to playing the game may not be able to fully enjoy the game because it is difficult for the player to understand how the game state and display mode are changed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a specific mode is provided in which the above-mentioned flow of the game can be experienced.

<Specific mode overview>
The normal game mode is set as a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, whereas the specific mode is set as a 1-bet game. The specific mode allows the player to simulate the gameplay of the normal game mode without reducing the number of medals. Specifically, one game is started by inserting one medal, and one medal is paid out at the end of each game, and the number of medals does not increase or decrease. In other words, the specific mode is a mode in which the number of medals paid out is equal to the number of medals bet for all game results. The transition of game states (transition of RT state) and transition of display modes in the normal game mode can be experienced by each game result of equal payout. The mechanism of the specific mode will be described below.

As already explained, in a 3-bet game, the straight downward-sloping line L4 is the active line (FIG. 9(a)), while in a 1-bet game, the curved line L6 is the active line (FIG. 9(c)). In the specific mode implemented as a 1-bet game, the winning symbol combinations are different from those in the normal game mode implemented mainly as a 3-bet game.

More specifically, when the lottery result in the 1-bet game is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line, in the 1-bet game, a specific symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination stops on the right-downward line L4, which is not an active line. The specific symbol combination is set as a combination that will result in the winning of the specific result if the lottery result in the 3-bet game is a specific result. In other words, when a predetermined symbol combination that will result in the winning of the predetermined result stops on the bent line L6 in the 1-bet game, a specific symbol combination that will result in the winning of the specific result stops on the right-downward line L4 in the 3-bet game. Although the same symbols appear to stop in the same place in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game, the winning results are different, as the specific result wins in the 3-bet game and the predetermined result wins in the 1-bet game.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a1), in a 3-bet game, the 1st BB is won and the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "red 7" symbol stop on the active line, resulting in the 1st BB winning. In a 1-bet game, a special 1st BB (1st PBB) is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 1st BB, and the symbol combination is set so that when the special 1st BB is won, the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol stop on the active line, resulting in the special 1st BB winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b1), when the symbol combination that results in the special 1st BB winning stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the 1-bet game, the symbol combination that results in the 1st BB winning stops on the right-downward line L4, which is the active line in the 3-bet game. However, in a 1-bet game, the downward sloping line L4 is not an active line, so even if the symbol combination that results in the first BB win as described above stops on the downward sloping line L4, the first BB win will not be achieved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a2), in a 3-bet game, the 26th small prize (watermelon) is won, and the "watermelon" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol stop on the active line, thereby establishing the 26th small prize. In a 1-bet game, a 26P small prize is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 26th small prize, and the symbol combination is set so that when the 26P small prize is won, the "watermelon" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "red bell" symbol stop on the active line, thereby establishing the 26P small prize. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b2), when the symbol combination that results in the 26P small prize stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the 1-bet game, the symbol combination that results in the 26th small prize stops on the right-downward line L4, which is the active line in the 3-bet game. However, in a 1-bet game, the right-sloping line L4 is not an active line, so even if the symbol combination that results in the 26th minor win stops on the right-sloping line L4 as described above, the 26th minor win will not be achieved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a3), in a 3-bet game, the 2nd small prize (bell) is won, and the "white bell", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols stop on the active line, thereby establishing the 2nd small prize. In a 1-bet game, a 2nd P small prize is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 2nd small prize, and the symbol combination is set so that when the 2nd P small prize is won, the "white bell", "red 7" and "watermelon" symbols stop on the active line, thereby establishing the 2nd P small prize. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b3), when the symbol combination that results in the 2nd P small prize stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the 1-bet game, the symbol combination that results in the 2nd small prize stops on the right-downward line L4, which is the active line in the 3-bet game. However, in a one-bet game, the right-sloping line L4 is not an active line, so even if the symbol combination that results in the second small win stops on the right-sloping line L4 as described above, the second small win will not be achieved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a4), in a 3-bet game, the 2nd small prize (bell) is won, and the "white bell", "red 7" and "watermelon" symbols stop on the active line, resulting in a so-called bell miss without the 2nd small prize being won. This symbol combination is a transitional result. In a 1-bet game, when the 2nd P small prize is won, the "white bell", "red 7" and "red bell" symbols stop on the active line, resulting in a so-called bell miss without the 2nd P small prize being won. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b4), when the symbol combination that does not result in the 2nd P small prize winning and is a so-called bell miss stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the 1-bet game, the symbol combination (transitional result) that does not result in the 2nd small prize winning and is a so-called bell miss stops on the right-downward line L4, which is the active line in the 3-bet game.

In this way, in the specific mode, the winning combination can be achieved by the same combination that would result in a winning combination during a three-bet game in the normal game mode, but with a different combination from the combination that would result in a winning combination during a three-bet game.

Here, in the 3-bet game in the normal game mode, the straight line L4 that slopes downward to the right is set as the active line, while in the specific game mode, the curved line L6 that curves is set as the active line. Since it is considered that the player is more likely to notice the winning combination of symbols that stops on a straight line than on a curved line, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b1), even if the combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols, and "watermelon" symbols that win the first PBB stops on the curved line L6 that is the active line in the specific game mode, the player's eyes are likely to be drawn to the "red 7" symbols that are aligned on the sloped line L4 rather than the combination of symbols. Moreover, the stop result where the "red 7" symbols stop aligned on the sloped line L4 is the stop result where the first BB win is achieved in the normal game mode.

In that case, a player who is familiar with the stop results may be distracted by the combination of symbols for the first BB winning stopped on the right-sloping line L4, which is not set as an active line, and may conclude that a first BB winning has been achieved, even if the combination of symbols for the first PBB winning stopped on the bent line L6 in a specific mode. In other words, by setting the results in this way, when a first PBB winning is achieved in a specific mode, it is possible to make the player believe that a first BB winning has been achieved, rather than a first PBB winning.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 70(b2), in a specific mode, the combination of "watermelon" and "red bell" symbols stopped on the curved line L6, which is an active line, is more eye-catching when the "watermelon" symbols are all stopped on the downward sloping line L4 to the right, which is not an active line in the specific mode, and it is possible to make the player believe that when the 26th P small prize is won in the specific mode, the 26th small prize is won, rather than the 26th P small prize.

It is also believed that players will be more likely to notice a winning combination when the same type of symbols are aligned, rather than when different symbols are aligned to form a winning combination. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 70(a3), even in the normal game mode, the combination of symbols that will form the second minor winning combination is set as a combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the active line, but in the stop result, the same type of "bell" symbols ("white bell" and "red bell" symbols) are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. In this case, when the second minor winning combination is formed, it is believed that the player will determine that the bell role has won as the second minor winning combination, based on the symbols that are stopped on the upper line L1 above the active line, the downward-sloping line L4. Even in the special mode, the combination of symbols that will result in the 2nd P minor win is set as a combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol on the active line, but the winning combination will result in the same type of "bell" symbols stopping on the upper line L1, just like the 2nd minor win. If this is the case, it is considered that the bell symbol has won when the 2nd P minor win is achieved.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fact that players are more likely to recognize curved lines than straight lines, and winning patterns in which the same symbols line up are more likely to be recognized by players than winning patterns in which different symbols are combined, is utilized to make the winning numbers in a specific mode appear as if they were winning numbers in the normal game mode, making it possible to reproduce simulated play in a more realistic way.

In addition, the bent line L6, which is set as an active line in the specific mode, and the downward-sloping line L4, which is set as an active line in the normal game mode, are set to common symbol stop positions (the upper row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M) on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and are set to different symbol stop positions (the lower and middle rows of the right reel 32R) on the right reel 32R. In this way, when associating winning combinations and their winning patterns in the specific mode and the normal game mode, it is only necessary to make the stopping patterns on the right reel 32R different. This makes it possible to relatively easily associate winning patterns in the specific mode and the normal game mode.

Furthermore, the effective lines in the specific mode and the effective lines in the normal game mode are set so that there is no overlap of lines L1 to L6. This is because if overlapping effective lines were set, when a winning symbol combination stops on the overlapping effective line, the winning combination would be different between the specific mode and the normal game mode, and even though the winning combination is standardized as described above, it would be clearly understood that it is a different hand because the winning combination is achieved with a different winning combination.

Next, with reference to Figures 71 to 73, we will explain the relationship between winning combinations in specific modes and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

In the special mode, the 1st P minor win to the 32nd P minor win are set as wins corresponding to the 1st P minor win to the 32nd P minor win in the normal game mode.

In the specific mode, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the first P small win is won. When the first P small win is won, one medal is paid out. The first P small win corresponds to the first small win in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that will win the first P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R on the downward right line L4. In other words, the "bell" symbol stops on the downward-sloping right line L4.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7", "Cherry", "BAR" or "White Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, a 2nd P small win to a 17th P small win will be awarded. When a 2nd P small win to a 17th P small win is awarded, one medal will be paid out. The 2nd P minor win to the 17th P minor win correspond to the 2nd P minor win to the 17th P minor win in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that result in the 2nd P minor win to the 17th P minor win stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the specific mode, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle row of the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R. In other words, the "bell" symbol stops on the top line L1.

Of the 2P small wins to the 17P small wins, the 2P small wins, the 3P small wins, the 6P small wins, and the 7P small wins have the same roll, the 4P small wins, the 5P small wins, the 8P small wins, and the 9P small wins have the same roll, the 10P small wins, the 11P small wins, the 14P small wins, and the 15P small wins have the same roll, and the 12P small wins, the 13P small wins, the 16P small wins, and the 17P small wins have the same roll. In other words, these rolls with the same rolls are the same roll in a specific mode. However, in the following explanation, they will be explained as different rolls for comparison with the normal game mode.

The 18th P minor win is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the top or bottom. When the 18th P minor win is achieved, one medal is paid out in one bet game. The 18th P minor win corresponds to the 18th minor win in the normal game mode, and when the symbol combination that results in the 18th P minor win stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination for the 18th P minor win stops on the sloping right line L4.

When the "red 7", "BAR" and "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "first replay" or "second replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 19th P small win is awarded. When the 19th P small win is awarded, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 19th P small win corresponds to the 19th small win in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that results in the 19th P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that results in the 19th P small win stops on the right-downward line L4.

The 20th P small win to the 24th P small win correspond to the 20th P small win to the 24th P small win in the normal play mode, and when the 20th P small win to the 24th P small win are achieved, one medal is paid out in one bet game. Note that the 20th P small win and the 21st P small win, and the 22nd P small win and the 23rd P small win are each roles with the same numbers, and are treated as the same role. However, for comparison with the normal play mode, they will be described as different roles.

The 25P small prize is a winning pattern in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row, similar to the 18P small prize. In the case of the 18P small prize, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R can stop in the middle row only if the special 1st BB or the special 2nd BB PBB is also won (the combination of the "2nd replay" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol), but in the case of the 25P small prize, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R can stop in the middle row regardless of whether the PBB is won or not. When the 25P small prize is won, one medal is paid out in one bet game. The 25th P minor win corresponds to the 25th minor win in normal play mode, and when the symbol combination that results in the 25th P minor win stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination that results in the 25th P minor win stops on the sloping right line L4.

When the "watermelon" or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 26th P small prize is won. When the 26th P small prize is won, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 26th P small prize corresponds to the 26th small prize in the normal game mode, and when the symbol combination that results in the 26th P small prize stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination for the 26th P small prize stops on the downward-sloping right line L4.

The 27P small win is a winning pattern that results in a stop result that is not what is known as a watermelon tenpai, and when the 27P small win is established, one medal is paid out in one bet game. The 27P small win corresponds to the 27th small win in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that results in the 27P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols for the 27th small win stops on the right-downward line L4.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7", "BAR", "white bell", "cherry" or "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 28th P small win is awarded. The 28th P small win is a so-called double tenpai miss stop result. When the 28th P small win is awarded, one medal is paid out in one bet game. The 28th P small win corresponds to the 28th small win in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that results in the 28th P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that results in the 28th P small win stops on the right sloping line L4.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 29th P small win is awarded. When the 29th P small win is awarded, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 29th P small win corresponds to the 29th small win in the normal game mode, and when the symbol combination that results in the 29th P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination for the 29th P small win stops on the downward-sloping right line L4.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 30th P small win is awarded. When the 30th P small win is awarded, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 30th P small win corresponds to the 30th small win in the normal game mode, and when the symbol combination that results in the 30th P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination for the 30th P small win stops on the downward-sloping right line L4.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 31st P small win is awarded. When the 31st P small win is awarded, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 31st P small win corresponds to the 31st small win in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that results in the 31st P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that results in the 31st P small win stops on the downward-sloping right line L4.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 32P small win is awarded. When the 32P small win is awarded, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 32P small win corresponds to the 32nd small win in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that results in the 32P small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that results in the 32P small win stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

As with the 30th to 32nd small wins, the 30th to 32nd small wins are wins that can occur during the bonus.

As already explained, in the normal game mode, the first re-play win through the eighth re-play win are set as the winnings that grant the re-play privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal. In contrast, in the special mode, the special re-play win is set in correspondence with the first re-play win. And in the special mode, the winnings that correspond to the second re-play win through the eighth re-play win are not re-plays, but the second re-play small win through the eighth re-play small win, which are small wins that result in the payout of one medal when a win is achieved.

That is, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, a special replay win is obtained. When a special replay win is obtained, the next game can be played as a replay without inserting a medal. The special replay corresponds to the first replay in the normal play mode, and as shown in FIG. 74(a), when a combination of symbols that will result in the special replay win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, a combination of symbols that will result in the first replay win stops on the downward right line L4. In this case, a "replay" symbol combination stops on the center line L2.

When the "BAR" or "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the second replay small win is awarded. When the second replay small win is established, one medal is paid out for one bet game. The second replay small win corresponds to the second replay in the normal play mode, and as shown in FIG. 74(b), when the combination of symbols that will result in the second replay small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that will result in the second replay win stops on the downward-sloping line L4. In this case, the "replay" symbol combination stops on the upward-sloping line L5.

When the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 3rd replay small win is awarded. When the 3rd replay small win is established, one medal is paid out for one bet game. The 3rd replay small win corresponds to the 3rd replay in the normal play mode, and as shown in FIG. 74(c), when the combination of symbols that results in the 3rd replay small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that results in the 3rd replay win stops on the downward right line L4.

The fourth lip minor win corresponds to the fourth replay in normal play mode. When the fourth lip minor win is achieved, one medal is paid out in 1 bet mode. Then, as shown in Figures 74(d) to 74(g), when the symbol combination resulting in the fourth lip minor win stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination resulting in the fourth replay win stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

When the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, or when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the fifth lip minor win is achieved. When the fifth lip minor win is achieved, one medal is paid out per bet game. The fifth lip minor feature corresponds to the fifth replay in normal play mode, and as shown in Figures 74(h) and 75(a), when the symbol combination that results in the fifth lip minor feature wins stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line in a specific mode, the symbol combination that results in the fifth replay wins stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

When the "First Replay" or "Second Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "First Replay" or "Second Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR", "Youth" or "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 6th replay small win is awarded. When the 6th replay small win is established, one medal is paid out in one bet game. The 6th replay small win corresponds to the 6th replay in the normal play mode, and as shown in FIG. 75(b), when the combination of symbols that will result in the 6th replay small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that will result in the 6th replay win stops on the downward right line L4.

When the "First Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" or "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 7th replay small win is awarded. When the 7th replay small win is established, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 7th replay small win corresponds to the 7th replay in the normal play mode, and as shown in FIG. 75(c), when the symbol combination that results in the 7th replay small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination that results in the 7th replay win stops on the downward-right line L4.

When the "First Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 8th replay small win is awarded. When the 8th replay small win is established, one medal is paid out per bet game. The 8th replay small win corresponds to the 8th replay in the normal play mode, and as shown in FIG. 75(d), when the symbol combination that results in the 3rd replay small win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in the specific mode, the symbol combination that results in the 3rd replay win stops on the downward right line L4.

Corresponding to the 1st BB win, 2nd BB win, and CB win in the normal game mode, the special mode provides the 1st PBB win (special 1st BB win), 2nd PBB win (special 2nd BB win), and PCB win (special CB win, SB win).

The first PBB winning corresponds to the first BB winning, and as described above, when the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, curved line L6, the first PBB winning occurs, a bonus is established, and the game state transitions to the special bonus state. In addition, when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, or when the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, a second PBB is won, a bonus is established, and the game state transitions to a special bonus state. When the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, a PCB is won, a bonus is established, and the game state transitions to a special CB state. In this embodiment, the PCB is set up so that it cannot be won, and the PCB prize cannot be won.

In the specific mode, special transition results are set as stop results corresponding to the transition results in the normal game mode. When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6 as an active line, or when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol or "first replay" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, a special transition result is set. When a special transition result stops, as shown in Figures 75(e) and 75(f), if the symbol combination that results in the special transition result stops on the bent line L6, which is the active line for a specific mode, the symbol combination of the transition result stops on the downward sloping line L4.

In addition, in the special mode, the first lip minor role and the miss minor role are provided as roles that do not correspond to roles in the normal game mode.

When the "First Replay" or "Second Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" or "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the First Replay Small Win is awarded. When the First Replay Small Win is awarded, one medal is paid out for one bet game. As shown in FIG. 75(g), when the combination of symbols that will result in the First Replay Small Win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in a specific mode, the First Replay or Second Replay symbols basically stop in line on the upper line L1.

When the "First Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "First Replay" symbol or the "Second Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, a small miss win is awarded. When a small miss win is awarded, one medal is paid out for one bet game. As shown in FIG. 75(h), when the combination of symbols that will result in the small miss win stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line in a specific mode, none of the symbols stop together on each of the straight lines L1 to L5, resulting in a scattered win.

The lottery table in the specific mode will be explained with reference to Figure 76. Here, in the specific mode, unlike the normal game mode, each RT state is not set as a game state, and instead, a normal game state and a bonus state (special bonus state) are set. The lottery table in Figure 76 is the lottery table that is referenced during the normal game state in the specific mode.

Incidentally, even when a specific mode is played during each RT state in the normal play mode, the lottery table for the normal play state in the specific mode may be referenced. Also, when normal play mode is played during the normal play state in the specific mode, the lottery table for each RT state in the normal play mode may be referenced.

In the lottery table for the specific mode, the point value PV is set to 0 for all index values IV=1 to 49, and the winning flag is not set for index values IV=1 to 49 (no positive determination in step S305). Note that index values IV=1 to 49 are omitted in the figure.

At index value IV=50, the winning combination is set to a miss small combination and a first replay small combination. At index value IV=51, it corresponds to a normal replay (IV=1) in the normal game mode, and a special replay is set as the winning combination. At index values IV=52-55, it corresponds to the first promotion replays 1-4 (IV=2-5) in the normal game mode, and is called special first promotion replays 1-4. As winning combinations, in addition to the first replay small combination, the third replay small combination, and the sixth to eighth replay small combinations, a miss small combination is set. At index values IV=56-58, it corresponds to the fall replays 1-3 (IV=6-8) in the normal game mode, and is called special fall replays 1-3. As winning combinations, in addition to the first replay small combination, the second replay small combination, and the sixth to seventh replay small combinations, a miss small combination is set. The index values IV=59, 60 correspond to the second promotion replay 1, 2 (IV=9, 10) in the normal game mode, and are called special second promotion replay 1, 2. As winning roles, in addition to the first, fourth and fifth lip small roles, a losing small role is set. The index values IV=61, 62 correspond to the BAR replay 1, 2 (IV=11, 12) in the normal game mode, and are called special BAR replay 1, 2. As winning roles, in addition to the first, third and sixth to eighth lip small roles, a losing small role is set. The index values IV=63 to 99 correspond to each small role and bonus (IV=13 to 49) in the normal game mode, and the corresponding winning roles are set.

When the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in FIG. 76, the probability of winning the special replay (probability of winning when IV=51) is about 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning the special strong cherry (probability of winning when IV=63) is about 1 in 263, and the probability of winning the special weak cherry (probability of winning when IV=64) is about 1 in 183. The probability of winning the special watermelon (probability of winning when IV=65) is about 1 in 154, the probability of winning the special chance A (probability of winning when IV=66) is about 1 in 252, and the probability of winning the special chance B (probability of winning when IV=67) is about 1 in 252. The probability of winning the special middle bell (probability of winning when IV=68) is about 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the special no-question bell (probability of winning when IV=69) is about 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning the special sequential push bell 1, the special sequential push bell 2, the special pinch push bell 1, and the special pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 70 to 73) is about 1 in 164, the probability of winning the special center push bell 1, the special center push bell 2, the special right push bell 1, and the special right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 74 to 77) is about 1 in 16.4. The probability of winning the special strong cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 81) is about 1 in 1770, the probability of winning the special strong cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 82) is about 1 in 4680, the probability of winning the special weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 83) is about 1 in 3280, and the probability of winning the special weak cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 84) is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning Special Watermelon Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 85) is approximately 1 in 3280, and the probability of winning Special Watermelon Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 86) is approximately 1 in 6550. The probability of winning Special Chance A Duplicate 1, Special Chance A Duplicate 2, Special Chance B Duplicate 1, and Special Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 87-90) is each approximately 1 in 3280. The probability of winning Special Middle Bell Duplicate 1 and Special Middle Bell Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 91, 92) is each approximately 1 in 2620. The probability of winning the 1st PBB and 2nd PBB alone (probability of winning when IV = 93, 94) is each approximately 1 in 65,500.

In other words, in a specific mode, special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special no-questions bell, special sequential push bell 1, 2, special pinch push bell 1, 2, special center push bell 1, 2, special right push bell 1, 2, special strong cherry overlap 1, 2, special weak cherry overlap 1, 2, special watermelon overlap 1, 2, special chance A overlap 1, 2, special chance B overlap 1, 2, special middle bell overlap 1, 2, 1st PBB, 2nd PB The probability of winning B is the same as the probability of winning a normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, no questions asked bell, forward push bells 1 and 2, sandwiched push bells 1 and 2, center push bells 1 and 2, right push bells 1 and 2, strong cherry overlap 1 and 2, weak cherry overlap 1 and 2, watermelon overlap 1 and 2, chance A overlap 1 and 2, chance B overlap 1 and 2, middle bell overlap 1 and 2, 1st BB, 2nd BB during normal play in normal play mode.

Note that, although the above special roles have the same winning probability as each role in the normal game mode, the winning probabilities do not have to be exactly the same, and may be slightly different. In this case, it is preferable that the probabilities are such that the player does not realize that they are different winning probabilities.

In addition, when the winning or losing role is judged using the lottery table shown in FIG. 76 in a specific mode, in addition to the above roles, the winning roles include special first promotion replays 1-4, special fall replays 1-3, special second promotion replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2, and a single-coin role with a miss (hereinafter referred to as "special push order replay"). Specifically, the probability of winning special first promotion replays 1-4 (probability of winning when IV = 52-55) is about 1 in 8.2, the probability of winning special fall replays 1-3 (probability of winning when IV = 56-58) is about 1 in 8.2, the probability of winning special second promotion replays 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV = 59, 60) is about 1 in 8.2, and the probability of winning special BAR replays 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV = 61, 62) is about 1 in 8.2. And the probability of winning a single-coin miss (the probability of winning when IV=50) is about 1 in 35.

As already explained, in the special mode, the PCB cannot be won. Also, in the special mode, the probability of not winning any role in the normal game state is 0, and one of the roles is guaranteed to win.

In other words, in the special mode of this embodiment, roles corresponding to each role in the normal game mode have the same probability of winning, and roles corresponding to roles that can be won by transitioning to the RT state in the normal game mode (special first promotion replays 1-4, special fall replays 1-3, special second promotion replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2; hereafter collectively referred to as "special transition roles") also win in the normal game state in the special mode.

As mentioned above, all winning combinations of the special transition combinations are set to include a losing combination. When a special transition combination is won, the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated determines whether a losing combination wins or another replay combination wins.

Figure 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations and the winning patterns that are achieved by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), when the special first promotion replay 1-4 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the miss small prize winning, the first lip small prize winning, and the third lip small prize winning will always be established, and which small prize winning will be established will differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. As shown in FIG. 77(c), when the special fall replay 1-3 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the miss small prize winning, the first lip small prize winning, and the second lip small prize winning will always be established, and which small prize winning will be established will differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. Also, when the special second promotion replay 1, 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the miss small prize winning, the fourth lip small prize winning, and the fifth lip small prize winning will always be established, and which small prize winning will be established will differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. As shown in FIG. 77(d), when special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, one of the following will always be achieved: a miss small win, a first lip small win, or a sixth to eighth lip small win; which small win is achieved will depend on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

When these special first promotion replays 1-4, special fall replays 1-3, special second promotion replays 1 and 2, and special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in order from the left, the operation sequence and the winning mode are related so that the winning of the miss small role is achieved in all cases. In other words, in the specific mode, even if these special transition roles are won in the normal game state, as long as the stop switches 42-44 are operated in order from the left, it is set so that the winning of the miss small role is achieved instead of the winning of the various lip small roles, and even if these special transition roles are won, the winning of the various lip small roles is not achieved unless the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is correct. In other words, if these special transition roles are won and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is correct, it is possible to achieve the winning of the various lip small roles.

In addition, in certain modes, the single miss role is set to include a miss minor role as a winning role, and depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, whether a miss minor role wins or a first lip minor role wins will occur.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(a), when a miss 1-coin winning combination is achieved, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42-44, either a miss small combination win or a first lip small combination win will always be achieved, and which small combination win will be achieved will depend on the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

Even in the case of a miss 1-coin role, the operation sequence and winning mode are related so that if the stop switches 42-44 are operated from the left, a miss small win will be achieved. In other words, in the specific mode, if a miss 1-coin role is won in normal play mode, a miss small win will be achieved as long as the stop switches 42-44 are operated in order from the left, and the first lip small win will not be achieved unless the operation sequence is correct. In other words, if a miss 1-coin role is won and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 is correct, it is possible to achieve the first lip small win.

In addition, in the special mode, the special push order bells (special push order bells 1 and 2, special pinch push bells 1 and 2, special center push bells 1 and 2, special right push bells 1 and 2) are different from the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the bells that are formed, just like in the normal game mode, and depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the corresponding winning may not be formed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 78, for example, when the special center push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 2nd P small prize or the 5th P small prize is won when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st P small prize is won when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the stop information is set so that the 2nd P small prize or the 5th P small prize is won when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Then, if the corresponding prize is not won due to the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the special transition result will stop on the bent line L6.

<Game mode switching effect>
The normal game mode and the specific mode can be switched by the player when no game is being played (when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped) by operating the second effect switch 67. In this case, the switching effect between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed based on the operation of the second effect switch 67.

When switching to a specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the special mode switching effect displays the text "free mode" to indicate the specific mode, and a line in a speech bubble from a girl character saying, for example, "Practice with us!!" is displayed to help the player understand that the specific mode is a practice mode. In addition, the special mode switching effect also displays a display instructing the player to return to normal game mode by operating the second effect switch 67 again.

When switching to normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the normal game mode switching effect is displayed by displaying the words "normal mode" to indicate normal game mode and a display instructing the player that a specific mode can be switched to by operating the second effect switch 67.

As described above, the display switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed by the second effect switch 67 connected to the sub-side display control device 81. In this slot machine 10, while information is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by various commands, information is not output from the display control device 81 to the main control device 101. This is to make it difficult to illegally enjoy benefits by reducing the information input to the main control device 101, which mainly performs processing related to the player's profit. Therefore, the main control device 101 does not specify whether the display control device 81 has performed a game mode switching effect, and the main control device 101 only switches the lottery table and the pay line according to the number of bets. In this way, it is possible to realize different game modes between the normal game mode and the specific mode without significantly increasing the processing load on the main control device 101, which performs the win/lose judgment (lottery processing) related to the player's profit.

<Description of the process on the main control device 101 side when betting one coin>
The flow of processing on the main control device 101 side when the number of bets is one will be described.

In normal processing (FIG. 29), after the start waiting process of step S204, a determination is made in step S205 as to whether the number of bets is a specified number. A positive determination is made in step S205 when it is determined that the number of bets has reached a specified number according to the gaming state, and in this slot machine 10, except when the gaming state is a bonus state, it is determined that the specified number has been reached when the number of bets is 1 or 3 coins. In other words, in step S205, execution of a specific mode of 1 bet mode is permitted regardless of whether a switching effect is being performed on the display control device 81 side.

In the mode transition notification process of step S206, as shown in FIG. 49, if the number of premonition games is not 0 (step S1101: NO), the notification process is terminated. The number of premonition games is not counted if the number of bets is 1, as will be described later. Therefore, the number of premonition games in the normal game mode is not counted while playing in the specific mode. Also, if the number of premonition games is 0 (step S1101: YES), regardless of the number of bets, the output setting of the challenge mode start command, the attack winning notification command, and the VB mode winning notification command is performed (steps S1105, S1110, and S1114). Therefore, if the number of premonition games in the previous game played in the normal game mode becomes 0, the notification is reliably performed at the time of betting regardless of the number of bets in the next game, and for example, if the attack mode or the like has been won in the normal game mode, it is possible to recognize this and play in the specific mode.

In normal processing, the bet command set in step S207 includes information on the number of bets for the game that is to start this time. In other words, it includes information that the first credit switch 56 has been operated and three bets have been made, that the second credit switch 57 has been operated and one bet has been made, or that the third credit switch 58 has been operated and two bets have been made. Since the game this time is one bet, the bet command set in step S207 includes information that one bet has been made.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S208: YES), the process of setting the active lines is performed in step S209. Since this is a one-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the lottery process of step S211, a lottery table (FIG. 76) for a specific mode corresponding to the current number of bets is obtained in step S302. Then, the process for determining whether or not a win has occurred in steps S303 to S308 is performed based on that lottery table. In other words, only the lottery table used differs depending on the number of bets, and the process for determining whether or not a win has occurred is the same regardless of the number of bets.

Incidentally, in the lottery table (Figure 31, etc.) referenced in normal play mode, the point value PV is set to 0 for all index values IV = 50 to 99. Therefore, not only will it be impossible to win any of the roles in normal play mode in a specific mode, but it is also set so that it is impossible to win any of the special roles for specific modes in normal play mode.

In the lottery result response process of step S310, when one coin is bet, the special role (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, weak cherry overlap 1, 2, watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2) and the push order role (the "push order replay" consisting of the first promotion replay 1-4, fall replay 1-3, second promotion replay 1, 2, BAR replay 1, 2, and the "push order bell" consisting of the push order bell 1, 2, sandwich push bell 1, 2, center push bell 1, 2, and right push bell 1, 2) are not won. Therefore, when one coin is bet, none of the first special role processing, second special role processing, third special role processing, and push order role processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed. Also, in the specialized zone processing, the additional game number is set for roles that are not won when one coin is bet in the additional lottery table in the attack mode additional lottery processing. Therefore, even if the specialized zone processing is performed with one coin bet, the number of games will not be added. Incidentally, the number of continued games in the specialized zone is not counted when one coin is bet, so even if a game is played in a specific mode during the specialized zone, the number of continued games in the specialized zone is not affected.

In the lottery process (Figure 30), after the lottery result response process is performed, a process of setting a lottery result command is performed in step S311. Regardless of the number of bets, information on the current lottery result is set in the lottery result command. Therefore, when one coin is bet, information on one of the various special roles that can be won with IV = 50 to 99 (Figure 76) is included in the current lottery result command.

In the normal process (Fig. 29), after the lottery process is executed, the reel control process (step S212) is performed. In the reel control process, regardless of the number of bets, the process for starting spinning (steps S401 to S402) and the process for stopping spinning (steps S403 to S412) are performed, and if all reels have stopped (step S411: YES), the payout determination process is performed in step S413. In the payout determination process, the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination is set, provided that the winning combination corresponds to the win flag. When one medal is bet, the payout of one medal is set for each of the benefits (Figs. 71 to 73) associated with each winning combination.

In the winning result response process, in the game number management process in step S1301 (FIG. 53), if the bet number is a specific number of 1 in step S1401, this management process ends without performing each process (steps S1402 to S1427). Therefore, when one coin is bet, the process of subtracting the premonition game number, the challenge mode continuation number, the attack mode continuation number, the VB mode continuation number, and the specialized zone continuation number are not performed. Also, since the third to fifth replay wins and the seventh replay win are not established when one coin is bet, a negative judgment is made in each process of steps S1302, S1308, and S1314, and the winning result response process ends as it is.

In the reel control process (Figure 32), after the winning result corresponding process is performed, a process to set the winning result command is performed in step S415. Regardless of the number of bets, information on the current winning result is set in the winning result command. Therefore, when one coin is bet, information on any of the winning results of the 1st P small win to the 32nd P small win, special replay, 1st lip small win to the 8th lip small win, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB, PCB, special transition result, and miss small win is included in the current winning result command.

In the normal processing (Figure 29), the medal payout process (step S213) pays out one medal, which is the reward for each bonus when one medal is bet. In the RT state processing of step S214 (Figure 35), when one medal is bet, no transition result or second to fifth replay wins are achieved, so no processing of the RT setting flags is performed. In other words, when one medal is bet, the RT state does not transition.

In the bonus state processing in step S215 (FIG. 40), the set number of the upper limit payout number during the bonus differs depending on the bonus that is won. Specifically, the special BB determined in step S612 indicates the first PBB or the second PBB, and these bonuses are bonuses that can only be won when one coin is bet. If it is determined in step S612 that the currently won bonus is the special BB, the remaining payout number is set to 24 in step S614. The reason why the upper limit payout number is different for the first BB or second BB and the first PBB or second PBB will be explained in detail later.

In the bonus state processing, the end determination process (Figure 54) determines in step S1501 whether or not a small win has been won regardless of the number of bets, and subtracts the current payout amount from the remaining payout amount (step S1502). In the bonus state when one coin is bet, the 29th P small win to the 31st P small win are achieved, and one medal is paid out each. In other words, when one coin is bet, no increase in medals can be expected even in the bonus state, and no decrease in medals will occur. Then, when the remaining payout amount becomes 0 (step S1504: YES), a bonus end command is set (step S1505). This process is the same as when three coins are bet.

However, when betting one coin, the various mode win flags and various additional flags are not set when the first PBB, second PBB are won, or during the bonus state, so the end determination process ends without setting any premonition command or additional command.

Here, regardless of the number of bets, only one bonus can be won and carried over in each state at one opportunity, and it is set so that if one bonus is won, other bonuses cannot be won. More specifically, regardless of the number of bets, if any BB is won in each state, other BBs cannot be won. Therefore, when three coins are bet, in a situation where the first BB is won or in a bonus state based on the first BB winning, the first BB, as well as the second BB, are not drawn, and in a situation where the second BB is won or in a bonus state based on the second BB winning, the first BB, as well as the second BB, are not drawn. Also, when one coin is bet, in a situation where the first PBB is won or in a bonus state based on the first PBB winning, the first PBB, as well as the second PBB, are not drawn, and in a situation where the second PBB is won or in a bonus state based on the second PBB winning, the first PBB, as well as the second PBB, are not drawn.

Furthermore, when betting three coins, if the first or second BB has been won or if the bonus state is based on winning the first or second BB, the first or second PBB will not be drawn even if the game is played with one coin bet. Conversely, when betting one coin, if the first or second PBB has been won or if the bonus state is based on winning the first or second PBB, the first or second BB will not be drawn even if the game is played with three coin bets.

Therefore, in this slot machine 10, BBs will not be won twice, and there will be no overlapping bonus states.

As described above, in a game in which one coin is bet, the main control device 101 basically outputs to the display control device 81 a bet command including information that one coin has been bet, a lottery result command including information on the lottery result when one coin is bet, and a winning result command including information on the winning result when one coin is bet. Based on these commands, the display control device 81 performs notification processing to allow the player to virtually experience playing in normal game mode.

<Description of the process on the display control device 81 side when betting one coin>
In the specific mode, the display mode in the normal game mode is simulated. Specifically, in the specific mode, the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone in the normal game mode are simulated as a display challenge mode, a display attack mode, a display VB mode, and a display specialized zone, respectively. Each of these display modes is shifted based on the lottery result or the winning result when one coin is bet.

Specifically, the display challenge mode is entered by winning a transition lottery that is held based on winning special specific roles (special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special strong cherry overlap 1, 2, special weak cherry overlap 1, 2, special watermelon overlap 1, 2, special chance A overlap 1, 2, special chance B overlap 1, 2, special middle bell overlap 1, 2).

The display attack mode can also be entered by winning the transition lottery, which is held based on the above-mentioned special specific role win. However, the display attack mode will be entered only if the transition lottery is won and the third lip minor role is won.

The display VB mode can be entered by winning the transition lottery that is held when the special specific combination is won during the display attack mode. However, the display VB mode will be entered only when the transition lottery is won and the fourth and fifth lip minor combinations are won.

The display special zone will also transition when a special BAR replay is won and the seventh replay minor win is achieved during the display VB mode.

The following mainly describes the processing flow on the display control device 81 side when the number of bets is one, which enables transitions between these display modes.

The processing performed by the display control device 81 when a single coin is bet can be broadly categorized into bet-time performance setting processing for a specific mode in the bet-time performance setting processing (Fig. 57), start-time performance setting processing for a specific mode in the start-time performance setting processing (Fig. 58), and stop-time performance setting processing for a specific mode in the stop-time performance setting processing (Fig. 60). Each of these is explained below.

<Specific mode bet time performance setting process>
First, the betting effect setting process for the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 80. As already described, this effect setting process is executed when the received betting command is a betting command corresponding to the specific number (1) (step S1801: YES).

The bet time effect setting process for a specific mode is broadly divided into a process for starting a specific mode (steps S2501 to S2506) and a process for notifying the mode transition (steps S2507 to S2521).

That is, the process for starting a specific mode begins with step S2501, where it is determined whether or not a specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The specific mode flag is a flag that is set based on the operation of the second effect switch 67, and the CPU 181 identifies a state in which the specific mode flag is set as a specific mode. If it is not set, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not a start command has been received. A start command is, for example, a lottery result command that is output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41.

When it is determined in step S2502 that a start command has been received, it means that the bet command determined to be a bet command corresponds to a one-coin bet, and the start lever 41 has been operated to start without switching to a specific mode. Specifically, this corresponds to, for example, winning the first BB or the like in normal game mode, and attempting to achieve the first BB win by betting one coin in the next game or later. In this case, other bet effects are set in step S2503, and then this effect setting process is terminated. In step S2503, for example, a process is performed to turn off the built-in lamps of each credit insertion switch 56-58 based on the bet operation.

If it is determined in step S2502 that a start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2504, where it is determined whether or not the second effect switch 67 as a switching button has been operated. If the second effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2502. If the second effect switch 67 has been operated, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the game is in a bonus state or a bonus carryover state. In this embodiment, in these bonus states and bonus carryover states, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not possible, and if it is determined in step S2505 that the game is in these states, the process returns to step S2502. In other words, in these states, operation of the switching button after a bet operation is invalid. If it is determined in step S2505 that the game is not in these states, the specific mode flag is set in step S2506.

If the specific mode flag is set in step S2501, or after the specific mode flag is set in step S2506, the mode transition notification process is performed in step S2507 and thereafter. The mode transition notification process corresponds to the mode transition notification process (Figure 49) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, in step S2507, it is determined whether the number of displayed premonition games is 0. The number of displayed premonition games indicates the number of continuing games in the pseudo premonition mode in the specific mode. The number of displayed premonition games is counted in the stop time performance setting process for the specific mode, which will be described later, and the number of displayed premonition games is decremented by one each time a game is played.

If the number of display premonition games is 0, in step S2508, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode winning flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a. The display challenge mode winning flag corresponds to the challenge mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special specific role is won in the specific mode start performance setting process. If the display challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S2509, the display challenge mode winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S2510, the display challenge mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a. The display challenge mode flag corresponds to the challenge mode flag on the main control device 101 side. In step S2511, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the display challenge mode start performance is performed.

In this case, the display control device 81 obtains image data for the challenge mode start effect from the normal play effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and obtains image data for the identification display from the identification information effect data storage area 182c of the ROM 182. Then, image data for the identification display is added to the image data for the challenge mode start effect, and the image data is set as image data for the display challenge mode start effect.

The display challenge mode start effect is generally similar to the challenge mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 93(a). The difference is that in the display challenge mode start effect, a stamp 65a is present as image data for identification display, indicating a specific mode, in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is added so that it is in front of the image data of the challenge mode start effect. In other words, the display challenge mode start effect is an effect in which image data of the stamp 65a for identification display, obtained from the identification information effect data storage area 182c, is added to the image data for the challenge mode start effect obtained from the normal game effect data storage area 182b.

As described above, there is a difference between the display challenge mode start effect and the challenge mode start effect in that there is or is not a stamp 65a as an identification display. This allows the player to clearly understand that the current game mode is a specific mode when the display challenge mode start effect is displayed. In this case, the effect data for the display challenge mode start effect is created using the effect data for the challenge mode start effect. This allows for a reduction in storage capacity compared to a configuration in which effect data for the display challenge mode start effect is stored separately.

Note that the creation of performance data for other display effects is similar to that described above, so a description of that will be omitted.

In the next step S2512, counting the number of continuation games in the display challenge mode is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 10) of the number of continuation games in the display challenge mode is set in the display challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The display challenge mode continuation counter corresponds to the challenge mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuation games in the display challenge mode is set to the same value as the initial value of the number of continuation games in the challenge mode.

If it is determined in step S2508 that the display challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S2513 whether the display attack mode winning flag is set. The display attack mode winning flag corresponds to the attack mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special specific role is won in the specific mode start performance setting process. If the display attack mode winning flag is set, in step S2514, the display attack mode winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S2515, a display attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The display attack notification flag corresponds to the attack notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag for enabling the third lip small role winning to be established in response to winning the transition lottery of the display attack mode. Then, in step S2516, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a display attack mode winning notification effect is displayed.

The attack mode winning notification effect for display is generally similar to the attack mode winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 92(a). The difference is that in the attack mode winning notification effect for display, a stamp 65a is present in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is added so that it is present in front of the image data of the attack mode winning notification effect.

If it is determined in step S2513 that the attack mode winning flag for display is not set, it is determined in step S2517 whether the VB mode winning flag for display is set. The VB mode winning flag for display corresponds to the VB mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special specific role is won in the specific mode start-time performance setting process. If the VB mode winning flag for display is set, in step S2518, the VB mode winning flag for display is cleared. Then, in step S2519, a notification flag for display VB is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The notification flag for display VB corresponds to the VB notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag for enabling the fourth and fifth lip minor roles to be won in association with the winning of the transition lottery for the VB mode for display. After that, in step S2520, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a notification performance for display VB mode is performed.

The display VB mode winning notification effect is generally similar to the VB mode winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 92(b). The difference is that in the display VB mode winning notification effect, a stamp 65a is present in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is added so that it is present in front of the image data of the VB mode winning notification effect.

If the display premonition mode is not 0 in step S2507, or if the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S2517, after executing any of the processes in steps S2512, S2516, and S2520, other bet time effects are set in step S2521, and then this effect setting process ends.

<Start-time performance setting process for specific mode>
Next, the start-time effect setting process for a specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 81. As already described, this effect setting process is executed when the received start-time command is a lottery result command corresponding to the specific number (1) (step S1901: YES).

In step S2601, it is determined whether the specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set, the effect setting process is terminated. In other words, in a one-coin bet game that is started without switching the game mode to the specific mode by operating the second effect switch 67, the start effect is not set.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2602. The processes from step S2602 onwards are configured as follows: step S2602: specific mode winning combination corresponding process, step S2603: specific mode display mode setting process, step S2604: specific mode bonus notification process, step S2605: specific mode continuous performance setting process, step S2606: other start-up performance setting process. Note that the specific mode display mode setting process is the same process as the display mode setting process in the normal game mode (step S1903), and identifies the display mode in the current specific mode based on the various display mode corresponding flags, and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. so that the corresponding performance is performed.

Below, the winning combination processing for specific modes will be explained. Since the bonus notification processing for specific modes and the continuous performance setting processing for specific modes are related to continuous performances, they will be explained after the stop time performance setting processing for specific modes.

<Processing for winning combinations in specific modes>
The specific mode winning combination corresponding process corresponds to the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 45) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 82, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special specific role based on the received lottery result command. If it is a special specific role, in step S2702, it is determined whether or not the display mode in the current specific mode is a normal display mode, which is not a display challenge mode, a display attack mode, a display VB mode, or a display specialized zone. If a positive determination is made in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not a display attack mode winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, in step S2704, a first specific role process for the specific mode is executed.

In addition, if it is determined in step S2702 that the display normal mode is not in effect, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the display attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S2705 whether the display mode in the current specific mode is the display attack mode. If it is the display attack mode, it is determined in step S2706 whether the display VB mode winning flag is set. If the display VB mode winning flag is not set, a second specific role process for the specific mode is executed in step S2707.

If it is determined in step S2705 that the display attack mode is not active, or if it is determined in step S2706 that the display VB mode winning flag is set, the third specific role process for the specific mode is executed in step S2708.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2702, step S2707, or step S2708, in step S2709, a process for notifying a specific role for a specific mode is executed. The process for notifying a specific role for a specific mode corresponds to the process for notifying a specific role in the normal game mode, and is related to continuous performance, so it will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the special specific role has not been won, then in step S2710, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special push order role ("special push order bell" and "special push order replay") based on the received lottery result command. If it is a special push order role, then in step S2711, specific mode push order role processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2710, or after the processing of step S2709 or step S2711 is executed, it is judged in step S2712 whether or not the display specialized zone flag is set. If the display specialized zone flag is set, processing for a specialized zone for a specific mode is performed in step S2713. If a negative judgment is made in step S2712, or after the processing of step S2713 is executed, the main winning role response processing is terminated.

<First specific role processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the first specific role process (Figure 46) on the main control unit 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 83, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is in progress. If the determination in step S2801 is negative, in step S2802, a normal time table for display attack mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2801 is positive, in step S2803, a challenge mode table for display attack mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. The normal time table and the challenge mode table are the same as the table provided for the normal game mode on the main control device 101 side, and the transition winning rate of strong cherries is replaced with the transition winning rate of special strong cherries, the transition winning rate of weak cherries is replaced with the transition winning rate of special weak cherries, etc., and each role on the table on the main control device 101 side is replaced with a role that wins when one coin is bet (in this table, each specific role is replaced with each special specific role). This is also true for tables for other specific modes.

After the display attack mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S2802 or step S2803, a display attack mode lottery process is executed in step S2804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b, and a lottery for transition to the display attack mode is performed by comparing the lottery counter with the lottery table acquired in step S2802 or step S2803.

In step S2805, based on the processing result of step S2804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the display attack mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to the display attack mode has been won, in step S2806, a process for setting the display attack mode winning flag is performed.

In the following step S2807, it is determined whether a bonus has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2807, in step S2808, a lottery process is performed to select the number of premonition games to be displayed. In step S2808, a number of premonition games to be displayed of 1 is randomly determined by lottery from 1 to 32. In step S2809, based on the processing result of step S2808, a process is performed to input the number of premonition games to be displayed into the display premonition counter in the various counter area 183b. The display premonition counter is decremented by 1 each time one bet game is played.

In step S2810, a process is executed to set the display premonition flag in the various flag storage area 183a. If a positive judgment is made in step S2807, or after the process of step S2810 is executed, this specific combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the lottery for transition to the display attack mode has not been won, then in step S2811, a lottery process for the display challenge mode is executed. In the lottery process for the display challenge mode, a table for the lottery for the display challenge mode is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 183b. The table for the lottery for the display challenge mode is the same as the table for the lottery for the challenge mode on the main control device 101 side, and each specific role is replaced with each special specific role.

In step S2812, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode has been selected based on the processing result of step S2811. If it is determined that the display challenge mode has been selected, in step S2813, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is selected. If the display normal mode is selected, in step S2814, a process is executed to set a display challenge mode selection flag in the various flags storage area 183a.

In the following step S2815, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won. If not, a lottery process for the number of premonition games to be displayed is executed in step S2816, a process for setting the number of premonition games to be displayed in the premonition counter is executed in step S2817, a process for setting the premonition flag to be displayed is executed in step S2818, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The processes in steps S2815 to S2818 correspond to steps S2807 to S2810.

If it is determined in step S2813 that the display challenge mode has been selected again during the display challenge mode, processing for adding on the continued games in the display challenge mode is performed in steps S2819 to S2823. That is, in step S2819, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been selected. If a bonus has not been selected, the process proceeds to step S2820, where a lottery process for the number of added games in the display challenge mode is executed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of added games in the display challenge mode is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 183b. The table for lottery for the number of added games in the display challenge mode is the same as the table for lottery for the number of added games in the challenge mode on the main control device 101 side, and each specific role is replaced with each special specific role.

In step S2821, a process for adding the number of games in the display challenge mode is performed. In this process, a process for adding a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S2820 to the display challenge mode continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S2822, a display add-on effect is set. The display add-on effect is generally similar to the add-on effect in the normal play mode, and the stamp 65a is added to the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65 so that it is in front of the display image in the normal play mode add-on effect. Note that in step S2822, only the setting of the display add-on effect is performed, and the execution of the display add-on effect is performed in the stop time effect setting process. This is also the same for the setting process of other add-on effects.

After executing the processing of step S2822, this specific combination processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2819, the display challenge mode addition flag is set in step S2823, and then this specific combination processing is terminated.

<Second specific role processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the second specific role process (Figure 47) on the main control unit 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 84, in step S2901, a process is performed to grasp the rank of the display attack mode. Even in the specific mode, the display attack mode has four ranks, the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode, and each rank has a different probability of transitioning to the display VB mode. Step S2901 determines whether the rank of the current display attack mode is the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode.

In step S2902, a display VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the display attack mode grasped in step S2901 is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. The display VB mode lottery table is the same as the VB mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific role is replaced with each special specific role.

In step S2903, a lottery for switching to the display VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S2902 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 183b. Then, in step S2904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2903 corresponds to the winning of the display VB mode.

If the result of step S2904 is positive, a process is performed in step S2905 to set a display VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 183a. After that, in steps S2906 to S2909, a process is performed to set the number of premonition games to be displayed, similar to steps S2807 to S2810.

If it is determined in step S2904 that the result of the display VB mode lottery process is not a display VB mode win, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, a display attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a table for the display promotion lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 183b. The table for the display promotion lottery is the same as the table for the promotion lottery on the main control device 101 side, and each specific role is replaced with each special specific role.

In step S2911, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S2910 was a promotion win. If a promotion win was found, in step S2912, a promotion process for the display attack mode is performed in which the display rank flag is set to correspond to the rank to be promoted. Then, in step S2913, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a display promotion effect is performed. In the display promotion effect, the stamp 65a is added to the display image in the promotion effect in the normal game mode so that it is in front of the player.

If it is determined in step S2911 that the display promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S2913 has been executed, processing to add to the number of continuing games in attack mode is performed in steps S2914 to S2920.

That is, in step S2914, a lottery process for adding on the number of games in the attack mode for display is performed. In this lottery process, a table for the lottery for the attack mode for display addition is obtained from the various table memory area 182a, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 183b. The table for the lottery for the attack mode for display addition is the same as the table for the lottery for the attack mode addition on the main control device 101 side, and each specific role is replaced with each special specific role.

Then, in step S2915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, this specific role processing ends.

If it is determined that the additional game lottery has been won, in step S2916, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2917, where a lottery process is performed for the number of additional games in the attack mode for display. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for lottery for the attack mode for display additional game number is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 183b. The table for lottery for the number of additional games in the attack mode for display is the same as the table for lottery for the attack mode for add-on game number on the main control device 101 side, and each specific role is replaced with each special specific role.

In step S2918, a process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. In this process, a process for adding a value corresponding to the number of added games selected in step S2917 to the display attack mode continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S2919, the display add-on performance is set. After the process of step S2919 is executed, this specific combination process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2916, a display attack mode add-on flag is set in step S2920, and then this specific combination process is terminated.

<Third specific role processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the third specific role process (Figure 48) on the main control unit 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85, in step S3001, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. This process is the same as the process in step S2914.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S3001 was a winning result for the additional bonus. If it is determined that the additional bonus lottery was won, in step S3003, it is determined whether the bonus was won. If the bonus was not won, the process proceeds to step S3004, where a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. Then, in step S3005, the number of games in the display attack mode is added, and in step S3006, the display additional bonus performance is set, and then this specific role process is terminated. The processes in steps S3003 to S3006 are the same as the processes in steps S2916 to S2919.

If the result of step S3002 is negative, the specific combination processing ends. If the result of step S3003 is that a bonus has been won, the display attack mode addition flag is set in step S3007, and the specific combination processing ends.

<Push order processing for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the push order role processing (Figure 51) on the main control unit 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 86, in step S3101, it is determined whether the current lottery result is any one of the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 based on the received lottery result command. A positive determination is made in step S3101 when any one of the first replay small win, the third replay small win, or the losing small win is won based on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3102, where it is determined whether the display attack notification flag is set.

If the display attack notification flag is set, in step S3103, it is determined whether the display attack mode flag is set, i.e., whether it is the display attack mode, the display VB mode, or the display top-up special zone. If the display attack mode flag is set, in step S3104, processing for notifying the push order of the third lip minor feature is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a notification effect is performed for the operation order corresponding to the third lip minor feature winning among the first lip minor feature, the third lip minor feature, and the missing minor feature (FIG. 77(b)). In the notification effect of the operation order, the stamp 65a is added to the display image of the notification effect of the operation order in the normal play mode so that it is present on the front side.

If it is determined in step S3103 that the display attack mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3105, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a notification effect is performed for the operation sequence corresponding to the first lip minor win among the first lip minor win, the third lip minor win, and the miss minor win (Figure 77 (b)). After that, the main push order win process is terminated.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3102, the operation sequence is not notified and the main push sequence processing ends. In this case, for example, if a stop operation is performed on the left reel 32L, a miss minor win is achieved.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the replay is not one of the special first promotion replays 1 to 4, then in step S3104 it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the special fall replays 1 to 3. A positive determination in step S3103 means that the first lip minor role, the second lip minor role, or the miss minor role wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S3105 it is determined whether the notification flag for the display attack is set. If the notification flag for the display attack is set, then in step S3106, processing for the push order notification of the first lip minor role is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that, among the first lip minor role, the second lip minor role, and the miss minor role, a notification performance of the operation sequence corresponding to the first lip minor role is performed (FIG. 77(b)). After that, the main push order role processing is terminated.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3105, the push order process ends without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 32L, one of the following is achieved: the first lip small win, the second lip small win, or the miss small win.

If it is determined in step S3104 that the replay is not one of Special Fall Replays 1 to 3, then in step S3107 it is determined whether the current lottery result is either Special Second Promotion Replay 1 or 2. A positive determination in step S3107 occurs when the first, fourth, fifth or missing small win is achieved based on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S3108 it is determined whether the notification flag for attack for display is set. If the notification flag for attack for display is set, then in step S3109 it is determined whether the notification flag for VB for display is set.

If the notification flag for display VB is set, processing for notifying the push order of the 4th or 5th lip small win is executed in step S3110. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a notification performance of the operation order corresponding to the 4th or 5th lip small win among the 1st, 4th, 5th, and missing small wins is performed (Figure 77 (c)). Thereafter, this push order win processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3109, it means that the display attack mode is in effect and the display VB mode has not been won. In this case, the process for notifying the push order of the first lip minor win is executed in step S3106, and then the main push order win process ends. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S3108, the operation order is not notified and the main push order win process ends as is. In this case, for example, if a stop operation is performed on the left reel 32L, a miss minor win is achieved.

If it is determined in step S3107 that the replay is not the special second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S3111 it is determined whether the current lottery result is either the special BAR replay 1 or 2. A positive determination in step S3111 means that, depending on the operation sequence of the current game, any of the first lip minor feature, the sixth to eighth lip minor features, and the miss minor feature will win. In this case, in step S3112 it is determined whether the notification flag for the attack for display is set. If the notification flag for the attack for display is set, then in step S3113 it is determined whether the notification flag for the VB for display is set. If the notification flag for the attack for display is set and the notification flag for the VB for display is set, then in step S3114 processing is executed for notification of the push order for the sixth to eighth lip minor features. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the 6th to 8th lip minor wins among the 1st lip minor win, the 6th to 8th lip minor wins, and the miss minor win is notified (FIG. 77(d)). After that, the main push order win process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3113, the process for the push order notification of the first lip minor feature is executed in step S3106, and then the main push order feature processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3113, the process for the push order notification is not executed, and the push order feature processing is terminated as is. In this case, for example, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 32L, a miss minor feature is won.

If it is determined in step S3113 that the result is not special BAR replay 1 or 2, then in step S3115 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a win for the special push order bell. If it is a win for the special push order bell, then in step S3116 it is determined whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set and the current state is either the display attack mode, the display VB mode, or the display add-on specialization zone, then in step S3117 a push order notification process is executed to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first P minor win (Figure 78). After that, the main push order role process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3116, the main push order processing is terminated without performing the processing for the push order notification.

If it is determined in step S3115 that the special push order bell has not been won, then in step S3118 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a miss 1-coin role. A positive determination in step S3118 means that the first lip minor role or a miss minor role will be won depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S3119 it is determined whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set, then in step S3120 a push order notification process is executed to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first lip minor role winning (Figure 78). Thereafter, the main push order role process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3119, the push order notification process is not performed and the main push order role process ends. In this case, for example, if a stop operation is performed on the left reel 32L, a miss minor role win is achieved.

<Specialized Zone Processing for Specific Modes>
This process corresponds to the specialized zone process (FIG. 55) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 87, in step S3201, the result of this lottery process is grasped. In the following step S3202, a lottery process for the number of added games in the display attack mode is performed. In the following step S3203, a process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. Then, in step S3204, the display added performance is set, and the process for the specialized zone for the specific mode is terminated. The processes in steps S3202 to S3204 are the same as the processes in steps S2917 to S2919. However, the number of games selected in the lottery process for the number of added games in step S3202 is greater than the lottery process for the number of added games in step S2917.

<Stop effect setting process for specific mode>
Next, the specific mode stop time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 88. As already described, this effect setting process is a process that is performed when the received stop time command is a winning result command corresponding to the specific number (1) (step S2101: YES).

The specific mode stop time presentation setting process is made up of specific mode game count management process in step S3301, specific mode winning result response process in step S3302, and specific mode bonus end process in step S3303. Each of these is explained below.

<Number of games for specific modes management process>
This process corresponds to the game number management process (FIG. 53) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 89, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won or whether or not the game is in a bonus state. If a positive determination is made in step S3401, in step S3402, the display challenge mode flag, display attack mode flag, display VB mode flag, display specialized zone flag, etc. are cleared, and then this game count management process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3401, in step S3403, it is judged whether the number of premonition games to be displayed is 0. If it is not 0, in step S3404, a process is performed to subtract 1 from the number of premonition games to be displayed. If the number of premonition games to be displayed is 0 in step S3403 (if the mode is not a premonition mode for display), or after the process of step S3404 has been executed, in steps S3405 to S3427, a process is performed to count the number of continued games in each mode.

That is, in step S3405, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is selected. If the display challenge mode is selected, the process proceeds to step S3406, where the display challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S3407, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If the counter is not 0, this management process is terminated. If the counter is 0, the display challenge mode flag is cleared in step S3408, and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a display challenge mode end effect in step S3409.

The display challenge mode end effect is generally similar to the challenge mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 93(b). In the display challenge mode end effect, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the challenge mode end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 so that it is in the foreground.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the mode is not the display challenge mode, then in step S3410 it is determined whether or not the mode is the display attack mode. If it is the display attack mode, then the process proceeds to step S3411, where the display attack mode duration counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S3412 it is determined whether or not the display attack mode duration counter is 0. If it is not 0, then this management process is terminated. If it is 0, then in step S3413 the display attack mode flag is cleared, and in step S3414 the display attack notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S3415, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to perform an attack mode end effect.

The attack mode end effect for display is generally similar to the attack mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 94(b). In the attack mode end effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the attack mode end effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 so that it is in the foreground. The display of the number of games played and the number of coins won during the attack mode for display will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S3410 that the mode is not the display attack mode, the process proceeds to step S3416 to determine whether or not the mode is the display VB mode. If it is the display VB mode, then in step S3417 it is determined whether or not the mode is the display add-on specialization zone. If it is not the display add-on specialization zone, then in step S3418 a process is performed to subtract 1 from the display VB mode continuation counter. Then, in step S3419 it is determined whether or not the display VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated. If it is 0, then in step S3420 the display VB mode flag is cleared, and in step S3421 the display VB notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S3422, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a display VB mode end performance.

The display VB mode end effect is generally similar to the VB mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 95(b). In the display VB mode end effect, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the VB mode end effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 so that it is in the foreground. The display of the number of games played and the number of coins won during the display VB mode will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S3417 that the zone is a display-use added specialization zone, the process proceeds to step S3423, where the display-use specialization zone continuation counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S3424, it is determined whether the display-use specialization zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, in step S3425, the specialization zone flag is cleared, and in step S3426, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a display-use specialization zone end performance. The display-use specialization zone end performance is generally similar to the specialization zone end performance, and like other display performances, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the specialization zone end performance so that it is in the foreground.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3407, step S3412, step S3419, step S3416, or step S3424, or after the processing of step S3409, step S3415, step S3422, or step S3426 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3427. In step S3427, a process for an add-on notification is executed. In this process, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so as to execute the set display add-on performance (step S2822, step S2919, step S3006, etc.). The display add-on performance is as described above. After the processing of step S3427 has been executed, this management process is terminated.

<Processing for winning results for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the winning result response process on the main control device 101 side (FIG. 52).

That is, as shown in FIG. 90, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current stop result is the third lip small win. If the third lip small win is established, in step S3502, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set, in step S3503, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set, since the display attack mode is already in effect, this response process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display attack mode flag is not set, in step S3504, the display attack mode flag is set. In the following step S3505, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to perform a display attack mode start performance.

The attack mode start effect for display is generally similar to the attack mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 94(a). In the attack mode start effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the attack mode start effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 so that it is in the foreground.

Then, in step S3506, counting the number of continuations of the display attack mode is started. Specifically, an initial value of the number of continuation games of the display attack mode (e.g., 50) is set in the display attack mode continuation counter. The display attack mode continuation counter corresponds to the attack mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuation games of the display attack mode is set to the same value as the initial value of the number of continuation games of the attack mode. After the processing of step S3506 is performed, this response processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the third lip minor win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S3507. In step S3507, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth lip minor wins have been achieved as the current stop result. If the fourth and fifth lip minor wins have been achieved, it is determined in step S3508 whether or not the display VB notification flag has been set. If the display VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S3509 whether or not the display VB mode flag has been set. If the display VB mode flag has been set, the display VB mode is already set, so this response process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display VB mode flag has not been set, a process of setting the display VB mode flag is performed in step S3510. After that, in step S3511, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to perform a display VB mode start performance.

The display VB mode start effect is generally similar to the VB mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 95(a). In the display VB mode start effect, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the VB mode start effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 so that it is in the foreground.

After that, in step S3512, counting the number of continuations in the display VB mode is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 60) of the number of continuation games in the display VB mode is set in the display VB mode continuation counter. The display VB mode continuation counter corresponds to the VB mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuation games in the display VB mode is set to the same value as the initial value of the number of continuation games in the VB mode. After the processing of step S3512 is performed, this response processing ends.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the 4th and 5th lip small wins have not been achieved, then in step S3513 it is determined whether or not the 7th lip small win has been achieved as the current stop result. If the 7th lip small win has been achieved, then in step S3514 it is determined whether or not the notification flag for display VB has been set. If the notification flag for display VB has been set, then in step S3515 a process is performed to set the display specialized zone flag. Then, in step S3516, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a display specialized zone start performance.

The display specialized zone start effect is generally similar to the specialized zone start effect, as shown in FIG. 96. In the display specialized zone start effect, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the specialized zone start effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 so that it is in the foreground. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to perform the above.

After that, in step S3517, counting the number of continuations of the display specialized zone is started. Specifically, an initial value of the number of continuation games of the specialized zone (e.g., 5) is set in the display specialized zone continuation counter. The display specialized zone continuation counter corresponds to the specialized zone continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuation games of the display specialized zone is set to the same value as the initial value of the number of continuation games of the specialized zone. After the processing of step S3517 is executed, this response processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S3513 or step S3514, this response processing is terminated as it is.

<Bonus end process for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the end determination process on the main control device 101 side (FIG. 54).

That is, as shown in FIG. 91, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a bonus end command has been received. The bonus end command is a command that is set in step S1505 in the end determination process on the main control device 101 side. If the bonus end command has not been received, this end process is terminated as is.

If a bonus end command has been received, in step S3602, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode win flag is set. If the display attack mode win flag is set, in step S3603, a lottery process is performed for the number of premonition games to be displayed, in step S3604, the number of premonition games to be displayed is set, and in step S3605, the display premonition flag is set. The processes in steps S3603 to S3605 are the same as the processes in steps S2808 to S2810. After the process in step S3605 has been executed, this end process is terminated.

If the display attack mode winning flag is not set in step S3602, then in step S3606 it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode winning flag is set. If the display challenge mode winning flag is set, then the processing for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then this termination processing is terminated. If the display challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S3606, then it is determined whether or not the display VB mode winning flag is set in step S3607. If the display VB mode winning flag is set, then the processing for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then this termination processing is terminated.

If the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S3607, proceed to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode addition flag is set. If the display attack mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of added games in the display attack mode is performed in step S3609, a process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed in step S3610, and a display addition effect is set in step S3611. The processes in steps S3609 to S3611 are the same as the processes in steps S2917 to S2919. However, the display addition effect set in step S3611 is executed at the relevant timing. After the process in step S3611 is executed, this termination process is terminated.

If the display attack mode addition flag is not set in step S3608, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the display challenge mode addition flag is set. If the display challenge mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of games to be added to the display challenge mode is performed in step S3613, a process for adding the number of games to the display challenge mode is performed in step S3614, and the display addition performance is set in step S3615. The processes in steps S3613 to S3615 are the same as the processes in steps S2820 to S2822. However, the display addition performance set in step S3615 is executed at the relevant timing. If a negative determination is made in step S3612, or after the process in step S3615 has been executed, this termination process is terminated.

<Game flow for each game mode>
As described above, in this embodiment, the normal game mode implemented in the 3-bet mode or 2-bet mode can be simulated in the 1-bet mode. Here, the flow of each game mode and the differences will be explained with reference to Figures 97 to 100. Figures 97 and 98 show the game flow of the normal game mode, and Figures 99 and 100 show the game flow of the specific mode.

In the normal game mode, when the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state, the display mode is basically the normal mode. If a specific role is won (a prize is awarded) at the timing of ta1 in this situation, a lottery is held to switch the display mode to the challenge mode or the attack mode. For example, if the lottery to switch to the attack mode is won, after the premonition mode, at the timing of ta2, an attack mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. After the attack mode winning notification effect is performed, a push order notification is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and if a push order role is won, a push order notification is performed to switch the game state.

If the first promotion replay 1 to 4 is won at the timing of ta3, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the third replay win is achieved. As a result, the third replay win is achieved, and the attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

By the way, the state between the attack mode winning notification performance and the attack mode start performance is the attack mode preparation state, the push order role is notified, and the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 0.61 pieces for each game. On the other hand, when the second replay winning is established and the attack mode is switched from the attack mode preparation state to the attack mode, the push order role is notified, and the game state is switched to the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the medals will increase by about 1.90 pieces for each game, and more medals can be won than in the preparation state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to switch to the attack mode as soon as possible after the attack mode winning notification performance is performed. On the other hand, if you have been trying to win the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the medals may gradually decrease even though the transition to the attack mode has been confirmed. Therefore, after the winning notification of the attack mode is made (more specifically, after the state of winning the attack mode has been reached), the number of continuing games in the attack mode can be increased by winning a specific role. Therefore, even if the transition to the attack mode does not occur for a while, it is possible to fully enjoy the game during that time.

When the attack mode starts at time ta3, the game state becomes the second RT state, and the probability of winning the push order replay becomes higher than the first RT state or the normal game state. For example, if fall replays 1 to 3 are won at time ta4, a push order notification is made during attack mode to establish the first replay win. Therefore, during attack mode, the occurrence of an event in which the RT state falls due to the second replay win is avoided. Also, if the push order bell is won during attack mode, a push order notification is made to establish a bell win. Therefore, the occurrence of an event in which the transition result stops due to a missed push order bell and the RT state falls is avoided.

If a specific combination is won (awarded) at the timing of ta5 during attack mode, a lottery is held to switch the display mode to VB mode and to add to the number of games to continue in attack mode. For example, if the lottery to switch to VB mode is won, a premonition mode is entered, and then at the timing of ta6, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. performs a VB mode winning notification effect. After the VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. will execute a push order notification for VB mode, and if the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won, a push order notification that can establish a fourth or fifth replay winning will be performed.

If the second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won at the timing of ta7, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the push order notification is performed so that the fourth and fifth replay wins are achieved. For example, if the fourth replay win is achieved, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. will perform a VB mode start effect.

By the way, the state between the VB mode winning notification performance and the VB mode start performance is the VB mode preparation state, the push order role is notified, and the game state is the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the medals will increase by about 1.90 pieces for each game. Moreover, in the game between the VB mode winning notification performance and the VB mode start performance, the subtraction of the number of continued games in the attack mode stops. Therefore, for example, even if a push order notification that allows the fourth and fifth replay winnings is made, if the first replay winning is made without following the push order notification, there is a possibility that the VB mode will not be started and the game will be played without reducing the number of continued games in the attack mode. Therefore, for example, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated without following the push order notification until the VB mode start performance is made after the VB mode winning notification performance is made, a predetermined penalty may be imposed. The specified penalty may be a configuration in which the number of games continued in the attack mode is subtracted, the rank of the attack mode is downgraded, or the attack mode is terminated. Also, the VB mode may be configured to be performed in the second RT state, so that there is no transition in the game state between the attack mode and the VB mode. In this case, it is possible to start the VB mode without going through the fourth and fifth replay wins, and the difference between the game in which the VB mode winning notification performance is performed and the game in which the VB mode start performance is performed can be eliminated.

In VB mode, the third RT state is entered, so there is a possibility of winning BAR Replay 1 or 2. If BAR Replay 1 or 2 is won and the BAR line-up lottery is also won, it becomes possible to achieve the seventh replay win (middle BAR line-up), and the seventh replay win transitions to the specialized zone. The specialized zone continues until the number of continuing games in the specialized zone reaches 0, at which point it returns to VB mode.

When the number of continuing games in VB mode reaches 0 at time ta8, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. displays a VB mode end effect. When VB mode ends, the display mode transitions to attack mode. Although the RT state is still in the third RT state, if BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, there is no notification of the push order that would result in the sixth to eighth replay wins, so there is a possibility that the third replay win will be achieved. When the third replay win is achieved at time ta9, the game state transitions to the second RT state.

When the number of continuing games in attack mode reaches 0 at timing ta10, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. displays an attack mode end effect. When attack mode ends, the display mode transitions from attack mode to normal mode. The RT state is still in the second RT state, but if fall replays 1 to 3 are won and a second replay win is established, or if the push order bell is won and a bell is missed (if the transition result stops), the game state transitions to the first RT state.

In contrast, in the special mode, the game state does not change. Below, we will explain, for example, the case where the special mode is executed when the game state is the normal game state in the normal game mode.

If a special specific role is won (awarded) at the timing of tb1, which is the normal display mode, a lottery is held to switch to the challenge mode or attack mode for display. In this case, the stopping numbers for the special specific role are the same as the stopping numbers for the specific role, so the player can simulate an experience in the specific mode of switching to the challenge mode or attack mode when a specific role is won in the normal game mode.

For example, if a special combination is won at the timing of tb1 and the lottery for transition to the display attack mode is won, the mode will transition to the display premonition mode. When the display attack mode confirmation notification is performed at the timing of tb2, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. will start to notify the push order.

When the special first promotion replay 1-4 is won at the timing of tb3, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the push order notification that allows the third replay to be won is performed. As a result, the third replay is won, and the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. performs the display attack mode start effect, and the display attack mode starts.

In this case, the stop result of the winning of the third lip minor symbol, which triggers the start of the display attack mode, is the same as the stop result of the winning of the third replay, which triggers the start of the attack mode in the normal play mode. Therefore, by winning the third lip minor symbol, the player can simulate the experience of the attack mode being started by the winning of the third replay. Also, the display content of the attack mode start effect and the display attack mode start effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is almost the same in appearance. Therefore, the start effect can also be performed to simulate the experience of the attack mode being started.

On the other hand, there is a difference between the attack mode start effect and the display attack mode start effect in terms of the presence or absence of stamp 65a. This allows, for example, the manager of the gaming hall to easily check which gaming mode the player is playing in, and also, for example, if one were to try to capture such a simulated experience in a photograph, the stamp 65a would inevitably appear in the photograph, which could lead to a desire to experience the actual normal gaming mode rather than a simulated experience. The effect of displaying the stamp 65a is the same for other display effects.

By the way, after the display attack mode winning notification performance is performed, the state until the display attack mode start performance is performed is the display attack mode preparation state, and the special push order role is notified. However, if the special fall replay 1-3, the special second promotion replay 1, 2, or the special BAR replay 1, 2 are won, the push order notification is not made on the condition that it is not the display attack mode, so a miss small role may be established. In other words, the push order notification is made when the special first promotion replay 1-4 is won and when the special push order bell is won. On the other hand, when the display attack mode is started at the timing of tb3, for example, if the special fall replay 1-3 is won at the timing of tb4, the push order notification that can establish the first lip small role is made, and even if the special second promotion replay 1, 2 is won, the push order notification that can establish the first lip small role is made. Moreover, when the display attack mode is started, a push order notification is made that can achieve the first replay small win even when a miss 1-coin win occurs. Therefore, when the third replay small win is achieved and the display attack mode is started, it becomes possible to virtually experience an increased probability of winning a replay.

If the special specific role is won (awarded) at the timing of tb5, a lottery for transition to the display VB mode and a lottery for adding the number of games to continue in the display attack mode will be held. For example, if the lottery for transition to the display VB mode is won, after the premonition mode, at the timing of tb6, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. will perform a display VB mode winning notification performance. After the display VB mode winning notification performance is performed, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. will execute a push order notification for the display VB mode, and if the special second promotion replay 1 or 2 is won, a push order notification that can establish the fourth and fifth replay small roles will be performed.

If the special 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2 is won at the timing of tb7, the push order notification will be made so that the special 4th and 5th replay small wins will be achieved. For example, if the 4th replay small win is achieved, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. will perform a display VB mode start effect.

In this case, the stop results of the winning of the 4th and 5th lip minor symbols, which trigger the start of the display VB mode, are the same as the stop results of the winning of the 4th and 5th replay, which trigger the start of the VB mode in the normal play mode. Therefore, by winning the 4th and 5th lip minor symbols, the player can simulate the experience of the VB mode being started by the winning of the 4th and 5th replay. Also, the display content of the VB mode start effect and the display VB mode start effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is almost the same in appearance. Therefore, the start effect can also be performed to simulate the experience of the VB mode being started.

If you win special BAR replay 1 or 2 during display VB mode and also win the BAR line lottery, it becomes possible to achieve the 7th replay small win (middle BAR line), and the 7th replay small win will transition you to the display specialized zone. The display specialized zone will continue until the number of continued games in the display specialized zone reaches 0, at which point it will return to display VB mode.

When the number of continuing games in the display VB mode reaches 0 at the timing of tb8, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. performs a display VB mode end effect. When the display VB mode ends, it transitions to the display attack mode. However, in conjunction with the transition to the RT state in the normal game mode, when special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, a push order notification is performed that allows the third replay small win to be achieved. When the third replay small win is achieved at the timing of tb9, the game state transitions pseudo-to the second RT state (it does not actually transition).

When the number of continuing games in the display attack mode reaches 0 at the timing of tb10, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. performs a display attack mode end presentation. When the display attack mode ends, the display attack mode transitions to the display normal mode. In this embodiment, by transitioning from the display attack mode to the display normal mode, the display attack mode flag and the display attack notification flag are cleared, and push order notification is no longer performed. Therefore, from the perspective of a transition to a pseudo RT state, the RT state transitions to the first RT state at the timing of tb10.

This configuration may also be configured so that, in accordance with the fall of the RT state in the normal game mode, even after the display attack mode ends, a push order notification is made when a special push order role other than special fall replays 1-3 or the special push order bell is won until the second replay small role is won or the special transition result stops (for example, until the timing of tb11). In this way, it is possible to allow the player to experience a state in which the replay probability is improved until the RT state falls.

As described above, in the simulated game in the specific mode played as a one-bet game, there is no RT state or the like, and instead, there is a normal game state until the first or second PBB is won, and a bonus state based on winning the first or second PBB. In both the normal game state and the bonus state, one medal is paid out for each game with one bet, and there is no increase or decrease in the number of medals. In this way, the gameplay of the normal game mode can be experienced in the specific mode without the player having to worry about the increase or decrease in the number of medals.

In this case, in this embodiment, it is not that the insertion of medals is not required (the game can be played with the insertion of zero medals), but rather that the game can be played with one bet by inserting the minimum number of medals, one medal. In other words, the specific mode can be played at least by receiving medals lent at the game hall, and the act of simply playing only the specific mode for free is suppressed. Also, in game halls where medals are lent in units of a specified number (for example, 50 medals), after a player has experienced a simulated game with the minimum number of medals, the remaining medals can be used to motivate the player to play in the actual normal game mode.

In addition, as a mode in which medals do not increase or decrease, instead of realizing all as replay roles, various special roles (special watermelon roles) in which one coin is paid out can be won. If medals do not increase or decrease, all lottery results may be replay roles, and doing so is thought to improve the operability of the specific mode because it allows the betting operation to be omitted. However, if all lottery results are replay roles in this way, one coin will be automatically inserted at the end of each game in the specific mode, and a replay setting will be made, which may make it difficult to end the specific mode. In this case, for example, it is necessary to configure the replay setting to be cancelable even if the replay setting is made, or to configure the game mode to be set again by turning the power OFF/ON. In this regard, as described above, because the game is structured so that it is possible to win a role that results in the payment of one coin, it is possible to switch from the special mode to the normal game mode (the number of bets can be reset) except in games in which the replay role is won, making it possible to add a novel gameplay feature in the form of a special mode to a single gaming machine without adding a new structure.

The payout rate (ball payout rate) of medals per game differs between the normal game mode and the specific mode. Therefore, in order to provide a more realistic simulated experience of the normal game mode in the specific mode, it is necessary to make the results, effects, and winning probability of each role common to both game modes, while it is necessary for the game hall to be able to identify which game mode is being played in. Therefore, by adding a stamp 65a as an identification display to each display image on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the specific mode, it becomes easy to identify that the game mode being played is the specific mode.

In addition, by displaying an identification mark indicating that a specific mode is in progress on the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65 in this way, for example, when taking a commemorative photograph of the number of points acquired displayed at the end of attack mode, it becomes possible to easily determine afterwards whether the number of points acquired is the number of points acquired in the simulated game experience or the number of points acquired in the actual normal game mode.

In particular, because such identification display is provided on the auxiliary display unit 65, rather than on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spun based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the winning combination is selected based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, so that the gameplay of the slot machine 10 itself can be experienced in a specific mode without the identification display getting in the way, making it possible to make the simulated experience of the normal game mode more realistic. In other words, for example, if the identification display catches the player's eye while operating the stop switches 42 to 44, it is likely that the player will be reminded that the game is in a simulated mode, and will neglect the so-called "eye-pressing". Therefore, as described above, by displaying the identification markings in places that are difficult to see when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, it is possible to have the player pay the same attention to the game as in normal game mode, even though it is a simulated experience, and it is possible to improve the playability of the simulated experience.

<About consecutive performances>
The continuous performance is a performance that starts when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode reaches a predetermined number in the normal game mode, and ends when the number of premonition games reaches 0, and is a performance that spans a predetermined number of games. In the specific mode in this embodiment, it is possible to experience the continuous performance during the normal game mode. For example, if a lottery for transition to the display attack mode is won during the display normal mode, a notification is given that the display attack mode has been won through the display premonition mode as described above. Then, the continuous performance starts when the number of display premonition games in the display premonition mode reaches a predetermined number, and ends when the number of display premonition games reaches 0.

The following describes the process for executing continuous effects in a specific mode. The processes for executing continuous effects include a process for notifying bonuses for a specific mode, a process for notifying specific roles for a specific mode, and a process for setting continuous effects for a specific mode.

<Specific Mode Bonus Notification Processing>
This process corresponds to the bonus notification process (FIG. 61) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 101, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a special bonus (first PBB, second PBB) winning game based on the currently received lottery result command. If it is a special bonus winning game, in step S3702, an announcing game lottery process is executed to notify the bonus win in a specific mode. In this announcing game lottery process, a shorter number of games is more likely to be selected than in the announcing game lottery process in the normal play mode. Specifically, one announcing game is determined from 0 games (notified in the current game) to 4 games.

In the next step S3703, a process is performed to set the number of consecutive performance games for display based on the notification game determined by the process of step S3702. Specifically, in step S3703, the consecutive performance games for display are set in the consecutive performance counter for display. The consecutive performance counter for display corresponds to the consecutive performance counter in the normal game mode, and is decremented by one each time one bet game is executed. After the process of step S3703 is executed, in step S3704, a consecutive performance flag for display is set.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3701, or after the processing of step S3704 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, it is judged whether or not the current game corresponds to the start of a bonus game. If a positive judgment is made in step S3705, in step S3706, the number of bonus performance games is set in the display bonus performance counter. The display bonus performance counter corresponds to the bonus performance counter in the normal game mode. In this embodiment, 24 is set as the upper limit payout number for the special bonus. Also, in the bonus game during the special bonus, a small combination that pays out one coin per game is realized. Therefore, in the special bonus, 24 bonus games are played. Therefore, in step S3706, 24 is input to the display bonus performance counter.

Then, in step S3707, the display bonus performance flag is set. If a negative judgment is made in step S3705, or after the processing of step S3707 is executed, this notification processing is terminated.

<Processing for notifying specific roles for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the process for notifying a specific role (Figure 62) in normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 102, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the display premonition flag is set. The display premonition flag may be set in the immediately preceding first specific role processing for specific mode (FIG. 83) or second specific role processing for specific mode (FIG. 84). If the display premonition flag is not set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the display additional performance is set. The setting of the display additional performance may be performed in the immediately preceding first specific role processing for specific mode (FIG. 83), second specific role processing for specific mode (FIG. 84), or third specific role processing for specific mode (FIG. 85). If the display additional performance is not set, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not a bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a special specific role win, and the lottery for transition to the display challenge mode, display attack mode, or display VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of continued games is not won, and the bonus is not won, the lottery process for the display pseudo-omen mode is executed in step S3804. The display pseudo-omen mode corresponds to the pseudo-omen mode in the normal play mode.

In step S3804, a table for drawing the pseudo-premonition mode for display is obtained from the various table memory area 182a, and a counter for drawing is obtained from the various counter area 183b, and a drawing is performed as to whether or not to execute the pseudo-premonition mode for display. The table for drawing the pseudo-premonition mode for display is the same as the table for drawing the pseudo-premonition mode, and each specific role is replaced with each special specific role.

In step S3805, based on the processing result of step S3804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the display pseudo-premonition mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S3806, a lottery process is performed for the number of games in the display pseudo-premonition mode. This process corresponds to the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo-premonition mode in the normal game mode. In the following step S3807, a process is performed to set the number of games in the display pseudo-premonition mode determined in step S3806 in the display continuous performance counter.

In step S3808, a process is executed to set a pseudo display flag indicating that the display pseudo precursor mode is in effect. In the following step S3809, a continuous performance display flag is set. After that, this notification process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in any of steps S3801 to S3803, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3805, this notification process is terminated.

<Continuous performance setting process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the continuous performance setting process (FIG. 63) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 103, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the display premonition flag is set. If the display premonition flag is set, in step S3902, a process is performed to input the number of display premonition games in the display premonition mode into the display continuous performance counter. In the following step S3903, the display continuous performance flag is set.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3901, or after the processing of step S3903 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3904. In step S3904, it is judged whether or not the display continuous performance flag is set. If the display continuous performance flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the display continuous performance counter is performed in step S3905. Then, in step S3906, it is judged whether or not the display continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the display continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is judged in step S3907 whether or not the display pseudo flag is set. If the display pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3908, and the display main omen performance table is obtained from the various table memory area 182a. Then, in step S3909, the display data for the corresponding consecutive performance is identified from the display premonition performance table and the display consecutive performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the normal game performance data storage area 182b, and performance data for the identification information is obtained from the identification information performance data storage area 182c, and processing is performed to set this as the current consecutive performance.

The performance data for the consecutive performances specified from the main premonition performance table for display is the same as the performance data for the consecutive performances specified from the main premonition performance table in normal play mode, and like other display performances, stamp 65a is added so that it is in front of the image data for the consecutive performances in normal play mode.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the display pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, a display pseudo premonition performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3911, performance data for the corresponding continuous performance is identified from the display pseudo premonition performance table and the display continuous performance counter, and the performance data is obtained from the normal game performance data storage area 182b and the identification information performance data storage area 182c, and processing is performed to set the current continuous performance.

The performance data for the consecutive performances specified from the pseudo-omen performance table for display is the same as the performance data for the consecutive performances specified from the pseudo-omen performance table in normal play mode, and like other display performances, a stamp 65a as an identification display is added to the front side of the image data for the consecutive performances in normal play mode.

After the processing of step S3909 or step S3911 is performed, in step S3912, it is determined whether the display continuous performance counter is 0. If the display continuous performance counter is 0, in step S3913, the display continuous performance flag and the display pseudo flag are cleared. If the display pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S3906 or step S3912, or after the processing of step S3913 is performed, this setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the display continuous performance flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, it is determined whether the display bonus performance flag is set. If it is set, in step S3915, a subtraction process is performed on the display bonus performance counter. In the following step S3916, a display bonus performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3917, the performance data for the corresponding bonus performance is identified from the display bonus performance table and the display bonus performance counter, and the performance data is obtained from the normal game performance data storage area 182b and the identification information performance data storage area 182c, and a process is performed to set it as the current bonus performance.

The performance data for the bonus effect specified from the display bonus performance table is the same as the performance data for the bonus effect specified from the bonus performance table in normal play mode, and like other display effects, stamp 65a is added so that it is in front of the image data for the bonus effect in normal play mode.

In step S3918, it is determined whether the display bonus performance counter is 0. If the display bonus performance counter is 0, in step S3919, a process is performed to clear the display bonus performance flag. This setting process is then terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S3914 or step S3918, this setting process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, even when playing in a specific mode, the display premonition mode is set in which a continuous performance is finally performed based on winning the display challenge mode, the display attack mode, or the display VB mode. Continuous performance is also set based on winning a bonus. In addition, when a specific role is won, if the transition lottery for each mode is not won and the additional lottery is not won, the display pseudo premonition mode corresponding to the pseudo premonition mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to simulate the experience in the specific mode of winning a specific role in the normal game mode and the result being notified via the premonition mode and continuous performance.

Here, separate counters are provided for the normal game mode and the special mode to keep track of the game in which the continuous performance is being performed and to keep track of which game in the continuous performance it is. Therefore, for example, even if the special mode is switched to while a continuous performance is being performed in the normal game mode, if the normal game mode is returned to, the continuous performance can be resumed from where it was in the normal game mode before the switch.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, for example, assume that the normal game mode is switched to the specific mode when the first and second consecutive games have been completed. In this case, in the specific mode, it is possible to play the pseudo game described above, regardless of the progress of the consecutive games in the normal game mode up to that point and the results thereafter. Then, if the pseudo display challenge mode or the like is won in the specific mode, the result is notified after the consecutive games. For example, when the normal game mode is subsequently switched to, the consecutive games being played in the normal game mode are resumed. In this case, the consecutive games are resumed from the third consecutive game as a continuation of the first and second games that have already been completed.

By doing this, when a continuous performance occurs in the normal game mode, for example, it is possible to predict that a winning notification in the attack mode will be made afterwards, and to preview in advance how the winning notification will be made in the specific mode and how the game state will change afterwards, and then to wait for the continuous performance in the normal game mode.

Furthermore, as described above, the consecutive performance counter and the display consecutive performance counter start counting as the premonition mode and the display premonition mode from the game before the consecutive performance occurs. Therefore, for example, if a situation arises in which a consecutive performance may occur due to the winning of a specific role, it is possible to prepare in the specific mode as described above before the consecutive performance begins. In this way, there is no need to interrupt the consecutive performance midway, and the consecutive performance can be fully enjoyed from the start.

On the other hand, after the continuous performance reaches the final game and the advantageous or unfavorable result is notified, if any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated, a winning notification performance will be performed (mode transition notification process in FIG. 49). In other words, after the result is notified through the continuous performance in the 3-bet game, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated to play a 1-bet game, a winning notification performance in the 3-bet game will be performed, and after the result is notified through the continuous performance in the 1-bet game, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to play a 3-bet game, a winning notification performance in the 1-bet game will be performed. This is because, for example, if a continuous performance occurs during a game in the normal game mode and continues until the final game, and the advantageous result is notified, an action of trying to achieve a 1 BB win or a 2 BB win by betting one coin in the next game is considered. In other words, in such a case, if a specific mode is switched based on a single bet, the player may feel disheartened by the display of the practice screen at the moment when they have just gone through the continuous performance and been notified that they have won the first or second BB, reducing the effect of the continuous performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to specify which game the bonus performance is for in normal gaming mode and in specific gaming mode. The bonus performance will be explained with reference to Figure 105.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the bonus effects in the normal game mode and the bonus effects in the specific mode are both effects that have the same number of games of continuity. Specifically, the bonus effects in the normal game mode are story effects in the form of live-action video in which the story progresses with each game, and the story is completed in 24 games. Each game is assigned one story episode, and the story performance of that episode unfolds over a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period is set to be longer than the shortest period (about 4.1 sec) required from the start of the game (operation of the start lever 41) to the completion of medal payout. In each game, if the shortest period is consumed and the start operation of the next game is performed immediately, the story performance being executed will end midway and the story performance corresponding to the next game will start.

In the normal game mode, in the bonus state based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB, the payout limit is set to 216 medals. In each game, either BB small/medium 1, BB red 7 matching, or BB BAR matching (IV = 28-30) will win, and any of the 1st to 32nd small prizes will win. Regardless of which prize is won, the bonus awarded is 9 medals, and the payout limit will be reached after 24 games.

In other words, in normal play mode, the bonus state is set to end after a predetermined number of games, 24 games, and the bonus performance is also set to end after the predetermined number of games, 24 games.

Meanwhile, in the bonus state (special bonus state) based on the first PBB or second PBB in the specific game mode, the maximum payout number is set to 24 medals. In each game, either the special BB small/medium combination 1, the special BB medium red 7 combination, or the special BB medium BAR combination (IV = 78-80) will win, and any of the 1st P small combination to the 32nd P small combination will win. Regardless of which combination wins, the bonus obtained is one medal, and the maximum payout number is reached after 24 games.

In other words, the bonus state in the specific mode is set to end after a predetermined number of games, 24, just like the bonus state in the normal play mode. The bonus effects in the specific mode are also the same as those in the normal play mode, and the bonus effects are the same for each number of games in the bonus state. The difference is that, like the other effects, in the bonus effects in the specific mode, a stamp 65a that says "FREE" representing the specific mode is present in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and this stamp 65a is added so that it is in front of the image data of the bonus effects in the normal play mode.

Furthermore, in the bonus performance, the remaining number of payouts to be paid out during the bonus and the number of medals acquired during the bonus are displayed. In the normal game mode, the remaining number of payouts is 216 as described above, and in the bonus performance of the first game, as shown in FIG. 105(b1), the remaining number of payouts is displayed as 216 and the number of medals acquired is displayed as 0. Then, in the bonus performance of the second game, the display of the remaining number of payouts is reduced to 207 medals and the display of the number of medals acquired is increased to 9 medals, corresponding to the acquisition of 9 medals in the first game. This display update is repeated for each game, and for example, in the bonus performance of the fifth game in FIG. 105(b2), the display of the remaining number of payouts is 180 medals and the display of the number of medals acquired is 36 medals. Also, in the bonus performance of the 23rd game in FIG. 105(b3), the display of the remaining number of payouts is 18 medals and the display of the number of medals acquired is 196 medals. Then, in the bonus performance of the final game (24th game) in FIG. 105 (b4), the remaining number of coins to be paid out is displayed as 9 coins, and the number of coins won is displayed as 207 coins. When a payout is made in the final game, the remaining number of coins to be paid out becomes 0 coins, and the bonus state ends.

Even during bonus effects in specific modes, the remaining number of medals to be paid out during that bonus and the number of medals won during that bonus are displayed. However, these displays in specific modes are not the actual remaining number of medals to be paid out (maximum payout number 24 medals) or the actual number of medals won (maximum win number 24 medals), but rather the remaining number of medals to be paid out (maximum payout number 216 medals) and the number of medals won (maximum win number 216 medals) when replaced with the bonus state in normal play mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(c1), in the first game, the bonus during a specific mode displays the remaining payout number of 216 coins and the number of coins won of 0 coins. The displayed number is the same as that shown in FIG. 105(b1), in other words, the remaining payout number and the number of coins won are displayed differently from the actual remaining payout number of 24 coins and the number of coins won of 0 coins. Then, in the bonus during the second game, one medal was won in the first game, but nine medals will be won in the normal game mode, so the display of the remaining payout number is reduced to 207 coins and the display of the number of coins won is increased to nine coins. This display update is repeated for each game, and for example, in the bonus during the fifth game in FIG. 105(c2), the display of the remaining payout number is 180 coins and the display of the number of coins won is 36 coins. The displayed number is the same as that in FIG. 105(b2), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquired number are displayed differently from the actual remaining payout number of 20 coins and the acquired number of 4 coins. Also, in the bonus performance of the 23rd game in FIG. 105(c3), the remaining payout number is displayed as 18 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 196 coins. The displayed number is the same as that in FIG. 105(b3), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquired number are displayed differently from the actual remaining payout number of 2 coins and the acquired number of 22 coins. And, in the bonus performance of the final game (24th game) in FIG. 105(c4), the remaining payout number is displayed as 9 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 207 coins. The displayed number is the same as that in FIG. 105(b4), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquired number are displayed differently from the actual remaining payout number of 1 coin and the acquired number of 23 coins. Once a payout has been made in the final game, the remaining payouts will be 0 coins and the bonus state will end.

As described above, by winning the first PBB and the second PBB and transitioning to the special bonus, the bonus state in the normal game mode can be explored in a simulated manner. Furthermore, since the numbers that appear when the first PBB or the second PBB is won are the same as the numbers that appear when the first BB or the second BB is won in the normal game mode, the transition to the bonus state can be easily experienced from the appearance of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and furthermore, since the presentation during the bonus state is also the same after transitioning to the bonus state, the bonus in the specific mode can be enjoyed as if it were a bonus in the normal game mode.

Furthermore, because the number of games that can continue in the bonus state is the same, and the effects of each game during the bonus state are the same, data can be shared between the normal play mode and the specific play mode, making it possible to significantly reduce storage capacity. In particular, the bonus effects during the bonus state are in the form of live-action video, which has a tremendous effect in increasing the attention to the bonus state, but can increase the storage capacity. In this regard, as described above, the bonus effects in the specific mode are configured to reuse the bonus effects in the normal play mode, ensuring a good balance between the effects and storage capacity.

Not only that, but in the specific mode, the remaining payouts and winnings during the bonus are displayed as they are in the normal game mode, rather than the actual remaining payouts and winnings. This allows players to virtually experience, even in the specific mode, the experience of winning a bonus and winning medals by using up the bonus.

In this embodiment, when the first or second PBB is won during a specific mode, but the first or second PBB is not won, that is, when the first or second PBB is in a carryover state, the lottery table used for the win/loss lottery is different. Therefore, the lottery table used for the win/loss determination in the carryover state will be explained with reference to FIG. 106.

As shown in FIG. 106, in the carryover state of the first PBB or the second PBB, the point values of the index values IV=63-92, 95-99 are the same as those before the first PBB or the second PBB was won (FIG. 72), while the point values of the index values IV=50-62, 93, 94 are set to 0. In other words, when the first PBB or the second PBB is carried over, the miss 1-piece role, the special first promotion replays 1-4, the special fall replays 1-3, the special second promotion replays 1, 2, and the special BAR replays 1, 2 are not won. Therefore, when the first PBB or the second PBB is carried over, there are cases where none of the roles are won, resulting in a miss result. In this way, an event such as not being able to win the first PBB or the second PBB despite winning the first PBB or the second PBB is avoided. In other words, if the game continues to be one bet and one coin paid out per game even when the carryover is carried over, the bonus cannot be won under control that prioritizes small wins over bonus wins, and the player may end up being forced to play a three-bet game or two-bet game that includes a losing result.

When the 1st BB or 2nd BB won in the normal game mode is carried over, the lottery table for the normal game state (BB overlapping roles and BB point value PV are 0) is referenced in a 3 bet game, and the lottery table in Figure 106 above is referenced in a 1 bet game. Therefore, even if you aim for the 1st BB win by betting 1 coin when the 1st BB etc. is carried over, it is possible to achieve the 1st BB win etc. without being hindered by the 1 coin payout role.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration using a lottery table with a losing result as described above, in the carryover state, a configuration may be used in which the priority of attracting a bonus win is higher than that of a small win. In other words, in a situation where both a bonus and a small win have been won, the stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may be performed so that a bonus win is prioritized over a small win. Even in this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to win a bonus due to a small win. Furthermore, the control that prioritizes a bonus win over a small win is not limited to when a bonus is carried over, but may also be performed in a bonus winning game or in a bonus non-winning state.

＜Display of number of continued games and number of wins＞
As described above, in the bonus state of the specific mode, the remaining payout number and the number of medals won are displayed as if nine medals had been paid out in each game. In this embodiment, the display of the number of medals won, which corresponds to the normal game mode, is performed not only in the bonus state but also in the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display add-on specialization zone.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The counting process is a process for counting the number of continued games in attack mode, display attack mode, etc., and the number of wins, and is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4001, it is determined whether the count condition is met. The count condition is met by the start of the attack mode or the display attack mode. If the count condition is met, in step S4002, a count flag corresponding to the game mode is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The count flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to know that the count condition has already been met; for example, if the count condition is met in the normal game mode (if the attack mode is started), the count flag for the normal game mode is set, and if the count condition is met in a specific mode (if the display attack mode is started), the count flag for the specific mode is set.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4001, or after the processing of step S4002 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, it is judged whether any of the count flags are set. If any of the count flags are set, the process proceeds to step S4004, where it is judged whether it is time to start the game. Specifically, it is judged whether a start command has been received from the main control device 101. If the game has started, the process proceeds to step S4005, where it is judged whether a specific mode flag has been set. As already explained, the specific mode flag is a flag that indicates that the game mode is a specific mode; the state in which the flag is set indicates the specific mode, and the state in which the flag is not set indicates the normal game mode.

If the game is in the normal game mode, in step S4006, an increment process is performed on the game counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. Specifically, the game counter is incremented by 1. In the following step S4007, a decrement process is performed on the payout counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. Specifically, a value equivalent to the current bet number (1 to 3) is decremented from the payout counter.

If it is determined in step S4005 that the specific mode is selected, in step S4008, an increment process is performed on the game counter for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b. Specifically, the game counter for the specific mode is incremented by 1. In the following step S4009, a decrement process is performed on the payout counter for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b. Specifically, a process is performed to decrement the payout counter for the specific mode by a value equivalent to the number of bets in the normal game mode (in this process, a uniform value of 3), rather than the current number of bets (1).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4004, or after the processing of step S4007 or step S4009 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, it is judged whether or not it is time to end the game. Specifically, it is judged whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main control device 101. If the game has ended, in step S4011, it is judged whether or not a payout has been made in the current game. Note that in step S4011, it is judged that a payout has been made in the case of a replay winning.

If a payout has been made, in step S4012, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set and the game is in normal game mode, in step S4013, a process is performed to determine the number of payouts. Note that in the event of a replay win, the number of payouts is determined assuming that the same number of payouts as the number of bets has been made. Then, in step S4014, a process is performed to add the current number of payouts to the payout counter.

If it is determined in step S4012 that the mode is a specific mode, a process for grasping the current winning mode is performed in step S4015, and a process for grasping the payout number in the normal game mode based on the winning mode is performed in step S4016. For example, if the current winning mode is a 1P small win (special bell), the pseudo payout number is grasped as 9 coins, which is the payout number when the 1P small win corresponding to the 1P small win is won in the normal game mode, rather than 1 coin, which is the actual payout number based on the 1P small win. Also, for example, if the current winning mode is a 26P small win (special watermelon), the pseudo payout number is grasped as 5 coins, which is the payout number when the 26P small win corresponding to the 26P small win is won in the normal game mode, rather than 1 coin, which is the actual payout number based on the 26P small win.

In step S4017, the pseudo payout amount determined in step S4016 is added to the payout counter for the specific mode. As a result, the payout counter for the specific mode has a value as if a payout had been received in the normal game mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4010 or step S4011, or after the processing of step S4014 or step S4017 is executed, it is judged in step S4018 whether or not the count clear condition is satisfied. The count clear condition is satisfied by the end of the attack mode or the end of the display attack mode. If the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag corresponding to the game mode in which the count clear condition is satisfied is cleared in step S4019, and the corresponding game counter and payout counter are reset. Specifically, if the attack mode is ended and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the normal game mode is cleared, and the game counter and payout counter for the normal game mode are reset to 0. In addition, if the display attack mode is ended and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the specific mode is cleared, and the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode are reset to 0.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4003 or step S4018, or after the processing of step S4019 is executed, this counting process ends.

In the normal game mode, for example, during the attack mode, as shown in FIG. 108(a), in an area on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 that does not overlap with the push order notification effect, the total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the normal game mode is displayed, and the number of wins corresponding to the value of the payout counter is displayed as an effect during the attack mode. In addition, in an area juxtaposed to the display area of the total number of games, the number of remaining games in the attack mode and VB mode are displayed. In addition, in the setting process for the attack mode end effect (step S2108 in the stop time effect setting process in FIG. 60) and the setting process for the VB mode end effect (step S2112 in the stop time effect setting process in FIG. 60), the number of continued games and the number of wins are displayed by referring to the game counter and payout counter for the normal game mode (FIG. 66(b), FIG. 67(b)).

In a specific mode, for example, during the display attack mode, even during the presentation during the display attack mode, as shown in FIG. 108(b), in an area of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 that does not overlap with the push order notification presentation, the total number of games played corresponding to the value of the game counter for the specific mode is displayed, and the number of wins corresponding to the value of the payout counter for the specific mode is displayed. Also, in an area juxtaposed to the display area for the total number of games, the number of remaining games in the display attack mode and the display VB mode is displayed. In this way, for example, during the display attack mode, it is possible to virtually experience how many medals can be won in each game.

In addition, in the process of setting the end effect of the attack mode for display (step S3415 in the process of managing the number of games for a specific mode in FIG. 89) and the process of setting the end effect of the VB mode for display (step S3422 in the process of managing the number of games for a specific mode in FIG. 89), the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode are referenced to display the number of games continued and the number of wins (FIG. 94(b)), FIG. 95(b). In other words, the display of the number of wins in the specific mode is not the actual number of wins (one coin won per game), but the number of wins that is a pseudo-measurement of the number of payouts equivalent to the normal game mode. On the other hand, the number of games continued is the actual number of games. This makes it possible to simulate the number of wins in the specific mode if the attack mode, etc., continues for a certain number of games.

<Switching between normal game mode and special mode>
Next, as a process for switching game modes, a specific mode switching process for switching between a normal game mode and a specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 109. The specific mode switching process is a process that is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) by the CPU 181 of the sub-side display control device 81 when the game is stopped (when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped).

In step S4101, it is determined whether the second effect switch 67 acting as a switching button has been operated. If it has been operated, it is determined in step S4102 whether it is in any bonus state or in a bonus carryover state. If it is in a bonus state, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to perform a switching impossible effect in step S4103. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Mode switching NG" to notify that switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not possible. After the processing of step S4103 has been performed, this switching process ends without performing the following mode switching processing.

In other words, in this embodiment, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not possible in the bonus state or in the carryover state where a bonus has been won but not yet won. By doing this, not only is the lottery table that is referenced during carryover, but switching between the two modes is effectively prevented, and an incident in which a bonus is won (awarded) in both game modes is avoided.

If the result of the judgment in step S4102 is negative, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is judged whether or not a specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the specific mode flag is not set, it means that the operation of the second effect switch 67 was performed during the normal game mode. In this case, in step S4105, a process of setting the specific mode flag is executed. In addition, in step S4106, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute a specific mode switching effect. The specific mode switching effect is as already explained, and as shown in FIG. 79(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "free mode" and instructs the player that the normal game mode can be returned to by operating the second effect switch 67 again. After the specific mode switching effect is set, in step S4107, a process of storing the game contents is executed. Specifically, a process of making the various flags and counters for the normal game mode unrewritable (inaccessible) and making the various flags and counters for the specific mode rewritable (accessible) is executed. Then, in step S4108, a specific mode setting process is executed. This process will be described in detail later.

If the specific mode flag is set in step S4104, this means that the second effect switch 67 was operated during the specific mode. In this case, in step S4109, a process is executed to clear the specific mode flag. In addition, in step S4110, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute an effect when switching to the normal game mode. The effect when switching to the normal game mode is as already explained, and as shown in FIG. 79(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "normal mode," and the player is informed that the specific mode can be returned to by operating the second effect switch 67 again.

After executing the process of step S4110, the game content is stored in step S4111. Specifically, the various flags and counters for the specific mode are made unrewritable (inaccessible), and the various flags and counters for the normal game mode are made rewritable (accessible).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4101, or after the processing of step S4108 or step S4111 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, it is judged whether or not a specific mode flag is set. If it is set, it is judged in step S4113 whether or not the non-play period has elapsed for a predetermined specific period (3 minutes). In the non-play period, no bets are set, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not rotating, and no medals are paid out. After the medals are paid out, the count of this non-play period is started by a predetermined timer process. Then, the count of the timer process is reset on the condition that, for example, any of the various operating units such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, and the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated. Therefore, for example, if the specific period has elapsed without operating any of the operating units after the medals are paid out for a specific game, a positive judgment is made in step S4113.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4113, it is judged in step S4114 whether or not the game is in a bonus state or a bonus carryover state. If the game is not in either state, a process is executed in step S4115 to clear the specific mode flag, and then in the following step S4116, a performance for switching to the normal game mode is set.

In other words, when a specific period of no-play time has elapsed in a specific mode, the game is forcibly switched to normal game mode, provided that the game is not in a bonus state or a bonus carryover state. This prevents, for example, a player who has practiced playing in a specific mode from finishing the game without switching to normal game mode, and the next player who sits down from unknowingly continuing to play in the specific mode.

After executing the processing of step S4116, in step S4117, the game content storage processing is executed. This processing is the same as the processing of step S4111 described above. After executing the processing of step S4117, this switching processing is terminated.

If the bonus state or bonus carryover state is determined in step S4114, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a bonus consumption instruction display is performed in step S4118. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Please consume your bonus" to notify the player that the bonus in the specific mode should be consumed. After the processing of step S4118 is performed, this switching process is terminated.

For example, if a player ends a game in a specific mode while still in a bonus state or while still in a bonus carryover state, and the successor player tries to play in the normal game mode without realizing this, a non-switching effect may be executed. In this case, there is a risk that this will be mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the bonus consumption instruction effect described above is designed to prevent such a mistake from occurring.

<Specific mode setting process>
The specific mode setting process performed in step S4108 of the specific mode switching process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the switching performance period has elapsed. The switching performance period is the period during which the specific mode switching performance is performed and the state is maintained, and is set to, for example, approximately 4.1 seconds (corresponding to the period required to play one game). Note that for this period as well, the passage of time from the execution timing of the specific mode switching performance is grasped by a predetermined timer process.

If the switching effect period has elapsed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display a specific mode setting screen in step S4202. On the specific mode setting screen, for example, the player is prompted to select whether to carry over the game contents of the previous specific mode and play the current specific mode, or to reset the game contents of the previous specific mode and play the current specific mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 112(a) and FIG. 112(b), a button image displaying "Continue from last time," indicating that the game contents will be carried over, and a button image displaying "Reset and start," indicating that the game contents will be reset, are alternately highlighted every predetermined period (e.g., 1 sec), and when a predetermined button operation (e.g., operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the timing when the button is highlighted, the highlighted side can be selected.

After the setting screen is displayed in step S4202, in step S4203, it is determined whether any of the above selections (selection to carry over the game contents or selection to reset the game contents) have been made. If no selection has been made, the process proceeds to step S4204 to determine whether a start operation has been performed, i.e., whether a start command has been received from the main control device 101. If a start command has not been received, the process returns to step S4203. If a start command has been received, in step S4205, the game contents are set to be carried over and this setting process ends. In step S4205, a process is performed to read out various flags and counters for the specific mode that have been made accessible in the process of step S4108. In other words, if no selection has been made and the start lever 41 is operated, the previous game contents are automatically carried over.

If it is determined in step S4203 that a selection has been made, it is determined in step S4206 whether or not a selection has been made to take over the game content. If a selection has been made to take over, the process proceeds to step S4205, where a takeover setting process is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4206 that a selection has been made to reset the game content rather than to carry over the game content, then in step S4207, a reset process is performed for the game content of the specific mode. In this process, various flags and counters for the specific mode that were made accessible in the process of step S4108 are initialized. As a result, the game content of the specific mode is set to the state it was in when the power was turned on (normal display mode).

In the next step S4208, a reset screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 113(a), the reset screen displays "Free mode reset", which indicates that the game content of the specific mode has been reset, and displays the following options for the state to start after the reset: "From challenge mode" corresponding to the challenge mode for display, "From attack mode" corresponding to the attack mode for display, "From VB mode" corresponding to the VB mode for display, "From specialized zone" corresponding to the added specialized zone for display, and "From the beginning" corresponding to the normal mode for display. In addition, the reset screen displays, for example, an image of one of the options is highlighted, and the highlighted option is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first performance switch 66) is performed at the timing when the option is highlighted, the highlighted option can be selected.

In step S4209, it is determined whether or not a selection operation has been performed on an option corresponding to the display challenge mode from among the displayed options. If the display challenge mode has been selected, in step S4210, a process is performed to set the display challenge mode flag. This makes it possible to start a specific mode from the display challenge mode.

In the next step S4211, a process is performed to set the display challenge mode start effect. This allows the player to understand that the specific mode will be started from the display challenge mode (that the selection operation for the display challenge mode was valid). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b1), the display challenge mode start effect displays an image of a "decision button" and an image of a "back button" along with the display challenge mode start effect, and each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

The next step, S4212, is to start counting the number of continued games in the display challenge mode.

If it is determined in step S4209 that the display challenge mode has not been selected, then in step S4213 it is determined whether or not a selection operation corresponding to the display attack mode has been performed. If the display attack mode has been selected, then in step S4214 a process is performed to set the display attack notification flag. This allows the specific mode to start from the state at the time of the winning notification for the display attack mode.

In the next step S4215, a process is performed to set the display attack mode winning notification effect. This allows the player to understand that the specific mode will start with a game in which the display attack mode winning notification is made (that the display attack mode selection operation was valid). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113(b2), the display attack mode winning notification effect displays an image of a "decision button" and an image of a "back button" along with the display attack mode winning notification effect, and each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

If it is determined in step S4213 that the display attack mode has not been selected, then in step S4216 it is determined whether or not a selection operation corresponding to the display VB mode has been performed. If the display VB mode has been selected, then in step S4217 a process is performed to set each of the display attack notification flag, the display attack mode flag, and the display VB notification flag. This makes it possible to start the specific mode from the state at the time of the winning notification of the display VB mode.

In the next step S4218, a process is performed to set the display VB mode winning notification effect. This allows the player to understand that the specific mode will start with a game in which the display VB mode winning notification is made (that the display VB mode selection operation was valid). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b3), the display VB mode winning notification effect displays an image of a "decision button" and an image of a "back button" along with the display VB mode winning notification effect, and each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

If it is determined in step S4216 that a selection operation for the display VB mode has not been performed, then in step S4219 it is determined whether or not a selection operation for an option corresponding to the display specialized zone has been performed. If a selection of the display specialized zone has been performed, then in step S4220 a process is performed to set the display attack notification flag, the display attack mode flag, the display VB notification flag, the display VB mode flag, and the display specialized zone flag. This makes it possible to start a specific mode from the start game of the display specialized zone.

In step S4221, a process is performed to set the display special zone start effect. This allows the player to understand that the specific mode will start from the start game of the display special zone (that the selection operation of the display special zone was valid). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b4), the display special zone start effect displays an image of a "decision button" and an image of a "back button" along with the display special zone start effect, and each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

After the processing of step S4212, step S4215, step S4218 or step S4222 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4219, a judgment is made in step S4223 as to whether or not a confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, a judgment is made as to whether or not a predetermined button operation (e.g., operation of the first effect switch 66) has been performed at the timing when the image of the "Confirmation button" is highlighted among the images of the "Confirmation button" and the "Back button" displayed in each of the set effect images. Also, in step S4223, a positive judgment is made if the option "From the beginning" corresponding to the normal display mode is selected among the options in FIG. 113(a). If a positive judgment is made in step S4223, this setting process is terminated, and if a negative judgment is made, the process returns to step S4209.

As described above, by making it possible to set the state at the start of a specific mode, it is possible to improve the versatility of the specific practice mode. In other words, if the player is able to select which state he or she wants to practice (simulatedly experience) in a specific mode, there is no need to play a game that the player already understands, and it becomes possible to concentrate on practicing or experiencing the state that the player wants to practice or experience.

In this case, when the display attack mode or the display VB mode is selected, the winning notification effect is set instead of setting the start of the display attack mode (start effect) or the start of the display VB mode (start effect). This makes it possible to experience the start of the attack mode after the third replay win by seeing the display attack mode start after the third lip small win. Also, it makes it possible to experience the start of the VB mode after the fourth and fifth replay wins by seeing the display VB mode start after the fourth and fifth lip small wins. In other words, it is possible to avoid the sense of incongruity of the attack mode starting without the third replay win (without the third lip small win) or the sense of incongruity of the VB mode starting without the fourth and fifth replay wins (without the fourth and fifth lip small wins).

In contrast, when the display specialized zone is selected, the display specialized zone start effect is set (starting from the start game of the display specialized zone). This is because the display specialized zone is a mode that is entered when the special BAR replay 1 or 2 is won and the 7th lip small symbol is won in that game, and the winning game and the start game cannot be different, as in the display attack mode and display VB mode. By doing this, it is possible to start the specialized zone in a pseudo manner without going through the 7th replay winning (without going through the 7th lip small symbol winning). In this case, for example, when the display specialized zone start effect is started, a display saying "This is a mode that starts from a BAR line-up" may be displayed to explain the difference between the stop result and the mode that starts.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example 1, the probability of winning various special roles in the specific mode is different from the probability of winning the corresponding specific roles in the normal game mode. FIG. 114 is a lottery table in the specific mode in this modified example 1.

For example, the point value PV corresponding to the special specific role with index value IV = 63-77, 81-92 is set to 10 times the point value PV (Figure 31, etc.) for the corresponding specific role in normal play mode. This makes the probability of winning the special specific role 10 times that of the corresponding specific role in normal play mode. By doing this, it is possible to experience that a transition lottery to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, specialized zone, etc. is held by winning a specific role, and that an additional lottery is held, and it is possible to experience a transition lottery or an additional lottery with a higher probability than a transition lottery or an additional lottery in normal play mode. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that a transition lottery or an additional lottery will occur in a fewer number of games than in normal play mode.

In this modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 114, in addition to the probability of winning the special specific role, the probability of winning the first PBB and the second PBB are also different from the probability of winning the corresponding first BB and second BB in the normal game mode, specifically, the probability of winning is 10 times higher than in the normal game mode. This allows the player to experience the bonus state with a higher probability than in the normal game mode, in other words, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning a bonus in fewer games than in the normal game mode.

As described above, if the probability of winning the special specific role is increased, the probability of winning other roles must be lowered. In this regard, in this modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 114, the probability of winning the special first promotion replays 1-4 and the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 is the same as the probability of winning the corresponding first promotion replays 1-4 and second promotion replays 1 and 2 in the normal game mode, while the probability of winning other special replays (special fall replays 1-3, special BAR replays 1 and 2) is lower than the probability of the corresponding other replays in the normal game mode. This is to avoid the inconvenience of the display attack mode or display VB mode not starting for a long time even if the transition lottery to the display attack mode or display VB mode has been won based on the winning of the special specific role.

On the other hand, for Special Fall Replays 1-3 and Special BAR Replays 1 and 2, even if the winning probability is lowered, the display attack mode and display VB mode are configured to end when the game number is counted, so there is no effect on the end game, and no inconvenience is likely to occur even if the above is done.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the configuration regarding the setting of the effects during the bonus in the specific mode is different. In the bonus state (special bonus state) in the specific mode in this modified example, in addition to the 1-bet game, a 3-bet game is possible.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 115(a), the bonus corresponding to the 30thP small win to the 32ndP small win as winning combinations that can be won during the special bonus state is made different for each bet game. That is, if the 30thP small win to the 32ndP small win are achieved in a 1 bet game, the bonus will be one medal payout, the same as the number of medals bet, and if the 30thP small win to the 32ndP small win are achieved in a 3 bet game, the bonus will be three medal payout, the same as the number of medals bet. By doing this, it is possible to prevent medals from increasing or decreasing even when the special bonus state is consumed in a 3 bet game.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), for example, if all games in the special bonus state are played as 3-bet games, 3 medals will be paid out per game, and the upper limit for the payout in the special bonus state will be reached in a total of 8 games. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to consume the special bonus, which normally takes 24 games.

Figure 116 (a) shows a part of the continuous performance setting process for a specific mode in this modification example 2.

If it is determined in step S3904 in FIG. 103 that the display continuous performance flag is not set, then in step S4301 it is determined whether or not the display bonus performance flag is set. This process is the same as the process in step S3914 above, and if it is not set, this setting process is terminated. If the display bonus performance flag is set, then in step S4302 it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 1-bet game rather than a 3-bet game, then in step S4303 a process is performed to subtract 1 from the display bonus performance counter. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game, then in step S4304 a process is performed to subtract 3 from the display bonus performance counter.

After executing the processing of step S4303 or step S4304, the process proceeds to step S3916 in FIG. 103 above, where the display bonus performance table is obtained, and then processing such as setting the bonus performance corresponding to the value of the display bonus performance counter is performed.

For example, if all games in the special bonus state are played in three bet games, as shown in FIG. 115(b), for the bonus effects in the special bonus state played in three bet games, the first game acquires effect data for the first game of the bonus effects, the second game acquires effect data for the fourth game of the bonus effects, and the third game acquires effect data for the seventh game of the bonus effects, and so on, with effect data being acquired every three games. By doing this, even if the number of games played in the special bonus state is shortened, the discrepancy between the effect content of each game and the number of games played can be reduced.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example 3, the PCB can be won during the special bonus. FIG. 117 is a lottery table during the special bonus in this modified example 3. The PCB (special CB) in this embodiment is a so-called single bonus (SB), and one JAC game is played based on the PCB (SB) winning. In this JAC game, the special CB small and medium roles 1 to 4 with index value IV = 96 to 97 are won with a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 117, in the special bonus of this modified example, in addition to index values IV=78-80, point values PV are also allocated for index value IV=95, and specifically, there is about a 1 in 4 probability of winning when index value IV=95 (winning the special CB).

Figure 116 (b) shows part of the end determination process in this modification example 3.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not a PCB (SB) win has occurred, and if a PCB (SB) win has occurred, the process of setting the remaining payout number to 0 is performed in step S4402. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, or after the process of step S4402 has been executed, the process from step S1501 onwards in Figure 54 is performed. Then, as the remaining payout number is set to 0 in step S4402, a positive determination is made in step S1504, and the process for ending the bonus is performed.

In other words, by implementing Variation 3, it is possible to reduce the number of games played in the special bonus state. This makes it possible to end the bonus state, in which no medal increase or decrease occurs, early.

The probability of winning a PCB in the special bonus state is not limited to the above, and may be higher or lower than the above. A higher probability would allow the special bonus state to end sooner, while a lower probability would reduce the deviation from the bonus performance in the normal play mode.

For example, the above configuration may be combined with variant 2 to make it possible to win the PCB in a 3-bet game in the special bonus state, but not in a 1-bet game. When the special bonus state is consumed in 3 bet games, it can be assumed that the player has made the decision to consume the special bonus state early, and the player will not feel uncomfortable even if there is a deviation from the bonus performance in the normal play mode.

In the above end determination process, the remaining payout number when the PCB (SB) is won may be set to 1 or more, and the bonus may end after the special CB state (a state in which one JAC game can be played) is executed. In this case, the game during the special CB state may be executed in 2 bet mode in addition to the 2 bet mode in the normal game mode, and the bonus based on the winning of each role during the special CB state may be set to the payout of 2 medals. In this way, it is possible to create a bonus state in which an increase in medals cannot be expected.

In a configuration in which the bonus state ends after each game in the special CB state is played, for example, the remaining payout number at the time of PCB winning may be set to 3, and each game in the special CB state may be played in 2 bet mode, and the bonus based on each winning combination during the special CB state may be set to the payout of 2 medals, so that an increase of 1 medal can be expected. Although a transition to the bonus state occurs when the first PBB or second PBB is won, no medals are paid out. Therefore, when a transition to the bonus state is made in a specific mode, one medal will be lost. In that regard, if the bonus state is configured as described above in such a way that an increase of 1 medal can be expected, it is possible to eliminate any increase or decrease in medals by subtracting the loss of 1 medal at the time of winning.

In addition, the configuration in which medals are increased during a bonus and the total is zero when combined with the decrease when a bonus is won may be a configuration that does not involve the PCB state. For example, the remaining payout number may be set to 2 when the first BB or second PBB is won, and each game in the special bonus state may be executed in 1 bet mode, and the bonus based on each winning combination during the special bonus state may be set to the payout of 2 medals, allowing for an increase of 1 medal.

<Modification 4>
In this fourth modified example, the setting of the specific mode is performed from a demo screen. The demo screen is a screen that is displayed when a switch for effect (first effect switch 66) provided on the slot machine 10 is operated other than during game execution. As the demo screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 118(a), an option of "brightness setting" corresponding to adjusting the brightness of the screen, an option of "volume setting" corresponding to adjusting the volume output from the speaker 64, an option of "free mode setting" corresponding to setting a specific mode, an option of "mobile linked service" corresponding to setting using a mobile terminal or the like owned by the player, and the like are displayed. In addition, for example, the image of one of the options is highlighted on the demo screen, and the highlighted option is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the timing when the option is highlighted, the highlighted option can be selected.

When the "free mode setting" option is selected, for example, as shown in FIG. 118(b), a free mode setting image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The free mode setting image displays the option of whether or not to reset the game history of a particular mode by displaying an image of a "YES button" corresponding to resetting and an image of a "NO button" not corresponding to resetting, and the highlighting of the image of each button is switched every predetermined period (e.g., 1 sec). When a predetermined button operation (e.g., operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the timing when the button is highlighted, the highlighted option can be selected.

For example, when the image of the "YES button" is selected, the specific mode setting screen in FIG. 112 is displayed. The specific mode setting screen and the subsequent reset operation are as described above.

On the other hand, if the "NO button" image is selected, the screen will return to the demo screen shown in Figure 118 (a).

This improves the ease of setting a specific mode. In other words, it is possible to set a specific mode by operating only the first effect switch 66, without operating the second effect switch 67. This makes it possible to set a specific mode (initialization, etc.) even if the second effect switch 67 is not always operable, but is configured to be operable only when a certain condition is met.

<Modification 5>
In this fifth modification, a specific mode is set in the mobile-linked service on the demo screen (FIG. 118(a)) shown in the fourth modification above.

When the option "Mobile Linked Service" is selected on the above demo screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 119(a), a mobile linked service image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The mobile linked service image displays the option of using the service in normal game mode or in a specific mode by displaying an image for "normal mode" that corresponds to the normal game mode and an image for "specific mode" that does not correspond to the specific mode, and the highlighting of each image is switched every predetermined period (e.g., 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (e.g., operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the timing when the image is highlighted, the highlighted option can be selected.

The information input/output process for the mobile linked service will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120. The information input/output process is initiated by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 at a predetermined interval (e.g., every 1.49 msec) when play is stopped.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not a mobile-linked service has been selected on the demo screen. If a mobile-linked service has not been selected, this input/output process is terminated. If a mobile-linked service has been selected, in step S4402, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display the mobile-linked service image (Figure 119 (a)).

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not a selection operation for the normal game mode has been performed in the mobile-linked service image. If a selection operation for the normal game mode has been performed, in step S4404, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display game information for the normal game mode. In displaying game information for the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (b1), the game history in the normal game mode (number of bonus wins, number of challenge mode wins, number of attack mode wins, number of VB mode wins, number of special zone wins, number of add-on wins, maximum number of add-on games, longest number of continuous games in attack mode, maximum number of coins won in attack mode, etc.) is displayed by a QR code (registered trademark) or the like so that it can be acquired by a mobile terminal or the like. In addition, in displaying game information for the normal game mode, for example, a password input unit may be provided so that a password can be input by the player's operation. The password is set, for example, according to the game history, and by inputting the password, the player can continue playing the previous game on the gaming machine.

In step S4405, it is determined whether information has been input using the password or the like. If information has been input, in step S4406, a process is performed to update the game information for the normal game mode by rewriting the currently stored game history information with a game history corresponding to the input password. Note that passwords and game histories are stored in ROM 182 of the display control device 81 in a one-to-one correspondence. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, or after the process of step S4406 has been executed, this input/output process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4403 that no selection operation for the normal game mode has been performed, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, it is determined whether or not a selection operation for the specific game mode has been performed. If a selection operation for the specific game mode has been performed, in step S4408, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display game information for the specific game mode. In the display of game information for the specific game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (b2), the game history in the specific game mode (number of times special bonuses have been won, number of times challenge mode has been won, number of times attack mode has been won, number of times VB mode has been won, number of times specialized zones have been won, number of times added, maximum number of games added, maximum number of games continued in attack mode for display, maximum number of coins won in attack mode for display, etc.) is displayed using a QR code (registered trademark) or the like so that it can be acquired by a mobile terminal or the like. In addition, in the display of game information for the specific game mode, a password input unit is provided, as in the display of game information for the normal game mode, so that a password can be input by the player's operation.

In step S4409, it is determined whether information has been input using the password or the like. If information has been input, in step S4410, a process is performed to update the game information for the specific mode by rewriting the currently stored game history information with the game history corresponding to the input password. If a negative determination is made in step S4407 or step S4409, or after the process of step S4410 has been executed, this input/output process is terminated.

As described above, by implementing variant 5, for example, if a practice in a specific mode is stopped midway, it is possible to change the game machine, game hall, game day, etc. and resume the practice from where it left off.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example 6, when the number of continuing games in a gaming state of the second RT state or higher reaches a predetermined number of games in the normal gaming mode, the gaming state is forcibly set to the normal gaming state. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous zone in this modified example 6. The advantageous zone refers to the zone of the game that is played when the gaming state is the second RT state or the third RT state. The processing for the advantageous zone is started by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4501, it is determined whether a transition to the second RT state has occurred. This determination can be made based on whether a third replay win has been achieved. If a positive determination is made in step S4501, in step S4502, a game number measurement flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4501, or after the processing of step S4502 has been executed, in step S4503, it is judged whether or not the number of games measurement flag is set. If it is not set, the processing for the advantageous zone is terminated as is. If it is set, in step S4504, the number of games measurement processing is executed. In the number of games measurement processing, it is judged whether or not it is the start timing of one game, and if it is the start timing, the processing of adding 1 to the number of games counter for the advantageous zone in the various counter area 106e is executed.

In the next step S4505, it is determined whether the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone has reached the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) based on the result of the game number measurement process. If the upper limit number of games has not been reached, this advantageous zone process is terminated. If the upper limit number of games has been reached, a process is performed in step S4506 to clear the flags and counters for each display mode. This process transitions the display mode to the normal mode. As a result, the push order notification is no longer performed, and the game state transitions from the RT state to the normal game state as a result of the fall replay winning. Note that the RT setting flag may be cleared in step S4506, forcing the game state to transition to the normal game state. Thereafter, in step S4507, a forced termination command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this advantageous zone process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the forced termination command performs processing corresponding to the fact that a display mode such as attack mode has been forcibly changed to normal mode (processing to reset various flags and counters), and controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to notify the player of the forced reset. To notify the player of the forced reset, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the message "The termination limit has been reached. Moving to normal game mode."

In this case, in the process of measuring the number of games (step S4505), an increment process is performed on the game number counter for the advantageous zone regardless of the number of bets. In that case, for example, if practice is performed in the specific mode during the advantageous zone, the number of games that can be played in the advantageous zone will be reduced by the number of games played in the specific mode.

For example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 122(a), in the specific mode switching process in this modified example 6, if it is determined in step S4601 that the second effect switch 67 as a switching button has been operated, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carryover state is in effect. The processes in steps S4601 and S4602 are the same as those in steps S4101 and S4102 described above.

If it is determined in step S4602 that a bonus is in progress, the non-switchable effect is set in step S4603, and then the specific mode switching process is terminated. The process in step S4603 is the same as the process in step S4103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is not in progress, then in step S4604 it is determined whether the game is in attack mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone in normal gaming mode. In other words, it is determined whether the game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined in step S4604 that the game is in an advantageous zone, then in step S4603, a non-switchable effect is set, and then this specific mode switching process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4604, the process proceeds to step S4104. The process from step S4104 onwards is as described above.

By doing the above, it is possible to avoid a situation where a specific mode is implemented during an advantageous period, thereby reducing the number of games that can be played during the advantageous period in normal play mode.

<Modification 7>
In this variation 7, while it is possible to switch to a specific mode during an advantageous zone in the above variation 6, a warning is issued when switching.

For example, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 122(b), the processing of steps S4701 to S4704 is performed in the same manner as steps S4601 to S4604 described above. If it is determined in step S4704 that the player is in attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, the processing proceeds to step S4705, unlike step S4604 described above, and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that a warning display is performed.

As a warning display, as shown in FIG. 123, the message "In favorable zone" is displayed to indicate that the player is in the favorable zone, and the message "Please return to betting 3 coins as the favorable zone will be reduced" is displayed to recommend a 3-bet game. If a negative judgment is made in step S4704 or after the processing of step S4705 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4104.

In other words, this variation 7 allows the game mode to be switched even during the advantageous zone, and is left to the player's discretion.

For example, if the continuation limit for the advantageous zone is set not only by playing the maximum number of games (e.g. 1500 games) but also by winning the maximum number of medals (e.g. 3000 medals), and the forced termination presentation differs depending on which continuation limit is reached and the game is forced to terminate, it is thought that some players would prefer to be forced to terminate when the maximum number of games is played, rather than when the maximum number of medals is won. Therefore, as described above, if a specific mode can be executed at the player's discretion even during the advantageous zone, it can be made possible to force the game to be terminated when the maximum number of games is played, based on the player's decision.

For example, if the game is forced to end due to the maximum number of games played, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested as a forced end effect. In this case, after winning the attack mode in the normal game mode, the game mode is switched from the normal game mode to a specific mode, and the game is played until the maximum number of games is reached. When the game mode is then switched back to the normal game mode, the number of medals won in the attack mode decreases, but since medals are not reduced during the specific mode, it is possible to execute the forced end effect without reducing medals. In this way, it is also possible to allow the player to choose between a gameplay in which medals are steadily won in the attack mode, and a gameplay in which a forced end effect is executed while choosing not to add medals in the attack mode, etc.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example 8, the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is different, and the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 varies depending on the situation. Fig. 124 is a flowchart showing a MAX bet switching process related to the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. The MAX bet switching process is started by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle).

In step S4801, the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, and it is determined whether or not a one-coin bet operation has occurred. If a one-coin bet operation has been performed, in step S4802, it is determined whether or not a one-coin bet mode flag has been set in the various flags storage area 106d. The one-coin bet mode flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to specify the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated with the one-coin bet mode flag set, one virtual medal is inserted, and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated with the one-coin bet mode flag not set, three virtual medals are inserted.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S4802 that the 1-coin bet mode flag is not set, that is, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated in a situation where the 1-coin bet mode flag is not set, a process is performed in step S4803 to set the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 to 1. In the following step S4804, the 1-coin bet mode flag is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4802 that the 1-coin bet mode flag is set, that is, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated while the 1-coin bet mode flag is set, the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is set to 3 in step S4805. In the following step S4806, the 1-coin bet mode flag is cleared.

After performing the processing of step S4804 or step S4806, in step S4807, the bet number switching command is set as the output target to the display control device 81. If it is determined in step S4801 that the second credit insertion switch 57 has not been operated, or after the processing of step S4807 has been executed, this switching process is terminated.

In other words, in this modification 8, the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is switched based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57. In this way, for example, when playing in a specific mode, operating the second credit insertion switch 57 once will cause the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 to be one, which corresponds to the specific mode, so that in the specific mode, it becomes possible to play by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 rather than the second credit insertion switch 57. In other words, although the number of bets differs between the normal game mode and the specific mode, the operation buttons used when inserting medals are the same, making it possible to make the simulated experience of the normal game mode more realistic in the specific mode.

For example, in the normal game mode, in the case where the specified number of bets is three during the normal game state and the bonus state, and two during the CB state, it is possible to vary the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX BET depending on which state it is in. On the other hand, the switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed only by the display control device 81, and not via the main control device 101. Therefore, if the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX BET is automatically switched by switching the game mode (three virtual medals are inserted in the normal game mode and one virtual medal is inserted in the specific mode), it becomes necessary to output the operation information of the second effect switch 67 for switching the game mode from the display control device 81 to the main control device 101, or to connect the second effect switch 67 to the main control device 101. This can increase the processing load on the main control device 101, and the increased amount of information input to the main control device 101 makes it easier to commit fraud, which is undesirable from the perspective of preventing such fraud in advance. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to improve the operability of games in specific modes without increasing the amount of information input to the main control device 101.

If the number of virtual medals inserted at MAX BET is to be automatically changed when the game mode is switched, the second effect switch 67 can be connected to the main control device 101 so that the main control device 101 can detect when the game mode is being switched.

In the above-mentioned variation 8, the second credit insertion switch 57 does not have to be the same or approximately the same size as the first credit insertion switch 56, and may be configured to be the same or approximately the same size as the third credit insertion switch 58, for example. This makes it possible to narrow the area in which the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are installed by reducing the size of the second credit insertion switch 57, making it possible to secure space for installing other parts (such as performance buttons).

<Modification 9>
In the present modification 9, the configuration of the identification display indicating that a specific mode is in progress is different.

As shown in Fig. 125(a) and Fig. 125(b), in this modified example 9, an identification function 65b and a switching drive unit 65c that switches the position of the identification function 65b are provided. The switching drive unit 65c is connected to the display control device 81, and the switching drive unit 65c is controlled by the CPU 181 to displace the identification function 65b between a normal position (Fig. 125(a)) set at a position where it does not overlap with the auxiliary display unit 65 in the front-to-rear direction, and a specific position (Fig. 125(b)) set at a position where it overlaps with the auxiliary display unit 65 in the front-to-rear direction.

When the game mode is set to the normal game mode, the CPU 181 drives and controls the switching drive unit 65c to place the identification device 65b in the normal position, and when the game mode is set to the specific mode, the CPU 181 drives and controls the switching drive unit 65c to place the identification device 65b in the specific position.

By doing this, it becomes easier to see whether the game mode is a specific mode or not, and each piece of performance data for the normal game mode can be used as is in the specific mode. This eliminates the need to incorporate the image data of the stamp 65a into the performance data for the normal game mode, making it possible to significantly reduce the processing load during the specific mode.

The normal position of the identification device 65b and the position where the switching drive unit 65c is provided may be set, for example, to the rear side of the upper lamp 63, so that they are not visible or are difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. This allows the identification device 65b and the switching drive unit 65c to be unobtrusive in normal gaming mode, allowing the player to play without being particularly aware of the specific mode.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the handling of the specific mode based on one bet game is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, the specific mode based on one bet game in this embodiment is executable when a predetermined condition is met in the normal game mode based on three bet games.

Figure 126 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the second credit insertion switch 57 in the first embodiment is formed to be the same or approximately the same size as the third credit insertion switch 58, and is located to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. Also, in this embodiment, the second effect switch 67 for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not provided.

A fourth credit insertion switch 69 is provided on the decorative panel 80 located below the stop switches 42 to 44. The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is used to insert one virtual medal. The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is connected to the main control device 101. More specifically, a fourth credit insertion detection sensor (not shown) that individually detects the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is connected to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 of the main control device 101, and when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, a detection signal from the fourth credit insertion detection sensor is output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104. The CPU 102 determines that one virtual medal has been inserted based on the reception of the detection signal.

The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is a switch that can be pressed from the front to the back of the slot machine 10, and has a different operation direction from the other credit insertion switches 56-58 that can be pressed downward. The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is also larger than the other credit insertion switches 56-58, and specifically, has an oval shape (long axis approximately 15 cm, short axis approximately 8 cm) that is the size of an adult's palm. Therefore, it is an operation button that is more likely to catch the player's eye than the other credit insertion switches 56-58, and when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, it is operated from a different position and in a different direction from the others, which makes it easy to give the impression that a special action is being performed.

Figure 127 shows a lottery table for a specific mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, unlike the lottery table (Fig. 76) in the first embodiment, a point value PV is assigned to each of the index values IV = 51, 63 to 65, 68, and 79, while the point value PV of the other index values IV is set to 0. Therefore, a win can be obtained when the index value IV = 51 (special replay), index value IV = 63 (special strong cherry), index value IV = 64 (special weak cherry), index value IV = 65 (special watermelon), index value IV = 68 (special middle bell), or index value IV = 79 (special red 7 combination role), while a win cannot be obtained when the other index values IV = 50, 52 to 62, 66 to 67, 69 to 78, or 80 to 99. Note that in this embodiment, the point value PV of the index value IV = 0 to 49 is set to 0 in the lottery table for the specific mode, and roles that can be won during the normal game mode do not win during the specific mode. Also, in the first embodiment, the case where a win occurs when the index value IV = 79 occurs during a special bonus state, but in this embodiment, a win can occur with an index value IV = 79 even during normal game play. Therefore, while in the first embodiment, the winning combination with an index value IV = 79 was called the "special BB red 7 combination," in this embodiment, it will also be simply called the "special red 7 combination."

Each index value IV = 51, 63-65, 68, 79 is set with an approximately equal point value PV. In other words, when playing in a specific mode, there is about a 1 in 6 chance of winning the special replay, about a 1 in 6 chance of winning the special strong cherry, about a 1 in 6 chance of winning the special weak cherry, about a 1 in 6 chance of winning the special middle bell, and about a 1 in 6 chance of winning the special red 7 combination.

The winning patterns and benefits for the special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, and special red 7 combination are the same as those in the first embodiment, and all of them are won when the same numbers that result in a replay win, strong cherry win, weak cherry win, middle bell win, or red 7 combination win in normal play mode come to a stop on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The pay lines that are set according to each bet number are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, the specific mode with one bet game can be executed in some cases when the player wins the lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the attack mode.

<Summary of surcharge for specific modes>
With reference to Figure 128, an overview of the top-up using a specific mode in this embodiment will be described.

In normal game mode, when the display mode is attack mode or higher and a specific combination such as watermelon, strong cherry, weak cherry, middle bell, or chance eye A or B is won, a lottery is held to switch the display mode depending on the current display mode, as in the first embodiment above, and an additional lottery is held to select attack mode.

In this embodiment, when the player wins the add-on lottery, the number of continued games may be added based on an add-on game number table corresponding to the specific role won in the add-on lottery, or the number of continued games may be added according to the role won by executing a specific mode. In the following explanation, the add-on performed on a table corresponding to the specific role won in the add-on lottery is referred to as a normal add-on, and the add-on according to the role won by executing a specific mode is referred to as a special add-on.

In normal addition, after the game in which the specific role is won or the bonus ends, the number of games that corresponds to the specific role won in the addition lottery is added, and the number of added games is announced as an addition effect by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

On the other hand, in the special top-up, first, a special bet instruction display that prompts the player to operate the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. In the special bet instruction display, for example, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is called the "enormous button" and the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Press the enormous button!!" and a sound effect for the special bet instruction display is emitted from the speaker 64. The sound effect is, for example, a loud electronic sound like "Zubabababababang!!" and is set so that the player can clearly recognize that a different operation from a normal bet operation should be performed.

After the special bet instruction performance and the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, a special start instruction performance that encourages the operation of the start lever 41 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In the special start instruction performance, for example, a message such as "Put your energy into it and hit the lever!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. When a start operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed based on the special start instruction performance, a sound effect for the special start operation instruction performance is emitted from the speaker 64. The sound effect is, for example, a low electronic sound "Dun", which allows the player to understand that a start operation with an effect different from that of a normal start operation (for example, a high-pitched electronic sound "Tun" is performed for a normal start operation), and is set as a sound that encourages a calm stop operation so as to build anticipation for the subsequent game content.

One coin is inserted by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69. Then, when the start lever 41 is operated while that one coin has been bet, the game starts as a one-bet game, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to spin. In that one-bet game, as described above, one of the following wins is achieved: special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, or special red 7 combination.

When the stop switches 42-44 are operated and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, one of the special roles that has been won is achieved. In the figure, for example, it is shown that a special watermelon win has been achieved. In the special add-on, the number of added games is determined based on the special watermelon that has been won, and an add-on effect corresponding to the determined number of games is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

Special jackpots that involve games in specific modes tend to result in a larger number of games being played than regular jackpots that do not involve games in specific modes. Therefore, when a special combination is won and an jackpot is played, players hope that a special jackpot will occur.

<Special top-up processing>
The following describes the processing that is performed when an increase in the number of continued games in the attack mode occurs in this embodiment.

Figure 129 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the second specific role processing is a process that is implemented as one process of the lottery result response process in the main control device 101 (Figure 47).

In other words, if a negative judgment is made in step S911 in the flowchart of FIG. 47, or after the processing of step S913 is executed (after the processing for promotion to attack mode is executed), the process proceeds to step S4901 shown in FIG. 129. In step S4901, a lottery process for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed, similar to the processing of step S914.

In the following step S4902, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S4901. If the player has not won, the second special role processing ends. If the player has won, the process proceeds to step S4903, where it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag has been set, i.e., whether or not the current special role win is a role that overlaps with the bonus, or whether or not the special role was won while the bonus was in a carryover state. This processing is the same as the processing of step S916 above.

If the bonus winning flag is not set, a special add-on lottery process is executed in step S4904. In the special add-on lottery process, a special add-on occurrence table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e. In the special add-on occurrence table, the probability of a special add-on occurring differs depending on the type of specific role that wins the add-on lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, there are patterns in which the higher the probability of winning each specific role, the lower the probability of special additions occurring, and patterns in which the higher the probability of winning a specific role, the higher the probability of special additions occurring. For example, the probability of winning a watermelon is approximately 1 in 144 (including watermelon overlaps 1 and 2, FIG. 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is approximately 1 in 218 (including strong cherry overlaps 1 and 2, FIG. 31, etc.), meaning that the probability of winning a strong cherry is lower than the probability of winning a watermelon. And, in the special addition occurrence table, special additions are more likely to occur when an addition is based on a strong cherry win than when an addition is based on a watermelon win.

On the other hand, the probability of winning a weak cherry is approximately 1 in 169 (including weak cherry overlaps 1 and 2, see Figure 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a watermelon is higher than the probability of winning a weak cherry. And in the special add-on occurrence table, special add-ons are more likely to occur when added based on a watermelon win than when added based on a weak cherry win.

In other words, the special add-on occurrence table sets the probability of special add-on occurrence regardless of the high or low relationship between the probability of winning a specific role in normal play mode.

In step S4905, it is determined whether or not a special add-on has been won based on the processing result of step S4904. If a special add-on has not been won, in steps S4906 to S4908, the same processing as in steps S917 to S919 is performed, and then the second specific role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that a special add-on has been won, in step S4909, a process is performed to add 1 to the add-on counter in the various counter area 106e. In the following step S4910, a process is performed to set a special add-on flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The add-on counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times a special add-on has occurred, and the special add-on flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to grasp that a situation exists in which a special add-on should be executed.

In the next step S4911, the special add-on command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special add-on command is a command for informing the display control device 81 that a special add-on will be generated in the next game, i.e., that the next game should be played in a specific mode. Having received the special add-on command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to execute the above-mentioned special bet instruction effect as an effect at the end of the current game.

If it is determined in step S4903 that the bonus win flag is set, this means that the current bonus will be carried over after the bonus ends, in which case the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, a special bonus lottery process is executed in the same manner as in step S4904 above. Then, in step S4913, it is determined whether or not a special bonus win has been won, and if not, in step S4914, a process is performed to set the attack mode bonus flag. This process is the same as the process in step S920 above. If a special bonus win has been won in step S4913, in step S4915, a process is performed to increment the bonus counter by 1.

After executing the processing of step S4908, step S4911, step S4914, or step S4915, the second specific role processing is terminated.

The third specific combination processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 131. As already explained, the third specific combination processing is a process that is implemented as one process of the lottery result response processing in the main control device 101 (FIG. 48).

In step S5001, a lottery process for adding the number of games in attack mode is executed. This process is the same as step S1001. In step S5002, it is determined whether or not an additional win has been won based on the processing result of step S5001 described above. If an additional win has not been won, the third specific role process is terminated as is. If an additional win has been won, in steps S5003 to S5015, the same process as in steps S4903 to S4915 described above is performed. That is, for example, in step S5005 or step S5012, a special additional win lottery process is performed, and if the special additional win lottery has not been won, a normal additional win process is performed, and if the special additional win lottery has been won, a special additional win process is performed.

Next, the end determination process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132. As already explained, the end determination process is a process that is implemented as one of the processes in the bonus state process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 54).

Figure 132 shows the process when a negative judgment is made in step S1511 in Figure 54. That is, if the remaining payout amount becomes 0 (step S1504: YES) and the attack mode win flag, challenge mode win flag, and VB mode win flag are not set at the end of the bonus, step S5101 judges whether the attack mode add-on win flag is set. If it is set, steps S5102 to S5204 perform the normal add-on process in the same way as steps S1513 to S1515 above.

If it is determined in step S5101 that the attack mode addition flag is not set, it is determined in step S5105 whether the addition counter is 0 or not. As described above, when a special addition is performed after the bonus ends, the addition counter is incremented (steps S4915, S5015). If it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S1516, where processing for the challenge mode addition is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is not 0, processing for the special addition is performed in steps S5106 and S5107, similar to steps S4910 and S4911 above. After the processing in step S5104 or step S5107 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

Next, the specialized zone processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 133. As already explained, the specialized zone processing is a process that is implemented as one of the lottery result response processes in the main control device 101 (FIG. 55).

In step S5201, similar to step S1601, a process is performed to ascertain the lottery results of the current game. In the following step S5202, similar to the process of step S4904, etc., a special add-on lottery process is executed. Note that the lottery process of step S5202 may have a different probability of occurrence of a special add-on compared to other lottery processes, and specifically, the special add-on may be more likely to occur than in other lottery processes.

In step S5203, it is determined whether or not a special add-on has been won based on the processing result of step S5202. If a non-win has been determined, normal add-on processing is performed in steps S5204 to S5206, similar to steps S1602 to S1604 above. On the other hand, if a special add-on has been won in step S5203, special add-on processing is performed in steps S5207 to S5209, similar to steps S4909 to S4911 above. After the processing of step S5206 or step S5209 has been executed, processing for the specialized zone is terminated.

Next, we will explain how to handle the lottery results when special bonuses are applied.

Figure 134 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery result response processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the lottery result response processing is a process that is performed as one step of the lottery processing in the main control device 101 (Figure 45).

In this embodiment, first, in step S5301, the number of bets for the current game is determined. If the number of bets is not a one-coin bet corresponding to the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S701 above, and processing for the normal game mode is performed. On the other hand, if the current game is a one-coin bet, in step S5302, lottery result response processing for the specific mode is executed, and then this response processing is terminated.

Figure 134 (b) is a flowchart showing the lottery result response processing for a specific mode.

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the special add-on flag is set. In other words, even in this embodiment, the 1-bet game can be played in modes other than the specific mode, and in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the game was played in the specific mode. If it was not in the specific mode, this response process is terminated.

If it is in the specific mode, proceed to step S5402 and determine whether the current lottery result is a special watermelon win. If it is a special watermelon win, in step S5403, a process is performed to obtain the special watermelon table from the various table storage area 105a as the current additional table.

Figure 135 (a1) shows a special watermelon table that is selected as an additional table when a special watermelon is won, and Figure 135 (b1) shows a watermelon table that is selected as an additional table when a watermelon is won. As shown in Figures 135 (a1) and 135 (b1), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when a special watermelon is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when a watermelon is won, and a greater number of games are selected when a special watermelon is won than when a watermelon is won.

If the result of step S5402 is negative, step S5404 determines whether the current lottery result was a special strong cherry win. If the result was a special strong cherry win, step S5405 performs a process to obtain a special strong cherry table from the various table storage area 105a as the current additional table.

Figure 135 (a2) shows a special strong cherry table that is selected as an additional table when a special strong cherry is won, and Figure 135 (b2) shows a strong cherry table that is selected as an additional table when a strong cherry is won. As shown in Figures 135 (a2) and 135 (b2), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when a special strong cherry is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when a strong cherry is won, and a greater number of games is selected when a special strong cherry is won than when a strong cherry is won.

If the result of step S5404 is negative, then in step S5406 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result was a special weak cherry win. If the result was a special weak cherry win, then in step S5407 a process is performed to obtain a special weak cherry table from the various table storage area 105a as the current additional table.

Figure 135 (a3) shows a special weak cherry table that is selected as an added-on table when a special weak cherry is won, and Figure 135 (b3) shows a weak cherry table that is selected as an added-on table when a weak cherry is won. As shown in Figures 135 (a3) and 135 (b3), the number of games that can be selected as the number of added games when a special weak cherry is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of added games when a weak cherry is won, and a greater number of games is selected when a special weak cherry is won than when a weak cherry is won.

If the result of step S5406 is negative, step S5408 determines whether the current lottery result was a special middle bell win. If the result was a special middle bell win, step S5409 performs a process to obtain the special middle bell table from the various table storage area 105a as the current top-up table.

Figure 135 (a4) shows the special middle bell table selected as the added-on table when the special middle bell is won, and Figure 135 (b4) shows the middle bell table selected as the added-on table when the middle bell is won. As shown in Figures 135 (a4) and 135 (b4), the number of games that can be selected as the number of added games when the special middle bell is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of added games when the middle bell is won, and a greater number of games are selected when the special middle bell is won than when the middle bell is won.

If the result of step S5408 is negative, then in step S5410 it is determined whether the current lottery result was a special replay win. If the result was a special replay win, then in step S5411 a process is performed to obtain a special replay table from the various table storage area 105a as the current additional table.

Figure 135 (a5) shows a special replay table selected as an additional table when a special replay is won, and Figure 135 (b5) shows a replay table selected as an additional table when a replay is won. Unlike other special specific roles, in the normal game mode, an additional role does not occur when a replay is won during the attack mode. The only time an additional role occurs when a replay is won is during a specialized zone, and such a replay table shows a table for the specialized zone. As shown in Figures 135 (a5) and 135 (b5), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when a special replay is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when a replay is won in the specialized zone, and a larger number of games is selected when a special replay is won than when a replay is won in the specialized zone. In other words, a larger number of games is added when a special role is won, compared to roles that are added during the specialized zone. In addition, in the add-on tables in the specialized zones for other specific roles, when compared to the add-on tables when a special specific role is won, the number of added games when a special specific role is won is greater than the number of added games when the corresponding specific role is won in the specialized zone.

If the result of the determination in step S5410 is negative, it means that the result of the lottery in this specific mode was a win for the special red 7 combination. In this case, in step S5412, a process is performed to obtain the special red 7 combination table as the current additional table from the various table storage area 105a.

Figure 135 (a6) shows a special red 7s table selected as an additional table when special red 7s line up, and Figure 135 (b6) shows a red 7s table selected as an additional table when red 7s line up. Unlike other special specific roles, red 7s line up only occurs during a bonus in normal play mode. The red 7s table shows a table during a bonus. As shown in Figures 135 (a6) and 135 (b6), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when special red 7s line up is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when red 7s line up during a bonus, and a greater number of games are selected when special red 7s line up than when red 7s line up during a bonus.

After executing the processing of step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, or step S5412, the process of adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed in step S5413. In this process, the number of added games in the current special addition, which is determined by referring to the table and the lottery counter obtained in each of the above processes, is added to the number of continued games in the attack mode being executed.

Then, in step S5414, the add-on command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this response process is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the add-on command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to generate an add-on effect corresponding to the end of the current game (when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped).

As described above, in this embodiment, a special add-on effect is performed in which the number of games played is different from the number of games played for each special role, using each special role corresponding to each special role that can result in an attack mode add-on. As shown in the first embodiment above, while each special role and each special special role are different roles, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R appear to stop with the same number of digits.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a watermelon role, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom of the right reel, and the watermelon role is won. Then, an additional performance of the number of games corresponding to the watermelon role may occur. On the other hand, in the case of a special watermelon role, if the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom of the right reel, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle of the right reel, and the special watermelon role is won. In this case, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom of the right reel, and the apparent results of the special watermelon role are the same as those of the watermelon role. Then, an additional performance of the number of games corresponding to the special watermelon role may occur. Therefore, based on the stopping results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the circumstances under which the additional bonus occurred, the player can be led to believe that the additional bonus effect corresponding to the special watermelon role was generated by the watermelon role. In this way, it is possible to make the additional bonus effect corresponding to the winning of a special specific role such as the special watermelon role appear as a type of additional bonus effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role such as the watermelon role.

Here, as a type of additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role such as a watermelon role, a configuration is also conceivable in which a special additional effect occurs in which an additional number of games occurs, such as the special watermelon role. However, doing so may result in the additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role becoming complicated, or since the winning of a specific role is a condition for the special additional effect, depending on the winning probability of the specific role, inconveniences may occur such as the special role not being easily won even though the special additional effect is desired. However, if the winning probability of the specific role is improved too much, inconveniences such as the ball payout rate may occur. Therefore, as in this embodiment, since the specific role and the special specific role are set as different roles, each role and the additional effect are associated, and the inconvenience of only the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the specific role becoming complicated does not occur, and by adjusting the winning rate of each role, it is possible to preferably generate the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the specific role and the special additional effect.

Moreover, both the special role and the special role can occur without a change in game state due to, for example, winning a bonus. Specifically, in the normal game state, a special role can be won by playing in the normal game mode of a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, and a special role can be won by playing in the special mode of a 1-bet game. In other words, these special roles and special special roles can each be won by simply changing the number of bets in the same game state, without a change in game state. As a result, it is not possible to distinguish which role has been won/awarded based on the game state.

And because the winning combination will differ depending on the number of bets as described above, if you want to trigger the special bonus effects mentioned above with special specific combinations, you can do so easily by simply switching the number of bets. This makes it possible to trigger the special bonus effects mentioned above at the timing you designed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the commonality of the stop results between specific roles and special specific roles, various measures have been taken to reduce the distinctiveness. Each of these will be explained below.

<Configuration that reduces the distinguishability between special specific roles and specific roles>
As described above, the special specific combinations including the special replay and the special red 7 combination and the corresponding specific combinations have the same number of stops on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when winning, making it difficult to distinguish which combination has won. In this embodiment, in addition to the commonality regarding the number of stops, a configuration is provided to reduce the distinguishability between these special specific combinations and the specific combinations.

<Commonalities in bet effects>
As a configuration for reducing the distinguishability between special specific roles and specific roles, first, the commonality of the bet time performance will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, when making a bet in normal game mode, including normal additions, if the player is in attack mode before placing a bet, the total number of medals won during this attack mode is displayed in the auxiliary display section 65 as "number of medals won" (in the figure, 54 medals are shown to have been won). The number of medals paid out as a result of winning in the previous game is displayed in the number of medals paid out display section 62 (in the figure, 9 medals were shown to have been paid out in the previous game). The number of virtual medals currently credited is displayed in the credit display section 60 (in the figure, the maximum number of 50 virtual medals is shown to have been credited).

In the above pre-betting situation, for example, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated and a bet of three coins is made, the display of the total number won on the auxiliary display unit 65 is reduced in accordance with the current bet number, and specifically, is updated to display the total number won reduced by three coins. Also, based on the betting operation, the display on the payout number display unit 62 is turned OFF to indicate that the next game may start. Then, the display on the credit display unit 60 is updated from the number of credits before the bet to the number of credits reduced by the current bet number.

In addition, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the current betting operation (sound effect when betting three coins). For example, the sound effect when betting three coins is "bebebe," where "be" is emitted three times to correspond to the number of coins bet. The sound effect when betting one coin is "be," and the sound effect when betting two coins is "bebe." These betting sound effects may be other sound effects as long as the player can identify the number of coins bet.

As an effect when a bet is made during a special add-on, for example, before a bet is made, when the above-mentioned special bet instruction effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the display of the number of games played during the attack mode and the total number won are no longer displayed. In addition, when the special bet instruction effect starts, the display on the payout number display unit 62 and the display on the credit display unit 60 are turned OFF.

In this situation, when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated in accordance with the instructions of the special bet instruction display and one bet is made, the screen on the auxiliary display unit 65 switches from the special bet instruction display to the special start instruction display. Even in the special start instruction display, the number of games played in attack mode and the total number won are no longer displayed. Therefore, unlike when making a normal bet, the display of the total number won is not updated based on this bet operation. Also, as described above, the credit display unit 60 is OFF. Therefore, the display of the number of credits on the credit display unit 60 is not updated based on the current bet operation.

In addition, the speaker 64 emits the three-coin bet sound effect corresponding to a three-coin bet, even though the current bet operation corresponds to a one-coin bet. In other words, while a "be" sound effect corresponding to a one-coin bet is normally emitted once, when a special bet is made and a one-coin bet is made, a "bebebe" and a "be" sound effect corresponding to a three-coin bet are emitted three times.

<Bet operation processing>
The processing for performing each of the above effects will be described below.

Figure 137 is a flowchart showing the bet operation process. The bet operation process is executed as one process in the in/out counter process of the number of bets in step S109 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 27) in the main control device 101. The bet operation process is started when the in/out counter process of the number of bets becomes possible (when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and medal payout has ended).

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the special add-on flag is set. If the special add-on flag is set, it indicates that the next game to be started is a game that will include a special add-on. In this case, in step S5502, a special operation instruction command is set as the target for output to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the special operation instruction command controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to generate the above-mentioned special operation instruction presentation based on the end of the game in which the special add-on flag has been set. In the following step S5503, a credit display invisibility process is executed. Specifically, the display of the credit display unit 60 and the payout number display unit 62 is turned OFF.

If the determination in step S5501 is negative, or after the processing in step S5503 has been executed, in step S5504, it is determined whether any of the credit insertion switches 56-58, 69 have been operated, and the process waits until such an operation is performed. If any of the operations has been performed, the process proceeds to step S5505.

In step S5505, it is determined whether the current operation was an operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. If the current operation was an operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, in step S5506, a three-coin bet process is executed. This process is for validly betting three virtual medals according to the number of credits, and if the number of credits is less than three, for example, the process determines that the bet operation is invalid. In this case, for example, the process returns to step S5504.

If three virtual medals are validly bet, the process of subtracting 3, which corresponds to the current bet amount, from the credit counter is performed in step S5507. In this case, the display in the credit display unit 60 is updated to a value that has been subtracted by 3. Note that if the display in the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the subtraction of the credit counter is performed. Then, in step S5508, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect (bebebe) when three medals are bet, and the bet operation process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5505 that the first credit insertion switch 56 was not operated, then in step S5509 it is determined whether the third credit insertion switch 58 was operated. If the third credit insertion switch 58 was operated, then in step S5510, a two-coin bet process is executed. This process is for validly betting two virtual medals according to the number of credits, and if the number of credits is less than two, for example, the bet operation is processed as invalid. In this case, for example, the process returns to step S5504.

When two virtual medals are validly bet, in step S5511, a process is performed in which 2, which corresponds to the current bet amount, is subtracted from the credit counter. In this case, the display on the credit display unit 60 is updated to a value that has been subtracted by 2. Note that if the display on the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5512, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect (bebe) when two medals are bet, and the bet operation process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5509 that the third credit insertion switch 58 was not operated, then in step S5513 it is determined whether the second credit insertion switch 57 was operated. If the second credit insertion switch 57 was operated, then in step S5514, a one coin bet process is executed. This process is for validly betting one virtual medal according to the number of credits, and if, for example, the number of credits is less than one (0), then the bet operation is processed as invalid. In this case, for example, the process returns to step S5504.

When one virtual medal is validly bet, in step S5515, a process is performed to subtract one from the credit counter, which corresponds to the current bet number. In this case, the display on the credit display unit 60 is updated to a value that has been subtracted by one. Note that if the display on the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect (be) when one coin is bet, and the bet operation process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5513 that the second credit insertion switch 57 was not operated, this means that the current operation of the credit insertion switch was the fourth credit insertion switch 69. In this case, in step S5517, a one coin bet process is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S5514. In the following step S5518, a process is executed to subtract 1 from the credit counter, which corresponds to the current number of bets, in the same manner as the process in step S5515.

In step S5519, it is determined whether or not the special add-on flag is set. If the special add-on flag is not set, in step S5520, similar to the processing in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit the sound effect (be) when one coin is bet, and then the bet operation processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5519 that the special add-on flag is set, in step S5521 the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect (bebebe) when three coins are bet. Then, in step S5522, the special start instruction command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the bet operation processing is terminated. The display control device 81, which has received the special start instruction command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to generate a special start instruction performance.

As described above, when the special add-on flag is set and the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, a three-bet sound effect is emitted. This makes the player feel as if the current specific mode with one bet game is a three-bet game.

Furthermore, in a game that is started with the special bonus flag set, the display on the credit display section 60 is turned OFF. Therefore, when a bet is placed, only the credit counter is decremented, and the credit display section 60 is not updated. This prevents a clear distinction between a 1-coin bet or a 3-coin bet from being made just by looking at the credit display section 60.

When the display of the credit display section 60 is turned OFF, the display of the payout number display section 62 is also turned OFF. This makes it less unnatural than a configuration in which only the display of the credit display section 60 is turned OFF. This makes it possible to draw attention to special operation effects, etc.

Even if the special add-on flag is set, if the second credit switch 57 is operated instead of the fourth credit switch 69, processing for a one-coin bet is performed, and the bet sound effect is set to a one-coin bet sound effect corresponding to a one-coin bet. This is because, in a situation where such a special add-on is performed, a player who operates the second credit switch 57 instead of the fourth credit switch 69 is considered to recognize that one coin will be bet by operating the fourth credit switch 69. For this reason, a one-coin bet sound effect is set, and the player is configured to confirm that a one-coin bet has been made validly.

In addition to operating the credit insertion switch, bets in each game may also be made by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45. An explanation of the process in this case will be omitted, but regardless of whether the special top-up flag is set or not, a bet sound effect (be) is emitted for each medal inserted.

The special add-on flag is set when a specific role (award) has been won in the previous game, and at least three medals have been paid out. In this case, a situation where the credit counter is at 0 in a game where a special add-on is performed is unlikely to normally occur, and a bet operation can be performed by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 without inserting a medal through the medal insertion slot 45. A situation where the credit counter is at 0 occurs when the settlement switch 59 is operated before a game where a special add-on is performed, and a player who performs such an action is likely to recognize that a bet of one medal will be made by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69, just as in the situation where the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated.

<Common features when winning>
Next, commonality of the winning effects will be described as a configuration for reducing the distinguishability between special specific roles and specific roles.

As shown in FIG. 138, when a normal bonus occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a watermelon win is established, a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout effect by illuminating the reels at positions corresponding to these "watermelon" symbols with a specified light-emitting element. The flash effect can be realized by controlling existing light-emitting elements, etc. When a watermelon win is established, five medals are paid out as a bonus corresponding to the watermelon win. In this case, a watermelon payout sound effect (for example, a low-pitched "do-do-do-do") is emitted from the speaker 64 as the medal payout sound effect. Then, an bonus effect of the number of games based on the watermelon table at the time of the watermelon win is generated.

On the other hand, when a special top-up occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "red bell" symbol stop on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a special watermelon win is established, a flash effect is generated as the watermelon payout effect, not on the symbols (watermelon, watermelon, and red bell) corresponding to these special watermelons, but on the reel at the position corresponding to the "watermelon" symbol, by illuminating it with a predetermined light-emitting section. In other words, although it is a special watermelon win, the watermelon payout effect, which is the effect that occurs when a watermelon wins, occurs during the special top-up. When the special watermelon win is established, one medal is paid out as a privilege corresponding to the special watermelon win. In this case, the watermelon payout effect is emitted from the speaker 64 as the medal payout sound effect. In other words, although it is a special watermelon win and the number of medals paid out is one, during the special top-up, a watermelon payout sound effect is generated as the medal payout sound effect when a watermelon wins. When the special watermelon is won, an additional game number will be played based on the special watermelon table.

<Payout determination process>
The processing for performing each of the above effects will be described below.

Figure 139 is a flowchart showing the payout determination process in this embodiment. As already explained, the payout determination process is a process that is implemented as one process (step S413) of the reel control process (Figure 32) in the main control device 101.

In step S5601, it is determined whether or not a payout may occur as a result of this winning. If a payout may occur, in step S5602, payout processing is performed, and then this payout determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5601 that a payout will not occur, in step S5603, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred. If any replay winning has occurred, in step S5604, replay processing is performed, and then this payout determination processing is terminated.

The payout process and replay process are explained below.

<Payment process>
In the payout process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 140, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the special add-on flag is set. If the special add-on flag is not set and the currently played game is not a game that supports the special add-on, payout settings for the normal game mode are performed in steps S5702 to S5705. On the other hand, if the special add-on flag is set and the currently played game is a game that supports the special add-on, payout settings for the specific mode are performed in steps S5706 to S5728.

As for payout settings for the normal game mode, first, a process for grasping the payout number is performed in step S5702. In this process, the current bet number and winning mode are identified, and the payout number corresponding to the identified bet number and winning mode is grasped. For example, if the current bet number is three coins and a bell (first small win) is achieved, it is grasped that nine medals will be paid out. Also, if the current bet number is three coins and a watermelon (26th small win, etc.) is achieved, it is grasped that five medals will be paid out. Also, if the current bet number is three coins and a strong cherry (25th small win, etc.), weak cherry (18th small win, etc.), or middle bell (29th small win) is achieved, it is grasped that three medals will be paid out. And, if the current bet number is three coins and a red 7 (30th small win) is achieved during the bonus, it is grasped that nine medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the current bet is one coin and a special bell (first P minor feature) is won, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. Also, if the current bet is one coin and a special watermelon (26th P minor feature, etc.) is won, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. Also, if the current bet is one coin and a special strong cherry (25th P minor feature, etc.), special weak cherry (18th P minor feature, etc.), or special middle bell (29th P minor feature) is won, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. Also, if the current bet is one coin and a special red 7 (30th P minor feature) is won, it is understood that one medal will be paid out.

After the processing of step S5702 is performed, in step S5703, a payout process is executed to pay out the number of medals determined in step S5702. Specifically, the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the determined number of medals is paid out. In this case, the payout number is added to the credit counter, and the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the number of medals paid out that exceeds the upper limit of the credit counter is paid out. In other words, if the number of medals paid out is equal to or less than the upper limit of the credit counter even when the number of medals paid out is added to the credit counter, no medals are paid out from the hopper device 51.

In the next step S5704, a payout sound effect corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if a watermelon (26th minor combination) is won, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a watermelon payout sound effect is generated. Also, if a special watermelon (26th P minor combination) is won, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a special watermelon payout sound effect is generated. The watermelon payout sound effect and the special watermelon payout sound effect are set to sounds that are different enough for the player to distinguish them. For example, the watermelon payout sound effect is set to the low-pitched sound "do-do-do-do" and the special watermelon payout sound is set to a low-pitched sound "do-do" that is shorter than the watermelon payout sound effect. The payout sound effects of other specific combinations and the special specific combination are also set to sounds that are different enough for the player to distinguish them. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether or not the medals are paid out from the hopper device 51. In other words, even if the payout number is simply incremented by the credit counter, a payout sound effect will be set.

In the next step S5705, the payout display corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if the watermelon (26th minor combination) is won, a flash effect is generated as the watermelon payout. In addition, the payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 5 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 as the watermelon payout, corresponding to the payout of the five medals. If the special watermelon (26th P minor combination) is won, a light-off effect is generated in which the light-emitting units that illuminate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are turned off as the special watermelon payout. The payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 1 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 as the special watermelon payout, corresponding to the payout of one medal. In other words, the watermelon payout and the special watermelon payout are different effects so that the player can distinguish them. In addition, different effects are set for the payout appearances of other specific roles and the payout appearances of special specific roles so that the player can distinguish them, and they can be distinguished by the difference between the flash effect and the light-off effect on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the difference in the payout number displayed on the payout number display section 62.

After processing step S5705, this disbursement process is terminated.

To set the payout for the specific mode, first, in step S5706, it is determined whether the number of coins bet in the current game is the specific number of 1 coin. If it is not 1 coin, the process proceeds to step S5702, where the payout setting for the normal game mode is performed.

If the special add-on flag is set and the game was played with one bet, proceed to step S5707. In step S5707, the add-on counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S5708, it is determined whether the add-on counter has reached 0. If it has reached 0, in step S5709, the special add-on flag is cleared. Note that steps S5707 to S5709 are performed when multiple special add-on games occur in succession.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5708, or after the processing of step S5709 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5710. In step S5710, it is judged whether or not a special watermelon (26th P minor prize) winning has been achieved. If a special watermelon winning has been achieved, a payout process corresponding to the special watermelon winning is performed in step S5711. In this case, unlike the payout process in step S5703, the current payout number is added to the credit counter, and an event that exceeds the upper limit of the credit counter is unlikely to occur. In other words, the credit counter is decremented by 1 by the bet of one coin in this specific mode, and adding 1, which is the current payout number, does not exceed the upper limit of the credit counter. The configuration in which medals are not paid out when the upper limit of the credit counter is not exceeded, and medals are paid out by controlling the hopper device 51 only when the upper limit of the credit counter is exceeded, is as described above. Note that an actual medal payout occurs when the credit counter is at the upper limit before the start of the specific mode, and the specific mode is executed by inserting one medal from the medal insertion port 45. This payout process is the same for other special winning combinations.

In the following step S5712, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a watermelon payout sound effect is produced in response to the watermelon win, not the special watermelon win, which is the current winning result. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether or not actual medals are paid out. Then, in step S5713, control is performed so that a watermelon payout appearance is produced in response to the watermelon win, not the special watermelon win, which is the current winning result. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout appearance. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special top-up occurs as described above, no processing is performed to display the payout number.

If it is determined in step S5710 that the special watermelon winning has not been achieved, it is determined in step S5714 whether or not a special strong cherry winning (such as the 25th P minor win) has been achieved. If a special strong cherry winning has been achieved, a payout process corresponding to the special strong cherry winning is performed in step S5715.

In the following step S5716, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a strong cherry payout sound effect is emitted in response to the current winning result, not the special strong cherry winning, but the strong cherry winning. Then, in step S5717, control is performed so that a strong cherry payout effect is performed in response to the current winning result, not the special strong cherry winning, but the strong cherry winning. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a strong cherry payout effect. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned OFF when the special top-up occurs as described above, no processing is performed to display the payout number.

If it is determined in step S5714 that a special strong cherry has not been won, it is determined in step S5718 whether or not a special weak cherry (such as the 18th P minor prize) has been won. If a special weak cherry has been won, a payout process corresponding to the special weak cherry is performed in step S5719.

In the next step S5720, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a weak cherry payout sound effect is emitted in response to the current winning result, not the special weak cherry winning, but the weak cherry winning. Then, in step S5721, control is performed so that a weak cherry payout effect is performed in response to the current winning result, not the special weak cherry winning, but the weak cherry winning. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a weak cherry payout effect. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned OFF when the special top-up occurs as described above, no processing is performed to display the payout number.

If it is determined in step S5718 that a special weak cherry win has not been achieved, it is determined in step S5722 whether or not a special middle bell win (such as the 29th P minor win) has been achieved. If a special middle bell win has been achieved, a payout process corresponding to the special middle bell win is performed in step S5723.

In the following step S5724, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a middle bell payout sound effect is produced in response to the current winning result, not the special middle bell winning, but the middle bell winning. Then, in step S5725, control is performed so that a middle bell payout sound effect is produced in response to the current winning result, not the special middle bell winning, but the middle bell winning. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a middle bell payout sound effect. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special top-up occurs as described above, no processing is performed to display the payout number.

If it is determined in step S5722 that the special middle bell win has not been achieved, this means that the winning result in this particular mode was a special red 7 combination (30th P minor win). In this case, in step S5726, a payout process corresponding to the special red 7 combination win is performed.

In the next step S5727, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a payout sound effect for matching red 7s is produced in response to the matching red 7s winning, not the special matching red 7s winning, which is the current winning result. Then, in step S5728, control is performed so that a payout sound effect for matching red 7s is produced in response to the matching red 7s winning, not the special matching red 7s winning, which is the current winning result. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout sound effect for matching red 7s. However, since the display on the payout number display 62 is turned off when the special top-up occurs as described above, no processing is performed to display the payout number.

After performing any of steps S5713, S5717, S5721, S5725, and S5728, the payout settings for the specific mode are completed and the payout process ends.

<Replay Processing>
Next, the replay processing in the payout determination processing (FIG. 139) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S5801, it is determined whether or not a special add-on has been set. If a special add-on has not been set, processing for the normal game mode is performed in steps S5802 and S5803. On the other hand, if the special add-on flag has been set, processing for the specific mode is performed in steps S5804 to S5809.

That is, in step S5802, as a process for the normal game mode, a bet sound effect setting process is performed. In this process, a bet sound effect corresponding to the number of re-bets corresponding to the number of bets on the currently executed game is set. Specifically, when a re-play win occurs in a 3-bet game, a 3-coin bet sound effect (bebebe) is set, when a re-play win occurs in a 2-bet game, a 2-coin bet sound effect (bebe) is set, and when a re-play win occurs in a 1-bet game, a 1-coin bet sound effect (be) is set. These set bet sound effects are output from the speaker 64 when virtual medals are automatically inserted into the next game based on the re-play win. Specifically, an automatic insertion process is performed in the start waiting process in the normal process (FIG. 28), and the bet sound effect set in accordance with this automatic insertion is output.

The next re-betting process in step S5803 is a process for preparing to automatically bet a number according to the number of bets in the game executed this time in the start waiting process (step S204) in the normal process (FIG. 28). Specifically, in the case of a 3-bet game, a 3-coin automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d so that 3 coins are bet in the start waiting process, in the case of a 2-bet game, a 2-coin automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d so that 2 coins are bet in the start waiting process, and in the case of a 1-bet game, a 1-coin automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d so that 1 coin is bet in the start waiting process. In the start waiting process, by checking these automatic insertion flags, it is possible to specify that a re-play win has been established in the previous game, and automatic insertion process is performed for the number of virtual medals according to the automatic insertion flag that has been set. Then, when the automatic insertion is performed, the bet time effect sound set in the above step S5802 is output. After the process in step S5803 is performed, the re-play process is terminated.

If the special add-on flag is set in step S5801, step S5804 determines whether the current game was a 1-bet game, as processing for a specific mode. If it is not a 1-bet game, the process proceeds to step S5802, where processing for the normal game mode is performed. If it is a 1-bet game, step S5805 performs a subtraction process on the add-on counter. Then, step S5806 determines whether the add-on counter is 0, and if it is 0, step S5807 clears the special add-on flag. The processing in steps S5805 to S5807 corresponds to the processing in steps S5707 to S5709.

If the add-on counter is not 0 in step S5806, or after the process of step S5807 has been executed, a process of setting a sound effect when three coins are bet is performed in step S5808. Then, in step S5809, as a special re-bet process, the automatic one coin insertion flag is set so that one coin is bet in the start waiting process. As a result, in the next game when a special replay win is established with the special add-on, one virtual medal is automatically inserted and a sound effect when three coins are bet is output. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that the game in which the special add-on was performed was a one-bet game. After that, the re-play process is terminated.

As described above, in a special mode where special bonuses are applied, when a special special role is won, the corresponding bonus of one medal is paid out, but the payout sound effect and payout appearance are not those corresponding to the special special role win, but rather those corresponding to the special role are set. This makes it difficult to tell whether a special role win or a special special role win has been won.

On the other hand, even if a special specific role win is achieved, if the game is played in a situation where the special add-on flag is not set, the payout sound effect and payout corresponding to the special role win are not set, but rather those corresponding to the special specific role win are set. This allows the player to clearly recognize that the special add-on is not valid, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural that, for example, a special red 7 win is achieved in a 1-bet game in normal play mode but no add-on occurs.

When a special replay win is made in the special add-on, one virtual medal is automatically inserted, and a sound effect is made when three medals are bet. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish whether the special replay win was made in a game in which a special add-on was made, or whether the special replay win was made by simply playing a one-bet game regardless of the special add-on.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example 1, when determining the additional game during the special additional, the game result that triggered the special additional is taken into consideration. In other words, the configuration is such that the bonus in the specific mode is determined by taking into consideration not only the game result in the specific mode but also the game result in the normal game mode that caused the specific mode to be executed.

Figure 142 shows the lottery table for special additions in this modified example 1. The lottery table for special additions is obtained in each process of the lottery result response process for the specific mode (step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, step S5412).

In the special watermelon table, special strong cherry table, special weak cherry table, and special middle bell table in this modified example 1, as shown in Figures 142(a) to 142(d), the number of games to be added is set to differ depending on the type of special role that triggered the current additional win. In this case, the number of games to be added is set to be the greatest when the winning role that triggered the addition and the current special role correspond (are consecutive).

That is, in the special watermelon table, when the trigger for the additional win is a watermelon win, and in the specific mode as the special additional win that is subsequently implemented, when the special watermelon win occurs, the games with the stop results as if two consecutive watermelon wins have occurred will be consecutive, and in this case, the number of additional games of the special additional is set to be the largest. Also, in the special strong cherry table, when the trigger for the additional win is a strong cherry win, and in the specific mode as the special additional win that is subsequently implemented, when the special strong cherry win occurs, the games with the stop results as if two consecutive strong cherry wins have occurred will be consecutive, and in this case, the number of additional games of the special additional is set to be the largest. In the special weak cherry table, when the trigger for the additional win is a weak cherry win, and in the specific mode as the special additional win that is subsequently implemented, when the special weak cherry win occurs, the games with the stop results as if two consecutive weak cherry wins have occurred will be consecutive, and in this case, the number of additional games of the special additional is set to be the largest. For the special middle bell table, the trigger for the additional win is a middle bell win, and if the special middle bell is won in a specific mode as a special additional win that is subsequently implemented, a series of games with stopping results that are as if two consecutive middle bell wins had occurred will occur, and this case is set to result in the greatest number of additional games for the special additional win.

Unlike the other special specific role tables mentioned above, on the special replay table and special red 7 table, there is no event in which a specific role and a corresponding special specific role are consecutively won. Therefore, as shown in Figures 142(e) and 142(f), on the special replay table and special red 7 table, the number of additional games is set to differ depending on the type of specific role that triggered the current additional win.

By doing the above, the number of games to be added is determined taking into account the game results in the normal game mode that triggered the special addition, improving game play compared to a configuration in which the number is determined by the specific mode alone.

In this case, for example, when various special roles are consecutively won in the normal game mode, the number of additional games may be determined using a different lottery table than when there are no consecutive wins. In this way, the continuity between the winning of a special role in the normal game mode and the winning of a special special role in the special mode can be associated with the continuity of the winning of a special role in the normal game mode, making the continuity between the normal game mode and the special mode difficult to distinguish from the continuity in the normal game mode.

<Modification 2>
In the present modified example 2, in the lottery table in the specific mode, the special BAR replay 1 (IV=61) is set as a possible winning combination instead of the special replay.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the index value IV=61, the possible winning combinations when the special BAR replay is won are the first special replay, the sixth special replay, the seventh special replay, and the eighth special replay, unlike the first embodiment described above.

Each of these special replays is awarded a replay as a bonus when it is won. As shown in FIG. 144, the first special replay is set as a winning mode similar to the first replay minor feature, in which the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol stops on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. The sixth special replay winning is set as a winning mode similar to the sixth P replay minor feature, in which the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol stops on the center reel 32M, and either the "BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, or "watermelon" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. The seventh special replay win is set as a winning pattern similar to the seventh replay minor win, where the "First Replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" or "Youth" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. The eighth special replay win is set as a winning pattern similar to the eighth replay minor win, where the "First Replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol stops on the right reel 32R.

When Special BAR Replay 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 145, one of the special replays will win, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated. In this case, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated at a time when the seventh special replay (BAR middle row alignment) can be won, the seventh special replay will win, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated at a time when the seventh special replay cannot be won, another special replay will win.

If the special BAR replay 1 is won during the special addition in attack mode, a VB mode win is awarded. In this case, after the special addition ends, a VB mode win notification is made without going through the premonition mode for VB mode, and after the 4th and 5th replay wins are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 are won, the mode transitions to VB mode.

The special addition in this variation 2 will be explained with reference to Figure 146.

As described above, in the lottery table during the specific mode in this modified example 2, there is a chance that the special BAR Replay 1 will be won, and if the special BAR Replay 1 is won, a replay will be won and the next game will also be played as a 1-bet game. In other words, in the lottery table in this modified example 2, there is a 5 in 6 probability of winning any of the special specific roles of the special watermelon, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, or special red 7, and there is a 1 in 6 probability of winning the special BAR Replay 1. If the special specific role with a 5 in 6 probability is won, the lottery table for the special addition is obtained as described above, the number of added games is determined, and the number of games in the attack mode is added.

On the other hand, if the player wins Special BAR Replay 1, which has a 1 in 6 probability, the player will be given the chance to play again and the chance to win VB mode as a special bonus. The auxiliary display unit 65 will then display "VB+1," indicating that the player has won VB mode.

In this variation 2, the special addition does not end when a replay wins, and the special addition continues in the next game. This means that there is a 1 in 6 chance of winning Special BAR Replay 1 in the next game as well. If you win Special BAR Replay 1, you will be awarded a replay and a VB mode win as a bonus when you win, just like above. The auxiliary display unit 65 will then display "VB+1," indicating that you have won VB mode.

As described above, if a replay wins, a special addition will be made in the next game. In the example of Figure 146, in this game, instead of the special BAR replay 1, a special watermelon is won as a special specific role, and the corresponding number of games is added. Then, if a special specific role is won, this special addition ends.

In the example of FIG. 146, the VB mode has been won twice. In this case, when the special top-up ends, a VB mode win notification is made, and after the fourth and fifth replay wins, the first VB mode is executed. When the first VB mode ends, the normal game state transitions to the first RT state due to the transition result, and the third replay win transitions to the second RT state, and the fourth and fifth replay wins execute the second VB mode. When the second VB mode ends, the normal game state transitions to the second RT state and the attack mode is entered.

By doing the above, the gameplay is improved when special additions are made. In other words, by preventing the special additions from ending when a replay is won, the inconvenience of playing in normal game mode in a one-bet game after the special addition is eliminated.

The above configuration may also be used in the specialized zone, for example. Specifically, for the special add-on that occurs during the attack mode, the above-mentioned second embodiment is adopted, and for the special add-on that occurs during the specialized zone, the above-mentioned variant example 2 is adopted. In this way, it is possible to reproduce the continuous occurrence of add-ons in the specialized zone by taking advantage of the inconvenience caused by replay winning.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example 3, when the special add-on flag is set and a game is played with three bets instead of one, an add-on is generated according to the lottery result in the normal game mode with three bets. In this modified example 3, in the lottery result response process (FIG. 134(a)), if the number of bets is three in the process of step S5301, if the special add-on flag is not set, the process proceeds to the lottery result response process in normal time in step S701, and if the special add-on flag is set, the process proceeds to a process substantially similar to the lottery result response process for specific mode in FIG. 134(b). That is, in the process in which the number of bets is three and the special add-on flag is set, in the process of steps S5402 to S5414 in the flow of FIG. 134(b) above, each special specific role is read as a specific role and applied. For example, in the process of determining whether or not a special watermelon has been won in step S5402, it is determined whether or not a watermelon has been won, and if a watermelon has been won, a watermelon table is obtained as a specific role table for special addition in step S5403.

Figure 147 shows a special specific role table for special top-up and a specific role table for special top-up. The special specific role tables in Figures 147 (a1) to 147 (a6) are similar to those in Figures 135 (a1) to 135 (a6) above. In contrast, the specific role tables for special top-up are set to select a number of games greater than the number of top-up games in the special specific role table, as shown in Figures 147 (b1) to 147 (b4).

On the other hand, in the replay table shown in FIG. 147(b5), the number of added games is not set, and no additional games will be added. Also, in the red 7 matching table shown in FIG. 147(b6), the number of added games is not set.

In other words, when determining whether a win is made in normal play mode, the probability of winning a specific role is lower than the probability of winning a special specific role in the specific mode. In that regard, if a special add-on is performed in normal play mode and a specific role is won, a greater number of games will be added than if the special add-on is performed in the specific mode and a special specific role is won. In this way, by allowing the player to choose between the significantly different playability of a special add-on in a specific mode and a special add-on in a normal play mode, it is possible to significantly improve the playability when a special add-on is performed.

In addition, if a special add-on is applied in normal play mode, the add-on will not occur if a replay is won. This will eliminate the imbalance that occurs when an add-on occurs in normal play mode due to winning a replay, which has a relatively high probability of occurring.

<Modification 4>
In this fourth modification, when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, a bet of one coin or a bet of three coins may be made. FIG. 148 shows a part of the bet operation process in this fourth modification.

That is, if it is determined in step S5513 in FIG. 137 that the fourth credit insertion switch 69 has been operated instead of the second credit insertion switch 57, the process proceeds to step S5901. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the special add-on flag has been set. If the special add-on flag has been set, in steps S5902 to S5904, the process for betting one coin in steps S5517 and S5518 and the process for setting the sound effect when betting three coins in step S5521 are performed.

If the special add-on flag is not set in step S5901, a three-coin bet process is performed in step S5905, the credit counter is decremented by three in step S5906, and a sound effect for three-coin bets is set in step S5907. This process is the same as the processes in steps S5506 to S5508 above. After the process in step S5904 or step S5907 is performed, this operation process ends.

In this way, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 can also be used in the normal game mode. In this case, for example, a configuration that allows the fourth credit insertion switch 69 to be operated in a game in which normal addition occurs in the normal game mode may be used. For example, instead of or in addition to a configuration in which the number of games to be added in normal addition is notified at the end of one game (when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped), a configuration in which the number of games to be added is notified at the time of a bet operation for the next game may be used. Then, as a bet operation for the next game, a special operation instruction effect is generated to prompt the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, and the number of games to be added is notified based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. In this way, in normal game mode, in a game in which a specific role has been won in a situation in which an attack mode addition can occur, the number of games to be added can be notified at the end of the game, when the bet is placed on the next game (when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated), or at the end of the next game, making it possible to provide a variety of ways to notify the number of games to be added.

In this case, the number of games notified at the end of the specific role winning game in the normal game mode when the betting operation for the next game is performed may be more likely to be than the number of games notified at the end of the specific role winning game, and the number of games notified at the end of the next game may be more likely to be than the number of games notified at the betting operation for the next game. In this way, the later the timing of the notification, the more advantageous it is expected to be, and it is possible to attract great interest in the situation in which the additional notification is performed.

The number of games announced at an earlier timing may be rewritten by the number of games announced at a later timing. For example, an additional 10 games may be announced at the end of the game when a specific role is won as the earlier timing, and this may be rewritten to an additional 30 games based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, or an additional 100 games may be announced at the end of the game based on the result of the game in a specific mode. In this way, the number of games can be increased in stages in accordance with the player's operation, greatly improving the enjoyment of each operation.

<Modification 5>
In the configuration in which either 1 bet or 3 bets are possible based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 as in the above-mentioned modified example 4, the number of bets based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 may be difficult for the player to distinguish. For example, in modified example 4, when a special operation instruction effect occurs, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to tell whether the game started by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and operating the start lever 41 is a specific mode with 1 bet or a normal game mode with 3 bets. In this case, if the special additional bonus is won, the game is a game in the specific mode, and if the special additional bonus is not won, the game is in the normal game mode.

As described above, by making it difficult to distinguish between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game even from the betting operation, it becomes more difficult for the player to tell which of the two games is being played, and it is believed that the players will operate each of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the hope of winning a special role (special special role). This will therefore attract more interest in the game.

In particular, because it is possible to switch between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game without transitioning between game states, it becomes even more difficult to know which game is being played. And because it is possible to switch between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game without transitioning between game states as described above, it is possible to switch between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game at various times. For example, it is possible to switch from the 3-bet game to the 1-bet game when it is desired to generate some kind of effect or to grant some kind of bonus, not just when a special bonus is won as in the second embodiment above.

<Modification 6>
In this sixth modification, the configuration of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is changed. Figure 149 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 in this sixth modification.

In this sixth modified example, a fifth credit insertion switch 75 is provided on the opposite side of the start lever 41, sandwiching the stop switches 42 to 44. The fifth credit insertion switch 75 is a lever-type operation unit that can be switched up and down. Normally, it is located in the upper initial position, and when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated toward the lower operating position, the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is deemed valid and an operation detection signal is output to the main control device 101. The main control device 101 determines that a one-coin bet operation has been performed based on the operation detection signal. Inside the fifth credit insertion switch 75, a biasing means (such as a leaf spring) (not shown) is provided that biases the fifth credit insertion switch 75 from the operating position toward the initial position, and the biasing means automatically returns the fifth credit insertion switch 75, which has been operated to the operating position, to its initial position.

A second start lever 76 is provided to the right of and parallel to the fifth credit insertion switch 75. The second start lever 76 has the same function as the first start lever 41, and when the start conditions for each game are met, operating the second start lever 76 starts the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and a lottery for that game is held.

The tip of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is provided with a first operation unit 75a that is spherical in left and right halves (left half). The tip of the second start lever 76 is provided with a second operation unit 76a that is spherical in left and right halves (right half). The fifth credit insertion switch 75 and the second start lever 76 are installed close to each other so that the two operation units 75a, 76a form a sphere. Therefore, the first operation unit 75a of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 and the second operation unit 76a of the second start lever 76 can be operated simultaneously, and when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated, the second start lever 76 is also easily operated, and when the second start lever 76 is operated, the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is also easily operated.

The first lever body 75b, which is closer to the slot machine 10 body side than the first operation unit 75a in the fifth credit insertion switch 75, is provided with a credit side cover 75c that covers from above the second lever body 76b, which is closer to the slot machine 10 body side than the second operation unit 76a in the second start lever 76. Because the credit side cover 75c is provided, when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated downward, the second lever body 76b of the second start lever 76 is pressed downward by the credit side cover 75c, and the second start lever 76 is operated. As a result, when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated, the second start lever 76 is also operated.

By configuring as described above, when a special bonus occurs, it is possible to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R without having to operate the start lever separately. This makes it possible to make the game in the specific mode less distinct from the game in the normal play mode, while strengthening the impression that the game in the specific mode is a special game.

In addition, as described above, the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75, which not only improves operability when a special add-on occurs, but also shortens the period from the betting operation to the start of the game compared to a configuration in which each operation is performed separately. In this way, it becomes difficult to see the event of credits being subtracted based on the betting operation or the setting of an active line in a game when a special add-on occurs. This makes it possible to further reduce the distinguishability between the special mode and the normal game mode.

As described above, while the second start lever 76 is configured to be operated based on the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75, the second credit insertion switch 57, which allows for the operation of one bet, and the start lever 41 are provided separately. Therefore, in a game in which a special add-on occurs, it is possible to perform the bet operation and the start operation separately. In this way, it is possible to improve the operability of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 and the second start lever 76 without compromising the thrill of playing the slot machine 10, which is to start and end a game based on the player's operation.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 150 to 153. Fig. 150 is a perspective view of the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward orientation, Fig. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the cross section of line F-F in Fig. 150, Fig. 152 is a partially enlarged view of the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 in an upward orientation, and Fig. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing the opening and closing of the lower opening 603. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for configurations similar to those in the above-mentioned embodiments, and their explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 150 and 151, the auxiliary tank 54 has a generally box-shaped tank body 601. The tank body 601 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside can be seen from the outside. A bottom plate portion 602 of the tank body 601 is provided with a lower opening 603 that penetrates the bottom plate portion 602 in the thickness direction. The lower opening 603 has a generally vertically elongated rectangular shape that extends along the longitudinal direction of the tank body 601 in a plan view, and is located in the center of the bottom plate portion 602.

A slope 604 is provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate 602 so as to surround the periphery of the lower opening 603. The slope 604 is composed of a front slope 604a and a rear slope 604b provided on both sides of the lower opening 603 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate 602, and a right slope 604c and a left slope 604d provided on both sides of the lower opening 603 in the lateral direction of the bottom plate 602. Each of these slopes 604a to 604d is inclined downward toward the lower opening 603, and the medals from the induction plate 52a (see FIG. 5) are guided to the lower opening 603 along the slope of each slope 604a to 604d.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the medals from the induction plate 52a are dropped onto the back surface 602b and then collected in the lower opening 603. For this reason, the opening size of the lower opening 603 in a plan view is smaller than the lower opening 512 (see FIG. 13) in each of the above embodiments, and the lower opening 603 has an elongated shape.

The bottom plate protrusion 605 protruding upward is provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602. The bottom plate protrusion 605 is continuous around the periphery of the bottom plate portion 602 and is formed around the entire circumference of the bottom plate portion 602. The upper surface 605a of the bottom plate protrusion 605 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position (the installation surface with the bottom plate 11a when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position) is flat and is approximately parallel to the upper surface of the flange portion 571 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position. The bottom plate protrusion 605 is integrally formed with the tank body 601 and is formed at a predetermined height.

As shown in FIG. 152, a bottom lid 606 that opens and closes the lower opening 512 and a support portion 607 that supports the bottom lid 606 are provided on the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602. The support portion 607 supports the bottom lid 606 so that it can rotate between a closed position (see FIG. 151) in which the bottom lid 606 closes the lower opening 603 and an open position (see FIG. 153(b)) in which the bottom lid 606 rotates from the closed position toward the inside of the tank body 601 to open the lower opening 603.

The support portion 607 is composed of upright portions 608 that rise from the surface 602a toward the inside of the tank body 601 around the lower opening 603. The upright portions 608 include a front upright portion 608a and a rear upright portion 608b provided on either side of the lower opening 512 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate portion 602, and a right upright portion 608c and a left upright portion 608d provided on either side of the lower opening 512 in the lateral direction of the bottom plate portion 602. These upright portions 608a to 608d are continuous in a frame shape in a plan view.

Each of the upright portions 608a to 608d is formed integrally with the tank body 601 and is positioned a predetermined distance outward from the periphery of the lower opening 603. That is, the distance between the front upright portion 608a and the rear upright portion 608b is greater than the longitudinal dimension of the lower opening 603, and the distance between the right upright portion 608c and the left upright portion 608d is greater than the lateral dimension of the lower opening 603. As a result, a roughly rectangular column-shaped recess 609 is formed by each of the upright portions 608a to 608d and the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 on the inside of each of the upright portions 608a to 608d.

As shown in FIG. 153(b), the bottom lid 606 is provided with a lid body 610 that is generally rectangular in plan view. The longitudinal and lateral dimensions of the lid body 610 are greater than those of the lower opening 603, making it possible to close the entire lower opening 603 from inside the tank body 601 with the bottom lid 606. In addition, the above-mentioned dimensions of the lid body 610 are smaller than those of the recess 609, and the thickness dimension of the bottom lid 606 is smaller than the depth dimension of the recess 609, i.e., the height dimension of each of the upright portions 608a to 608d.

For this reason, when the bottom lid 606 is in the closed position, the lid body 610 is housed inside the recess 609. At that time, as shown in FIG. 151, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 abuts against the surface 602a (see FIG. 152(b)) of the bottom plate portion 602 on the inside of each of the upright portions 608a to 608d, thereby restricting the bottom lid 606 from rotating beyond the closed position to the outside of the tank body 601.

A cylindrical through hole 612 that penetrates the lid body 610 in the longitudinal direction is provided on one of the long sides of the lid body 610. On the other hand, through holes 614a, 614b are provided in the front standing part 608a and the rear standing part 608b, respectively, corresponding to the through hole 612. These through holes 614a, 614b are cylindrical and extend in the thickness direction of each standing part 608a, 608b, and are arranged coaxially with each other. A round rod-shaped shaft 615 is inserted into the through holes 612, 614a, 614b with the bottom lid 606 housed in the recess 609, and the bottom lid 606 and the support part 607 (tank body 601) are connected through the rod shaft 615.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), a cutout 618 is formed by cutting out a portion of the cover body 610 of the bottom cover 606 in a rectangular shape on one side in the longitudinal direction of the cover body 610. A coil spring 617 that biases the bottom cover 606 toward the closed position is disposed in the cutout 618. A rod shaft 615 is inserted into the wound portion 617a of the coil spring 617, and the coil spring 617 is bridged between the bottom cover 606 and the left standing portion 608d by engaging one arm 617b with the engaging hole 606f of the bottom cover 606 and engaging the other arm 617c with the left standing portion 608d. The biasing force of the coil spring 617 is set to a strength that prevents the bottom cover 606 from rotating downward under its own weight when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, as shown in FIG. 151, and can hold the bottom cover 606 in the closed position.

In the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted for automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in the housing 11 in a downward position. In this case, a part of the bottom lid 606 is exposed upward from the lower opening 603, and when medals are not overflowing from the storage tank 52 and no medals are placed on the bottom lid 606, the bottom lid 606 is held in the closed position by the biasing force of the coil spring 617, and the lower opening 603 is closed (see FIG. 151).

When medals overflow from the storage tank 52, as shown in FIG. 153(a), the medals fall onto the right inclined portion 604c provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602. The medals that fall onto the right inclined portion 604c fall along the inclination of the right inclined portion 604c and are guided to the lower opening 603. In this case, even if the medals move vigorously on the right inclined portion 604c and pass through the lower opening 603, the left inclined portion 604d is inclined in the opposite direction, so that the medals are guided again toward the lower opening 603 by the left inclined portion 604d. Also, if the medals have a strong momentum and go up the left inclined portion 604d to the periphery of the bottom plate portion 602, the medals come into contact with the bottom plate protrusion 605. This restricts the medals from moving any further and prevents them from falling outside the tank body 601.

The medals that reach the lower opening 603 are placed on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 exposed from the lower opening 603. This process is repeated each time a medal is discharged from the storage tank 52. As long as the weight of the medals on the back surface 606b is less than a predetermined weight and the biasing force of the coil spring 617 exceeds the weight of the medals, the bottom cover 606 is maintained in the closed position. As a result, medals accumulate on and around the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606.

When the weight of the medals on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight, the load of the medals overcomes the biasing force of the coil spring 617, and the bottom cover 606 rotates downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the lower opening 603 opens, and the medals on the back surface 606b and its surrounding area fall into the tank body 601. These medals pass through the tank body 601 to the medal discharge hole 15 and are supplied to the automatic collection device located below the slot machine 10.

After the medals on the back surface 606b have fallen, the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position and the lower opening 603 is closed again. Thereafter, medals from the storage tank 52 are temporarily stored on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 in the same manner as above, and the lower opening 603 is opened each time the weight of the medals on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight. In this way, the lower opening 603 is opened according to the medal weight, making it possible to eliminate the need to manually open the bottom lid 606. Therefore, simply installing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downwards allows for automatic collection, improving convenience.

In this case, in this embodiment, the medals on the back surface 606b are guided to the lower opening 603, so that the medal weight can be easily concentrated on the bottom lid 606. For example, if the weight of the medals discharged from the storage tank 52 is dispersed on the bottom plate portion 602, the response of the bottom lid 606 is delayed, and the time until the lower opening 603 opens tends to be long. As a result, the medals may overflow on the bottom plate portion 602, spill outside the tank body 601, and be scattered inside the housing 11. In this regard, according to this embodiment, the medal weight is easily concentrated on the bottom lid 606, so that the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be improved, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Furthermore, because the medal on the back surface 606b is guided to the lower opening 603, the lower opening 603 can be made smaller, and the size of the bottom cover 606 can also be reduced accordingly. This makes it possible to suppress interference with the upper sensor rod 16a when the bottom cover 606 is opened and closed. In this case, by adjusting the size of the lower opening 603 and the bottom cover 606 and the position of the pivot 606c, etc., so that the dimension from the pivot 606c of the bottom cover 606 to the end 606d on the tip side of the pivot is shorter than the distance from the pivot 606c to the upper sensor rod 16a, the above-mentioned interference can be reliably avoided.

When the slot machine 10 is transported, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in the cabinet 11 in a downward position, as in the case of automatic recovery. In this case, the bottom cover 606 is held in the closed position by the biasing force of the coil spring 617, and the lower opening 603 is closed (see FIG. 151). That is, in this embodiment, the lower opening 603 can be kept closed when the slot machine 10 is transported.

In this case, by placing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward so as to cover the medal discharge hole 15, the space above the medal discharge hole 15 (the space inside the tank body 601) can be blocked by the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, even if a foreign object or hand is inserted into the medal discharge hole 15, unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 is prevented by the auxiliary tank 54, making it possible to suppress such fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the bottom cover 606 is in the closed position, the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 and the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the bottom cover 606 from rotating outside the tank body 601. With this configuration, even if a foreign object or hand enters through the medal discharge hole 15 and pushes up the bottom cover 606 during transportation of the slot machine 10, the bottom cover 606 does not rotate, making it difficult to open the lower opening 603. This makes it possible to suppress acts of opening the lower opening 603 to illegally access the inside of the slot machine 10, and strengthens fraud prevention measures. Incidentally, with this configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing upward in response to manual collection, the weight of the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from falling out.

Furthermore, when the bottom cover 606 is in the closed state, the bottom cover 606 is surrounded by the uprights 608 (the bottom cover 606 fits inside the recess 609). In this case, the uprights 608a to 608d can cover the peripheral edge surface of the bottom cover 606, making it difficult for foreign objects or hands that have entered through the medal ejection hole 15 to get caught on the bottom cover 606. This makes it possible to inhibit the act of catching and pulling such foreign objects on the bottom cover 606, thereby rotating the bottom cover 606 towards the open position.

In particular, in this embodiment, the height dimension of the upright portion 608 (depth dimension of the recess 609) is greater than the plate thickness dimension of the bottom cover 606, so that the bottom cover 606 can be inserted deeply into the recess 609. This makes it even more difficult for the above-mentioned foreign objects to get caught on the bottom cover 606, making it possible to strengthen fraud prevention measures.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, the weight of the medals causes the bottom lid 606 to open, and the medals enter the inside of the tank. In this case, when the medals enter the tank and the weight is reduced, the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the coil spring 617. At that time, if any medals remain on the bottom lid 606, the force of the bottom lid 606 returning to the closed position may cause the medals to be knocked off and scattered inside the housing 11. In this regard, in this embodiment, the bottom plate protrusions 605 are erected around the bottom plate 602 (the receiving portion that receives the medals from the storage tank 52), so that even if the medals are knocked off, they can be prevented from reaching the outside of the auxiliary tank 54.

In this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, the right flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 engages with the engagement portion 574, preventing the auxiliary tank 54 from floating up (see FIG. 151). Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is being transported, even if a foreign object or a hand is inserted through the medal discharge hole 15 to push up the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to make it difficult for a gap to form between the auxiliary tank 54 and the bottom plate 11a, or for the gap to widen. This makes it possible to prevent the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the gap in an attempt to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10.

In addition, even when used in response to automatic collection, for example, when a player strikes the slot machine 10 and an impact is applied, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from bouncing around inside the housing 11. This prevents the auxiliary tank 54 from shifting out of position due to an impact, and prevents the inconvenience of medals from the storage tank 52 not being guided to the medal discharge hole 15.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the configuration of the bottom cover 606 and the bottom plate portion 602 is different from that of the third embodiment. The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modification will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 154, in this modified example, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, an inclined surface is formed on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, which slopes downward toward the end of the bottom cover 606 at the tip end side of the rotation of the bottom cover 606. Note that in this modified example, the inclined surface is formed by tilting the entire bottom cover 606 and the support portion 607, but it is also possible to tilt only the back surface 606b.

With this configuration, the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 can guide the medals placed on the back surface 606b towards the end of the bottom cover 606 at the tip of its rotation. This allows the medals to be brought closer to the end of the bottom cover 606 at the tip of its rotation, making it easier to concentrate the weight of the medals in that area. As a result, the opening responsiveness of the bottom cover 606 is improved, making it possible to prevent medals from spilling over and falling off the back surface 606b.

In particular, the right inclined portion 604c of the bottom plate portion 602 is inclined downward toward the lower opening 603 (bottom cover 606), so that the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 and the right inclined portion 604c can form a V-shaped groove. This makes it easier to collect medals in the portion of the bottom cover 606 that is closest to the tip of the rotation, and makes it possible to favorably improve the opening responsiveness of the bottom cover 606.

The above configuration is also expected to have the following effects. As already explained, if there are medals remaining on the bottom cover 606 when the bottom cover 606 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force of the coil spring 617, the medals may be thrown off by the force of the bottom cover 606 returning to the closed position. In this regard, by sloping the back surface 606a (the medal placement surface) of the bottom cover 606 downward toward the rotating tip of the bottom cover 606, medals are less likely to remain on the bottom cover 606, and the medals can be prevented from flying off. In addition, since the medals can be led out into the tank even if the bottom cover 606 is opened relatively little, the amount of rotation required for closing is reduced, and even if medals remain, the amount of flight can be kept to a minimum.

It is not necessary to incline the entire back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, but only the portion exposed upward from the lower opening 603 may be inclined, or only a portion of that portion may be inclined.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the configuration of the bottom cover 606 is different from that of the above-mentioned modification 1. The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modification will be described with reference to Fig. 155. Fig. 155 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 is provided with a back surface protrusion 621 that protrudes upward from the back surface 606b. The back surface protrusion 621 is integrally formed with the cover body 610, and is provided on an exposed portion 606e that is exposed upward from the lower opening 603 when the bottom cover 606 is in the closed position.

The height dimension of the back surface protrusion 621 is set to a predetermined dimension within a range in which it does not interfere with the bottom plate portion 602 (the peripheral wall surface of the lower opening 603) when the bottom cover 606 is opened or closed, and the tip of the back surface protrusion 621 does not protrude below the bottom plate protrusion 605 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position. Specifically, it is set to a dimension that is higher than the height of multiple medals (e.g. about five medals) stacked flat, and is a height that can block the medals guided by the right side inclined portion 604c.

The back surface protrusion 621 is positioned closer to the pivot shaft 606c when viewed in the axial direction of the pivot shaft 606c, and is spaced a predetermined distance from the wall portion 603a on the pivot tip side of the peripheral wall portion of the lower opening 603. This ensures that a space is available in the exposed portion 606e of the bottom cover 606 on the pivot tip side of the back surface protrusion 621 in which a medal can be placed. In addition, the back surface protrusion 621 is formed in a straight line from one end to the other end of the exposed portion 606e so as to cross the exposed portion 606e in the axial direction of the pivot shaft 606c in a plan view.

This configuration allows the medals guided by the right inclined portion 604c to be blocked by the backside protrusion 621. This allows the medals to be collected in front of the backside protrusion 621 in the exposed portion 606e, making it possible to move the medals to a portion away from the pivot shaft 606c. As a result, the weight of the medals tends to be concentrated in this portion, making it possible to improve the opening responsiveness of the bottom cover 606.

At that time, the rear surface protrusion 621 is spaced a predetermined distance from the wall portion 603a, and a space is provided in the exposed portion 606e in which medals can be placed, so that the blocked medals can be conveniently placed on the bottom cover 606. This prevents the medals from being blocked and staying on the right inclined portion 604c side, and makes it possible for the weight of the medals discharged from the storage tank 52 to act efficiently on the bottom cover 606.

The structure for blocking the medals is not limited to the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, but may be provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602. One such structure is, for example, a back surface protrusion 622 provided above the wall portion 603b on the rotation base end side of the peripheral wall portion of the lower opening 603, as shown in FIG. 155(b).

In this case, the lower opening 603 is positioned radially of the rod shaft 615 toward the tip of the rotation of the bottom cover 606, and the portion of the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 toward the tip of the rotation is more exposed 606e. This allows the weight of the blocked medals to be efficiently applied to the portion toward the tip of the rotation, and improves the opening responsiveness of the bottom cover 606.

The configuration in which the lower opening 603 is biased toward the tip of the rotation relative to the bottom cover 606 is not limited to this modified example, but can be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and other modified examples. Also, a configuration in which the medals are blocked may be adopted by providing both back surface protrusions 621, 622 or by raising the wall portion 603b. Furthermore, in this modified example, the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 is inclined as in modified example 1, but the back surface 606b may be configured to be approximately horizontal as in the above-mentioned third embodiment.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the connection structure between the auxiliary tank 54 and the housing 11 is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 156 to 159. Fig. 156 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, Fig. 157(a) is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line G-G in Fig. 156, (b) is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line G-G of the tank body, Fig. 158 is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in Fig. 156 and an enlarged view of a main part, Fig. 159(a) is a perspective view of the bottom cover 704, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom cover 704.

As shown in FIG. 156, the auxiliary tank 54 has a tank body 701 that is generally box-shaped with a bottom that opens upward. The tank body 701 has a bottom plate portion 701a that is generally rectangular in plan view, and a front wall portion 701b, a rear wall portion 701c, a right side wall portion 701d, and a left side wall portion 701e that stand up from the bottom plate portion 701a so as to surround the bottom plate portion 701a, and an upper opening portion 702 that is generally rectangular in plan view and opens upward is formed at the top of the tank body 701.

As shown in Figures 156 to 158, the tank body 701 has a lower opening 703 provided in the bottom plate portion 701a, and a bottom lid 704 that opens and closes the lower opening 703. The bottom lid 704 is rotatably supported by a support portion 705 provided on the bottom plate portion 701a.

The lower opening 703 has a generally rectangular shape in a plan view and penetrates the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The lower opening 703 opens up and down, leaving only a portion of the periphery of the bottom plate portion 701a, and is positioned generally toward the front wall portion 701b. On either side of the lower opening 703 in the bottom plate portion 701a, a rear bottom plate portion 701g and a front bottom plate portion 701f are positioned, with the rear bottom plate portion 701g being longer in the longitudinal direction than the front bottom plate portion 701f.

159, the bottom cover 704 includes a cover body 706 having a generally rectangular shape in plan view, and a shaft portion 707 formed integrally with the cover body 706. The cover body 706 is larger in both longitudinal and lateral dimensions than the lower opening 703, and is large enough to close the lower opening 703. The shaft portion 707 is provided on one of the short sides of the cover body 706 that face each other in the longitudinal direction, and has a round bar shape that extends along the width direction of the cover body 706 (extension direction of the short side). The length dimension of the shaft portion 707 is larger than the width dimension of the cover body 706, and both ends of the shaft portion 707 in the axial direction protrude laterally beyond both ends of the cover body 706 in the lateral direction.

As shown in Figures 156 to 158, the support portion 705 includes a right support portion 708 and a left support portion 709 provided at both ends of the short side of the bottom plate portion 701a at the bottom plate front portion 701f.

The right support part 708 has a right bulge part 710 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate part 701a. The bulge dimension (height) of the right bulge part 710 is larger than the shaft diameter of the shaft part 707 of the bottom cover 704. Inside the right bulge part 710, a right hole part 711 is provided that has a bell-shaped cross section and extends in the short direction of the bottom plate part 701a. The end of the right hole part 711 on the left support part 709 side is an open end, and the opposite end is closed. The depth dimension from the open end of the right hole part 711 is larger than the protruding dimension of the shaft part 707 from the cover body 706.

The left support part 709 has the same configuration as the right support part 708, except that it is symmetrical. That is, it has a left bulge part 713 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate part 701a, and a left hole part 714 provided in the left bulge part 713.

Both ends of the shaft 707 are inserted into the holes 711, 714 of the right support part 708 and the left support part 709 with the bottom lid 704 positioned inside the tank body 701. This allows the bottom lid 704 to be connected to the tank body 701 in a state where it can rotate up and down, and the bottom lid 704 can be switched between a closed state in which it closes the lower opening 703 from inside the tank body 701, and an open state in which it rotates the bottom lid 704 upward from the closed state to open the lower opening 703.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), the front wall 701b of the tank body 701 is provided with a front wall bulge 716 that bulges forward. The front wall bulge 716 is located at the top of the front wall 701b, and its width is slightly larger than that of the lid body 706. When the bottom lid 704 is rotated toward the open position, a part of the lid body 706 can fit inside the front wall bulge 716.

Each wall portion 716a facing the front wall bulge portion 716 in the width direction is provided with a protrusion portion 716b that protrudes in a semicircular shape from each wall portion 716a toward the inside of the front wall bulge portion 716. Each of these protrusion portions 716b is disposed at the upper end of each wall portion 716a at a predetermined distance rearward from the front portion 716c of the front wall bulge portion 716. The distance between the protrusion portions 716b in the width direction of the front wall bulge portion 716 is slightly narrower than the width dimension of the lid main body 706, and when the bottom lid 704 is rotated toward the inside of the front wall bulge portion 716, the lid main body 706 is elastically deformed and enters between the protrusion portion 716b and the front portion 716c. This configuration makes it possible to keep the bottom lid 704 in the open position.

A handle portion 718 is provided on the front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701. The handle portion 718 has the same configuration as the handle portion 503 in each of the above embodiments, so a description of the handle portion 718 is omitted.

In this embodiment, the auxiliary tank 54 is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is engaged with the engagement portion 721 in the housing 11 to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54, and a second state in which the engagement is released to allow the auxiliary tank 54 to be removed from the housing 11. This configuration will be described below with reference to Figs. 160 to 163 in addition to Figs. 156 to 159. Fig. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the cross section of line H-H in Fig. 156, Fig. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the state before engagement, Fig. 162 is an explanatory diagram showing the engaged state, and Fig. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing the disengaged state. Note that in Fig. 163, for the sake of convenience, the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 156 to 158, the bottom plate portion 701a of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a cylindrical bottom through-hole 720 that penetrates the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The bottom through-hole 720 is disposed at the rear portion 701g of the bottom plate portion 701a, and is located at the rear end of the auxiliary tank 54. As shown in Figures 160 and 161, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with an engagement portion 721 that can engage with the bottom through-hole 720. The engagement portion 721 includes a storage portion 722 provided in the bottom plate 11a, and an engagement protrusion 723 that is stored in the storage portion 722 so that a portion of the engagement protrusion protrudes upward from the surface of the bottom plate 11a.

The engagement protrusion 723 has a generally cylindrical shaft portion 724 that extends vertically, and a head portion 725 that is connected to the upper end of the shaft portion 724, and the shaft portion 724 and the head portion 725 are integrally formed. The head portion 725 has a generally disk shape, and its diameter is larger than that of the shaft portion 724.

The storage section 722 is a bottomed vertical hole that opens upward, and includes a first hole 726 that is provided from the upper end position to the middle position of the storage section 722, and a second hole 727 that is provided from the middle position to the lower end position of the storage section 722. Both the first hole 726 and the second hole 727 are generally cylindrical and extend in the vertical direction. The diameter of the first hole 726 is larger than the diameter of the head 725 of the engagement protrusion 723, and the depth dimension of the first hole 726 is sufficiently larger than the thickness dimension of the head 725. Therefore, the head 725 can be accommodated inside the first hole 726. The second hole 727 is formed to extend downward from the center of the bottom surface 726a of the first hole 726, and the shaft 724 of the engagement protrusion 723 is inserted into the second hole 727. The diameter of the second hole 727 is slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft 724, and the engagement protrusion 723 is supported by the second hole 727 so that it can move up and down.

A coil spring 729 is disposed between the lower surface 725a of the head 725 and the bottom surface 726a of the first hole 726. The coil spring 729 is disposed with the shaft 724 inserted therethrough, and the engaging projection 723 is biased upward by the biasing force of the coil spring 729.

Here, the diameter Dc of the head 725 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd (see FIG. 158) of the bottom through-hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, when the bottom through-hole 720 is positioned above the head 725 and faces the head 725, the head 725 can be inserted into the bottom through-hole 720. When the head 725 is inserted into the bottom through-hole 720, the peripheral wall 720a of the bottom through-hole 720 comes into contact with the peripheral surface 725b of the head 725, restricting the forward/backward and left/right movement of the auxiliary tank 54.

In this embodiment, the thickness dimension of the head 725 is smaller than the vertical dimension of the bottom through-hole 720 (the direction in which the head 725 is inserted), but they may be the same, or the former may be larger than the latter.

The position of the engagement portion 721 (engagement protrusion 723) in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the housing 11) is set so that when the auxiliary tank 54 is inserted to a predetermined installation position in the housing 11, the engagement portion 721 engages with the bottom through-hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 160, the rear end of the auxiliary tank 54 is in close proximity to the rear plate 11b of the housing 11, in other words, the rear surface of the front door 12 (see FIG. 3) does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54 even when the front door 12 is closed. By setting such a position as the installation position, even if the front door 12 is closed with the bottom through-hole 720 engaged with the engagement portion 721, the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 do not interfere with each other, and damage to the auxiliary tank 54, the front door 12, and the engagement portion 721 due to the closure of the front door 12 is avoided.

On the other hand, the position of the engagement portion 721 in the left-right direction (width direction of the housing 11) is set so that when the end portion (right flange portion) of the auxiliary tank 54 on the side of the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 is abutted against the right side plate 11c, the left-right positions of the engagement portion 721 and the bottom side through hole 720 match. In this case, the engagement portion 721 and the bottom side through hole 720 can be aligned simply by installing the auxiliary tank 54 in a position where it abuts against the right side plate 11c. This not only makes the engagement work easier, but also allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be installed closer to the right side plate 11c, which is advantageous in terms of ensuring installation space for other mounted components such as the hopper device 51.

As shown in Figures 158 and 159(b), the back surface 706a of the lid body 706 is provided with a push-in protrusion 733 and two support protrusions 734 arranged on either side of the push-in protrusion 733. The push-in protrusion 733 and the support protrusions 734 are integrally formed with the lid body 706.

The pushing protrusion 733 is formed on the end of the lid body 706 opposite the shaft portion 707, and is disposed at a position corresponding to the bottom through-hole 720. As shown in FIG. 158, the pushing protrusion 733 is cylindrical and extends downward, and its tip is chamfered in a tapered shape. The diameter De of the pushing protrusion 733 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd of the bottom through-hole 720, and the pushing protrusion 733 can be inserted into the bottom through-hole 720.

The height dimension of the pushing protrusion 733 corresponds to the depth dimension of the bottom through-hole 720. Specifically, the height dimension of the pushing protrusion 733 is set so that the remaining dimension Ha, obtained by subtracting the height dimension of the support protrusion 734, is the same as or slightly larger than the depth dimension of the bottom through-hole 720.

Each support protrusion 734 has a roughly semicircular cross section and is disposed in a corner at the end of the lid body 706 opposite the shaft 707. When the bottom lid 704 is in the closed position and the lower opening 703 is closed, a space corresponding to the lower opening 703 is formed below the bottom lid 704, and the weight of the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 may cause the bottom lid 704 to bend. Even if such bending occurs, the support protrusion 734 abuts against the surface of the bottom plate 701a, making it possible to support the bottom lid 704 in a well-balanced manner.

As shown in Figures 156 to 158, the tank body 701 is provided with an upper sensor insertion hole 731a through which the upper sensor rod 16a (see Figure 6) is inserted, and a lower sensor insertion hole 731b through which the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted. Each of these sensor insertion holes 731a, 731b is formed in a horizontally elongated shape, and their height positions correspond to the height positions of the respective sensor rods 16a, 16b. Specifically, the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a is the same as or slightly shorter than the distance Lj (see Figure 160) from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower end of the upper sensor rod 16a. In addition, the distance from the bottom end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the bottom end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b is the same as or slightly shorter than the distance Lm (see FIG. 160) from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower sensor rod 16b.

For this reason, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the above-mentioned installation position, the auxiliary tank 54 and each of the sensor rods 16a, 16b come into contact or are close to each other at the lower ends of each of the sensor insertion holes 731a, 731b. As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 tries to move upward, this is restricted by each of the sensor rods 16a, 16b, and the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from floating up from the bottom plate 11a.

In this embodiment, both the distance from the bottom end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the bottom end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the distance from the bottom end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the bottom end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b correspond to the distances Lj and Lm, respectively, but it is also possible to configure only one of them. Also, as shown in FIG. 160, the vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b is approximately the same as the diameter (vertical width) of each sensor rod 16a, 16b, but this is not limited to this, and the vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b may be larger than the diameter of each sensor rod 16a, 16b. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the spilling of medals from each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b when medals are stored, the configuration of this embodiment is preferable.

Next, the method of engaging the bottom through-hole 720 with the engaging portion 721 will be described with reference to Figures 161 and 162.

To engage the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721, first, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front of the housing 11 open. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is positioned forward of the tips of the sensor rods 16a and 16b. At this time, as already explained, the auxiliary tank 54 is guided by the right side plate 11c, so that the left and right positions of the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 can be easily aligned.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the back of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. Then, as shown in FIG. 161, when the bottom side through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement portion 721 come into close proximity to a certain extent, the front end of the bottom plate portion 701a comes into contact with the engagement protrusion 723 protruding from the surface of the bottom plate 11a.

In this embodiment, an engagement inclined portion 745 is provided at the front end of the bottom plate portion 701a (where it abuts the head portion 725). The distance between the engagement inclined portion 745 and the bottom plate 11a narrows from the end on the engagement protrusion 723 side toward the bottom through-hole 720; in other words, the engagement inclined portion 745 is inclined downward when viewed in the opposite direction to the sliding movement direction of the auxiliary tank 54. An arc-shaped portion 746 that is convex toward the outside is provided above the engagement inclined portion 745, and the engagement inclined portion 745 and the front wall portion 701b are connected by the arc-shaped portion 746.

Because the coil spring 729 biases the engagement protrusion 723, the engagement protrusion 723 may protrude from the bottom plate 11a, and there is a risk that the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement protrusion 723 may interfere with each other in the process of sliding the auxiliary tank 54. In this regard, the provision of the arc-shaped portion 746 and the engagement inclined portion 745 makes it possible to push down the engagement protrusion 723 and guide it into the storage portion 722. This not only allows the auxiliary tank 54 to smoothly slide to a position where the engagement protrusion 723 and the bottom through-hole 720 engage, but also makes it possible to prevent damage to the engagement protrusion 723 and other parts that accompanies the installation of the auxiliary tank 54.

When the engagement protrusion 723 is pushed down, the coil spring 729 is compressed accordingly, storing a restoring force. Then, as shown in FIG. 162, when the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the installation position described above and the bottom-side through-hole 720 is positioned above the engagement protrusion 723, the downward force on the engagement protrusion 723 disappears, and the engagement protrusion 723 rises due to the restoring force of the coil spring 729. As a result, the engagement protrusion 723 is inserted into the bottom-side through-hole 720, and the two engage with each other. This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54.

Therefore, when transporting the slot machine 10, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the above-mentioned installation manner, rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 in the housing 11 can be suppressed, and damage caused by collisions between the auxiliary tank 54 and surrounding components during transport can be suppressed.

Next, the method for releasing the engagement between the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 will be described with reference to Figures 160, 162, and 163.

Release of the engagement is required when used in response to manual collection. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the installation position using the engagement method already described (see Figures 161 and 162). In this case, as shown in Figure 162, the lower surface of the pushing protrusion 733 comes into contact with the upper surface of the head 725 of the engagement protrusion 723, and the pushing protrusion 733 is pushed up together with the engagement protrusion 723.

As a result, the bottom cover 704 is pushed up, and as shown in FIG. 160, the bottom cover 704 comes to rest in a state where it is raised a predetermined height from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, in other words, in a state where it is rotated slightly upward. In addition, the engagement protrusion 723 rises and is inserted into the bottom through-hole 720, so that the engagement protrusion 723 and the bottom through-hole 720 engage with each other.

After that, when the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are successively stored in the auxiliary tank 54, they are placed on the bottom lid 704, and the weight of the medals acts on the bottom lid 704. Because the weight of the medals also acts on the coil spring 729 through the pushing protrusion 733 and the engagement protrusion 723, as the weight of the medals on the bottom lid 704 increases, the coil spring 729 is gradually compressed, and the bottom lid 704 rotates downward little by little. As a result, the engagement protrusion 723 is pushed down by the pushing protrusion 733, and the head 725 gradually comes out of the bottom through-hole 720.

When the amount of medals that can be stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount, as shown in FIG. 163, the head 725 is pushed completely out of the bottom through-hole 720. This disengages the bottom through-hole 720 from the engagement protrusion 723, allowing the auxiliary tank 54 to move. In other words, when a certain amount of medals accumulates in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 can automatically be removed, making it possible to collect the medals in the auxiliary tank 54.

The amount (weight) of medals that can be stored when the engagement is released should be less than the amount (full state) of medals that can be stored when each sensor rod 16a, 16b becomes conductive, and should be reached before fullness is detected. In this case, the engagement can be released with plenty of time before the employee of the amusement hall collects the medals (removes the auxiliary tank 54), preventing any disruption to the collection operation.

The engagement between the engagement portion 721 and the bottom through-hole 720 can also be released by manual operation. That is, the engagement between the two can be released by inserting a hand into the auxiliary tank 54 and pushing the bottom cover 704 downward. With this configuration, even if there are no medals contained in the auxiliary tank 54 or the amount of medals contained is small, the engagement can be released as necessary, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be removed as needed.

However, the auxiliary tank 54 may be removed even when there are no medals or the amount of medals that can be stored in the auxiliary tank 54 is small, for example, when the auxiliary tank 54 is temporarily moved aside in an attempt to pick up medals scattered inside the housing 11. In this case, if the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement protrusion 723 are engaged, a forceful removal operation may damage the auxiliary tank 54 or the engagement portion 721.

In this embodiment, therefore, to accommodate the above-mentioned removal operation, as shown in FIG. 158, a release inclined portion 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through-hole 720. The release inclined portion 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through-hole 720, located on the opposite side of the head portion 725 from the removal direction (pulling direction) of the auxiliary tank 54. The release inclined portion 741 is inclined so that the distance from the bottom plate 11a becomes narrower from the one end on the engagement protrusion 723 side toward the rear wall portion 701c side; in other words, it is inclined downward when viewed in the opposite direction to the removal direction of the auxiliary tank 54.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is removed, the engagement protrusion 723 comes into contact with the release inclined portion 741 and is pushed downward along the inclination of the release inclined portion 741 while sliding on its surface. Therefore, if the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out with a certain degree of pulling force, the engagement protrusion 723 can be retracted from the bottom through-hole 720 accordingly. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement portion 721 even if a forceful removal operation is performed.

In addition, in the bottom through-hole 720, the peripheral wall surface 743 on the opposite side to the release inclined portion 741 is not inclined, but is formed so as to be approximately parallel to the peripheral surface of the head 725. In other words, when sliding in the installation direction, the head 725 is actively hooked onto the peripheral wall surface 743, restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in forcefully when installing it, the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted from moving beyond the installation position and is prevented from violently colliding with the back plate 11b.

Next, the case where the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted for automatic collection will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram of the case where the auxiliary tank 54 is used in response to automatic collection.

When using the auxiliary tank 54 for automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is removed from the housing 11 with the front of the housing 11 open, and the bottom lid 704 is rotated upward to open the lower opening 703. At that time, the bottom lid 704 is rotated until a part of the lid body 706 enters between each protrusion 716b and the front part 716c in the front wall bulge 716. In this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall part 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located forward of the tips of the sensor rods 16a and 16b.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed towards the back of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. The auxiliary tank 54 is then advanced to a position where the lower opening 703 and the medal discharge hole 15 are in communication. At this time, the auxiliary tank 54 is stopped at a position just before the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 engage, so that the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 do not engage. This completes the installation of the auxiliary tank 54.

In this embodiment, the longitudinal dimension of the bottom lid 704 is sufficiently larger than the height dimension of the tank body 701. Therefore, when the bottom lid 704 is rotated to the open position, the end 704a at the tip of the rotation of the bottom lid 704 is positioned above the upper end of the tank body 701. An induction plate 52a (see FIG. 5) is disposed above the tank body 701 so as to protrude from the storage tank 52 toward the auxiliary tank 54.

In this embodiment, the position of the induction plate 52a, the longitudinal dimension of the auxiliary tank 54, the open position of the bottom lid 704, etc. are adjusted so that the induction plate 52a is located at a midpoint between the open position and the closed position of the bottom lid 704. Therefore, even if a strong impact is applied to the slot machine 10 such that the bottom lid 704 rotates toward the bottom plate portion 701a, the bottom lid 704 abuts against the outer surface of the front wall portion 52b of the induction plate 52a, thereby restricting the rotation of the bottom lid 704. This prevents the bottom lid 704 from falling to the closed position, making it possible to prevent the inconvenience of the lower opening 703 being closed.

In addition, by abutting the bottom lid 704 against the outer surface of the front wall portion 52b of the guide plate 52a, the rotation of the bottom lid 704 in the closing direction is restricted. This prevents the bottom lid 704 from blocking the medal discharge port of the guide plate 52a or from becoming interposed between the guide plate 52a and the lower opening 703. Even if the bottom lid 704 is left leaning against the guide plate 52a, medals can continue to be guided from the storage tank 52 to the lower opening 703, and medals can continue to be supplied to the automatic collection device.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 716b may be omitted. However, considering that the bottom cover 704 provides double protection with the induction plate 52a against tilting, and that the number of collisions of the bottom cover 704 with the induction plate 52a is reduced, thereby suppressing the generation of abnormal noise due to such collisions, it is preferable to use the configuration of the above embodiment.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a bottom through-hole 720 and an engagement portion 721 is provided inside the housing 11, and the engagement between the two is switched on and off depending on the state of the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are engaged to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank 54. On the other hand, when collecting medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 can be switched to a non-engaged state depending on the medals accumulated in the auxiliary tank 54, making it possible to remove the auxiliary tank 54 from inside the housing 11.

When no medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement part 721 are engaged, and when a medal is stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement part 721 are disengaged. In this case, during transportation when it is not expected that the auxiliary tank 54 will contain medals, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement part 721 restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54, while during operation, the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to be removed automatically as medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54. This not only eliminates the need for switching operations by hall employees, helping to eliminate hassle, but also prevents the inconvenience of forgetting to switch and performing removal operations while damaging the engagement part 721, etc.

When a medal is stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom cover 704 is displaced downward due to the weight of the medal, and as the bottom cover 704 is displaced downward, the engagement portion 721 (engagement protrusion 723) is pushed out of the bottom through hole 720 and moved to a non-engaged position.

The above configuration eliminates the need for a sensor for detecting weight, a drive unit for driving the engagement protrusion 723, and a control configuration for controlling the drive unit in response to the sensor detection results, which is advantageous for simplifying the configuration and reducing costs. In addition, since the bottom cover 704 can efficiently support the weight of the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the engagement unit 721 can be moved using the displacement of the bottom cover 704 to improve the responsiveness of the engagement unit 721 to changes in the medal storage state. This makes it possible to prevent delays in switching to the non-engaged state, which can cause problems when removing the auxiliary tank 54.

The bottom cover 704 is provided with a push-in protrusion 733 at a position on the rear side of the housing 11, and the bottom through-hole 720 and engagement portion 721 are provided on the rear side of the housing 11.

When the hall employee pulls out the auxiliary tank 54 from inside the cabinet 11, the front side of the auxiliary tank 54 is lightly lifted, and in that state, it is conceivable that the auxiliary tank 54 will slide forward along the bottom plate 11a. In this case, for example, if the push-in protrusion 733, bottom through-hole 720, and engagement portion 721 are configured to be located on the front side of the cabinet 11, it is conceivable that the push-in protrusion 733 will move away from the engagement portion 721 as the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted, which may cause an unintentional switch from a non-engaged state to an engaged state.

In this regard, by arranging the pushing protrusion 733, the bottom through hole 720, and the engagement portion 721 at the rear side of the housing 11, it becomes easier to maintain the pushing of the engagement portion 721 by the pushing protrusion 733, and unintentional switching from the disengaged state to the engaged state can be suppressed. This allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be smoothly pulled out.

When each sensor rod 16a, 16b is inserted into each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b, the peripheral portion of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b comes into contact with or approaches each sensor rod 16a, 16b, restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54. This allows the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 to be additionally restricted in addition to the engagement of the bottom through hole 720 and the engagement portion 721, making it possible to further suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, since each sensor rod 16a, 16b is utilized, there is no need to provide a separate dedicated structure for engagement, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of mounted parts.

The bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are engaged by sliding the auxiliary tank 54 placed on the bottom plate 11a. In this case, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 can be engaged by moving the auxiliary tank 54 on the bottom plate 11a without directly operating the bottom through-hole 720 or the engagement portion 721, making it easy to perform the engagement operation. This configuration also allows the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 to be placed in a location that is difficult for the worker (the person performing the engagement operation) to reach, improving the freedom of layout.

Moreover, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are engaged by sliding toward the back of the housing 11, which further simplifies the engagement operation. In other words, after the auxiliary tank 54 is installed, when closing the front door 12, it is necessary to push the auxiliary tank 54 deep into the housing 11 in advance so that the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 do not interfere with each other. However, according to this embodiment, it is possible to perform the operation of pushing the auxiliary tank 54 and the operation of engaging the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 in a single operation. In this case, the engagement is naturally achieved by performing the normal installation work, which also contributes to preventing forgetting to engage.

The bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are configured to engage with each other in the front-to-rear direction. In this case, the engagement between the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 can restrict movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-to-rear direction. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to be installed, the restriction of movement makes it possible to know that it has been installed in the correct position.

When the bottom lid 704 is in the open state, the end 704a at the tip of the rotation of the bottom lid 704 is positioned above the upper end of the tank body 701, and an induction plate 52a that abuts against the open bottom lid 704 at a predetermined open position is provided in a position above the tank body 701 inside the housing 11. As a result, even if the slot machine 10 is subjected to impact or vibration and the bottom lid 704 tilts, the induction plate 52a can regulate the rotation of the bottom lid 704, preventing unintended closure of the lower opening 703.

In this case, by rotating the bottom lid 704 forward from the closed state to switch to the open state, the bottom lid 704 in the open state can be positioned on the front door 12 side with respect to the guide plate 52a. This prevents medals supplied to the auxiliary tank 54 from hitting the bottom lid 704 and flying towards the front door 12, preventing them from hitting the front door 12. It also prevents medals from getting caught between the front door 12 and the tank body 701.

<Modification 1>
This modification differs from the fourth embodiment in that a configuration is added that defines the forward end position of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position in a mode compatible with automatic collection. This modification will be described below with reference to Figures 165 to 168. Figure 165 is a perspective view of the bottom cover 704, Figure 166 is a plan view of the tank body 701, Figure 167(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate 751 when closed, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate 751 when open, and Figure 168 is an explanatory diagram showing how the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 165, an extension plate 751 extending outward is provided on the short side of the bottom cover 704 on the shaft portion 707 side. The extension plate 751 is provided on the opposite side of the shaft portion 707 from the cover body 706, and is formed integrally with the shaft portion 707. The extension plate 751 has a generally rectangular shape extending in the axial direction of the shaft portion 707 in a plan view, and is disposed in the center of the shaft portion 707. The length of the extension plate 751 in the extension direction is set so that the distance from the pivot shaft 707a (see FIG. 167(a)) of the shaft portion 707 to the tip end 751a of the extension plate 751 is longer than the distance from the pivot shaft 707a to the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a.

As shown in FIG. 166, a cutout 752 is formed in the bottom plate front portion 701f of the bottom plate portion 701a of the tank body 701 in correspondence with the extension plate 751. The cutout 752 is rectangular in plan view and is sized to allow the extension plate 751 of the bottom lid 704 to pass through.

In this configuration, when the bottom lid 704 is in the closed position, as shown in FIG. 167(a), the extension plate 751 is located above the notch 752 and is housed inside the tank body 701. On the other hand, when the bottom lid 704 is rotated upward toward the open position, as shown in FIG. 167(b), the extension plate 751 rotates in the opposite direction (downward) on the opposite side of the lid body 706, passing through the notch 752 and causing the tip 751a to protrude downward from the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a.

As shown in FIG. 168, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 has a recess 754 formed by cutting out a part of the surface of the bottom plate 11a. The recess 754 is located in front of the medal discharge hole 15 in the movement path of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position (the position where the bottom side through hole 720 and the engagement part 721 are engaged) (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 6). The detailed location of the recess 754 is located on the passing area through which the tip part 751a of the extension plate 751 passes when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position on the bottom plate 11a. The depth of the recess 754 is deeper than the protruding length of the extension plate 751 from the back surface of the bottom plate part 701a, and the extension plate 751 can enter the recess 754 when it passes over the recess 754 (see FIG. 168(a)).

When the auxiliary tank 54 advances toward the installation position with the extension plate 751 inserted into the recess 754, the tip 751a of the extension plate 751 gets caught on a step 755 formed at the boundary between the recess 754 and the surface of the bottom plate 11a, as shown in FIG. 168(b). As a result, the advancement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, and the end position of the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is determined.

In this modified example, the position of the step 755 is set so that the tip 751a of the extension plate 751 abuts against the step 755 of the recess 754 before the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the installation position. The position of the step 755 in this case is also such that when the entire auxiliary tank 54 fits inside the housing 11 and the front door 12 is closed, there is no interference between the rear surface of the front door 12 and the front end of the auxiliary tank 54 (the end on the front door 12 side).

Therefore, when the bottom cover 704 is rotated to the open position, the auxiliary tank 54 can be stopped just before the installation position while being allowed to advance to a position where the front door 12 can be closed. Therefore, even if the worker (the game parlor employee) who performs the pushing operation does not pay special attention to the position of the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 can be installed in an appropriate position where the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 do not engage and the front door 12 can be closed.

On the other hand, when the bottom cover 704 is in the closed position and the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted for transporting the slot machine 10 or for manual collection, as already explained, the extension plate 751 is housed inside the tank body 701, and the tip 751a does not protrude downward from the back surface of the bottom plate 701a. Therefore, the tip 751a does not get caught on the step 755, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly advanced to the installation position.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the configuration for releasing the engagement between the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to Fig. 169. Fig. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54. In this modification, the bottom cover 514 of the auxiliary tank 54 and the structure related to its support are similar to those of the first embodiment. These are given the same reference numerals as those in the respective drawings of the first embodiment, and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 169, an engagement drive unit 761 that drives the engagement protrusion 723 of the engagement unit 721 is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. The engagement drive unit 761 has a solenoid as a drive source, and a transmission mechanism as a drive force transmission means that connects the solenoid and the engagement protrusion 723 and transmits the drive force of the solenoid to the engagement protrusion 723. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 101.

When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 101 is stopped and the solenoid is in a non-driven (non-energized) state, the engaging protrusion 723 is held in the raised position (engaged position) by the biasing force of the coil spring 729, and the bottom through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged. On the other hand, when a drive signal is output from the main control device 101 and the solenoid is driven (energized), the engaging protrusion 723 moves from the raised position to the lowered position (non-engaged position). As a result, the engaging protrusion 723 comes out of the bottom through-hole 720, disengaging them, and movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is permitted.

In this modified example, the main control device 101 monitors the electrical continuity between the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, and when it determines that they are electrically connected, i.e., that the auxiliary tank 54 is full, it outputs the above-mentioned drive signal to the engagement drive unit 761.

In this configuration, when the slot machine 10 is transported, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 using the engagement method described in the fourth embodiment (see Figures 161 and 162). During transportation, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, and no power is supplied to the slot machine 10, so that the main control device 101 does not output the drive signal to the engagement drive unit 761. Therefore, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement unit 721 engage with each other, and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 within the housing 11 can be restricted. This makes it possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation, and to suppress collisions between the auxiliary tank 54 and surrounding components and damage to them.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the cabinet 11 in the same manner as described above. In this case, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source (commercial power source of the amusement hall), and power is supplied to the slot machine 10. However, when no medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b are not conductive, so the main control device 101 does not output the drive signal, and the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are engaged.

Even when the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, if the auxiliary tank 54 is empty, for example, before the hall opens or after the hall closes for inspection or game setting, there is no need to move the auxiliary tank 54, and it is desirable for the auxiliary tank 54 to be immobile for work reasons. In this regard, even when power is supplied to the slot machine 10, if the medal storage capacity in the auxiliary tank 54 is below a predetermined level, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 engage with each other, so that unnecessary movement of the auxiliary tank 54 can be suppressed when it is not necessary to move it, and a configuration that is advantageous for work, etc. can be realized.

After that, when the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reach a predetermined amount and both sensor rods 16a, 16b become conductive, the main control device 101 outputs the above drive signal to the engagement drive unit 761. As a result, the engagement drive unit 761 becomes in a driven state, the engagement protrusion 723 descends, and the engagement between the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement unit 721 is released.

Furthermore, when both sensor rods 16a, 16b are conductive, as already explained, an external signal indicating that the tank is full is output to the management device of the amusement hall via the external central terminal board 121. The employee who has received the notification then goes under the slot machine 10 and removes the auxiliary tank 54 to collect the medals inside it. In this case, in this modified example, the bottom through-hole 720 has already been disengaged from the engagement portion 721, allowing the auxiliary tank 54 to be removed. Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 can be easily removed, making it possible to collect the medals.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed again in the housing 11 after the medals are collected, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are engaged, and then the engagement is released again as the two sensor rods 16a, 16b become conductive.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed upside down in the housing 11, as in the first embodiment described above, or the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed in an upward position with the bottom cover 514 engaged with the tank body 701 by a locking claw or the like, so that the auxiliary tank 54 can be held in an open position.

As described above, this modified example also makes it possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 when transporting the slot machine 10 while avoiding any adverse effects on the operation of removing the auxiliary tank 54 during manual collection, thereby significantly improving convenience.

In the above modified example, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are disengaged in response to detecting the full state of the auxiliary tank 54, but the engagement between the two may be disengaged before the full state is detected.

Specifically, a detection means can be provided in addition to the two sensor rods 16a, 16b to detect when the amount of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 has reached a specific amount that is less than full, and the engagement drive unit 761 can be driven and controlled based on the detection result of the detection means. In this case, the detection means can be electrically connected to the main control device 101, and a drive signal can be output from the main control device 101 when the main control device 101 detects that the specific amount of medals has been stored. This makes it possible to allow the auxiliary tank 54 to be removed before it becomes full.

This configuration allows for ample time to respond to the timing of removing the auxiliary tank 54 when it is detected to be full. Moreover, because the auxiliary tank 54 can be removed even if it is not full, it is also possible to respond to cases where some of the medals in the storage tank 52 are transferred to the auxiliary tank 54 for recovery.

The detection means may be a load sensor attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, or a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are provided at a height lower than the upper sensor rod 16a so as to sandwich the auxiliary tank 54 (tank body 701) from the front, back, left and right, and the amount of medals stored is detected when the light from the light-emitting element is continuously blocked by the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 for a predetermined period of time.

<Modification 3>
This modified example differs from the fourth embodiment in that a sensor that detects the state of medals contained in the auxiliary tank 54 is used to engage and disengage with the auxiliary tank 54. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figs. 170 to 173. Fig. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54, Fig. 171(a) is a perspective view of the lower sensor unit 801 and its surroundings, (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor unit 801, Fig. 172(a) is a perspective cross-sectional view of the auxiliary tank 54, (b) is a perspective cross-sectional view of the tank main body 701, and Fig. 173 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 171(a), this modified example has a lower sensor unit 801 instead of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 170, the lower sensor unit 801 is configured to engage with the bottom lid 802 by sandwiching the rear wall 701c of the tank body 701. The combination of the lower sensor unit 801, rear wall 701c, and bottom lid 802 will be described below. Note that the upper sensor rod 16a has the same configuration as that in each of the above embodiments, so its description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 171(a), the lower sensor unit 801 has a generally L-shaped cross section and is constructed by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness. The lower sensor unit 801 includes an attachment portion 811 for attaching the lower sensor unit 801 to the housing 11, and a sensor body 812 provided at the lower end of the attachment portion 811.

The mounting portion 811 extends along the back plate 11b of the housing 11, and a through-hole (not shown) is formed in the center thereof so as to penetrate the mounting portion 811 in the thickness direction. The shaft portion 813a (see FIG. 170) of the screw 813 is inserted into the through-hole from inside the housing 11, and a nut 814 is screwed onto the shaft portion 813a of the screw 813 from the rear side of the back plate 11b. This fixes the lower sensor unit 801 to the back plate 11b. A wire is connected to the shaft portion 813a or the nut 814 via a connection terminal, and the lower sensor unit 801 and the main control device 101 are electrically connected through the wire.

The sensor body 812 includes an extension 821 extending forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 811, a bent portion 822 that bends downward from the tip of the extension 821, and an engaging inclined portion 823 that rises diagonally upward from the tip of the bent portion 822. As shown in FIG. 171(b), the tip 823a of the engaging inclined portion 823 extends to approximately the same height as the upper end 822a of the bent portion 822, and the vertical width dimensions of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 are approximately equal.

As shown in FIG. 170, the extension dimension of the sensor body 812 from the mounting portion 811 corresponds to the length dimension of the upper sensor rod 16a. Specifically, the distance in the extension direction of the extension portion 821 from one end 821a (see FIG. 171(a)) on the back plate 11b side of the extension portion 821 to the tip 823a of the engagement inclined portion 823 is approximately the same as the distance from the back plate 11b of the upper sensor rod 16a to the tip of the sensor rod 16a. As a result, even if the shape of the lower sensor portion 801 differs from that of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6), the lower sensor portion 801 can be appropriately brought into contact with the medals in the auxiliary tank 54, and the full state can be detected satisfactorily.

As shown in Figures 172(b) and 173, the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 is provided with a lower sensor insertion hole 831 corresponding to the lower sensor portion 801. The lower sensor insertion hole 831 penetrates the rear wall portion 701c in the thickness direction and is formed to a size that allows the bent portion 822 and the engagement inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 to pass through.

As shown in Fig. 172(a) and Fig. 173, the bottom cover 802 has a cover body 835 having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and an engagement upright portion 836 that stands upward from an end portion 835a of the cover body 835 opposite to the shaft portion 832, and has a substantially L-shaped cross section. In the cover body 835, the distance from the shaft portion 832 (rotation center) to the end portion 835a is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft portion 832 on the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a to the end portion on the rear wall portion 701c side, and the cover body 835 extends so as to cover substantially the entire surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The engagement upright portion 836 stands upright so as to substantially follow the inner surface of the rear wall portion 701c in the vicinity of the rear wall portion 701c, and extends to a predetermined height position that is above the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and below the upper sensor insertion hole 731a.

A lid sensor insertion hole 837 is provided at the top of the engagement upright portion 836. The lid sensor insertion hole 837 penetrates the engagement upright portion 836 in the thickness direction and has a size that allows the bent portion 822 and the engagement inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 to pass through. The lid sensor insertion hole 837 is positioned in front of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 of the rear wall portion 701c in a front view of the engagement upright portion 836, corresponding to the lower sensor portion 801.

As shown in Figures 172(b) and 173, a coil spring 839 is disposed on the rear bottom plate portion 701g located between the lower opening 703 and the rear wall portion 701c in the bottom plate portion 701a. The coil spring 839 is fixed on a spring seat portion 840 formed by recessing a portion of the surface of the rear bottom plate portion 701g downward, and is disposed so as to exert an upward biasing force.

When the cover body 835 of the bottom cover 802 approaches the bottom plate portion 701a, a coil spring 839 is interposed between the cover body 835 and the bottom plate portion 701a, and the bottom cover 802 is biased upward by the coil spring 839. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 173, when the bottom cover 802 is in a state where the lower opening 703 is closed and no medals are placed on the cover body 835, the bottom cover 802 is raised by a predetermined height from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, and the engagement upright portion 836 of the bottom cover 802 is also stationary in a raised position.

When the engagement upright portion 836 is in the raised position, the height position of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 rises, so that the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is positioned higher than the upper end 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831. As a result, the vertical width of the space that communicates with the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 in the insertion direction of the lower sensor part 801, i.e., the distance Lq from the upper end 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837, is reduced compared to when the engagement upright portion 836 (bottom lid 802) is lowered. In this case, the distance Lq is smaller than the vertical width dimension Hb (see FIG. 171(b)) of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor part 801, making it impossible or difficult for the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 to pass through.

Next, the method of engaging and releasing the lower sensor unit 801 and the bottom cover 802 will be described with reference to Figs. 174 and 175. Fig. 174(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state before engagement, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the engaged state, and Fig. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the disengaged state. Note that for convenience, the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 are not shown in Fig. 175.

First, a method of engaging the lower sensor unit 801 with the bottom cover 802 will be described. To engage the lower sensor unit 801 with the bottom cover 802, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front of the housing 11 open. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is positioned forward of the tips of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor unit 801. At this time, the auxiliary tank 54 can be aligned in the left-right direction by placing it against the right side plate 11c, as in the fourth embodiment.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the back of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. Then, as shown in FIG. 174(a), when the auxiliary tank 54 approaches the back plate 11b to a certain extent, a part of the tip side of the engagement inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 provided in the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701, and abuts against the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 provided in the engagement upright portion 836 of the bottom lid 802.

Here, since the engagement inclined portion 823 is inclined downward when viewed in the direction of movement of the auxiliary tank 54, as the auxiliary tank 54 advances, the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 slides on the engagement inclined portion 823 and is gradually pushed downward along the inclination of the engagement inclined portion 823. As a result, the bottom lid 802 descends together with the engagement upright portion 836, and the coil spring 839 is compressed and a restoring force is stored.

In addition, as the engagement upright portion 836 descends, the height position of the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 decreases, and the distance Lq from the upper end 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 increases. The further the auxiliary tank 54 advances, the greater the increase in distance Lq becomes, until it finally becomes equal to or greater than the vertical width dimension Hb of the bent portion 822 and the engagement inclined portion 823. This allows the bent portion 822 and the engagement inclined portion 823 to pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 in its entirety.

When the auxiliary tank 54 advances further and the engagement inclined portion 823 passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837, the downward pressing force on the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 disappears. As a result, the engagement upright portion 836 rises due to the restoring force of the coil spring 729. As a result, as shown in FIG. 174(b), a part of the engagement upright portion 836 below the lid sensor insertion hole 837 (including the lower end 837a) enters between the bent portion 822 and the back plate 11b, and the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802 engage with each other.

In this case, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is moved in the direction opposite the back panel 11b, the engagement upright portion 836 abuts against the bent portion 822 of the lower sensor portion 801, restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54. On the other hand, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 toward the back panel 11b is restricted by the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 abutting against the screw 813 that fixes the lower sensor portion 801. In other words, in this modified example, the rear wall portion 701c and the engagement upright portion 836 are sandwiched between the bent portion 822 and the screw 813, restricting the forward and backward movement of the auxiliary tank 54.

As explained in the fourth embodiment above, the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the upper sensor rod 16a and the upper sensor insertion hole 731a.

In this way, when the forward/backward and upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, the entire auxiliary tank 54 fits within the housing 11, and even when the front door 12 is closed, the rear surface of the front door 12 does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54. In other words, in this modified example, the position of the auxiliary tank 54 when the lower sensor unit 801 and the bottom cover 802 engage corresponds to the installation position referred to in the fourth embodiment above.

Therefore, when transporting the slot machine 10, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the above-mentioned installation manner, rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 in the housing 11 can be suppressed, and damage caused by collisions between the auxiliary tank 54 and surrounding components during transport can be suppressed.

Next, the method of disengaging will be described. Disengagement is required when using the device for manual collection. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in the installation position using the engagement method already described (see Figures 161 and 162).

When the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are successively stored in the auxiliary tank 54, they are placed on the bottom lid 704, and the weight of the medals acts on the bottom lid 704. Because the weight of the medals also acts on the coil spring 839 through the bottom lid 704, as the weight of the medals on the bottom lid 704 increases, the coil spring 839 is gradually compressed, and the bottom lid 704 rotates downward little by little. As a result, the engagement upright portion 836 descends, and the distance Lq from the upper end 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 increases.

When the amount of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 exceeds a predetermined amount, as shown in FIG. 175, the engagement upright portion 836 (bottom lid 704) descends to the lowest position, and the distance Lq becomes greater than the vertical dimension Hb of the bent portion 822 and the engagement inclined portion 823. This allows the bent portion 822 and the engagement inclined portion 823 to pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 in their entirety, and the restriction on movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the withdrawal direction is released. In other words, when a certain amount of medals accumulate in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is automatically permitted to be removed, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted for automatic collection, as in the fourth embodiment, the auxiliary tank 54 is temporarily removed from the housing 11 with the front of the housing 11 open, and the bottom cover 704 is rotated upward to open the lower opening 703. Thereafter, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the above-mentioned installation position with the lower opening 703 still open.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a portion of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In the first embodiment, the probability of winning each special role is the same as the probability of winning each corresponding role in the normal game mode, but some of the probabilities may be different, or all of them may be different. For example, if the probability of winning a special specific role corresponding to a specific role is configured to be higher than the probability of winning a specific role, it becomes easier to experience a transition lottery to an attack mode or a lottery for an additional bonus in the normal game mode in a game in the specific mode. In contrast, if the probability is configured to be lower than that of a specific role, a transition lottery to an attack mode or a lottery for an additional bonus in the normal game mode is rarely performed in a game in the specific mode. This makes it easier for a player who has experienced that a transition lottery to an attack mode or the like is rarely performed in a practice specific mode to experience that a transition lottery is frequently performed in the normal game mode.

The probability of winning the first PBB or second PBB in the specific mode may be different from the probability of the first BB or second BB in the normal play mode, for example, a higher probability than the first BB or second BB, or a lower probability than the first BB or second BB. A higher probability makes it easier to experience the first BB or second BB, while a lower probability makes it less likely that an event will occur in which a bonus state (special bonus state) is entered during the specific mode, and the lottery for the first BB or second BB in the normal play mode is not held until the bonus state is ended.

(2) In the first embodiment, the lottery table in a specific mode is set to be equivalent to the lottery table in the normal game state in the normal game mode, but it may be set to be equivalent to the lottery table in another game state (e.g., the bonus state).

(3) In the first embodiment, the end condition for the first PBB and the second PBB is set to end after the number of games played is equal to the number of times the first BB and the second BB are performed (payout of 24 coins), but the configuration may be such that the game ends with the payout of fewer coins than 24 coins (e.g., 3 coins) so that the game can end sooner. For example, if the configuration ends with the payout of 3 coins, then in a 1 bet game, it will be 3 games (1 bet, 3 games with 1 coin paid out), and in a 3 bet game, it will be 1 game (3 bets, 1 game with 3 coins paid out), making it possible to end the game sooner than in the first embodiment.

(4) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB are provided, but the configuration may be such that the first PBB and the second PBB are not provided. Instead, a one-coin payout role is provided that wins the same winning mode as the first PBB and the second PBB, that is, the same number that wins the first BB or the second BB in the normal game mode. Then, when the one-coin payout role is won (at the time of winning), a performance that wins (wins) the first PBB or the second PBB may be generated. In this case, if the one-coin payout role is configured to win in a winning game as a role with no misses, there is no need to provide processing that corresponds to the state in which the first PBB or the second PBB is carried over.

Furthermore, in this case, the special role (such as the 30th P minor role) corresponding to the role (such as the 30th minor role) that can be won during the bonus state is configured to win or not win depending on the difference between the special role that can be won during the normal game state and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and after a one-coin payout role that wins with the same result as the first BB or second BB win is won, the operation sequence of the special role that can be won during the bonus state is announced over a predetermined number of games (e.g. 24 games), and the special role is won. This makes it possible to experience a pseudo bonus state over a predetermined number of games.

In addition, as the push order role, multiple types of the above-mentioned losing minor role are provided, and a push order role with multiple losing minor roles set is provided. That is, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation sequence, the first losing minor role is won, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation sequence, the second losing minor role is won. And, when the one coin payout role corresponding to the above-mentioned first PBB or second PBB is won, but the winning combination corresponding to the first PBB or second PBB is not won (when the one coin payout role is won with a random combination), one medal is paid out, and the type of the losing minor role notified when the above-mentioned push order role is won is changed. That is, before the winning of the one-coin payout role corresponding to the first PBB or the second PBB, the first operation sequence is announced so that the first losing minor role is more likely to be won, and the first operation sequence is set to an operation sequence that is usually performed (such as the order in which the left reel is stopped), and after the winning of the one-coin payout role corresponding to the first PBB or the second PBB, the operation sequence of the second losing minor role is announced. In this way, it is possible to make the results different between the carryover state and the non-carryover state, and to make so-called reach eyes appear.

(5) In the first embodiment, the specific mode is basically performed using a 1-bet game, but the specific mode may be performed using a 2-bet game, or the normal game mode may be performed using a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, and the specific mode may be performed using a 3-bet game.

(6) In the first embodiment, in addition to the normal game state and the bonus state, each RT state may be set in the 1-bet game, and the transition (promotion/decline) to each RT state may be performed by a special replay or a special transition result that corresponds to each replay. In this case, if at least a losing minor combination that pays out one coin is provided, it is possible to play the 1-bet game as a free mode with no (few) medal gains or losses.

(7) In the first embodiment, the lottery process for the 1-bet game may also have a result that is a complete miss, meaning that no index value will result in a win.

(8) In the first embodiment, whether the normal game mode or the specific game mode is being played may be output to an external device. The external output destination may be, for example, a hall computer in the game hall, or a data display device installed in the game hall. In this case, the hall computer or data display may be configured to separately manage the game history for the normal game mode and the specific game mode, or may be configured to manage at least the game history for the normal game mode, but not manage the game history for the specific game mode.

(9) In the first embodiment, the configuration for distinguishing between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to the stamp 65a or the distinguishing device 65b, and may be other configurations. For example, when the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 is used to distinguish between the normal game mode and the specific mode, the background color may be different between the normal game mode and the specific mode instead of or in addition to the stamp 65a. In this case, when the display content during the specific mode is determined by the display control device 81, it is preferable to obtain the performance data of the corresponding performance content during the normal game mode, rewrite the color data in the performance data, and set it as the display content during the specific mode. This allows a significant reduction in storage capacity compared to a configuration in which performance data for the specific mode is stored separately. In addition, when the display content is distinguished by the distinguishing device 65b, if a position protruding from the slot machine 10 (for example, upward) is set as the specific position, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily know that the specific mode is in progress even from a distance.

In addition, a standing wall is provided at the end of the side of the slot machine 10 (for example, the right side opposite to the rotating shaft side) that protrudes forward and extends up and down. The standing wall may be used to display the identification mark. This makes it possible to display the identification mark at a position that is not noticeable to players playing while viewing the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop switches 42 to 44, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and that is easily visible to managers of the game hall. In this case, for example, the identification mark may not be displayed on the standing wall facing inward (toward the player), and the identification mark may be displayed on the standing wall facing outward (toward the adjacent game machine). In this way, it is possible to display the identification mark in a way that is even less noticeable to players playing. In addition, by doing this, players playing on an adjacent gaming machine can easily understand that the adjacent gaming machine (this gaming machine) is playing in a specific mode, and it is also possible to prevent players from mistaking the gameplay of this gaming machine, in which medals are not reduced, for fraudulent activity.

(10) In the first embodiment, in the lottery table during a specific mode, all the winning combinations were set to be different in the normal game state and the bonus state (special bonus state). However, some or all of the combinations may overlap, and it is sufficient that the winning probability of each combination is different at least in the normal game state and the bonus state.

(11) In the first embodiment, in the specific mode, in both the normal game state and the bonus state, one coin is bet and one coin is paid out, but it is sufficient that the expected payout number for the number of medals inserted is the same in both the normal game state and the bonus state. For example, in the normal game state, one coin is bet and one coin is paid out (expected payout number for the number of medals inserted = 1/1), and in the bonus state, three coins are bet and three coins are paid out (expected payout number for the number of medals inserted = 3/3). In addition, in the normal game state and the bonus state, the gameplay without a losing result has been described, but if a losing result is realized, it is sufficient that the expected payout number for the number of medals inserted, including a losing result, is the same in each state.

(12) In the first embodiment, the first PBB or second PBB that can be won in a one-bet game may be set as a combination with no misses. By doing so, it is possible to ensure that the first PBB or second PBB wins in a game in which the first PBB or second PBB is won. This can eliminate the loss of medals that occurs when the first PBB or second PBB is carried over.

(13) In the first embodiment, the first PBB or second PBB that can be won in a one-bet game may be set as a role that pays out one medal when won. This can eliminate the loss of medals that occurs in games in which the first PBB or second PBB is won.

(14) In the first embodiment, when a special replay win is achieved in a specific mode, an automatic bet may not be made. In this way, the difference between whether or not a bet is made for a lip minor win can be eliminated. Also, when a lip minor win is achieved, an automatic bet of one medal may be made instead of a payout of one medal. Even in this way, the difference between whether or not a bet is made for a lip minor win and a special replay win can be eliminated.

(15) In the second embodiment, the configuration of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and the fifth credit insertion switch 75 for performing betting operations for the specific mode is not limited to the above, and may be other operating units. For example, the entire decorative panel 80 may be a pressing operating unit, and the betting operation for the specific mode may be performed by the operating unit on the decorative panel 80. Also, a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be provided, and the detection of a part of the player's body, such as a hand, by the sensor may be regarded as a betting operation in the specific mode. Also, a MAX BET button may be provided, and the number of coins bet by operating the MAX BET button may be changed depending on the presence or absence of a special top-up flag, etc.

(16) In the second embodiment, the roles that can be won during a specific mode are not limited to those mentioned above, and may include other roles or roles that do not include any of those mentioned above. For example, the first PBB or the second PBB may also be winnable. When the first PBB or the second PBB is won, a bonus state is entered for a predetermined number of games (until a predetermined number of coins are paid out), but when a special addition occurs, etc., the first PBB or the second PBB is won or placed, and the state transitions to a bonus state, and an addition is further performed in each game during the bonus state (i.e., it is treated as a specialized zone).

In addition, for example, while special replay and special red 7 combinations are provided, the configuration may be such that special replay and special red 7 combinations are not provided.

There may be a non-winning result that does not win any role, or a losing minor role as in the first embodiment. The number of added games may be reduced for these non-winning results or losing minor roles, or the configuration may be such that no added games are played.

Special specific roles are special watermelon, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, special replay, and special red 7 combination, but one or more of these may be winnable. Also, multiple lottery tables may be provided in the specific mode, and roles that may be won or are more likely to be won may differ depending on each table. In this case, for example, in the normal game mode, if the second RT state (corresponding to attack mode) is reached in the normal game mode, the lottery table for the specific mode may be different depending on the game state in the normal game mode, such that the lottery table for the specific mode is held at a table that wins the special watermelon, and if the third RT state (corresponding to VB mode) is reached, the lottery table for the specific mode may be different depending on the game state in the normal game mode.

(17) In the second embodiment, the role that can be won during the specific mode may include a push order role, or may be a push order role for any role. For example, the push order roles of special watermelon and special strong cherry may be set as the push order roles, and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in the winning of the corresponding special specific role may be notified according to the number of added games won. For example, the special watermelon and the special strong cherry are set so that the number of added games is generally greater for the special strong cherry. Therefore, when a relatively large number of added games is selected during the drawing of the specific mode in the special add-on, the operation sequence that will result in the winning of the special strong cherry is notified, and when a small number of added games is selected, the operation sequence that will result in the winning of the special watermelon is notified. In this way, it is possible to better associate the winning role with the number of added games.

In addition, as a push order role, a push order role may be set for each special specific role in the second embodiment and a role of a dice that notifies the granting of a special benefit such as a specified bonus (for example, the fourth lip minor role and the fifth lip minor role in the first embodiment). In addition, a push order role may be set for a role of a dice that notifies the granting of a special benefit such as a specified bonus and a losing minor role. And, regardless of whether or not a special add-on is won, a configuration may be set in which a game is played in a specific mode, and if a special add-on is won, the operation sequence for a winning dice role that notifies the granting of a special benefit such as the specified bonus is notified, and if not, the operation sequence for a losing minor role or a winning special specific role is notified.

(18) In the second embodiment, the timing for playing in the specific mode is not limited to the time when the attack mode is added, and may be other timing. For example, in the normal mode, it may be used as a winning notification effect for the challenge mode or attack mode. In this case, for example, as in (17) above, each role in the specific mode is a push order role with a dice role that notifies the granting of a special benefit such as a predetermined bonus. Then, if the challenge mode or attack mode is won, the dice role that notifies the granting of the special benefit notifies the operation sequence that can be won, and if not, the operation sequence that can be won by the special specific role or the missing minor role may be notified.

(19) In the second embodiment, if a specific role is won during the normal game mode and a prize is won (a payout is made), a special add-on in the specific mode is likely to occur, and if a prize is not won (no payout is made due to a miss), a special add-on in the specific mode is unlikely to occur. By doing this, it is possible to improve the significance of having the player press the button when a specific role is won and not miss out. Furthermore, by doing this, it becomes less likely that the credit counter will be 0 when the specific mode starts. This makes it possible to ideally realize the gameplay of operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 in the specific mode.

(20) In the second embodiment, the closer the credit counter value is to the upper limit, the less likely it is that a special addition due to a specific mode will occur, and the further it is from the upper limit (the smaller the credit counter value), the more likely it is that a special addition due to a specific mode will occur. In the special addition due to a specific mode, even if one coin is paid out, a sound effect corresponding to the payout sound effect in the normal game mode is generated. For example, when a special watermelon is won, a payout sound effect corresponding to the watermelon is output and 1 is added to the credit counter. In this case, if the special watermelon is won when the credit counter value is close to the upper limit (for example, 49), the credit counter is incremented by 1 to the upper limit (50) and four medals are paid out from the hopper device 51, corresponding to the payout of five medals for the watermelon win. However, in the case of a special watermelon win, only the credit counter is incremented and no medals are paid out. In this case, even if the special watermelon winning effect has been set, the fact that a special watermelon winning has occurred will be clearly identified by the fact that no medals are paid out from the hopper device 51. Therefore, if the smaller the credit counter value is, the more likely it is that a special addition will occur in the special mode, making it possible to avoid the contradiction of whether or not medals are paid out when pseudo-producing a special winning combination. In this case, for example, the special addition in the special mode may be made more likely to occur if the credit counter is 41 or less, and made less likely to occur if the credit counter exceeds 41, so that even if nine medals, which corresponds to the maximum number of medals that can be paid out for a special winning combination, are paid out, only the credit counter is incremented.

(21) In the second embodiment, the special bonus for a specific mode is an bonus for the number of continuing games in attack mode or an bonus for VB mode, but the bonus for a specific mode game is not limited to this. For example, the bonus for a specific mode game may be a bonus for a rare image, or a password or the like that allows the effects in normal play mode to be changed. In a configuration in which a rare image is granted, the rarity of the rare image granted may be varied depending on the type of special role won in a game in a specific mode. Also, in a configuration in which a password or the like is granted, the changeable effects in normal play mode may be varied depending on the type of special role won in a game in a specific mode.

(22) In the second embodiment, in the credit display invisibility processing of step S5503, the display of the credit display section 60, etc. is turned off. However, for example, the display of the credit display section 60, etc. may continue but the visibility of the display may be reduced (for example, the display may be made fainter than usual), or the visibility of the credit display section 60, etc. may be reduced by performing a performance at a position overlapping the credit display section 60, etc. (for example, the reel may be made to overlap the credit display section 60, etc. in the front-to-back direction).

(23) In the second embodiment, the special role bonus that triggers the special addition may be different from the above. For example, instead of five medals being paid out based on the winning of a watermelon role, three medals may be paid out. In this case, in a situation where a watermelon role bonus is achieved in which three medals are paid out in a game played as a three-bet game, and in a situation where a special watermelon role bonus is achieved in which one medal is paid out in a game played as a one-bet game, actual medal payouts are unlikely to be performed in both cases (there is only an increase or decrease in the credit counter), which is preferable in terms of reducing the distinguishability of both situations. In other words, by setting the special role bonus that triggers the special addition to three or less, which is the number of bets, it is possible to suitably reduce the distinguishability from the situation where a special special role bonus is achieved.

(24) The display modes of normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone configurations, transition triggers, transition probabilities, number of continuing games, etc. are not limited to those described above and may have other configurations. For example, in each of the above embodiments, the specialized zone is configured to transition upon winning the seventh replay during VB mode, but it may also be configured to transition during attack mode, and the role that triggers the transition may be part of a specific role such as watermelon.

(25) The configurations of the normal game state, RT state, and bonus state as game states, as well as the transition trigger, transition probability, number of games to be continued, etc. are not limited to those described above, and may be other configurations. In this case, for example, in the first embodiment described above, a special combination that will be awarded based on the stop number that appears when the game state transitions may be set in a specific mode.

(26) The pay lines set in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game are not limited to the downward sloping line L4 and the curved line L6. For example, the curved line L6 may be set in the 3-bet game, and the downward sloping line L4 may be set in the 1-bet game. In this case, it is advisable to set the winning mode of each combination so that a winning combination is achieved when the combination stops in the 3-bet game in each of the above embodiments.

(27) Although the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the operation order may be notified by outputting a sound from the speaker 64, the operation order may be suggested by lighting the lamp of the stop switch to be operated next in a different color from the other stop switches, the backlight of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be turned on or off to suggest the next reel to be stopped, or other display devices or role devices may be provided to notify the operation order. Furthermore, the operation order may be notified by a combination of these configurations.

(28) A configuration may be adopted in which a penalty is given to a player depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a penalty is given when an operation is performed in a different operation sequence from the operation sequence notified when the push order role is won (when an operation is performed that results in a winning role other than the role to be notified), or when an operation sequence different from a predetermined operation sequence (for example, an operation sequence in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) is performed even though the state in which the operation sequence is not notified when the push order role is won, or even though the operation sequence is not notified when the push order role is won. To impose a penalty, for example, the reel control process by the main control device 101 may determine whether or not an operation that is subject to a penalty (a specific operation that is subject to a specified penalty) has been performed based on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44, and the main control device 101 may execute a penalty process that, for example, does not hold a lottery for challenge mode, attack mode, etc. for a specified number of games, does not hold a lottery for adding the number of games to be continued in challenge mode, attack mode, etc., or holds these lotteries but holds lotteries with a lower probability of winning than when no penalty is imposed.

In this case, a penalty notification that a specific operation that is subject to the above-mentioned specified penalty has been performed may be configured to be notified by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification may be configured to be performed by the display control device 81. In this case, the display control device 81 is able to grasp that a specific operation has been performed by a command output when the main control device 101 identifies that the above-mentioned specific operation has been performed, and is able to execute processing to notify the above-mentioned penalty.

For example, the main control device 101 may be configured to perform the above-mentioned penalty processing when a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, but not to perform the above-mentioned penalty processing when a specific operation is performed in the specific mode. The specific mode is a game mode in which the number of medals is not increased or decreased by returning equal coins, and if a penalty were to be imposed in such a game mode, an event could occur that goes against the purpose of providing the specific mode, such as a penalty being imposed even though the number of medals is not increased or decreased.

In this case, the display control device 81 may be configured to notify the player of the penalty when a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and also to notify the player of the penalty when a specific operation is performed in the specific mode. In this way, in a configuration in which the specific mode is set as a practice mode, it is possible to inform the player that a penalty will be imposed if such a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, thereby enhancing the significance of the practice mode.

Furthermore, the display control device 81 may be configured to notify the player of the details of the penalty when a specific operation is performed in a specific mode. The content notification may be a notification explaining that the lottery for the attack mode or the like will be less favorable than usual, as described above. In this way, it is possible to improve the significance of providing the specific mode as a practice mode.

(29) Although the normal game mode and the specific mode are realized by the difference in the number of bets, they may be realized by other configurations. For example, even if the number of bets is the same, a changeover switch that can be switched between a first position and a second position may be configured so that when the changeover switch is switched to the first position, the normal game mode can be executed, and when the changeover switch is switched to the second position, the specific mode can be executed. The changeover switch may be provided in a position where the player can perform a changeover operation (e.g., the front of the slot machine 10), or in a position where the player cannot perform a changeover operation (e.g., the back of the slot machine 10). In addition, the normal game mode and the specific mode may be switched by a setting value that makes the winning probability of each role different in the lottery by the lottery means. Specifically, when the setting value is the minimum value 1 or the intermediate value 3, the specific mode can be executed, and when the setting value is other than the above, the normal game mode can be executed.

(30) The effective lines in the normal game mode and the specific mode are not limited to those described above. For example, in the normal game mode, in a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, the other straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as the effective lines instead of the downward-right line L4, or a line with a bend may be set as the effective line in the normal game mode. Also, in the specific mode, the straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as the effective lines, or a line with a bend may be set as the effective line. The number of effective lines in the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to one, and may be two or more, or the number of effective lines in both game modes may be different. When the effective lines in both game modes are composed of multiple effective lines in either or both game modes, one of the effective lines may overlap in both game modes, and in this case, it is sufficient that at least one effective line that does not overlap with each other's effective lines is included.

(31) Although various effects are performed using the auxiliary display unit 65, other means may be used to perform various effects. For example, various effects may be performed using a so-called full-screen LCD in which the game panel 25 is a liquid crystal display panel that covers the entire display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R while still allowing each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be seen, or various effects may be performed on the decorative panel 80 below the stop switches 42 to 44, or various effects may be performed using movable gadgets, etc.

(32) Although the slot machine has been described as having a BB state (1st BB, 2nd BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), a CB state (CB, PCB), and each RT state as a bonus state, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the slot machine may not have a BB state or a CB state, or may have other game states such as a regular bonus (RB) state or a single bonus (SB) state.

(33) In the normal game mode, the game can be started by betting three or one medal, but it may be configured so that the game cannot be started when one medal or two medals have been bet. In this case, in the first embodiment, the second effect switch 67 can be operated to switch to a specific mode to allow one medal bet, and in the second embodiment, the special add-on flag can be set to allow one medal bet. When these one medal bets are allowed, other bets (three medal bets or two medal bets) may be prohibited.

(34) In addition to the bonus of changing the game state and the bonus of replay, the bonus of paying out medals is included as the bonus to be awarded, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and any bonus may be awarded to the player. For example, instead of the bonus of paying out medals, a prize other than medals may be paid out. In particular, when playing in a specific mode as a free mode as in the first embodiment, the number of medals is not increased or decreased, so that even if a large number of games is added, for example, an increase in medals cannot be expected. Therefore, for example, when the number of pseudo wins reaches a predetermined number or more, a bonus such as displaying a rare image may be awarded.

(35) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop buttons arranged in parallel and four active lines has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and may be, for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop buttons arranged in parallel, or a slot machine having seven active lines. From the viewpoint of preventing erroneous operations when stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop buttons are sufficient.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, the bottom plate portion 501a, 602, 701a is provided with a bottom through hole 720, which is opened and closed by the bottom lid 514, 606, 704, 802. However, the entire bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 may be opened, and the opening may be opened and closed by the bottom lid 514, etc.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 is configured to be installed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. However, the auxiliary tank 54 may be configured to be installed at a location other than the bottom plate 11a, such as on a mounted component disposed within the housing 11.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, a rod-shaped sensor is used as a storage state detection means for detecting the storage state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54. However, other sensors may be used, such as a load sensor attached to the bottom plate 11a.

(39) In each of the above embodiments, the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 is used to guide the left and right position of the auxiliary tank 54. However, such a guide may be configured by something other than the right side plate 11c, for example, by providing a predetermined guide member that extends in the front-rear direction on the bottom plate 11a. In addition, the configuration is not limited to guiding only one side of the auxiliary tank 54, but may be configured to guide on both sides.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration includes two sensor rods, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, but the lower sensor rod 16b may be omitted. In this case, for example, a conductive plate may be placed on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and the main control device 101 may monitor the electrical continuity between the conductive plate and the upper sensor rod 16a.

(41) In the first and third embodiments, the lower openings 512, 603 may be omitted, the bottom plates 501a, 602 may be closed, and the bottom lids 514, 606 may be omitted. In this case, by placing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward, not only is the auxiliary tank 54 fixed to the housing 11, but the medal discharge hole 15 can also be blocked by the auxiliary tank 54. Note that when the configuration in which the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom lids 514, 606 are omitted is used to accommodate automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 can be removed from inside the housing 11.

In addition, if the lower openings 512, 603 and bottom covers 514, 606 are omitted, it is not necessary to configure the auxiliary tank 54 to engage by installing it facing downwards. For example, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed sideways with the upper opening 502 facing left or right, or installed upright with the upper opening 502 facing forward or backward, so that the auxiliary tank 54 engages. Even in such cases, it is possible to notice at a glance that the tank is installed in a manner different from the normal installation manner, and it is possible to encourage the user to notice that the tank is engaged (fixed).

Furthermore, even in the configuration in which the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom lids 514, 606 are provided, the auxiliary tank 54 may be engaged in the above-mentioned sideways or upright position. In this case, it is not necessary to use the same position of the auxiliary tank 54 when transporting the slot machine 10 and when used in response to automatic collection. For example, the auxiliary tank 54 may be in the above-mentioned sideways or upright position when transporting, and in the case of automatic collection, in the downward position. In particular, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position, there is an advantage that the upper opening 502 can be used to secure a medal movement path from the lower openings 512, 603 to the medal discharge hole 15, so that the auxiliary tank 54 is preferably in the downward position to respond to automatic collection. In addition, considering that it is not necessary to change the position of the auxiliary tank 54 each time when transporting and when automatic collection is performed, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(42) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom covers 514, 606 are configured to rotate, but they may be configured to move up and down or diagonally, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, the bottom covers may descend to open the lower openings 512, 603. In this case, it is preferable to form an inclined surface that descends toward the upper opening 502 (medal discharge hole 15) on the back surface of the bottom covers (the surface that becomes the upper surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position). With this configuration, medals that pass through the lower openings 512, 603 and reach the back surface can be smoothly guided toward the medal discharge hole 15.

(43) In the first and third embodiments, the engaging portion 574 for engaging the auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, but the auxiliary tank 54 may be configured to engage with a mounted component in the housing 11, for example, by providing such an engaging portion on the hopper device 51 or the like. In this case, it is not necessary to engage the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54 with the engaging portion. For example, a portion other than the flange portion 571 may be engaged, for example, by providing an engaged portion that can engage with the engaging portion at a midpoint in the height direction of each of the walls 501b to 501e of the tank body 501. In this case, the height position of the engaged portion may be changed depending on the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion may not reach each other in the upward attitude, and may reach each other only in the downward attitude. This makes it possible to suppress the inconvenience of unintentionally engaging the two portions and restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the upward attitude.

(44) In the first and third embodiments, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the auxiliary tank 54 is engaged only on the left side when viewed from the front. However, the auxiliary tank 54 may be engaged on the right side or rear side by providing an engagement portion that engages with the left flange portion 571d or the rear flange portion 572b of the tank body 501 on the bottom plate 11a, the back plate 11b, or the right side plate 11c. The engagement portion is not limited to the left side of the auxiliary tank 54. However, in a configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the right corner of the housing 11, by arranging the engagement portion on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54, the engagement portion is easier to see than when it is arranged on the right side or rear side, and it is easier to visually check whether or not the engagement is performed. In light of this, it is preferable to arrange the engagement portion on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54. Incidentally, in a configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the left corner of the housing 11, it is preferable to arrange the engagement portion on the right side of the auxiliary tank 54.

(45) In the first and third embodiments, the flange portion 571 is used as the first engagement portion. However, for example, a portion of the upper end of the tank body 501 that protrudes outward other than the flange portion 571 may be used as the first engagement portion. In this case, the protruding portion does not necessarily need to be provided around the entire periphery of the tank body 501, but may be provided corresponding to a portion of the periphery.

(46) In the first and third embodiments, the engaging portion 574 is integrally formed with the hopper mounting plate 22. However, the engaging portion may be provided independently of the hopper mounting plate 22, or may be integrally formed with a peripheral member other than the hopper mounting plate 22 (e.g., the hopper device 51).

(47) In the first and third embodiments described above, when the right flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement portion 574 are engaged, the upper surface of the right flange portion 571c and the lower surface of the protruding portion 578 of the engagement portion 574 come into contact with each other (see FIG. 18(c)). However, the configuration may be such that they merely approach each other and a gap is formed between them. In other words, engagement does not necessarily have to involve contact.

(48) In the first and third embodiments, a display unit displaying predetermined information may be provided on the back surface of the bottom plate portion 501a (the surface that becomes the upper surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position), and the predetermined information may be hidden when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position and may be displayed when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position. With such a configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, it is possible to alert the worker (the employee of the game hall) who performs the removal operation, and to prevent the worker from performing an unreasonable removal operation. Conversely, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position, the predetermined information is invisible or difficult to see, which prevents the worker from being confused by the display of the predetermined information and prevents the medal collection operation from being hindered. Note that the predetermined information may be, for example, information explaining a method for releasing the engagement state (for example, "Please slide to remove the medal!", etc.).

The display unit (specified display) is not limited to the bottom plate portion 501a, and may be provided on other wall portions such as the front wall portion 501b. In this case, it is preferable to configure the specified information to be upside down when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position. This makes it difficult to view the specified information (difficult to identify the contents) when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position, and easy to view (easy to identify the contents) when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position. Furthermore, the specified information does not have to be configured to be directly visible, and may be configured to be indirectly visible, such as through a mirror or the like.

(49) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom lids 514, 606 are disposed inside the tank body 501, 601, but they may be disposed outside the tank body 501, 601 or inside the lower opening 512, 603. In this case, it is advisable to provide a restricting means for restricting the bottom lids from rotating beyond the closed position toward the outside of the tank body 501, 601. This makes it possible to prevent the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from falling out, even if the bottom lids are not in contact with the surface of the bottom plate portion 501a, 602.

(50) In the third and fourth embodiments, similar to the first embodiment, the bottom lid 606, 704, 802 may be tilted at a predetermined rotation angle between the closed position and the open position and moved in a predetermined removal direction to release the connection between the bottom lid 606, 704, 802 and the tank body 601, 701. Conversely, in the first embodiment, the bottom lid 514 may be configured to be unremovable.

(51) In the first embodiment described above, the bottom lid 514 may be configured to engage with the tank body 501 in the closed position. In this case, the bottom lid 514 can be held in the closed position, and the slot machine 10 can be transported with the lower opening 512 closed.

(52) In the first embodiment, the rotation limiting means (protrusion 535) is provided on the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514, but it may be provided on the shaft portion 522 of the bottom lid 514 or on the right side wall portion 501d of the tank body 501.

(53) In the first embodiment, the tank body 501 and the bottom lid 514 are configured to be transparent, but they may also be configured to be opaque. With this configuration, when an attempt is made to visually check the internal structure of the slot machine 10 from outside the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge hole 15, the tank body 501 and the bottom lid 514 can prevent this. In this case, it is not necessary to make both the tank body 501 and the bottom lid 514 opaque; only one of them may be configured to be opaque, or only part of them may be configured to be opaque. This is similar to the other embodiments.

(54) In the third embodiment, the bottom cover 606 is biased toward the closed position by the coil spring 617 (elastic member), but it may be biased by magnetic force (adhesive force) using a magnet. However, from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activities by automatically returning the bottom cover 606 to the closed position when the bottom cover 606 is opened through the medal discharge hole 15 during transportation of the slot machine 10, for example, it is preferable to use the configuration of the third embodiment or a configuration using both an elastic member and magnetic force. Note that in the fourth embodiment, the engaging projection 723 and the bottom cover 802 may be biased by magnetic force (repulsive force) instead of or in addition to the coil springs 729, 839.

(55) In the first modified example of the third embodiment described above, the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 is inclined, and the medals are guided toward the tip end of the bottom cover 606 by this inclination. However, for example, an air blowing device that blows air onto the medals on the bottom cover 606 or the bottom plate portion 602 may be provided in the housing 11 or the tank body 601, and the medals may be guided by air from this device. Alternatively, the medals may be guided by a configuration other than an inclination, or a guide means may be provided at a location other than the bottom cover 606. However, in terms of simplifying the configuration and improving the guiding accuracy, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(56) In the second modified example of the third embodiment, the back surface protrusion 621 is configured to be continuous from one end of the back surface 606b to the other end along the rotation axis of the bottom cover 606, but it may be configured to be provided on a part of the back surface 606b, or multiple back surface protrusions may be arranged intermittently. In the latter case, it is preferable to make the distance between the back surface protrusions smaller than the medal diameter. This prevents medals from the storage tank 52 from slipping between the back surface protrusions, which reduces the efficiency of the damming.

(57) In the second variant of the third embodiment described above, the medals from the storage tank 52 are blocked on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, but the medals blocked at a location other than the back surface 606b may be guided to the back surface 606b.

(58) In the fourth embodiment, the installation position of the auxiliary tank 54 (the position where the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 engage, or the position where the lower sensor portion 801 and the engagement upright portion 836 engage) is set to a position further back than the position where the front door 12 can be closed (the position where the auxiliary tank 54 does not interfere with the front door 12 even when closed), but it may be set to the position where the front door 12 can be closed. In this case, the space between the back surface of the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 can be eliminated or narrowed, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device 101, the setting key insertion hole 73, etc. by using that space.

(59) In the fourth embodiment, the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with the engagement inclined portion 745 and the arc-shaped portion 746 for guiding the engagement protrusion 723 toward the lowered position when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position. However, instead of or in addition to this, the auxiliary tank 54 may be provided with an inclination at the contact point of the head 725 of the engagement protrusion 723 with the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, the inclination on the auxiliary tank 54 side may be the opposite inclination to the engagement inclined portion 745.

(60) In the fourth embodiment, the diameter De of the pushing protrusion 733 may be larger than the opening diameter of the storage section 722 (the diameter of the first hole 726). In this case, the pushing protrusion 733 is prevented from entering the storage section 722 when it descends due to the weight of the medal, and the height dimension of the pushing protrusion 733 can be made sufficiently large relative to the depth dimension of the bottom through-hole 720 (the stroke of the pushing protrusion 733 when descending). This makes it possible to suppress the inconvenience of being unable to push the engagement protrusion 723 out of the bottom through-hole 720 even if the height dimension of the pushing protrusion 733 becomes smaller due to wear or the like.

(61) In the fourth embodiment, the peripheral wall surface 743 of the bottom through-hole 720 on the side opposite the release inclined portion 741 is configured to be upright and approximately parallel to the peripheral surface of the head 725, but the peripheral wall surface 743 may be configured to be inclined in a manner opposite to the release inclined portion 741. In this case, the inclination angles of both inclinations may be the same or different.

In the latter case, the inclination angle of the release inclined portion 741 (the angle between the top surface of the head 725 and the release inclined portion 741) should be smaller than that of the peripheral wall surface 743. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed (pulled out), the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement protrusion 723 come into contact at the beginning, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed (pushed in), the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement protrusion 723 come into contact at the end. It is assumed that the removal operation applies a stronger load to the engagement protrusion 723. In this case, by making the release inclined portion 741 relatively flat, damage to the engagement protrusion 723 can be suppressed. On the other hand, by making the inclination angle of the peripheral wall surface 743 larger and relatively upright, it is possible to reduce the catch between the head 725 and the peripheral wall surface 743 to some extent, while making it easier to restrict the auxiliary tank 54 from moving toward the back.

(62) In the fourth embodiment, the release inclined portion 741 for reducing snagging during the operation of removing the auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through-hole 720. However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration in which a slope is provided on the auxiliary tank 54 side, such as providing a slope at the contact point of the auxiliary tank 54 at the head 725 of the engagement protrusion 723, may be adopted. In this case, the slope on the auxiliary tank 54 side may be the opposite slope to the release inclined portion 741. Also, in the case of providing a slope to reduce snagging during the operation of pushing in the auxiliary tank 54 as in (61) above, a slope may be provided on the head 725 of the engagement protrusion 723 instead of or in addition to the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through-hole 720.

(63) In the fourth embodiment, both the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b are used to regulate the floating of the auxiliary tank 54, but it may be configured to regulate it by only one of them. Also, in the first and second embodiments, it may be configured to regulate the floating of the auxiliary tank 54 by at least one of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b.

(64) In the fourth embodiment, the widths of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b may be made to correspond to the widths of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b (approximately the same dimensions), and the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b may be used to restrict left-right movement of the auxiliary tank 54. This is similar to the other embodiments. In this case, it is not necessary to make the widths of both the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b correspond to each other, and only one of them may be made to correspond to each other.

(65) In the fourth embodiment, the bottom lid 704 is entirely transparent, but only a portion located above the upper end of the tank body 701 when the bottom lid 704 is in the open position, or only a portion of the portion, may be transparent. Even with this configuration, the inside of the housing 11 and the tank body 701 can be seen through the bottom lid 704, and even though a portion of the bottom lid 704 protrudes upward and the height dimension of the auxiliary tank 54 tends to be large, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the visibility inside the housing 11 and the tank body 701. Note that if the entire bottom lid 704 is transparent and the front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701 (the wall portion that overlaps the bottom lid 704 from the front when the bottom lid 704 is in the open position) is transparent, the inside of the tank body 701 can be seen through both the front wall portion 701b and the bottom lid 704, and inspection and confirmation work such as whether medals are stuck in the tank body 701 can be facilitated.

(66) In the fourth embodiment, the bottom cover 704 is configured to abut against the induction plate 52a, but it may also be configured to abut against another member (e.g., the storage tank 52, etc.) that is located closer to the open position than the induction plate 52a. This is also true for each of the modified examples of the fourth embodiment.

(67) In the fourth embodiment, the lid body 706 of the bottom lid 704 is a movable bottom plate, and is provided with a movable member that bears almost all of the medal weight in the auxiliary tank 54. However, for example, a movable member may be provided on a part of the bottom plate portion 701a or on a peripheral wall portion such as the front wall portion 701b, and the movable member may bear part of the medal weight. In short, it is sufficient to be able to release the engagement in response to an increase in medal weight, and it is up to the movable member to decide how much of the medal weight the movable member bears. This is also true for variant 3 of the fourth embodiment.

(68) In the fourth embodiment described above, the bottom cover 704 is provided with both the lid body 706 as the movable bottom plate and the engagement upright portion 836 as the first engagement portion, and these are configured to be integrally formed. However, the movable bottom plate and the first engagement portion may be arranged separately and spaced apart, and the two may be linked together via a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement (power) of the movable bottom plate to the first engagement portion. This is also true for Variation 3 of the fourth embodiment described above.

(69) In the fourth embodiment, a cushioning member (elastic member) such as rubber or sponge may be disposed at the contact point between the bottom cover 704 and the induction plate 52a. This prevents the bottom cover 704 and the induction plate 52a from being damaged by the impact when the bottom cover 704 collides with the induction plate 52a. In this case, the interference member may be disposed on the bottom cover 704 side or on the induction plate 52a side. This is the same for each of the modified examples of the fourth embodiment.

(70) In the second variant of the fourth embodiment described above, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 are engaged (the engagement protrusion 723 is positioned in the raised position) when the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source. However, even if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, if the slot machine 10 is not powered on (the power switch 71 is not turned on), the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721 may be engaged.

In addition, when releasing the engagement, the configuration may be such that the engagement will not be released if the slot machine 10 is not powered on even if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, or the engagement will not be released if the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source.

Note that the engagement may be released even when the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, for example by mechanically disengaging when the power switch 71 is turned ON. However, considering that when the slot machines 10 are transported, there is a possibility that the slot machines may collide with each other and switch the power switch 71 to the ON side, it is preferable to require connection to an external power source.

(71) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, the bottom through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 may be disengaged regardless of the detection results of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b. In other words, the engagement may be disengaged when the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, or when the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source and the power is turned on.

(72) In the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, the engagement upright portion 836 is provided with a lid sensor insertion hole 837, and the lower sensor portion 801 is inserted through the lid sensor insertion hole 837. However, the engagement upright portion 836 may be configured to omit the portion above the lower end of the lid sensor insertion hole 837, and not have the lid sensor insertion hole 837. In other words, the height of the engagement upright portion 836 may be set to a position corresponding to the height position of the lower end of the lid sensor insertion hole 837, and the upper end of the engagement upright portion 836 may enter and leave the space formed between the bent portion 822 and the rear wall portion 701c, thereby engaging the auxiliary tank 54 and the lower sensor portion 801.

(73) In the third modification of the fourth embodiment described above, when the engagement upright portion 836 and the lower sensor portion 801 are engaged with each other, a gap is formed between the lower end of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 in the engagement upright portion 836 and the extension portion 821 of the lower sensor portion 801, and the two are merely close to each other. However, they may be configured to abut against each other.

(74) In the fourth embodiment and its third modification, these configurations are not necessarily alternatives, and both configurations may be combined.

(75) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 may be disengaged by performing a specific operation using an operating means provided on the slot machine 10 so that an employee of the gaming hall or the like can disengage the engagement at any time. Considering that when removing the auxiliary tank 54 from the slot machine 10, the front door 12 must be opened as a preliminary operation, it is preferable that the specific operation be an operation for opening the front door 12.

Specific examples include an unlocking operation for the locking device 20 (key cylinder 21) (e.g., rotating the key inserted in the key cylinder 21 to the left). For example, the engagement part on the housing 11 side may be made movable so that it can be switched between an engaged state and a disengaged state (e.g., the configuration of modified example 2 of the fourth embodiment), and a link mechanism that transmits the movement of the locking device 20 to the engagement part may be provided between the engagement part and the locking device 20, or a configuration may be provided that detects the unlocking operation and drives and controls the engagement part, so that the engagement part is switched from the engaged state to the disengaged state based on the unlocking operation being performed.

In the above configuration, the disengagement by the specific operation may be provided in addition to the disengagement configuration in each embodiment, or may be provided in place of those configurations. In the latter case, the movable engagement part may be configured to switch from a non-engaged state to an engaged state when an operation other than the specific operation (for example, an operation to close the front door 12) is performed using the above operating means or a different operating means.

(76) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, a gaming machine may have a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups A to H have been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem to be solved by the invention is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result to a player when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The bet number set by the bet number setting means includes a first bet number (3 coins) and a second bet number (1 coin, 2 coins) different from the first bet number,
a pay position setting means for setting the pay position according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means (a function for executing a pay line setting process by the main control device 101);
When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a first specific result (for example, a watermelon role as the 26th minor role, a replay) is provided as a result that can be won in the lottery by the lottery means;
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second specific result (for example, a special watermelon role or a special replay as a 26P minor role) different from the first specific result is provided as a result that can be won in the lottery by the lottery means;
The reward granting means includes:
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first specific result and the first specific symbol combination stops at a first effective position (a line L4 that slopes downward to the right) that is set by the effective position setting means in correspondence with the first bet number, a first benefit (e.g., five medals in the case of a watermelon winning, a replay) corresponding to the first specific result can be awarded;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second specific result, and a second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination stops at a second valid position (bent line L6) set by the valid position setting means corresponding to the second bet number, a second benefit (e.g., one medal for a special watermelon prize or a replay) corresponding to the second specific result can be awarded.
a gaming machine characterized in that the pictures are attached to the rotating body so that, when the second specific picture combination stops at the second valid position, the first specific picture combination stops at a specific position that is not set as a valid position by the valid position setting means when the second bet number is set, and that is set as the first valid position by the valid position setting means when the first bet number is set.

According to the above configuration, when playing with a first bet number, if the first specific result is won, the first specific pattern combination stops at the first valid position and the first benefit is awarded. When playing with a second bet number different from the first bet number, if the second specific result different from the first specific result is won, the first specific pattern combination stops at the first valid position and the second specific pattern combination stops at the second valid position and the second benefit is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to obtain different benefits with the same stopping numbers when playing with the first bet number and when playing with the second bet number. In other words, it is possible to realize a game in which different benefits are awarded by playing with different bet numbers even if the stopping numbers appear to be the same, with one gaming machine. In this way, it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, characterized in that the bonus granting means can pay out a specific number of gaming media equal to or greater than the first bet number as the first bonus, or allow replay, and can pay out a number of gaming media equal to the second bet number as the second bonus, or allow replay.

According to the above configuration, even if the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number appear to have the same stopping outcome, the game with the first bet number may pay out or grant replay of gaming media equal to or greater than the bet number, whereas the game with the second bet number pays out or grants replay of gaming media equal to the bet number, and no increase in gaming media can be expected. In this way, by creating a clear difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number, it is possible to provide completely different gaming characteristics even if the game with both bet numbers has a common outcome and the game characteristics are similar, and the significance of incorporating multiple game characteristics into one gaming machine can be guaranteed.

Feature A3. A plurality of types of the second specific results are provided as possible results that can be won in the lottery by the lottery means when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means,
The gaming machine described in feature A2 is characterized in that when the second bet number is set in a predetermined state (normal gaming state) and a lottery is conducted by the lottery means, the gaming machine is set to win one of the multiple types of second specific results.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific result is won, the same number of gaming media as the second bet is paid out or replay is granted. Therefore, if one of the second specific results or a replay role is won in a game played with the second bet number in a predetermined state, the game played with the second bet number in the predetermined state will not increase or decrease gaming media. This makes it possible to use a game played with the second bet number as a practice game, for example, or as a presentation in a game played with the first bet number. Therefore, by taking advantage of the commonality of the results with a game played with the first bet number, a novel gameplay in which the amount of gaming media does not increase or decrease with the second bet number can be realized.

Feature A4. As the first specific result, a transition result (for example, a third replay as the first promotion replay 1 to 4) is provided in which the winning probability of the predetermined role (replay) before and after the transition is different.
a transition means (a function of executing RT state processing by the main control device 101) capable of transitioning a gaming state to a predetermined state (RT state) when a lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and a first specific picture combination for transition as the first specific picture combination stops at the first effective position;
As the second specific result, a second payout result is provided in which the same number of gaming media as the second bet number is paid out as the second benefit;
When the result of the drawing by the drawing means is the second payout result and a second specific payout symbol combination as the second specific symbol combination stops at the second payout position, a payout of gaming media in the same number as the second bet number is performed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the rotating body is provided with patterns such that when the second specific pattern combination for payout stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for transition stops at the specific position.

According to the above configuration, in a game with a first bet number, a transition result in which a win occurs and the game state transitions to a predetermined state can be reproduced in a game with a second bet number by the payout of gaming media in the same number as the second bet number. In this way, for example, it is possible to simulate the transition of the game state to a predetermined state in a game with a first bet number in a game with a second bet number, in which the amount of gaming media does not increase or decrease.

In the above embodiment, the "second bonus" corresponding to the "second payout result" is "a payout of gaming media in the same number as the second bet number," but the "second bonus" may be "a payout of a predetermined number of gaming media." Even with this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to experience the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined state in a game with the second bet number while receiving gaming media.

Feature A5. A first predetermined performance execution means (a function for performing processing for executing the attack mode start performance by the display control device 81) that can execute a predetermined performance (e.g., an attack mode start performance) on a predetermined notification means (e.g., the auxiliary display unit 65) based on the transition of the game state to the predetermined state by the transition means;
a second predetermined performance execution means (a function of performing processing for executing a display attack mode start performance by the display control device 81) capable of executing the predetermined performance by the predetermined notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means performed under the condition that the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means is the second payout result, and the second specific payout symbol combination stops at the second effective position so that the first specific payout symbol combination stops at the specific position;
The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the player experiences the transition of the game state to a predetermined state with the second bet number, a common predetermined presentation is generated, making it possible to provide a more realistic experience. In this way, the gameplay of the practice game with the second bet number can be made closer to the gameplay of the game with the first bet number.

Feature A6. The gaming machine described in Feature A5 is characterized by having an identification means (stamp 65a, identification device 65b) that makes it possible to distinguish between a case where the predetermined performance is executed by the first predetermined performance execution means and a case where the predetermined performance is executed by the second predetermined performance execution means.

With the above configuration, while the games with the first and second bet numbers are similar, it is possible to distinguish whether the game with the first or second bet number is being played by looking at the specified presentation. In this way, while the numbers that come out of the rotating body are the same and further commonality is sought in the presentation, the two games can be clearly distinguished when, for example, the manager of the game hall checks the ball output status, etc.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A4 to A6, characterized in that the predetermined state is a state in which the probability of winning the replay role as the predetermined role changes before and after the transition.

According to the above configuration, the player can experience a transition to a so-called RT state as a transition to a predetermined state. In addition to the RT state in which the probability of a replay changes, a bonus state in which the probability of a small win changes is also assumed as a transition to a game state in which the probability of a replay changes. Generally, the bonus state is a state in which a specific symbol such as 7 symbols is aligned, which is visually easy to understand, and the transition to the bonus state when the specific symbol such as 7 symbols is aligned is familiar to players. In contrast, the transition to the RT state is less familiar than the transition to the bonus state, and the results at the time of the transition are often set to be relatively difficult to recognize. Therefore, by applying the gameplay that allows the player to experience the transition of the game state with the second bet number, as in the configuration of feature A4, to the transition of the RT state, it is possible to greatly help the player to fully understand the gameplay by experiencing such a difficult transition to the game state.

Feature A8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result that results in the winning of the predetermined role (replay) as the first specific result, and when a first specific pattern combination for a predetermined role as the first specific pattern combination stops at the first effective position, a predetermined benefit (replay) corresponding to the predetermined result is awarded as the first benefit,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a result for a second predetermined role as the second payout result (for example, a miss 1-coin role), and a second specific combination of symbols for a predetermined role as the second specific combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that establishes a first lip minor role win) stops at the second effective position, a payout of gaming media is performed in the same number as the second bet number.
The rotating body is provided with the symbols such that, when the second specific symbol combination for the predetermined role stops at the second effective position, the first specific symbol combination for the predetermined role stops at the specific position;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A4 to A7, characterized in that it is equipped with a first means for making the second specific pattern combination for the specified role stop at the second valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the result for the second specified role (for example, a function for executing a process for notifying the press order to establish a first lip small role when the main control unit 101 wins a miss 1-coin role), and a second means for preventing the second specific pattern combination for the specified role from stopping at the second valid position (for example, a function for executing a process for notifying the press order to establish a miss small role when the main control unit 101 wins a miss 1-coin role).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reproduce the situation where a transition result in a game based on a first bet number results in a win, changing the probability of winning a predetermined role and changing the probability of receiving a predetermined bonus, by stopping a second specific combination of symbols for a predetermined role when a result for the second predetermined role is won, or not stopping the second specific combination of symbols for the predetermined role, in a game based on a second bet number. Moreover, when the second specific combination of symbols for the second predetermined role is stopped, a payout of gaming media equal to the second bet number is awarded, so it is possible to experience this type of playability without increasing the number of gaming media.

Feature A9. When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a first specific transition result (first BB, second BB) is provided as a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery means, in which the probability of winning a payout role (e.g., a bell) in which the payout of gaming media is granted as a privilege differs before and after the transition;
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second specific transition result (first PBB, second PBB) is provided as a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery drawing means, in which the probability of winning a payout role (e.g., a bell) for which a payout of gaming media is granted as a privilege differs before and after the transition;
a specific transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of transitioning the gaming state to a first specific state (bonus state) when a lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result and a first specific pattern combination for specific transition as the first specific pattern combination stops at the first effective position, and capable of transitioning the gaming state to a second specific state (special bonus state) when a lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result and a second specific pattern combination for specific transition as the second specific pattern combination stops at the second effective position;
The gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the rotating body is provided with patterns such that when the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition stops at the second valid position, the first specific pattern combination for the specific transition stops at the specific position.

According to the above configuration, a first specific transition result and a second specific transition result are provided as so-called bonuses in both the games with the first and second bet numbers, respectively. Furthermore, when the second specific transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition that wins the second specific transition result stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for the specific transition that wins the first specific transition result stops at the specific position. In this way, it is possible to make the bonus win when a bonus is won in the game with the second bet number look as if it were also a bonus win in the game with the first bet number, thereby improving the playability of the game with the second bet number.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, characterized in that when the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, during play from when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific transition result until the second specific state transitioned to based on the second specific transition result ends, a payout of gaming media in an amount exceeding the bet number set by the bet number setting means is not performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the second specific transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the game enters the second specific state, no increase in gaming media is expected. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number, and to strengthen the impression that the game with the second bet number is a game for practice.

In addition, in the above configuration, if it is assumed that "when the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific transition result, and during play until the first specific state transitioned to based on the first specific transition result ends, a payout of gaming media in an amount exceeding the bet number set by the bet number setting means is performed," the difference between the first specific state and the second specific state can be made clear.

In addition, if the relationship between the "first bet amount" and the "second bet amount" is such that the "second bet amount is less than the first bet amount," it becomes possible to allow the player to understand that the second specific state to which the player can enter when the second bet amount is placed is a special privilege that is in line with the bet amount, even with the above-mentioned configuration.

Feature A11. A first ending means for ending the first specific state based on the fact that the number of game media paid out during the first specific state has reached a first predetermined number (a function for executing a process for making an affirmative determination in step S1504 based on the fact that the remaining number of payouts set in step S613 by the main control device 101 has reached 0);
A second termination means for terminating the second specific state based on the fact that the number of game media paid out during the second specific state becomes a second predetermined number that is smaller than the first predetermined number (a function for executing a process for making an affirmative determination in step S1504 based on the fact that the remaining number of payouts set by the main control device 101 in step S614 becomes 0);
The gaming machine described in feature A10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends with a smaller payout amount than the first specific state. This makes it possible to make the second specific state in line with practice play with the second bet amount, and even if the second specific state is one in which no substantial increase in gaming media is expected, as in feature A9, it is possible to end the second specific state more quickly.

In the above configuration, for example, if the configuration is such that "when the first specific transition result is a win or after the transition to the first specific state, the second specific transition result is not a win as a lottery result of the lottery means based on the second bet number until the first specific state ends, and when the second specific transition result is a win or after the transition to the second specific state, the first specific transition result is not a win as a lottery result of the lottery means based on the first bet number until the second specific state ends," the significance of ending the second specific state earlier is enhanced. In other words, in such a configuration, the first specific transition result is not a win even if the bet number is set to the first bet number until the second specific state ends, so it is necessary to end the second specific state in order to play with the first bet number, regardless of the increase or decrease in the game media during the second specific state.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, characterized in that, in the second specific state, a possible outcome in the drawing by the lottery means in a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means is an outcome in which the payout of the number of gaming media equal to the second bet number is awarded as the bonus, and, in a situation where a specific bet number (3, first bet number) greater than the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means is an outcome in which the payout of the number of gaming media equal to the specific bet number is awarded as the bonus.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the second specific state ends with the payout of a second predetermined amount, the second specific state can be ended earlier when playing with the specific bet amount than when playing with the second bet amount. In particular, by making it possible to change whether or not to end the game early based on the bet amount, which can be determined by the player's operation, it is possible to guarantee that the player will be able to play when he or she wishes to fully enjoy or experience the second specific state, and it is possible to allow the player to play while respecting his or her wishes.

Feature A13. A predetermined end result (PCB, SB) is provided as a result that may be won in the lottery by the lottery means during the second specific state;
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, wherein the second ending means is capable of ending the second specific state based on the predetermined ending result being a win.

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends even if a predetermined end result is won. For example, depending on the probability of winning the predetermined end result, the second specific state may end earlier than the second predetermined number is reached. This makes it possible to eliminate the inconvenience of a long continuation of the second specific state in which no increase in game media is expected.

More specifically, the "predetermined ending result" may be "an outcome in which the game state after the transition is terminated when the probability of winning the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition and the number of game media paid out after the transition becomes a predetermined number." The "predetermined ending result" may be "an outcome in which the game state after the transition is terminated when the probability of winning the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition and the number of game media paid out after the transition becomes a predetermined number, or after a predetermined number of games have been played."

Furthermore, when the above configuration is applied to feature A12, it may be that "the predetermined end result is set as a result that can be won in a lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the specific bet amount is set." A player who sets a specific bet amount using the bet amount setting means can be considered to have the intention of ending the second specific state early, and in this case, if the configuration is such that the predetermined end result can be won, it is possible to end the game early in line with the player's will, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of ending the game early despite not wanting to do so.

Feature A14: The drive control means controls the rotation of the corresponding rotating body to stop within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the winning symbol corresponding to the winning result is stopped at the valid position;
a reserve storage means for reserve-storing the winning of the second specific transition result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second specific transition result and the pattern corresponding to the second specific transition result does not stop and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition is not formed (a function for executing a process of setting a bonus winning flag in step S306 in the main control device 101 and a process of making a negative judgment in step S609);
A gaming machine described in any one of features A9 to A13, characterized in that in a lottery conducted by the lottery means when the winning second specific transition result is reserved and stored in the reserved memory means, a non-winning result that does not win the second specific result exists.

The above configuration makes it possible to stop the reel aiming at the image corresponding to the second specific transition result when the second specific transition result is reserved and stored. In other words, even if you try to win the reserved second specific transition result, if you win the second specific result, the control that prioritizes the winning of the second specific result will not allow the winning of the second specific transition result to be achieved, and you will not be able to transition to the second specific state. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to transition to the second specific state.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14, wherein the reserved storage means is capable of reservedly storing the winning of the first specific transition result even when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first specific transition result and the pattern corresponding to the first specific transition result does not stop and the first specific pattern combination for the specific transition is not formed.

When playing a game with the first bet number that may differ from the trial version game with little increase or decrease in the gaming media, if a first specific transition result is obtained and is reserved and stored, some players may choose to play the reserved and stored situation with the second bet number instead of the first bet number. In this regard, with the above configuration, it is possible to win the first specific transition result with the first bet number with the second bet number, thereby improving the freedom of the game in achieving a win without reducing the gameplay of each bet number.

Feature A16. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A9 to A15, characterized in that the second bet amount is set to a number less than the first bet amount.

The above configuration makes it clear the difference between the first specific state, which is entered with a first bet amount, and the second specific state, which is entered with a smaller second bet amount. In particular, in feature A14, it becomes easier to perform an action that makes the first specific transition result win with the second bet amount when the first specific transition result is reserved and stored.

Feature A17. When the second specific transition result is a win and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition stops at the activated position, the transition means transitions to the second specific state, but the game media is not paid out at the time of the transition.
A gaming machine described in any one of features A9 to A16, characterized in that in the second specific state, a payout of an amount equal to the number of gaming media for the bet number set by the bet number setting means plus the number of gaming media for the second bet number is set as one of the termination conditions of the second specific state in a specified game in the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, since no payout of gaming media is performed when the second specific transition result is won, a loss of gaming media may occur when transitioning to the second specific state. Therefore, if the end condition of the second specific state is increased by the number of gaming media required when the second specific transition result is won (second bet number), it is possible to reduce the increase or decrease in gaming media in total from the transition to the second specific state to the end. This allows the game with the second bet number to be played with less increase or decrease in gaming media even if a transition to the second specific state occurs, and maximizes the benefits of sharing the stopping results with the game with the first bet number.

Feature A18: In a game in which the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, a first continuous effect that is performed continuously across each game is set in a predetermined effect means (e.g., the auxiliary display unit 65),
In a game in which the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, a second consecutive effect that is performed consecutively across each game is set by the predetermined effect means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that it has a first consecutive number memory means (consecutive performance counter) that grasps the consecutive number of the first consecutive performance, and a second consecutive number memory means (display consecutive performance counter) that grasps the consecutive number of the second consecutive performance.

With the above configuration, the number of consecutive plays of the first consecutive performance and the number of consecutive plays of the second consecutive performance are grasped separately. Therefore, for example, even if the game with the first bet amount is switched to the game with the second bet amount while the first consecutive performance is being executed, or vice versa, the number of consecutive plays of each consecutive performance can be stored, and when the game with the original bet amount is restored, it is possible to resume the consecutive performance from the middle.

Feature A19: A switching means (a function of executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81) is provided that can switch between a first presentation mode (normal game mode) in which a presentation based on the first bet number is performed as a presentation by a specific presentation means (e.g., the auxiliary display unit 65) and a second presentation mode (specific mode) in which a presentation based on the second bet number is performed, based on the establishment of a specific switching condition (operation of the second presentation switch 67);
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A18, characterized in that the bet amount setting means is capable of setting the first bet amount and the second bet amount without switching the presentation mode by the switching means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch the presentation mode and enjoy playing with the first bet amount and playing with the second bet amount in a presentation mode that suits each game. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a bonus is awarded when a so-called bonus is won, a bet amount different from the bet amount at the time of winning the bonus may be set, and even in such a case, if the presentation mode is switched, it may be annoying for the player. Therefore, by making it possible to set each bet amount using the bet amount setting means without switching the presentation mode, it is possible to fully enjoy playing with each bet amount without the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature A20. The gaming machine described in Feature A19, which is characterized by having a restricting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4603, S4604, S4703 to S4705, etc. by the main control device 101) that executes restricting processing to prohibit switching of the presentation mode by the switching means or to notify the user that the state is not in which switching of the presentation mode should be performed by the switching means, based on the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (advantageous zone, during bonus).

According to the above configuration, depending on the game state, it may not be necessary to switch between playing with the first bet number and playing with the second bet number. For example, in an advantageous state managed by the number of games, playing games with the other bet number may erode the number of games in that advantageous state, and if a bonus is won with one bet number, playing a game with the other bet number may not result in a bonus drawing. Therefore, by providing a means to prevent such switching, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the player incurs a loss due to switching.

Feature A21. The gaming machine described in Feature A20, characterized in that the predetermined gaming state in which the regulating means performs the regulating process is a state that is advantageous to the player.

The above configuration allows the effect of feature A20 to be effectively achieved.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result to a player when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
a transition means (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning the game state to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means may change compared to before the transition (e.g., 1st BB, 2nd BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB) corresponding to the transition result, when a specific pattern combination (e.g., 7 reds) corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is a first bet number (3 coins), a first specific result (e.g., a watermelon as the 26th minor combination) and the transition result are provided, which are a payout of gaming media in a number greater than the first bet number or a replay is possible;
A gaming machine characterized in that, as a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is a second bet number (1 coin) which is less than the first bet number, a second specific result (e.g., a special watermelon as a 26P minor prize) and a transition result are provided, which result in the payout of the same number of gaming media as the second bet number or the ability to play again.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine capable of a series of games in which the start operation means is operated with the number of gaming media bets set as the first bet number, the result of a lottery executed based on that operation is notified by the stopping result of the pictures through the operation of the stop operation means, and if the result of the lottery is the first specific result, it is possible to win a second specific result or transition result in which the same number of gaming media as the number of bets is paid out or replay is possible, by setting the number of bets as a second bet number different from the first bet number. In this way, it is possible to realize a game in which a game is played in the hope of winning a number of gaming media more than the number of bets, but which is played from a completely different perspective from the first game. For example, by increasing the probability of winning the second specific result and the transition result, it is possible to realize a game with no (small) increase or decrease in game media, in which an increase in game media cannot be expected, but conversely, there is no decrease in game media either. Even if the probability of winning the second specific result or the transition result is low, since the second bet number is smaller than the first bet number, it is possible to execute a series of games, such as operating the start operation means, rotating the rotating body, operating the stop operation means, and stopping the rotating body, with a smaller number of game media. In this way, it is possible to freely set the game without being bound to a uniform bet number, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature B2: When the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the first specific result is won, and the rotating bodies stop in a state where a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed in the pay position, so that a bonus corresponding to the first specific result is awarded;
As the second identification result,
A first corresponding result (e.g., a special watermelon as a 26P minor prize) in which a bonus corresponding to the winning of the second specific result is awarded when each of the rotating bodies stops in a specific position that is not the active position when the second bet is set by the bet setting means and is the active position when the first bet is set by the bet setting means, with the first specific pattern combination being formed;
A first non-corresponding result (a losing minor prize) in which a bonus corresponding to the winning of the second specific result is awarded when each of the rotating bodies stops in a state in which the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed at the specific position;
A gaming machine as described in feature B1, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second bet number, it is possible to award a bonus corresponding to winning the second specific result in either the case where the first predetermined pattern combination that results in a winning prize is formed in the game with the first bet number, or the case where the first predetermined pattern combination that does not result in a winning prize is not formed in the game with the first bet number. In this way, in the game with the second bet number, which has little increase or decrease in gaming media, instead of a game in which some patterns line up and the so-called winning result stops, it is possible to increase the variety of the stopped results, such as some patterns line up and stop to produce a winning result, or a so-called losing result that does not line up, thereby improving the game with the second bet number.

Feature B3. As the second specific result, when the operation sequence of the stop operation means is a first operation sequence, each of the revolving bodies stops with a first pattern combination stopped at the valid position, and a first operation result winning (e.g., a miss small win) is established, and when the operation sequence of the stop operation means is a second operation sequence different from the first operation sequence, each of the revolving bodies stops with a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination stopped at the valid position, and a second operation result winning (e.g., a third replay small win) different from the first operation result winning is established. Operation sequence corresponding results (e.g., special first promotion replays 1 to 4) are provided.
The gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2 is characterized in that the bonus awarding means is configured to pay out a number of gaming media equal to the second bet number when a winning prize is established as a result of the first operation, and to pay out a number of gaming media equal to the second bet number when a winning prize is established as a result of the second operation.

According to the above configuration, in a game with the second bet number, when the second specific result corresponds to the operation sequence, the number of game media paid out does not change, but different picture combinations stop depending on the operation sequence, resulting in different winning patterns. In this way, in a game with the second bet number, while ensuring playability with no (small) increase or decrease in game media, it is possible to improve playability by increasing the number of winning patterns beyond the number of winning results.

Feature B4: When the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the first specific result is won, and the rotating bodies stop in a state where a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed in the pay position, so that a bonus corresponding to the first specific result is awarded;
The gaming machine described in feature B3, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the operation sequence, and when the operation sequence of the stop operation means is the first operation sequence, the first operation result winning is achieved by each of the revolving bodies stopping in a state where the first predetermined pattern combination is formed as the first pattern combination at the valid position, and when the operation sequence of the stop operation means is the second operation sequence, the second operation result winning is achieved by each of the revolving bodies stopping in a state where the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed as the second pattern combination at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, the so-called losing numbers and winning numbers for the first bet number are stopped according to the operation sequence of the stop operation means. The bonus awarded will not change regardless of which number is stopped, but by doing as described above, for example, it is possible to intentionally make the winning numbers appear by notifying or not notifying the first operation sequence for the winning numbers. This can significantly improve the playability of the second bet number.

Feature B5. In a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a replay result among the first specific results is won, and a replay corresponding to the winning replay result is awarded by stopping each of the rotating bodies in a state where a predetermined picture combination for replay corresponding to the replay result is formed in the active position,
A gaming machine as described in Feature B3 or Feature B4, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the operation sequence, and when the operation sequence of the stop operation means is the first operation sequence, the first operation result winning is achieved by each of the revolving bodies stopping in a state in which the specified picture combination for replay is formed as the first picture combination at the valid position, and when the operation sequence of the stop operation means is the second operation sequence, the second operation result winning is achieved by each of the revolving bodies stopping in a state in which the specified picture combination for replay is not formed as the second picture combination at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, the winning combination for the first bet number and the losing combination for the replay are stopped according to the operation sequence of the stop operation means. The bonus awarded will not change regardless of which combination is stopped, but by doing as described above, it is possible to intentionally make the winning combination for the replay appear, for example, by notifying or not notifying the first operation sequence for the winning combination for the replay. This can greatly improve the playability of the second bet number.

Feature B6. As a game to be performed in a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a high re-play state (e.g., a second RT state) in which the probability of winning the re-play result is relatively high and low, and a low re-play state (e.g., a first RT state) are set,
The gaming machine described in feature B5 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operation sequence notification means (for example, a function of executing push order role processing for a specific mode by the display control device 81) that can notify the first operation sequence by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) when the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the operation sequence.

According to the above configuration, in the case of an operation sequence corresponding result, if the operation sequence notification means notifies the first operation sequence, a winning combination for a replay in the game with the first bet number will appear, and if the first operation sequence is not notified, a losing combination for the game with the first bet number will appear. Depending on whether or not there is a notification, it is possible to reproduce the high replay state or low replay state in the game with the first bet number in the game with the second bet number. Therefore, the playability of the game with the second bet number can be improved.

Feature B7: A plurality of types of the second specific results are provided as possible results that can be won in the lottery by the lottery means when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that when the second bet number is set in a predetermined state (normal gaming state) and a lottery is conducted by the lottery means, the game machine is set so that one of the multiple types of second specific results and transition results is won.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific result is won, the same number of gaming media as the second bet is paid out or replay is granted. Therefore, if one of the second specific results is won in a game played with the second bet number, there is no increase or decrease in gaming media in the game played with the second bet number. This makes it possible to use a game played with the second bet number as, for example, a practice game or as a performance in a game played with the first bet number.

Feature B8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B7, characterized in that when the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, during play from when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result until the specific state transitioned to based on the transition result ends, a payout of gaming media in an amount exceeding the bet number set by the bet number setting means is not performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition result in the game with the second bet number is a win and a specific state is reached, no increase in gaming media is expected. In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number, and to strengthen the impression that the game with the second bet number is a game for practice.

Feature B9. In a situation where the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, when the transition result is a win and the specific symbol combination stops at the activated position, the transition means transitions to the specific state, but the gaming medium is not paid out at the time of the transition.
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that in the specific state, a payout of an amount equal to the number of gaming media for the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means plus the number of gaming media for the second bet amount is set as one of the termination conditions of the specific state in a specified game in the specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the case of the second bet number, no payout of gaming media is made when the transition result is won, so a loss of gaming media may occur when transitioning to a specific state. Therefore, if the end condition of the specific state is increased by the number of gaming media required when the transition result is won (the second bet number), it is possible to reduce the increase or decrease in gaming media in total from the transition to the specific state to the end. This makes it possible to make a game with the second bet number into a game in which the increase or decrease in gaming media is reduced even if a transition to a specific state occurs.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result to a player when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
a transition means (function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning the game state to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means may change compared to before the transition (e.g., 1st BB, 2nd BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), when a specific pattern combination (7 reds) corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position;
A gaming machine comprising:
The bet number set by the bet number setting means includes a first bet number (3 coins) and a second bet number (1 coin) different from the first bet number,
The lottery means, when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, performs a lottery for each role including the transition result with a first lottery probability, and, when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, performs a lottery for each role including the transition result with a second lottery probability;
In a situation where a predetermined state exists, a ratio of the award to the number of bets when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the first lottery probability is different from a ratio of the award to the number of bets when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the second lottery probability,
A display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying game information including the bonus to be awarded;
Identification means (stamp 65a, identification device 65b) for making it possible to identify on the display means that a game is being played with the first bet amount and that a game is being played with the second bet amount;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when playing with the first bet number and when playing with the second bet number, a lottery is held for each role including a transition result that allows a transition to a specific state. The so-called payout rate, which is the ratio of the bonus to the bet number, is different between the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number. By making such a gaming machine, it is possible to realize multiple playability with different payout rates in one gaming machine, and it is possible to meet the needs of various players with one gaming machine. Moreover, which game is being played can be identified by a display means that can notify game information including the bonus. Therefore, for example, when checking the game information including the obtained bonus, it is immediately clear which bet number the game was played with, along with the bonus, and for example, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall to easily check the payout rate.

Although the payout rate is expressed as "the ratio of the bonus to the number of bets," it may also be expressed as, for example, "the rate at which the bonus is awarded per game," or "the rate at which the gaming media increase per game" or "the rate at which the gaming media decrease per game" in a configuration in which "a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out as a bonus." Also, the number of games used to calculate the payout rate may be "per a predetermined number of games."

Also, "in a situation where a specified state is present" may mean, for example, a specified state among the multiple game states that are set, such as during a bonus or RT state, or may mean a state that includes any or all of the multiple game states that are set.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, wherein the identification means makes it possible to distinguish between a game with the first bet number and a game with the second bet number by superimposing identification information (identification information presentation data) indicating that a game with the second bet number is being played on information displayed by the display means (normal game presentation data) when a game with the first bet number is being played.

With the above configuration, compared to a configuration in which the display information when a game is being played with the first bet amount and the display information when a game is being played with the second bet amount are provided as separate information that can be distinguished from each other, it is possible to simply superimpose the distinguishing information, thereby significantly reducing the storage capacity of the display information that is stored in advance.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C2, characterized in that the display means displays image data for displaying the display information when a game is being played with the second bet amount using image data for displaying the display information when a game is being played with the first bet amount, and is capable of displaying the identification information by superimposing it thereon.

With the above configuration, there is no need to store image data in advance to display information when a game is being played with the second bet amount, and the effect of feature C2 can be more effectively achieved.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that the display means is disposed in a position that does not overlap the rotating body in the front-to-rear direction.

According to the above configuration, when playing the game while looking at the rotating body, the player does not have to worry about the identification provided by the identification means, and when checking the identification by looking at the display means, the player does not have to worry about the rotating body. For example, when a number that does not stop for a long time stops on the rotating body, it is expected that some players will take a photograph to keep a record of it. In that regard, according to the above configuration, it is possible to take the photograph without worrying about the display means being reflected in the photograph.

Feature C5. When the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number and the transition means transitions to the specific state, the stop results of the symbols that stop at positions visible through the display unit when each of the rotating bodies is stopped are:
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the winning number is the same as the winning number that will be displayed when the transition means transitions to the specific state when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, the transition to a specific state in which the winning probability of each role can be changed by the lottery means can occur by the same winning combination whether the first bet number is used or the second bet number. In this way, even if the game has different payout rates, the transition to the game state occurs by the same combination, making it easier for the player to understand the game, and even when playing a game with a lower payout rate, it is possible to experience that a transition to a specific state occurs by the same combination as a game with a higher payout rate, providing a sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, if the same number is rolled like this, it can be said that it becomes even more difficult for the amusement hall manager to tell which game is being played. In particular, the point where the game state changes is a point that the amusement hall manager can pay close attention to. In this regard, as described in feature C1, since it is identifiable on the display means side, the notification of which game is being played is made at a position unrelated to the number rolled by each rotating body, and while the player can enjoy effects such as a sense of satisfaction from the number rolled, there is no decrease in identifiability.

Feature C6. In a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, a first transition result (first BB, second BB) is provided as the transition result that causes the transition means to transition to the specific state;
A second transition result (first PBB, second PBB) is provided as the transition result for transitioning to the specific state by the transition means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number is the same as the probability that the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number is the second transition result.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a transition result (probability of the first transition result and the second transition result) is set to be the same for a game with a first bet number and a game with a second bet number, which have different payout rates. Therefore, in the winning situation of the transition result (occurrence of a specific state), it is difficult to distinguish between a game with a first bet number and a game with a second bet number. In other words, even if the game has different payout rates, the two games can be made similar to each other, and for example, one game can be treated as a trial version of the other game. And, as described in feature C1, while the two games are made similar in this way, they can be distinguished on the display means side, so that the game hall can easily perform the confirmation work.

In addition, by configuring the game so that "the special benefits obtained are different between the specific state transitioned to based on the first transition result and the specific state transitioned to based on the second transition result," it is possible to ensure a configuration in which the payout rate is different even if the winning probability for both transition results is the same.

Feature C7: When the lottery result by the lottery means is a first specific result (for example, a watermelon as the 26th minor combination), the bonus awarding means pays out a first specific number of game media as the bonus;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number and the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means is the first specific result, and the first specific number of gaming media is to be paid out, if the same stopping result of the pattern that stops in a position visible via the display unit when each of the rotating bodies is stopped stops in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, a second specific number of gaming media different from the first specific number is paid out.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to configure a configuration in which the same stop number is used to award different benefits in a game played with a first bet number and a game played with a second bet number. This makes it possible to realize a game with different payout rates while using a common number for the first bet number and the second bet number by utilizing the number on the rotating body, which is an area different from the display means where the distinguishability occurs while still being identifiable by the identification means.

Feature C8. The configuration is such that when the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount and the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is a second specific result (for example, a special watermelon as a 26P minor role) different from the first specific result, the second specific number of game media can be paid out;
The gaming machine described in feature C7 is characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number is the first specific result and the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number are set to be the second specific result are set to be the same probability.

According to the above configuration, the first specific result in which a first specific number is paid out and the second specific result in which a second specific number is paid out can be made to appear with the same probability while using a common output. This makes it possible to realize a game with different payout rates for the first bet number and the second bet number while using a common output, by utilizing the output of the rotating body, which is an area different from the display means where the identifiability occurs, while still being identifiable by the identification means.

Feature C9. The display means is capable of displaying the number of game media paid out by the bonus awarding means as payout number information when notifying the game information including the bonus,
A gaming machine as described in feature C8, characterized in that when the second specific number of gaming media is paid out based on the second specific result, the payout number information can be displayed as if the first specific number of gaming media had been paid out.

According to the above configuration, when game information including a bonus is announced, the same payout number information can be displayed for a game with the first bet number and a game with the second bet number. This makes it possible to provide the same gaming experience on the display even if the number of game media actually paid out is different and the payout rate is different. However, as described in feature C1, when game information is announced, it is assumed that the display is merely pseudo, since it is possible to identify which game it is, and it is precisely because of this assumption that no problems will arise even if a different payout number is displayed from the actual number as described above.

Feature C10. The display means is capable of displaying information on the number of games played as game number information when notifying the game information including the bonus,
A gaming machine as described in feature C9, characterized in that when a game is being played with the first bet number, game number information of the game played with the first bet number is displayed, and when a game is being played with the second bet number, game number information of the game played with the second bet number is displayed.

According to the above configuration, the payout number information is displayed in a pseudo manner, while the game count information is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the actual number of games played. This is because if the game count information were also displayed in a pseudo manner, the reliability of the game information notification would be significantly reduced. By displaying the same number of games as the number of games actually played by the player, it becomes easier to imagine the pseudo payout number display.

Feature C11: The identification means makes it possible to distinguish between a game based on the first bet number and a game based on the second bet number by superimposing identification information (identification information presentation data) indicating that a game based on the second bet number is being played on display information (normal game presentation data) displayed by the display means when a game based on the first bet number is being played;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that the ratio of the bonus to the number of bets when the lottery means draws a lottery based on the second lottery probability is lower than the ratio of the bonus to the number of bets when the lottery means draws a lottery based on the first lottery probability.

According to the above configuration, identification information indicating a game with the second bet number, which has a lower ball payout rate, is superimposed on the display information when a game is being played with the first bet number, which has a higher ball payout rate. In other words, when a game is being played with the first bet number, the identification information is not superimposed. In other words, when a game is being played with the first bet number, it is possible to say that it is possible to concentrate on playing with the first bet number without worrying about the other game. This is based on the idea that many players prefer to play with the game with the higher ball payout rate, and by doing so, it is possible to create a gaming machine that meets the needs of the majority of players.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for executing a payout of a predetermined number of game media as a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning the game state to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means changes compared to before the transition, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (e.g., first PBB, second PBB) corresponding to the transition result and a specific pattern combination (e.g., red 7, red 7, watermelon) corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the expected number of game media to be paid out (ball payout rate) by the payout means for the number of bets set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the specific state is equivalent to the expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means for the number of bets set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the payout amount per game for the bonus state as a specific state to which the transition is made based on the so-called bonus winning is set to be equal to the normal game state before the bonus transition. In other words, even if the normal game state transitions to the bonus state, the player's advantage does not change. For example, as a configuration for not changing the advantage, a configuration is conceivable in which a pseudo bonus state is generated in which the bonus symbols are aligned and stopped in a specified starting game to generate a bonus state, but the probability of a small win is not changed compared to before the bonus state transition. However, in this case, the game state has not changed at all just through the starting game in which the bonus symbols can be aligned and stopped, and the probability of winning a small win does not change, so the player does not easily experience the occurrence of the bonus state. In contrast, in the above configuration, the probability of each role changes due to the transition to a specific state as a bonus, and if the winning probability of each role increases or a role that can only be won during a bonus is won, the bonus state is easily experienced. By adopting this configuration while keeping the advantage unchanged as described above, it becomes possible to allow the player to simulate the experience of a bonus state as a specific state without giving the player any advantage, greatly increasing the freedom of game design. This makes it possible to appropriately attract attention to the game.

Note that "equivalent" may include "the same thing" and "not the same, but the benefits that players can obtain are at the same level."

In addition, "the expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means for the number of bets set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the specific state (ball payout rate) is equivalent to the expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means for the number of bets set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the normal game state before the transition to the specific state" may also be expressed as "the degree of advantage during the specific state is equivalent to the degree of advantage during the normal game state before the transition to the specific state."

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the expected number of game media paid out by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the expected number of game media paid out by the payout means per game executed during the normal game state before the transition to the specific state are equal to or less than the number of bets set by the bet number setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, an increase in gaming media is not expected not only in the normal gaming state, but also in the specific state. In other words, an increase in gaming media is not expected even in the normal gaming state. In this way, it is possible to ideally realize a game in which the player can experience a bonus as a specific state without giving any benefit to the player.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D2, characterized in that the expected number of game media paid out by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the expected number of game media paid out by the payout means per game executed during the normal game state before the transition to the specific state are the same as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, in each game in the normal game mode and the specific game mode, it is expected that the same number of gaming media as the number of bets will be paid out. In other words, although an increase in gaming media cannot be expected in each game, there will be no decrease in gaming media either. In this way, by providing a gameplay that does not increase or decrease gaming media, it is possible to provide a gameplay that is suitable for practice, for example, to help players understand the specifications of the gaming machine.

Feature D4. As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, a plurality of payout roles and replay roles to be paid out of game media by the payout means are provided, and when the lottery is executed by the lottery means, any of the payout roles or the replay roles is won;
The gaming machine described in feature D3 is characterized in that, when the result of the lottery in the lottery means is a winning payout role and a specific pattern combination corresponding to the winning payout role stops at the active position, the payout means executes a payout of gaming media in the same number as the bet number set by the bet number setting means as a bonus corresponding to the winning payout role.

According to the above configuration, so-called losing results are not set, and the same number of gaming media as the bet amount is paid out or replay is executed in each game. For example, in a configuration in which there is no increase or decrease in the gaming media when averaging multiple games, there will be states in which the gaming media is decreasing and states in which the gaming media is increasing, which may create advantages and disadvantages for the player in achieving the playability of feature D1. In contrast, according to the above configuration, there is no increase or decrease in the gaming media in each game, so the player can easily experience the game without creating advantageous or disadvantageous situations.

Feature D5. The drive control means controls the rotation of the corresponding rotating body to stop within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the image corresponding to the winning result to stop at the valid position;
a reserve storage means (a function of executing a process of setting a bonus winning flag in the main control device 101) for reserve-storing the winning of the transition result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result and the pattern corresponding to the transition result does not stop in the valid position while forming a predetermined pattern combination;
A gaming machine as described in feature D4, characterized in that in a lottery by the lottery means which is conducted in a state in which the transition result winning is reserved and stored in the reserved memory means, a non-winning result which does not win any of the multiple payout roles is present.

The above configuration makes it possible to stop the reels aiming for a specific pattern that corresponds to a transition result when the transition result is reserved and stored. In other words, even if you try to win a transition result that is reserved and stored, if another payout role is won, the control that prioritizes the winning role cannot achieve the winning transition result and it becomes impossible to transition to a specific state. Therefore, by using the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being unable to transition to a specific state.

Feature D6. The bet number set by the bet number setting means includes a first bet number (1 coin) that makes the expected number of payouts of the gaming media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state equal to the expected number of payouts of the gaming media by the payout means per game executed during the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state, and a second bet number (3 coins) that is different from the first bet number;
In a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, an expected number of payouts of the gaming media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state is not equal to an expected number of payouts of the gaming media by the payout means per game executed during a normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state,
the transition result is set as a result of a lottery by the lottery means for a game to be played with the second bet number;
The gaming machine described in feature D5 is characterized in that the reserve memory means is capable of reserving and storing a winning transition result even if the result of the lottery by the lottery means for the game played with the second bet number is a transition result and a specific pattern corresponding to the transition result does not form a predetermined combination and stop at the valid position.

When a transition result occurs and is reserved while playing a game that may differ from the trial version game with little increase or decrease in the amount of gaming media at the second bet number, some players may choose to play the reserved situation at the first bet number instead of the second bet number. In this regard, the above configuration makes it possible to win the transition result won at the second bet number with the first bet number, thereby improving the freedom of the game to achieve a win without reducing the gameplay of each bet number.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in Feature D6, characterized in that the first bet amount is set to a number less than the second bet amount.

According to the above configuration, since the first bet number is less than the second bet number, if one wishes to achieve a winning transfer result while minimizing the loss of gaming media in a situation where the transfer result is reserved and stored at the second bet number, it is expected that the transfer result will be achieved with the first bet number, not the second bet number. This makes it easier for situations to occur where the effect of feature D6 is exerted, thereby increasing the benefits of having the configuration of feature D6.

Feature D8. The drive control means controls the rotation of the corresponding rotating body to stop within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the image corresponding to the winning result to stop at the effective position;
A specific pattern corresponding to the transition result in each of the rotating bodies is arranged so as to be stopped at the effective position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means,
The gaming machine described in feature D4 is characterized in that the transition means is configured so that the transition result is the lottery result by the lottery means, and the specific pattern forms a predetermined combination at the valid position and stops, thereby transitioning to the specific state.

With the above configuration, the game of aiming and stopping a specific pattern in the case of a transition result is eliminated, but because it is not reserved as in feature D5, there is no loss of gaming media in the amount of the bet when it is reserved.

Feature D9. As the plurality of payout roles, a first payout role (e.g., a special bell as a first P minor role) and a second payout role (e.g., a special watermelon as a 26th P minor role) are set,
The dispensing means is
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first payout winning combination and a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first payout winning combination stops at the active position, a payout of game media is executed in the same number as the bet number set by the bet number setting means as a bonus corresponding to the first payout winning combination;
When the result of the drawing by the drawing means is the second payout winning combination and a second predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second payout winning combination stops at the active position, a payout of gaming media is executed in the same number as the bet number set by the bet number setting means as a bonus corresponding to the second payout winning combination,
A gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D8, characterized in that the first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, multiple payout roles are set, and in a game in which the same number of gaming media as the number of bets is paid out regardless of which payout role is won and there is no increase or decrease in the gaming media, the first and second predetermined pattern combinations constituting the first and second payout roles are configured to be visually distinguishable. This allows for variation in the stop results of the rotating body in each game, and makes it possible to keep players from getting bored even in a game in which there is no increase or decrease in the gaming media regardless of which payout role is won.

Feature D10. As the plurality of payout roles, a first payout role (e.g., a special bell as a first P minor role) that can be won during the normal game state and a third payout role (e.g., a special BB small role 1 as a 32nd P minor role) that can be won during the specific state are set,
The dispensing means is
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first payout winning combination and a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first payout winning combination stops at the active position, a payout of game media is executed in the same number as the bet number set by the bet number setting means as a bonus corresponding to the first payout winning combination;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the third payout winning combination and a third predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second payout winning combination stops at the active position, a payout of gaming media is executed in the same number as the bet number set by the bet number setting means as a bonus corresponding to the third payout winning combination.
A gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D9, characterized in that the first predetermined pattern combination and the third predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which multiple payout roles are set and, for any winning payout role, the same number of gaming media as the number of bets is paid out and there is no increase or decrease in the gaming media, the first predetermined pattern combination constituting the first payout role winning that occurs during the normal gaming state and the third predetermined pattern combination constituting the third payout role winning that occurs during the specific state are configured to be visually distinguishable. Therefore, it is possible to create variation in the stop results of the orbiting body in each game between the normal gaming state and the specific state, and it is possible to easily experience the transition of the gaming state even in a game in which the expected number of gaming media is the same.

Feature D11. The bet number set by the bet number setting means includes a first bet number (1 coin) that makes the expected number of payouts of the gaming media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state equal to the expected number of payouts of the gaming media by the payout means per game executed during the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state, and a second bet number (3 coins) that is different from the first bet number;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that in a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of game media paid out by the payout means per game executed during the specific state is not equivalent to the expected number of game media paid out by the payout means per game executed during the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the novel gameplay of the above feature D1 can be realized with the first bet number, while a general game in which the expected payout number differs between the specific state and the normal game state can be realized by setting a second bet number different from the first bet number. In this way, multiple gameplay characteristics can be realized with one gaming machine, and the game can be diversified.

In this case, for example, if the gameplay that can result in an increase or decrease in game media realized with the second bet number can be experienced with the first bet number, it is possible to position the game with the first bet number as a practice for the game with the second bet number. This makes it possible to first practice the game with the second bet number with the first bet number, and to understand the fun of the game, even if it is difficult to understand how interesting it is on the first play, so that the game with the second bet number can be fully enjoyed.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for executing a payout of a predetermined number of game media as a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning the game state to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means changes compared to before the transition, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (e.g., first PBB, second PBB) corresponding to the transition result and a specific pattern combination (e.g., red 7, red 7, watermelon) corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position;
A gaming machine comprising:
The bet number set by the bet number setting means includes a first bet number (3 coins) and a second bet number (1 coin) different from the first bet number,
A condition determination means (in the second embodiment, a function of executing a process to determine the presence or absence of a special bonus flag by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result is satisfied in a game that is played in a state where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount;
a first presentation means (function of executing the processing of, for example, step S5520, step S5704, and step S5705 in the main control device 101 in the second embodiment) capable of executing a first specific presentation by a predetermined presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc.) in a game that is played in a situation in which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount;
A second presentation means (a function of executing, in the main control device 101 in the second embodiment, for example, processing of steps S5521, S5712, S5713, etc., or processing for special addition) capable of executing a second specific presentation different from the first specific presentation by the predetermined presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc.) in a game played in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be established by the condition determination means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a first bet number and a second bet number can be set, different effects are generated when a game is played with the first bet number, a specific condition is met, and then a game is played with the second bet number, and when a game is not played with the first bet number, or a game is played with the first bet number but a specific condition is not met and then a game is played with the second bet number. This makes it possible to significantly improve the range of play for a gaming machine in which multiple bet numbers can be set. In other words, unlike conventional gaming machines, which always play with the first bet number, for example, it is possible to realize a playability in which a specific condition is met when playing with the first bet number, and then a game is played with the second bet number.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the probability of winning each role by the lottery means, which is performed when the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount, is the same in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is met and a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not met.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning each role by the lottery means in a game played with the second bet amount remains unchanged regardless of whether the specific condition is met. Therefore, it is possible to make the presentation different between the first presentation means and the second presentation means without changing the game state, etc. This increases the freedom of presentation, which can greatly contribute to increasing attention.

Feature E3. The second payout role (for example, a special watermelon as the 26P minor role) and the replay role (special replay) are provided, in which the same number of game media as the second bet is paid out as a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number,
A gaming machine as described in feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that when at least in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established, the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number and a lottery is conducted by the lottery means, the gaming machine is set so that either the second payout role or the re-play role is won.

According to the above configuration, at least in the game played with the second bet amount when a specific condition is met, there is no increase or decrease in the amount of gaming media. In this way, it is possible to position the game with the second bet amount as a presentation game, and it is possible to ideally realize novel presentations with different bet amounts, as long as the player does not suffer any loss.

Feature E4. A first payout role (for example, watermelon as the 26th minor role) is provided, in which a first specific number of game media equal to or greater than the second bet is paid out as a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied as one condition when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win for the first payout in a game played in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number.

The above configuration makes it less likely that a player will encounter an inconvenience in playing a game with the second bet amount based on the establishment of a specific condition, such as not having the game media for the second bet amount even though the specific condition has been established, and therefore not being able to see the second specific performance based on the establishment of the specific condition. In other words, this is because the game media for the second bet amount or more should have been paid out based on the first payout winning/winning role that triggered the establishment of the specific condition.

Feature E5. The first payout role (for example, watermelon as the 26th minor role) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number;
A second payout role (for example, a special watermelon as a 26P minor role) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means which is performed in a state where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the stopping outcome of each of the revolving bodies when the first payout winning combination is achieved is set to be the same as the stopping outcome of each of the revolving bodies when the second payout winning combination is achieved.

According to the above configuration, the first payout that is won in a game with a first bet amount that satisfies a specific condition and the second payout that is won in a game with a second bet amount that can be executed after the specific condition is satisfied have the same stopping outcome. In this way, the game played with the second bet amount can be made to resemble the game played with the first bet amount, making it possible to reduce the awkwardness of the gameplay that alternates between bet amounts.

Feature E6. The first payout role (for example, watermelon as the 26th minor role) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the specific condition is established based on winning the first payout and also winning a lottery by a second lottery means (a function of executing a special additional lottery process by the main control unit 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not met simply by winning the first payout role at the first bet number, but is met when the lottery by the second lottery means is won. This makes it possible to lower the probability of the specific condition being met without lowering the appearance rate of the first payout role, and increases the rarity of the second specific performance by the second performance means. Furthermore, by doing as described above, even when the first specific role is won, there will be cases where the specific condition is met and cases where it is not met, and it is also possible to diversify the performance settings when the first specific role is won.

Feature E7. The gaming machine described in Feature E6, characterized in that a second benefit (e.g., an additional number of games in attack mode) different from the benefit provided by the payout of the gaming medium is awarded by winning the lottery drawn by the second lottery means.

The above configuration improves the significance of the lottery by the second lottery means, and also improves the significance of the second specific presentation, since if the second benefit is awarded, the specific condition is met and the second specific presentation is performed by the second presentation means.

Feature E8. The gaming machine described in Feature E7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process for a special top-up by the main control device 101) capable of determining the type of the second benefit to be granted based on the result of a lottery by the lottery means, which is performed in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount.

The above configuration enhances the significance of the game played with the second bet number. In other words, when the first specific role is won, it is determined that the second bonus will be awarded by winning the second lottery means, and the type of second bonus to be awarded is determined in the game with the second bet number that is subsequently played. In this way, the excitement of the game played with the second bet number is enhanced.

Feature E9. The gaming machine described in Feature E8 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing a process for normal addition by the main control device 101) capable of determining the type of the second benefit to be awarded based on the result of a lottery performed by the lottery means when the lottery means draws a lottery with the first bet amount set by the bet amount setting means in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is met and the type of the second benefit can be determined in a game with the second bet number, if a game with the first bet number is played instead of the game with the second bet number, the type of the second benefit is determined using the lottery result of the game with the first bet number, thus avoiding the inconvenience of not awarding the second benefit.

Feature E10. A gaming machine according to Feature E8 or Feature E9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for determining the type of the second benefit to be granted using the result of the lottery by the lottery means based on the first bet number that triggered the establishment of the specific condition (a function for executing a process for determining the number of games to be added for the special add-on based on an add-on trigger by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, the type of the second bonus is reflected not only in the game after the specific condition is met, but also in the result of the game that triggered the specific condition to be met. As a result, the type of the second bonus reflects the continuity of a series of games, in which the specific condition is met in a game with a first bet amount, and then the second bonus is awarded mainly in a game with a second bet amount, making it possible to realize an innovative gameplay in which a bonus awarding system takes into account the continuity of games with different bet amounts.

Feature E11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E10, characterized in that the second specific effect by the second effect means can also occur in a game that is played in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a second specific effect can occur when a specific condition is met in a game with a first bet amount and a game with a second bet amount is played, the second specific effect can also occur in a game with the first bet amount, making it difficult to tell whether the game in which the second specific effect occurs was played with the first bet amount or the second bet amount. This makes it difficult to tell whether the game in which the second specific effect occurs was played with the first bet amount or the second bet amount in a game in which the bet amount is changed back and forth, making it possible to focus attention on the outcome of the game (for example, the type of second bonus to be awarded) in a game in which the bet amount is changed back and forth.

Feature E12. The first payout role (for example, watermelon as the 26th minor role) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number;
The specific condition is established based on the first payout winning and winning a lottery by a second lottery means (a function for executing a special add-on lottery process by the main control device 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means,
The gaming machine described in feature E11 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing processing for normal addition by the main control unit 101) capable of executing the second specific presentation when the lottery by the second lottery means, which is performed when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, is not won.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific condition under which the second special benefit is awarded is not met, the second special benefit can occur in a game played with the first bet number. This makes it difficult to tell whether the second special benefit was implemented based on a game with the second bet number implemented due to the specific condition being met, or whether it was implemented based on the specific condition not being met. This makes it difficult to tell whether the bet number is being changed in a game that is realized by changing the bet number, and makes it possible to focus attention on the outcome of the game (for example, the type of second special benefit to be awarded).

Feature E13. The receiving means includes a plurality of second bet number receiving means capable of receiving the virtual game medium of the second bet number;
The gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E12, wherein the second presentation means executes the second specific presentation when a virtual game medium of the second bet number is accepted by operation of a first second bet number accepting means among the plurality of second bet number accepting means in a game played in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be established by the condition determination means and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, and executes the first specific presentation when a virtual game medium of the second bet number is accepted by operation of a second second bet number accepting means different from the first second bet number accepting means.

According to the above configuration, when the first side of the multiple second bet number receiving means is operated, the second specific presentation is executed, while when the second side is operated, the first specific presentation is executed, making it possible to vary the presentation depending on the second bet number receiving means operated. For example, even if the operation of the first side is prompted when a specific condition is met, it is up to the player to decide which operation to perform, and when the second side is operated contrary to the operation instruction of the first side, the player's decision is respected. This makes it possible to perform presentations within a range that does not deviate from the thrill of playing a slot machine, which is to start a game by rotating the rotating body by one's own operation, and to end a game by stopping the rotation of the rotating body by one's own operation.

Feature E14. The start operation means is provided in a plurality of ways,
The gaming machine described in feature E13 is configured to receive the operating force of the first second bet number receiving means by the player, and to operate a predetermined start operating means among the plurality of start operating means.

According to the above configuration, when a player operates the first second bet number accepting means, a predetermined start operating means is also operated, and the operation of the accepting means and the operation of the start operating means are performed in conjunction, improving operability. In this case, since not only are there first and second side second bet number accepting means as described above, but there are also multiple start operating means, it can be said that the player can choose whether or not to use such a configuration in which operations are performed in conjunction. Therefore, the game can be played in a favorable manner without forcing any performance against the player's will.

The above configuration allows a player to operate both operation sections simultaneously if "the acceptance operation section where the first and second bet number acceptance means are operated and the start operation section where the predetermined start operation means is operated are arranged adjacent to each other, and the acceptance operation section and the start operation section are operated in the same direction."

In this case, the device may be configured to have an interlocking part that presses the starter operating part in the operating direction when the receiving operating part is operated in the operating direction.

Feature E15. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E14, characterized in that it is provided with a means for reducing the distinguishability between a game played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is met and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount, and a game played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is met and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount (a function for executing a process for setting bet time effects, payout effects, etc. when a special add-on flag is set by the main control device 101).

With the above configuration, in a game in which the bet amount is changed back and forth when a specific condition is met, it is possible to make the change in the bet amount less obvious and to draw attention to the outcome of the game (for example, the type of second bonus to be awarded).

Feature E16: As a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed in a state where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, a payout role and a replay role in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out are set;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E15, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means, which is performed when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, is the payout role, the state in which the specific condition is met is changed to a state in which it is not met, while when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the re-play role, the state in which the specific condition is met can be maintained.

The replay role is a role that allows a player to play a game with the same number of bets as the current game without needing new gaming media as a special bonus when it is won. For example, if a replay role is won in a game with a second bet, the player may be forced to play the next game with the second bet. With the above configuration, even if a player is forced to play the next game with the second bet when a replay role is won in a game with a second bet based on the establishment of a specific condition and the player is forced to play the next game with the second bet, the state in which the specific condition is established is maintained, so that there is no need to make the player play a wasteful game, such as playing a game with the second bet even when the specific condition is not established.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for executing a payout of a predetermined number of game media as a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first specific role (for example, a replay during a normal game state in the first embodiment, and for example, a watermelon role as the 26th minor role in the second embodiment) and a second specific role having a higher probability of winning than the first specific role (for example, a first lip minor role during a normal game state in the first embodiment, and for example, a special watermelon role as the 26th P minor role in the second embodiment) are provided.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specifying means (for example, in the second embodiment, a function for performing a process such as setting a sound effect when three coins are bet when a special addition is made) that reduces the distinguishability between a first specific situation in which the first specific role may be won (a situation in which a re-play win is made in normal game mode, or a situation in which a watermelon role is won) and a second specific situation in which the second specific role may be won (a situation in which a first lip small role is won in a specific mode, or a situation in which a special watermelon role may be won).

According to the above configuration, the distinctiveness of the first specific situation in which the first specific role can win and the second specific situation in which the second specific role can win is reduced, making it difficult to tell whether the first specific role or the second specific role has won. Since the second specific role is set to have a higher probability of winning than the first specific role, for example, by making the frequently occurring second specific role win look like the infrequent first specific role win, it is possible to make it seem as if the first specific role win occurs frequently without increasing the probability of winning the first specific role too much. In this way, by reducing the distinctiveness of roles with different winning probabilities, it is possible to realize innovative gameplay by combining these roles.

Feature F2. In the first specific situation, when the first specific winning combination is established, the stop results of the patterns that stop at positions visible through the display unit in a state where each of the rotating bodies is stopped are:
A gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the winning number is the same as the winning number that occurs when the second specific role is achieved in the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, the stop results when the first specific role is won and the stop results when the second specific role is won are the same. In other words, the rotation of the circling body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the circling body is stopped by the operation of the stop operation means, and the winning of each role is established as a stop result according to the lottery result. This makes it possible to make the first specific role win and the second specific role win common in terms of the stop results, which are the core of the so-called slot machine playability. As a result, in order to reduce the distinctiveness of each specific performance by the identification means, it is possible to make it easier to make the player think that both specific roles are the same, since the stop results of each game are the same in the first place.

Feature F3. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means when the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount (3);
The gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the second specific role is a role that can be won as a result of a lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is a second bet number different from the first bet number.

According to the above configuration, the first and second specific roles, which have different winning probabilities, can be used differently depending on the bet amount. This makes it possible to completely differ the gameplay characteristics, such as the lottery probability, between the first specific situation in which the first specific role can be won and the second specific situation in which the second specific role can be won, without any transition in the game state. Furthermore, as in feature F1, the distinctiveness is reduced between the first and second specific situations, making it difficult for the player to realize that such completely different gameplay characteristics are switching back and forth, and it is possible to realize novel gameplay characteristics that utilize the switching between the gameplay characteristics.

Feature F4. The receiving device includes a receiving effect execution means (a function of executing processing for bet time effects by the main control device 101) capable of executing a receiving effect based on the receiving of a gaming medium or a virtual gaming medium by the receiving means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the identification means is capable of reducing the distinguishability between the acceptance performance executed by the acceptance performance execution means in the first specific situation and the acceptance performance executed by the acceptance performance execution means in the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, by reducing the distinctiveness between the first and second specific situations from the start of the game, when the game medium or virtual game medium is accepted by the accepting means, it becomes difficult to realize situations in which different roles, such as the first and second specific roles, can be won, and it becomes possible to optimally realize the playability described in feature F1.

Feature F5. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means when the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount (3);
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is a second bet amount different from the first bet amount,
The gaming machine described in feature F4 is characterized in that the identification means reduces the distinguishability between the first specific situation and the second specific situation by executing the acceptance performance corresponding to the first bet number using the acceptance performance execution means when an acceptance is made by the acceptance means corresponding to the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, the reception effect makes it difficult to tell whether the game is one in which the first specific role can be won with a first bet amount, or one in which the second specific role can be won with a second bet amount. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which game is played with which bet amount, i.e., which specific role can be won, while making the winning role different for each bet amount.

Feature F6: A virtual game medium number display means (credit display unit 60) that displays the number of virtual game media that can be received by the receiving means;
updating means for updating the display of the number of virtual game media by the number of virtual game media display means based on the reception of the virtual game media by the reception means (a function for executing an in/out counter process of the number of bets by the main control device 101: step S109);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature F5, characterized in that the identification means is capable of making the number of virtual gaming media displayed by the virtual gaming medium number display means invisible or difficult to identify based on the establishment of a specific condition that causes the second specific situation (setting of a special add-on flag).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is different between the first specific situation and the second specific situation, the distinguishability between the first specific situation and the second specific situation is also reduced by reducing the visibility of the number of virtual gaming media that can be used to set the bet amount. In this way, it is possible to avoid an incident in which the fact that different bet amounts are set by the bet amount setting means is clearly represented by updating the display of the number of virtual gaming media, making it clear which bet amount is being set.

Feature F7: A payout number display unit (payout number display unit 62) is provided to display the number of game media paid out by the payout unit,
The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the specifying means is capable of making the payout number displayed by the payout number display means invisible or difficult to see based on the establishment of the specific condition.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific situation occurs, not only the display of the number of virtual gaming media but also the visibility of the display of the payout number is reduced. Generally, these displays are displayed side by side, and if the visibility of only one of the displays is reduced, it may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, by reducing the visibility of both displays, it is possible to effectively achieve the effect of feature F6 without causing discomfort.

Feature F8. The gaming machine described in Feature F7, characterized in that the number of gaming media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the winning of the first specific role is different from the number of gaming media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the winning of the second specific role.

According to the above configuration, even if the payout amounts are different between the specific roles, as described in feature F7, the visibility of the payout amount display is reduced to begin with, so the configuration of feature F7 has the effect of making it difficult to tell which specific role has been achieved.

Feature F9. The receiving means includes a plurality of specific receiving means (a second credit insertion switch 57 for one bet, a fourth credit insertion switch 69, and a fifth credit insertion switch 75) that can be operated in the second specific situation;
The gaming machine described in any one of features F5 to F8, wherein the identification means, in the second specific situation, when a virtual game medium is accepted by operating a first specific accepting means among the plurality of specific accepting means, causes the acceptance performance execution means to perform the acceptance performance that is subject to reducing the distinctiveness from the first specific situation, while, when a virtual game medium is accepted by operating a second specific accepting means different from the first specific accepting means, causes the acceptance performance execution means to perform the acceptance performance that is not subject to reducing the distinctiveness from the first specific situation.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific situation, when the first side of the plurality of second bet number accepting means is operated, an accepting performance is performed in which the distinctiveness from the first specific situation is reduced, and when the second side is operated, an accepting performance is performed in which the distinctiveness from the first specific situation is not reduced. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the effect of a performance with reduced distinctiveness without departing from the thrill of playing with a slot machine, which is to start a game by rotating the rotating body by one's own operation, and to end a game by stopping the rotation of the rotating body by one's own operation.

Feature F10. A payout execution means (a function of executing a process for setting a payout by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout according to the payout number based on the payout of the gaming media by the payout means,
The number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the winning of the first specific combination is different from the number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the winning of the second specific combination,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that the determination means is capable of reducing the distinguishability between the payout executed by the payout execution means based on the winning of the first specific role in the first specific situation and the payout executed by the payout execution means based on the winning of the second specific role in the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, the distinguishability of the payouts between the first and second specific roles, which have different payout amounts, is reduced, making it difficult to tell whether the first or second specific role has been won. This makes it possible to optimally realize the playability of feature F1.

Feature F11. A first specific number of game media is paid out by the payout means based on the first specific combination, and a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out by the payout means based on the second specific combination,
The gaming machine described in feature F10 is characterized in that the determination means reduces the distinguishability between the first specific situation and the second specific situation by executing the payout corresponding to the one specific number of payouts by the payout execution means based on the winning of the second specific role.

The above configuration allows the effect of feature F10 to be effectively achieved.

Feature F12. The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is a second bet amount;
The gaming machine described in feature F11, wherein the second specific number is set to be equal to or less than the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, for example, if the configuration has a function of crediting virtual gaming media, when the second specific winning combination is achieved, it becomes difficult for gaming media to actually be paid out. In other words, in order to achieve the second specific winning combination, the virtual gaming media of the second bet number is accepted by the accepting means, and even if a second specific number of gaming media that is equal to or less than the second bet number is acquired as a result, the second specific number of gaming media is considered to fit within the credit. In this way, since gaming media is not actually paid out, the payout appearance alone can have the effect of reducing distinctiveness.

Feature F13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F12, characterized in that the start operating means is operated in response to the operating force of the receiving means by the player.

According to the above configuration, when a player operates the receiving means, the start operating means is also operated, and the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the start operating means are performed in conjunction with each other, improving operability. In this way, a time lag is unlikely to occur between the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the start operating means, and it is possible to start the rotation of the circulating body without giving time to recognize the number of virtual game media accepted by the receiving means. Therefore, in a configuration in which the first specific role and the second specific role are used depending on the difference in the bet number as in feature F3, it is possible to reduce the distinguishability of the bet number and make it difficult to tell whether the first specific role or the second specific role has been won.

The above configuration allows a player to operate both operation sections simultaneously if "the receiving operation section where the receiving means is operated and the start operation section where the start operation means is operated are provided adjacent to each other and the receiving operation section and the start operation section are operated in the same direction."

In this case, the device may be configured to have an interlocking part that presses the starter operating part in the operating direction when the receiving operating part is operated in the operating direction.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result to a player when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The bet number set by the bet number setting means includes a first bet number (3 coins) and a second bet number (1 coin, 2 coins) different from the first bet number,
a pay position setting means for setting the pay position according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means (a function for executing a pay line setting process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine characterized in that a first effective position (a downward sloping line L4) set by the effective position setting means when the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount, and a second effective position (a curved line L6) set by the effective position setting means when the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount, are set to include specific positions that are effective positions that do not overlap with each other.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to use the specific position to relate the game of the first bet number to the game of the second bet number. In other words, the specific position included in the first valid position side does not overlap with the second valid position, and the specific position included in the second valid position side does not overlap with the first valid position. By using such a relationship, for example, in a game played with the first bet number, a specific pattern combination stops at a specific position to win a specific result, while in a game played with the second bet number, even if the specific pattern combination is stopped at a position where the specific pattern combination that wins the specific result for the first bet number was stopped, the position is not considered to be a valid position in the game played with the second bet number, so the specific result is not won. However, since the stop result is a winning result in the game played with the first bet number, it is possible to make it appear as if the specific result has been won in the game played with the second bet number. The reverse is also true; by using a specific position that does not overlap between the first and second valid positions, it is possible to produce a winning result in one position but not in the other, as described above, and it is possible to take advantage of the commonality of the results to increase the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 is characterized in that the first valid position is configured by a first specific position (a downward-right line L4) that does not overlap with the second valid position, and the second valid position is configured by a second specific position (a curved line L6) that does not overlap with the first valid position, such that there is no valid position that overlaps the first valid position and the second valid position.

According to the above configuration, there are no overlapping valid positions between the first and second valid positions. If there are overlapping valid positions, for example, when trying to stop a winning combination that will result in a predetermined winning result in a game played with the first bet amount in a game played with the second bet amount, a picture combination corresponding to the result of the current game with the second bet amount will stop at the overlapping valid position, which may cause an inconvenience in that the rule of the results you want to set (the rule that makes the results of the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount the same) will be broken. Therefore, by preventing overlapping valid positions as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature G1 while avoiding such inconvenience.

Feature G3: The valid positions are positions visible through the display unit, and are set as lines that combine the stop positions at which the patterns on each of the rotating bodies can stop, one for each of the rotating bodies;
The gaming machine described in feature G2 is characterized in that the first specific position is set as a line that becomes a straight line when the stop positions are combined, while the second specific position is set as a bent line that generates a bend when the stop positions are combined.

In a gaming machine in which a number of rotating bodies are stopped and the result is announced by the combination of the pictures attached to the number of rotating bodies, if the combination of the pictures corresponding to the winning role is set to stop in a straight line, the player can easily understand the winning role, rather than stopping on a curved line. Based on this premise, in the above configuration, it is considered that the first specific position set as a straight line makes it easier for the player to understand the combination of the stopped pictures than the second specific position set as a curved line. If such a phenomenon is utilized, for example, even if a combination of pictures corresponding to the result of the game of the second bet number is stopped at the second specific position with the second bet number, if a predetermined combination of pictures is stopped at the first specific position as the stopped result of the game, the player will tend to look at the predetermined combination of pictures, and it will be easy to mistakenly believe that a predetermined result has been won. Therefore, it is more preferable to use the first specific position and the second specific position to make the results common.

Feature G4. The gaming machine described in Feature G3, characterized in that the stop positions included in the line of the first specific position and the stop positions included in the line of the second specific position are set so that there are stop positions that are common and stop positions that are not common.

The above configuration makes it easy to design the game using the first and second specific positions to standardize the results of the game with both bets. Specifically, for example, when a stop result that stops a predetermined pattern combination on a line at the first specific position is to appear in a game with the second bet, it is necessary to stop the predetermined pattern combination at the first specific position while stopping the pattern combination as a result of the game with the second bet at the second specific position. According to the above configuration, in such a situation, it is sufficient to stop the patterns that make up the predetermined pattern combination at a stop position that is common to the first specific position, and to stop the patterns that do not make up the predetermined pattern combination at a stop position that is not common. This simplifies the pattern configuration when associating the combination of the pattern that stops at the common stop position and the pattern that stops at the non-common stop position with the predetermined pattern combination.

Feature G5. The gaming machine described in Feature G4, characterized in that the number of the common stop positions is greater than the number of the non-common stop positions.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature G4, among the pictures stopped at the second specific position, the number of pictures that make up the predetermined picture combination is greater than the number of pictures that do not make up the predetermined picture combination. This makes it easier to reuse the combinations of various pictures in the game with the first bet number when designing the combinations of various pictures in the game with the second bet number for the game with the first bet number. Therefore, it is possible to easily achieve the innovative gameplay of feature G1 while making good use of the existing configuration.

Feature G6. A gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, characterized in that the first bet amount is set to be greater than the second bet amount.

According to the above configuration, the first bet number on the side where the straight line is set as the valid position is greater than the second bet number on the side where the curved line is set as the valid position. Generally, the greater the bet number, the higher the probability of winning a role (e.g., a bonus) and the more benefits a player can obtain in a game. In the above configuration, the bet number that a player will actually place in a game is set as the straight line. In this way, for example, in a game with the second bet number, if a predetermined pattern combination stops on the straight line, which is the first valid position, it is possible for the player to easily understand that this is the winning combination that corresponds to a predetermined winning result, in light of the game that is normally played.

Feature G7. A first specific result (e.g., a watermelon role) is set as a result that may be won in the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the first bet number is set;
A second specific result (e.g., a special watermelon role) is set as a result that may be won in the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the second bet number is reached,
The reward granting means includes:
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first specific result, a first specific pattern combination stops at the first specific position, so that a benefit corresponding to the first specific result can be awarded;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second specific result, a special benefit corresponding to the second specific result can be awarded by stopping the second specific pattern combination at the second specific position;
The gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G6, characterized in that the first specific pattern combination is set to be completed when first specific patterns (e.g., watermelon patterns) that constitute the first specific pattern combination stop aligned at each of the stopping positions, while the second specific pattern combination is set to be completed when combinations of multiple types of second specific patterns (e.g., watermelon patterns and red bell patterns) that constitute the second specific pattern combination stop at each of the stopping positions.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination that stops on a straight line is set as a single type of first specific pattern, while the second specific pattern combination that stops on a curved line is set as a combination of multiple types of second specific patterns, so the first specific pattern combination is more eye-catching than the second specific pattern combination, and when understanding the winning combination from the stopped numbers, it is easy to understand that the first specific result winning has been achieved even if the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are both stopped. This makes it easier to believe that the first specific result winning has been achieved even with the second specific result.

Feature G8. The gaming machine described in Feature G7, characterized in that when the first specific symbol combination stops at the first specific position, the second specific symbol combination stops at the second specific position, and when the second specific symbol combination stops at the second specific position, the first specific symbol combination stops at the first specific position.

According to the above configuration, for example, in a game with a second bet amount, when a situation occurs in which the second specific result is a second specific combination of symbols stopping at the second specific position and winning the second specific result, the stopped result will be the first specific combination of symbols stopping at the first specific position. In this way, it is possible to make the second specific result easily seem like the first specific result.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result to a player when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a game mode,
a first game mode (normal game mode) in which the number of game media can be increased or decreased based on the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game;
a second game mode (specific mode) in which the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is less likely to increase or decrease in the number of game media than in the first game mode;
is set,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the second gaming mode, a payout result (for example, a special watermelon role as the 26thP minor role) is set as a lottery result by the lottery means, in which the payout of the same number of gaming media as the bet number set by the bet number setting means is awarded as the bonus.

The above configuration has a first game mode that is set so that the amount of game media can be increased or decreased, and a second game mode that is set so that the amount of game media is unlikely to be increased or decreased, so that multiple game modes can be implemented on one game machine, diversifying the game. In particular, since the amount of game media is unlikely to be increased or decreased in the second game mode, it can be used, for example, as a game mode for practice or a game mode for presentation, making it an innovative game machine that has never been seen before.

When setting such a game mode in which increases or decreases in game media are unlikely to occur, it is possible, for example, to make all lottery results into replay roles. A replay role is a role that allows the next game to be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in the current game without the need to accept game media again, and this replay role is considered to be a favorable role for playing the practice game mode, etc., described above. In particular, when a replay role is won, it is common for the number of bets for the next game to be automatically set without the need to accept game media in the next game, so by playing the practice game mode by replaying, there is also the advantage that the operability is improved since the acceptance operation is no longer required.

However, if such replays are set as all roles, because the bet amount is set automatically as described above, even if an attempt is made to end the second game mode as the practice game mode, the bet amount will always be set based on the replay win, which can cause the inconvenience of making it difficult to end the second game mode. In this case, for example, it may become necessary to turn the power of the gaming machine on and off, or to add a configuration that allows the game mode to be changed even when the bet amount is set based on the replay win.

In the above configuration, instead of making all replays, the payout result is set to pay out the same number of gaming media as the bet amount, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that combines the first gaming mode with the unprecedented and innovative playability of the second gaming mode while avoiding the inconvenience of automatically setting the bet amount.

The "second gaming mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a second gaming mode set so that no increase or decrease in gaming media occurs" or "a second gaming mode that allows the current amount of gaming media to be maintained."

The "first gaming mode" and "second gaming mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a first gaming mode in which a first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, and a second gaming mode in which a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means."

Feature H2. The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game that imitates a game in the first game mode can be executed;
A gaming machine as described in feature H1, characterized in that when play is performed in the second gaming mode, it is equipped with a means for executing an identification notification indicating that the play is simulating play in the first gaming mode (a function for executing processing for an identification display by a display control device 81).

The above configuration allows players to more clearly recognize the role of the second game mode, which is an innovative second game mode such as the practice game mode shown in feature H1.

Feature H3. The first gaming mode is a gaming mode executed when a first bet number (3 or 2 coins) is set by the bet number setting means;
A gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, characterized in that the second gaming mode is a gaming mode that is executed when a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode and the second game mode are realized by the difference in the number of bets. In this way, since each game mode only requires that the game medium or virtual game medium accepted by the accepting means is different, it is possible for the player to select which game mode to play in at his/her own will. Here, if one game mode is configured to be all replay as described in feature H1 in realizing multiple game modes by the difference in the number of bets, the next game will have to be played in the same game mode due to the automatic setting of the number of bets associated with the replay winning. In this regard, as described in feature H1, since the second game mode is configured to be realized by the payout result, even if the player wants to play the next game in the first game mode, it is permitted to set a different number of bets (first number of bets), and it is possible to preferably execute the first game mode and the second game mode.

Feature H4. A replay role and a transition result (e.g., a first PBB, a second PBB) corresponding to transitioning the game state from a normal game state to a specific state in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means changes are set as the lottery result by the lottery means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a winning re-play role is set to be the same or approximately the same in a first predetermined state (normal gaming state) of the normal gaming state in the first gaming mode and a second predetermined state (normal gaming state) of the normal gaming state in the second gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, even in the second game mode, which is set so that the number of game media does not increase or decrease, not only the payout result but also the replay role is set. The replay role is set to have the same or approximately the same winning probability in the first predetermined state of the first game mode and the second predetermined state of the second game mode. On the premise that the first game mode is a general game mode, if the replay role in the second game mode is set to have the same or approximately the same winning probability as the replay role in the general game mode, it becomes possible to play the game with the same feeling as usual in the second game mode, both as a practice game mode and as a game mode, and it becomes possible to improve the significance of the practice mode. Also, assuming that the first game mode is a general game mode as described above, the probability of winning the replay role in the general game mode should be the probability of winning after setting other small roles, etc., and even if the replay role is set with a high probability of winning the replay role other than the other small roles, it can be expected that the payout result will also be in the second game mode with a probability that other small roles can be won in the general game mode. In this way, it is unlikely that almost all results in the second game mode will be replay roles and only rarely will be a payout result, making it possible to optimally achieve the effect of feature H1.

Note that "approximately the same probability" does not have to be exactly the same, as long as the probabilities are recognizable to a player as being roughly the same probability; in other words, the probabilities are recognizable as being different probabilities.

Feature H5. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of re-game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) are set in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a different probability of winning the re-game role,
The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the first predetermined state is set as one of the plurality of replay states.

According to the above configuration, the second predetermined state in the second game mode is set to have the same or approximately the same probability of winning the replay role as any one of the multiple replay states in the first game mode. In this way, not only does the playability of the first game mode improve due to the multiple replay states, but in the second game mode, it can be positioned as a practice mode corresponding to one of the states, clarifying the playability of the second game mode.

Feature H6. The gaming machine described in Feature H5, characterized in that the normal gaming state in the second gaming mode does not include the multiple replay states (normal gaming state, first to third RT states).

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature H5, the second gaming mode can be simplified. In other words, while the first gaming mode has multiple replay states, the second gaming mode, which serves as a practice mode, does not have multiple replay states, so the second gaming mode can be said to be a simpler mode than the first gaming mode. In this way, when designing a gaming machine with multiple gaming modes such as the first gaming mode and the second gaming mode using the limited memory area of the gaming machine, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of having to secure twice the usual memory area or the inconvenience of simplifying the general first gaming mode.

The above configuration may also be expressed as "the normal game state in the second game mode is set so that the probability of winning the replay role in the lottery by the lottery means does not change."

Feature H7. In the first game mode, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-play winning combination and the re-play pattern combination corresponding to the re-play winning combination stops at the effective position, the bet number can be set by the bet number setting means in the next game without the game medium or virtual game medium being accepted by the accepting means as a bonus corresponding to the re-play winning combination.
As one type of the replay pattern combination, a pattern combination is set in which the replay pattern combination is formed by replay patterns (first replay pattern, second replay pattern) which are patterns constituting the replay pattern combination being aligned and stopped at the active position,
The gaming machine described in feature H6 is characterized in that, as the payout result as a lottery result in the second gaming mode, a re-play payout result (various replay small symbols) is set in which, when the re-play symbols line up and stop, the payout of the same number of gaming media as the amount of the bet is granted as the bonus.

As in the above configuration, if the stop result corresponding to the replay payout result is made to appear, it can be made to look as if a replay winning has been achieved because the replay symbols are aligned and stopped, and since the same number of gaming media as the bet amount is paid out, the effect of being able to play the next game without needing new gaming media is the same as with a replay winning. Therefore, even if the winning probability of the replay role is set uniformly in the second gaming mode, it is possible to make it look as if the winning probability of the replay role has changed by varying the winning probability and appearance rate of the replay payout result. Therefore, it is possible to bring the playability closer to that of the first gaming mode without setting multiple states with different winning probabilities of the replay role in the second gaming mode.

Feature H8. The gaming machine described in Feature H7, wherein the drive control means includes a means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) for establishing the replay payout result winning if the stop operation means is operated in a first operation sequence when the lottery result of the lottery means is the replay payout result, and for preventing the replay payout result winning from being established if the stop operation means is operated in a second operation sequence different from the first operation sequence.

The above configuration makes it possible to realize cases where you want the replay payout result to appear and cases where you do not want it to appear without changing the winning probability of the replay payout result. Therefore, in a gaming machine with feature H7, there is no need to provide multiple states with different winning probabilities for the replay payout result, and the configuration of the second gaming mode is simplified.

Feature H9. The gaming machine described in Feature H8, characterized in that the bonus awarding means awards the payout of gaming media in the same number as the number of bets as the bonus when the lottery result of the lottery means is the replay payout result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation sequence to establish the replay payout result winning, and also awards the payout of gaming media in the same number as the number of bets as the bonus when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation sequence to establish the replay payout result winning.

According to the above configuration, when a replay payout result is won, the same number of gaming media as the number of bets is paid out regardless of whether or not the replay payout result is won. In this way, it is possible to realize a game in which the game is always played with the same number of coins returned, regardless of whether or not a win is won, and there is no increase or decrease in the number of gaming media.

Feature H10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to switch from the first gaming mode to the second gaming mode regardless of the lottery result in the first gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, if a player wishes to execute the second game mode while playing the first game mode, the second game mode can be executed at any time, which increases the degree of freedom in gameplay compared to a configuration in which the second game mode cannot be executed unless some game result is achieved.

Feature H11. A predetermined performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance in the second game mode (a function for executing various performances for a specific mode by the display control device 81) is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature H10, wherein the predetermined performance execution means is configured to restrict the execution of the predetermined performance when switching from the first gaming mode to the second gaming mode is performed while a regulatory condition that is established during the first gaming mode (e.g., a bonus win) is established.

According to the above configuration, although the first game mode and the second game mode can be freely switched, when the regulating condition is met, the predetermined effects are restricted even when switching to the second game mode. By doing so, while allowing free switching between the two game modes, it is possible to inform the player when switching from the first game mode to the second game mode is not appropriate.

Feature H12. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a different probability of winning a predetermined role are set,
The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game that imitates a game in the first game mode can be executed,
A setting means for setting the second game mode (a function for executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81) is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the setting means is capable of setting so as to start the current second gaming mode from one of a plurality of gaming states in the first gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, the second game mode can be played as a simulated trial version of the first game mode without increasing or decreasing the number of game media. In providing this simulated experience, the setting means allows the player to set which state of the game state in the first game mode is to be experienced, improving the playability of the second game mode.

Feature H13: The game machine is provided with a penalty means (a function for executing a penalty process by the main control device 101) capable of carrying out a specific process that is disadvantageous to a player when a specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a specific penalty is performed;
The gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the penalty means is configured to carry out the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the first gaming mode, while not carrying out the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second gaming mode, or to carry out processing that reduces the disadvantage to the player if the specific processing is carried out.

According to the above configuration, when a specific operation that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. If such a configuration is applied uniformly to the second game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. In other words, the above penalty is given in the first game mode for actions such as intentionally trying to obtain game media, but the second game mode is a mode in which there is no possibility of an increase or decrease in game media, and if the above penalty is also given to the second game mode, it would go against the purpose of the second game mode.

Feature H14: The device further includes a specific notification execution means (a function of executing a penalty notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification that the specific process will be performed by the penalty means based on the specific operation,
The gaming machine described in feature H13, wherein the specific notification execution means performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the first gaming mode, and also performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the second gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature H13, although a penalty is not given in the second gaming mode, a specific notification is given. This makes it possible to make the player understand that if a specific operation is performed even in the second gaming mode, it would be an operation that would have been penalized in the first gaming mode, and improves the significance of the practice mode.

Feature H15. The gaming machine described in Feature H14, wherein the specific notification execution means is configured to execute a content notification indicating the content of the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the second gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, when a specific operation is performed in the second specific mode, a penalty is not given, but a notification is given indicating the content of the penalty (content of the specific process). This makes it possible to inform the player of the severity of the penalty that would be given if a specific operation is performed in the first gaming mode, to prevent the player from performing the specific operation, and to enhance the significance of the second gaming mode being a practice mode.

Feature H16: A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (a medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for determining that the gaming medium or virtual gaming medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result to a player when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the pattern is visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a game mode,
a first game mode (normal game mode) in which the number of game media can be increased or decreased based on the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game;
a second game mode (specific mode) in which the number of game media does not increase or decrease from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game;
is set,
A penalty means capable of carrying out a specific process that is disadvantageous to a player when a specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed (a function of carrying out a penalty process by the main control device 101).
Equipped with
The penalty means is configured to carry out the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the first gaming mode, while not carrying out the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second gaming mode, or to carry out processing that reduces the disadvantage to the player if the specific processing is carried out.

The above configuration has a first game mode that is set so that the amount of game media can be increased or decreased, and a second game mode that is set so that the amount of game media cannot be increased or decreased, so that multiple game modes can be implemented on one gaming machine, diversifying the games. In particular, since the amount of game media does not increase or decrease in the second game mode, it can be used, for example, as a practice game mode or a game mode for presentation, making it an unprecedented and innovative gaming machine.

In addition, when a specific operation that is subject to a specified penalty is performed in the first game mode, a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. If such a specific process configuration is applied uniformly to the second game mode as well, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. In other words, the above-mentioned penalty is originally given for actions in the first game mode, such as intentionally trying to obtain game media, but the second game mode is a mode in which there is no possibility of an increase or decrease in game media, and if the above-mentioned penalty is also given to the second game mode, it would go against the purpose of the second game mode. Therefore, by adopting the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the second game mode, which is a practice mode.

The "second gaming mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a second gaming mode in which the amount of gaming media is less likely to increase or decrease" or "a second gaming mode that allows the current amount of gaming media to be maintained."

The "first gaming mode" and "second gaming mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a first gaming mode in which a first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, and a second gaming mode in which a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means."

The inventions shown in the following feature groups I to O have been made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention seeks to solve in relation to the background technology that states, "Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as a type of gaming machine. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with auxiliary tanks that store gaming media such as medals that are surplus in the storage section (see, for example, JP 2005-323750 A)." The problem that the invention seeks to solve is, "Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of the ease of use of the auxiliary tanks."

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A housing (housing 11) that is open to the front,
A door body (front door 12) for opening and closing a front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) that is installed in the housing and has a storage section (storage tank 52) that stores game media;
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the cabinet side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has an opening (upper opening 502) at its upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at its lower end.
A first engagement portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and engageable with the first engaging portion,
the auxiliary tank can be installed in the predetermined installation area in a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on an upper side and the bottom is on a lower side, and in a second orientation different from the first orientation,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are not engaged when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, and the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are engaged when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, such that the engagement restricts movement of the auxiliary tank.

From the viewpoint of preventing the loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored within the housing. However, when manually retrieving the gaming media stored in the auxiliary tank of the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank needs to be removed from the housing, so it is required that the auxiliary tank be stored in a free state without being fixed. For this reason, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank will move within the housing and collide with the surrounding hopper device, door body, etc., causing damage.

In this respect, in the present configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in a first orientation with the opening on the top and the bottom on the bottom, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are not engaged, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in a second orientation different from the first orientation, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are engaged. When the game medium from the storage portion is to be stored in the auxiliary tank, it is assumed that the auxiliary tank will be used in the first orientation, and in such a case, the auxiliary tank can be made free and removal from the housing is permitted. On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the above-mentioned engagement portions are engaged, so that the movement of the auxiliary tank within the housing can be restricted. By installing the auxiliary tank in the second orientation during transportation of the gaming machine, etc., rattling of the auxiliary tank during transportation can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. In other words, according to the present invention, it is possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank during transportation while allowing the auxiliary tank to be removed when the gaming machine is in operation, and the convenience is greatly improved.

In addition, in this invention, the orientation of the auxiliary tank corresponds to the switching between the engaged and disengaged states, so the appearance of the auxiliary tank can be made different when it is engaged and when it is disengaged. For example, if the engagement point is in a blind spot seen by an amusement hall employee (a worker who removes the auxiliary tank), the employee may not realize that the tank is engaged and may perform a forced removal operation, which may damage the first engagement part and the second engagement part. In this regard, with this configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank is different, making it possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In this case, for example, if the worker is notified in advance that the auxiliary tank is engaged or not depending on its orientation, the worker can easily determine which of the above states it is in without having to check the engagement point, and this makes it possible to prevent forced removal operations.

In addition, with this configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, it can be installed by utilizing the installation area for the first orientation. This eliminates the need to reserve a dedicated space for transportation, etc., and keeps the expansion of the installation space to a minimum, making it suitable for gaming machines with limited installation area for mounted components.

Feature I2. The door body is rotatably connected to the cabinet at one side of the gaming machine, and a locking device for locking the door body and the cabinet is disposed at the side opposite to the one side of the gaming machine;
the predetermined installation area is set in the housing at a location near the opposite side,
The gaming machine described in feature I1, characterized in that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion engage with each other to restrict upward movement of the auxiliary tank.

In the above configuration, the locking device is provided on the side opposite the pivot axis of the door body, which prevents the door body from opening when locked, and the specified installation area for installing the auxiliary tank is set close to the side opposite the pivot axis of the door body, making it easy to insert and remove the auxiliary tank. However, in a configuration in which the locking device and the installation area for the auxiliary tank are located on the same side, if the auxiliary tank moves upward during transportation of the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank may get caught in an interference position with the locking device, and it may not be possible to unlock it even if an unlocking operation is performed later. In this regard, in the above configuration, the upward movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion, making it possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature I3. The gaming machine described in Feature I1 or I2, characterized in that the second orientation is an orientation in which the auxiliary tank is upside down with respect to the first orientation.

With this configuration, the amount of space occupied in the installation area can be made to be similar when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and when it is installed in the second orientation. Therefore, the installation area for installation in the first orientation can be used as is to install the auxiliary tank in the second orientation, making it possible to suppress the expansion of the installation area.

Feature I4. The gaming machine described in Feature I3, characterized in that the size of the tank overlap area on the tank installation surface of the installation area differs between when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, and the tank overlap area is larger when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation.

When the gaming machine is being transported, the auxiliary tank is installed in the cabinet in the second orientation. In this case, the movement of the gaming machine itself generates a force on the auxiliary tank depending on the orientation of the cabinet, but since the auxiliary tank is engaged with the cabinet and the tank overlap area on the tank installation surface is large, the auxiliary tank can be held in a stable state. In addition, since the tank overlap area on the tank installation surface is small when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation when the gaming machine is in operation, which is advantageous in terms of avoiding interference between the auxiliary tank and the engagement portion (second engagement portion) on the cabinet side.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I3 or I4, characterized in that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are set in a positional relationship such that their height positions match when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, and their height positions do not match when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation.

The above configuration makes it possible to prevent the first engagement portion from unintentionally engaging with the second engagement portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, thereby preventing the auxiliary tank from being restricted in movement.

Feature I6: In the auxiliary tank, a protruding portion (right flange portion 571c) that protrudes outward is provided on at least a portion of the periphery of the opening,
A gaming machine described in any of features I3 to I5, characterized in that the first engagement portion is formed by the protruding portion and the second engagement portion is provided on the tank installation surface of the installation area.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be properly engaged, while the height position of the first engagement portion can be significantly changed when the auxiliary tank is turned upside down. This makes it possible to prevent the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion from unintentionally engaging with each other when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, thereby preventing the movement of the auxiliary tank from being restricted.

Feature I7. The protruding portion is provided at a portion extending in a direction that is the front-rear direction of the gaming machine when the auxiliary tank is installed in the installation area at the peripheral portion of the opening,
The gaming machine described in feature I6 is configured so that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are engaged and disengaged by sliding the auxiliary tank in the front-to-back direction of the gaming machine within the cabinet.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the protruding portion provided on the periphery of the opening of the auxiliary tank can be used to engage the auxiliary tank within the housing. In addition, since the hopper device and the auxiliary tank are arranged side-by-side within the housing, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the protruding portion regulates the position of the auxiliary tank relative to the hopper device and the wall of the housing. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank is not engaged in the first orientation, it is possible to regulate the positional deviation of the auxiliary tank.

Feature I8. Equipped with a storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b and main control device 101) for detecting the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means has insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) that are inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank,
The insertion holes are provided in a plurality of rows vertically,
A gaming machine described in any of features I3 to I7, characterized in that the insertion member can be inserted into any of the multiple insertion holes whether the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation or the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation.

According to the above configuration, in either case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation or where the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the insertion member of the storage state detection means can be positioned inside the tank body. This makes it possible to detect the storage state of the game media regardless of the top/bottom orientation of the auxiliary tank, making it possible to provide a configuration suitable for installing the auxiliary tank upside down.

Feature I9. The auxiliary tank is slid in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine within the cabinet to engage and disengage the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion,
A storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b and main control device 101) is provided to detect the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detection means has insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) that are inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank,
The insertion member extends in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine and in the height direction in the same direction as the tank installation surface of the installation area,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I3 to I8, characterized in that the insertion member can be inserted and removed from the insertion hole by sliding the auxiliary tank in the front-to-back direction of the gaming machine within the cabinet.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the first orientation and game media is stored in the auxiliary tank, the auxiliary tank is relatively heavy, so when an operator removes the auxiliary tank, it is thought that the auxiliary tank is pulled out of the housing by sliding it from the front opening side of the housing along the tank installation surface. In this case, because the auxiliary tank is slid, the insertion member inserted into the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank is pulled out without receiving excessive force from the auxiliary tank.

In contrast, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the second orientation, the auxiliary tank is empty and its weight is relatively light. Therefore, when an operator removes the auxiliary tank, it is conceivable that the auxiliary tank will be pulled out of the housing while being lifted toward the front. In this case, there is a concern that the insertion member inserted into the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank will be subjected to excessive force from the auxiliary tank. In this regard, the auxiliary tank is configured so that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are engaged and disengaged by sliding the auxiliary tank in the front-to-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the insertion member can be prevented from being subjected to excessive force from the auxiliary tank. In other words, the insertion member can be protected.

Feature I10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I3 to I9, characterized in that, among the side walls of the auxiliary tank that rise from the periphery of the bottom so as to surround the bottom, the side wall (left side wall 501e) that faces the second engagement portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation is inclined such that the distance between the side wall (right side wall 501d) facing the side wall on the inside of the auxiliary tank increases toward the top.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the side wall portion that faces the second engagement portion is inclined such that the distance between the opposing side wall portions increases as the distance increases upward. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, it is easier to ensure a space between the auxiliary tank and the second engagement portion, and interference between the two can be suppressed.

Feature I11. A bottom plate opening (medal ejection hole 15) is provided on the bottom plate of the housing, and game media can be ejected to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
A gaming machine described in any of features I3 to I10, characterized in that when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the auxiliary tank covers the bottom plate opening, and the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are engaged with each other on the outside of the auxiliary tank.

When the gaming machine is being transported, it is anticipated that a person may insert a foreign object or hand into the bottom plate opening from outside the gaming machine to disengage the first and second engagement parts, and then remove the auxiliary tank to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine. With the above configuration, the bottom plate opening is covered by the auxiliary tank, and the engagement relationship between the first and second engagement parts is established outside the auxiliary tank, so that the wall of the auxiliary tank can be interposed between the engagement point and the bottom plate opening. This makes it difficult to access the engagement point through the bottom plate opening, making it possible to suppress the above-mentioned unauthorized behavior.

Feature I12. The bottom plate of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal ejection hole 15), and the gaming medium can be ejected to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I11, wherein the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by an opening/closing means (bottom lid 514) provided on the bottom.

According to the above configuration, by opening the bottom of the auxiliary tank, the gaming media from the storage section can be led directly to the bottom plate opening. This allows the auxiliary tank to be automatically collected while still installed inside the cabinet, eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the gaming hall, and also making it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost.

Feature I13. The opening and closing means is configured to open the bottom by moving inwardly of the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine described in feature I12, wherein the auxiliary tank is provided with a holding means for holding the opening/closing means in a closed position.

The above configuration includes a holding means for holding the opening/closing means in the closed position, making it possible to transport the gaming machine with the bottom of the auxiliary tank closed.

Feature I14: The auxiliary tank is provided with a display unit on which predetermined information is displayed,
A gaming machine described in any of features I3 to I13, characterized in that when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the specified information is visible or in a first state where it is easily visible, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the specified information is invisible or in a second state where it is more difficult to see than the first state.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation, the specified information is visible or easily visible, thereby alerting the worker performing the removal operation and preventing the worker from performing an unreasonable removal operation. Conversely, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the specified information is invisible or difficult to see, thereby preventing the worker from becoming confused by the display of the specified information and preventing any disruption to the game media collection operation.

Examples of the specified information include information explaining how to release the engaged state, information warning against removing the auxiliary tank, information suggesting or indicating that the auxiliary tank is fixed, information suggesting or indicating that the auxiliary tank is at the bottom, information suggesting or indicating the raw materials or materials used to form the auxiliary tank, etc. The specified information does not necessarily have to be in the form of text, but may be composed of color, shape, pattern, etc.

<Characteristics Group J>
Feature J1. A housing (housing 11) that is open to the front,
A door body (front door 12) for opening and closing a front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) that is installed in the housing and has a storage section (storage tank 52) that stores game media;
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the cabinet side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
A bottom plate opening (a medal ejection hole 15) is provided on the bottom plate of the housing to eject game media from inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine.
The auxiliary tank has an opening at an upper end and a bottom at a lower end,
The bottom portion is provided with an opening/closing means (bottom cover 514) that allows the bottom portion to be opened and closed.
the auxiliary tank can be installed in the predetermined installation area in a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on an upper side and the bottom is on a lower side, and in a second orientation (downward orientation) in which the opening is on a lower side and the bottom is on an upper side,
A gaming machine comprising a switching mechanism that closes the opening/closing means in the first orientation and opens the opening/closing means in the second orientation.

With the above configuration, the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, so that the auxiliary tank can be made available for manual collection by closing the bottom, while it can be made available for automatic collection by opening the bottom. This allows the auxiliary tank to be installed inside the cabinet even during automatic collection, eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the gaming hall, and also making it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost, etc.

In addition, in the above configuration, the bottom can be opened when the auxiliary tank is turned upside down from the first orientation to the second orientation, so the operation of switching to the open state can be simplified. Moreover, in this configuration, the opening and closing of the bottom is associated with the orientation of the auxiliary tank, so it is easy to understand which state it is in. For example, if the opening and closing only switches under the first orientation, it is difficult to understand which state it is in without looking inside the auxiliary tank. As a result, there is a risk of using it in an incorrect state, such as using it in an open state when it should be used in a closed state. In this regard, in the present configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank can be made different between the closed state and the open state, so it is possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In particular, since the configuration is configured to be in the open state when the bottom is on the top, it is easy to notice that the bottom is open, and it is possible to prevent use in an incorrect state.

Feature J2. The gaming machine described in Feature J1, characterized in that the auxiliary tank is configured to be installed in the specified installation area in the second orientation when automatically collecting gaming media.

By placing the auxiliary tank in the second orientation, the bottom of the auxiliary tank is switched to an open state, which makes it possible to prevent forgetting to leave the bottom open when used in conjunction with automatic collection.

Feature J3: The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and opens the bottom by being rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank;
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized in that when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation, the opening and closing means rotates and opens under its own weight.

According to the above configuration, the opening/closing means rotates under its own weight to open the bottom, so that the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened by placing the auxiliary tank in the second orientation, preventing the auxiliary tank from being left open. In this case, there is no need for a drive unit that rotates the opening/closing means to open the bottom, or a control configuration that controls the drive unit depending on the position of the auxiliary tank, making it possible to simplify the configuration and reduce costs.

Feature J4: The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and opens the bottom by being rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank;
A gaming machine described in any of features J1 to J3, characterized in that when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation, at least the support side base end of the opening/closing means is covered from above by the bottom of the auxiliary tank.

The above configuration prevents the game media from the storage section from colliding with the support side base end of the opening/closing means, causing problems with support. In this case, by using the bottom of the auxiliary tank as a cover that covers the support side base end, there is no need to provide a dedicated part, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank can be simplified.

Feature J5: The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and opens the bottom by being rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank;
The auxiliary tank is provided with a rotation limiting means (projection 535) for limiting the rotation range of the opening/closing means,
A gaming machine described in any of features J1 to J4, characterized in that the upper limit rotation angle (predetermined rotation angle α) set by the rotation limiting means is an angle at which the opening and closing means rotates to the closing side under its own weight when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the opening and closing means rotates under its own weight to close the bottom, so that the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be closed by placing the auxiliary tank in the first orientation, and forgetting to close the tank can be prevented. In this case, a drive unit that rotates the opening and closing means to close the bottom, and a control configuration that controls the drive unit according to the attitude of the auxiliary tank are not required, so it is possible to simplify the configuration and reduce costs.

Feature J6. The gaming machine described in Feature J5, characterized in that when the opening/closing means is rotated to the upper limit angle with the auxiliary tank in the first orientation, the opening/closing means is inclined toward the closing side.

According to the above configuration, by orienting the auxiliary tank in the first direction, the opening and closing means falls toward the closing side under its own weight, allowing the bottom of the auxiliary tank to close naturally.

This feature can also be rephrased as "when the opening/closing means is rotated to the upper limit angle with the auxiliary tank in the first orientation, the center of gravity of the opening/closing means is located on the closed side with respect to a virtual vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the opening/closing means."

Feature J7: The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and opens the bottom by being rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank;
A gaming machine described in any of features J1 to J6, characterized in that a rotation limiting member (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) is provided within the auxiliary tank, which comes into contact with the opening/closing means rotated to the open side when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, and limits the rotation angle of the opening/closing means to the open side.

With the above configuration, if a foreign object or the like is introduced through the bottom plate opening during transportation of the gaming machine and attempts to open the bottom of the auxiliary tank, the rotation limiting member can prevent this. This prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank from opening completely, making it more difficult to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

Feature J8. Equipped with a storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main control device 101) for detecting the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means has insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) that are inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine described in feature J7 is characterized in that the rotation limiting member is constituted by the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, the rotation of the opening/closing member can be restricted by utilizing the storage state detection means without providing a dedicated member as a rotation restriction member. Furthermore, if the auxiliary tank is installed with the insertion member inserted into the tank during transportation of the gaming machine, the rotation of the opening/closing means can be restricted, while the restriction can be released by removing the auxiliary tank from the housing. In other words, the restriction can be switched on or off depending on the situation, improving convenience.

Feature J9. A first engagement portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and engageable with the first engaging portion,
A gaming machine described in any of features J1 to J8, characterized in that when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion do not engage with each other, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion engage with each other, and the engagement restricts movement of the auxiliary tank.

The above configuration makes it possible to respond to automatic collection while engaging the first engagement portion with the second engagement portion. This makes it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from shifting position even if an impact is applied, for example, when a player hits the gaming machine, and makes it possible to properly guide the gaming medium from the storage portion to the bottom plate opening. Furthermore, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation when the gaming machine is transported, it is possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank within the housing, and it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from rattling. This makes it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from colliding with surrounding components within the housing and causing damage.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A housing (housing 11) that is open to the front,
A door body (front door 12) for opening and closing a front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) that is installed in the housing and has a storage section (storage tank 52) that stores game media;
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area within the housing and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
A bottom plate opening (a medal ejection hole 15) is provided on the bottom plate of the housing to eject game media from inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine.
The auxiliary tank is
The container has an opening at its upper end and a bottom at its lower end.
An opening/closing means (bottom cover 514) provided on the bottom portion and capable of opening and closing the bottom portion;
A support means (support portion 607) for supporting the opening/closing means so as to be openable and closable;
A biasing means (coil spring 617) for biasing the opening/closing means toward the closing side;
Equipped with
the auxiliary tank can be installed in the predetermined installation area in a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on an upper side and the bottom is on a lower side, and in a second orientation (downward orientation) in which the opening is on a lower side and the bottom is on an upper side,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the opening and closing means is opened by the weight of the gaming medium when the gaming medium from the storage section is placed on the opening and closing means.

According to the above configuration, the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the weight of the gaming media on the opening and closing means can open the bottom of the tank, so installing the auxiliary tank in the second orientation can accommodate automatic collection. This allows the auxiliary tank to be installed inside the cabinet even during automatic collection, eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the gaming hall, and making it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost. Moreover, since the opening and closing means is biased to the closing side by the biasing means, it is possible to prevent the bottom of the tank from remaining open, and it is possible to prevent the insertion of foreign objects or hands through the bottom plate opening to attempt unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, wherein the auxiliary tank is provided with an opening restriction means (surface 602a of bottom plate portion 602) that restricts the opening/closing means from opening to the outside of the tank by contacting the opening/closing means from the outside of the tank when the opening/closing means is in a closed state.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the bottom of the tank is prevented from opening even if the opening/closing means is pushed up from below. As a result, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation during transportation of the gaming machine, the bottom of the tank is less likely to open even if a foreign object or hand is inserted through the bottom plate opening, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.

Feature K3. The gaming machine described in Feature K1 or K2, characterized in that the bottom portion is provided with a surrounding portion (standing portion 608) that extends in the height direction of the auxiliary tank and surrounds the opening/closing means.

It is anticipated that a foreign object may enter through the bottom plate opening and become caught on the opening/closing means, opening the bottom of the tank and allowing unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine. In this regard, with this configuration, the opening/closing means is surrounded by an enclosure, making it difficult for a foreign object to become caught on the opening/closing means, and making it possible to suppress the above-mentioned unauthorized acts.

Feature K4. The gaming machine described in Feature K3, characterized in that the height dimension of the enclosure is greater than the thickness dimension of the opening/closing means.

The above configuration makes it more difficult for foreign objects to get caught on the opening and closing means.

Feature K5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features K1 to K4, characterized in that it is provided with an upward movement restriction means (right flange portion 571c, engagement portion 574) that restricts the upward movement of the auxiliary tank when the auxiliary tank is installed in the specified installation area in the second orientation.

According to the above configuration, by installing the auxiliary tank in the second orientation during transportation of the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank can be prevented from floating up, and collisions between the auxiliary tank and surrounding components during transportation can be prevented. Furthermore, even if a foreign object or the like is allowed to enter through the bottom plate opening and push up the auxiliary tank, it is possible to make it difficult for a gap to form between the auxiliary tank and the tank installation surface, and to make it difficult for the gap to expand. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine through the gap. Moreover, even when used in response to automatic collection, for example, when a player hits the gaming machine and applies an impact, the auxiliary tank is prevented from bouncing inside the housing. This prevents the auxiliary tank from being displaced due to an impact, and makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of the gaming medium from the storage unit not being guided to the bottom plate opening.

Feature K6: The upward movement restriction means is
A first engagement portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engagement portion (engagement portion 574) provided in the housing and engageable with the first engagement portion,
The gaming machine described in feature K5 is configured such that when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion do not engage with each other, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion engage with each other, and the engagement restricts movement of the auxiliary tank.

The above configuration makes it possible to realize the configuration of feature K5 in a practically preferable manner. In addition, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion do not engage, and the auxiliary tank is allowed to move. Therefore, when used in response to manual collection, the auxiliary tank can be easily removed from within the housing.

Feature K7: The opening and closing means is provided in the auxiliary tank with a size that allows a portion of the bottom portion to be opened and closed;
A gaming machine described in any of features K1 to K6, characterized in that it is provided with a guide means (inclined portion 604) at a location on the bottom different from the opening/closing means, which guides the gaming medium from the storage section toward the opening/closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation.

For example, if the response of the opening/closing means is delayed when game media is supplied from the storage section and the bottom of the tank does not open, the game media may accumulate on the bottom and gradually spill out and become scattered inside the cabinet. In this regard, the above configuration is designed to collect the game media at the opening/closing means, so the weight of the game media can be concentrated on the opening/closing means. This makes it possible to improve the opening responsiveness of the opening/closing means.

Feature K8: The guiding means is a guiding inclined portion (inclined portion 604) provided at a position different from the opening/closing means on the bottom portion,
The gaming machine described in feature K7, characterized in that the guiding inclined portion is inclined downward toward the opening/closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the specified installation area in the second orientation.

The above configuration allows the gaming media to be guided along the slope, making it possible to optimally move the gaming media from the storage section toward the opening and closing means.

Feature K9. The support means supports the opening/closing means so as to be rotatable;
The bottom portion is provided with a bottom opening (lower opening 603),
the opening/closing means is rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank to open the bottom opening,
The gaming machine described in feature K7 or K8, wherein the bottom opening is located toward the pivot tip of the opening/closing means.

In the above configuration, the opening and closing means is exposed to the outside of the tank through the bottom opening, which is positioned closer to the pivot tip of the opening and closing means. This makes it easier to place the game media from the storage section at a location away from the pivot axis of the opening and closing means, improving the opening responsiveness of the opening and closing means.

Feature K10. The support means supports the opening/closing means so as to be rotatable;
A gaming machine described in any of features K1 to K9, characterized in that the auxiliary tank is equipped with a guide means (the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606) that guides the gaming medium placed on the opening and closing means toward the rotation tip side of the opening and closing means.

With the above configuration, the game medium is guided toward the tip of the opening/closing means, making it easier to concentrate the weight of the game medium away from the rotation axis of the opening/closing means, and improving the opening responsiveness of the opening/closing means.

Feature K11: The guide means includes a guide inclined portion provided on the opening/closing means,
The gaming machine described in feature K10 is characterized in that, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the guide inclined portion is provided on a predetermined surface of the opening/closing means on the side on which the gaming medium is placed, and is inclined downward toward the tip of the rotation.

The above configuration allows the game media on the opening and closing means to be guided along the slope, making it possible to preferably move the game media from the storage section toward the tip of the rotation.

Feature K12: The opening/closing means opens the bottom by being rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank against the biasing force of the biasing means;
A gaming machine described in any of features K1 to K11, characterized in that when the bottom is closed by the opening/closing means, the placement surface for the gaming medium on the opening/closing means is inclined downward toward the rotation tip of the opening/closing means.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the weight of the gaming media causes the opening and closing means of the auxiliary tank to open, and the gaming media enters the inside of the tank. In this case, as the gaming media enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the opening and closing means returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the biasing means. In such a case, if there is gaming media remaining on the opening and closing means, it may be thrown out of the auxiliary tank by the force of the opening and closing means, raising the concern that the gaming media may be scattered inside the housing.

In this regard, in the above configuration, when the opening/closing means is closed, the placement surface of the opening/closing means for the game media is inclined downward toward the tip of the rotation, thereby preventing the game media from being thrown off. In other words, if the placement surface for the game media is inclined downward toward the tip of the rotation, the game media can be guided into the tank even if the opening/closing means is opened relatively little. Therefore, when the opening/closing means is closed due to a decrease in the amount of game media above the opening/closing means, the amount of rotation required for closure is reduced, which in turn prevents the game media from being thrown off.

This feature may also be interpreted as "the opening and closing means is inclined so that the tip side of the part supported by the supporting means is positioned inside the tank in the vertical direction when the bottom is closed by the opening and closing means."

Feature K13: In the auxiliary tank, the bottom has a receiving portion (bottom plate portion 602, bottom lid 606) that receives the game medium supplied from the storage portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the downward position;
A gaming machine described in any of features K1 to K12, characterized in that the bottom portion has an upright portion (bottom plate protrusion portion 605) that stands up from the bottom portion in the area surrounding the receiving portion.

When the auxiliary tank is installed facing downward, the weight of the gaming media opens the opening and closing means of the auxiliary tank, and the gaming media enters the inside of the tank. In this case, as the weight of the gaming media enters the tank and is reduced, the opening and closing means returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the biasing means. In such a case, if there are gaming media remaining on the opening and closing means, there is a concern that the momentum of the opening and closing means will cause the gaming media to be thrown out of the auxiliary tank, causing the gaming media to be scattered inside the housing. In this regard, in the above configuration, an upright portion is provided around the receiving portion at the bottom of the auxiliary tank, so that even if the gaming media are thrown out, it is possible to prevent the gaming media from reaching the outside of the auxiliary tank.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A housing (housing 11) that is open to the front,
A door body (front door 12) for opening and closing a front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) that is installed in the housing and has a storage section (storage tank 52) that stores game media;
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the cabinet side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has an opening (upper opening 502) at its upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at its lower end.
A first engagement portion (a bottom-side through-hole 720 and an engagement upright portion 836) provided on the auxiliary tank;
A second engagement portion (engagement portion 721, lower sensor portion 801) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engagement portion;
A switching means (bottom lid 704, 802) for switching between an engaged state and a disengaged state of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion according to the state of the game media contained in the auxiliary tank;
A gaming machine comprising:

From the viewpoint of preventing the loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored within the housing. However, when manually retrieving the gaming media stored in the auxiliary tank of the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank needs to be removed from the housing, so it is required that the auxiliary tank be stored in a free state without being fixed. For this reason, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank will move within the housing and collide with the surrounding hopper device, door body, etc., causing damage.

In this regard, the present configuration is provided with a first engagement portion provided on the auxiliary tank and a second engagement portion provided within the housing, and the engagement between the two is switched on and off depending on the state of the gaming media contained in the auxiliary tank. Therefore, by engaging the first engagement portion with the second engagement portion when transporting the gaming machine, rattling of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. On the other hand, when collecting the gaming media contained in the auxiliary tank, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be switched to a non-engaged state depending on the accumulation of gaming media in the auxiliary tank, making it possible to remove the auxiliary tank from within the housing.

Feature L2. The gaming machine described in Feature L1, characterized in that the switching means engages the first engagement portion with the second engagement portion when no gaming medium is contained in the auxiliary tank, and disengages the first engagement portion with the second engagement portion when a gaming medium is contained in the auxiliary tank.

According to the above configuration, during transportation or other times when it is not expected that gaming media will be stored in the auxiliary tank, the first and second engagement parts restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank, while when the gaming machine is in operation, the auxiliary tank is automatically allowed to be removed in response to the gaming media being stored in the auxiliary tank. This not only eliminates the need for switching operations by the operator, helping to eliminate the hassle, but also prevents the first and second engagement parts from being damaged when the operator forgets to switch and performs the removal operation.

Feature L3. A gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, characterized in that it has a release operation part (bottom cover 704, 802) that releases the engagement between the first engagement part and the second engagement part when they are engaged.

In the above configuration, since a release operation unit is provided, even if no gaming medium is contained in the auxiliary tank and the first engagement unit and the second engagement unit are engaged, the release operation unit can be operated to release the engagement between the first engagement unit and the second engagement unit, making it possible to remove the auxiliary tank as needed. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of using the auxiliary tank while suppressing rattling when the gaming machine is being transported, etc.

Feature L4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L1 to L3, characterized in that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are arranged to be in an engaging relationship with each other in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion restricts the movement of the auxiliary tank in the front-to-rear direction of the gaming machine. This prevents the auxiliary tank from moving inside the cabinet and hitting the door when the gaming machine is being transported, etc.

Feature L5. One of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is a movable portion (the engagement protrusion 723, the engagement upright portion 836), and the movable portion is movable between an engagement position and a non-engagement position with respect to the other engagement portion (the bottom through-hole 720, the lower sensor portion 801);
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the switching means moves the movable part from the engaged position to the disengaged position based on the presence of a gaming medium in the auxiliary tank.

The above configuration allows the configuration of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion to be simplified, making this a practically preferable embodiment for achieving any of the configurations of features L1 to L4.

Feature L6. The first engagement portion is a hole portion (bottom through-hole 720) provided in the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank,
The second engagement portion is the movable portion (the engagement protrusion 723) that can enter and exit the hole portion,
the switching means is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and has a movable bottom plate (bottom cover 704) that is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is contained in the auxiliary tank;
A gaming machine described in feature L5, characterized in that the movable part moves from the engaged position to the disengaged position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward due to the weight of the gaming medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. This movable bottom plate is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and therefore can efficiently support the weight of the gaming media stored in the auxiliary tank. Furthermore, because the movable part is moved using the displacement of the movable bottom plate, the responsiveness of the movable part to changes in the storage state of the gaming media can be improved, and it is possible to prevent delays in switching to the disengaged state that can cause problems when removing the auxiliary tank.

Feature L7. The movable bottom plate is
It is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 705),
The gaming machine described in feature L6 is characterized in that it has a pushing portion (pushing protrusion 733) on the side of the rotating tip for pushing the movable part to move it from the engaged position to the disengaged position.

According to the above configuration, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are disengaged by pushing the movable portion with the movable bottom plate. In this case, the downward displacement of the movable bottom plate can be directly used to push the movable portion, simplifying the configuration.

Feature L8. The movable bottom plate is rotatable with the rear side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine as the rotation tip within the cabinet;
A gaming machine described in feature L7, characterized in that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are provided at the rear side of the gaming machine in the front-to-rear direction within the cabinet.

When an operator pulls out the auxiliary tank from inside the housing, the front side of the auxiliary tank is lifted lightly, and in that state, it is conceivable that the auxiliary tank will slide forward along the bottom plate of the housing. In this case, for example, if the pivoting tip of the movable bottom plate is at the front side of the housing and a push-in part is provided on this front side, it is conceivable that as the auxiliary tank is lifted, the push-in part will release the push on the movable part, which may cause an unintentional switch from a disengaged state to an engaged state. This may pose a concern that it may hinder the auxiliary tank from being pulled out.

In this regard, because the first and second engagement parts are provided at the rear of the gaming machine in the front-to-rear direction inside the cabinet, it is easier to maintain the pushing of the movable part by the pushing part, and unintentional switching from a disengaged state to an engaged state can be suppressed. This makes it possible to smoothly pull out the auxiliary tank.

Feature L9. The first engagement portion is the movable portion (the engagement upright portion 836) that can be displaced in the up-down direction,
The second engaging portion is an engaged portion (lower sensor portion 801) provided at a position capable of engaging with the movable portion,
The switching means is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and has a movable bottom plate (lid body 835) that is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is contained in the auxiliary tank,
A gaming machine described in feature L5, characterized in that the movable part moves from the engaged position to the disengaged position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward due to the weight of the gaming medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. This movable bottom plate is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and therefore can efficiently support the weight of the gaming media stored in the auxiliary tank. Furthermore, since the movable part is moved using the displacement of the movable bottom plate, the responsiveness of the movable part to changes in the storage state of the gaming media can be improved, and the inconvenience of a delay in switching to the disengaged state, which causes problems when removing the auxiliary tank, can be suppressed.

Feature L10. The second engagement portion is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through an insertion hole (lower sensor insertion hole 831, lid sensor insertion hole 837) provided in the auxiliary tank,
A gaming machine described in feature L9, characterized in that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are configured to be engageable with each other inside the auxiliary tank.

In the above configuration, the engagement relationship between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be established inside the auxiliary tank. This eliminates the need to secure space for engagement around the outside of the auxiliary tank, and makes it possible to reduce or prevent the occurrence of dead space that does not contribute to the storage of game media in the installation area for the auxiliary tank (predetermined installation area).

Feature L11: A storage state detection means (lower sensor unit 801, main control device 101) is provided to detect the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means has an insertion member (lower sensor portion 801) that is inserted into the insertion hole,
The gaming machine described in feature L10, wherein the second engagement portion is constituted by the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, the second engagement portion is configured using a storage state detection means that detects the storage state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts when realizing the configuration of feature L10. In addition, since the storage state detection means is generally made of metal, this configuration is also preferable in terms of suppressing damage to the second engagement portion.

Feature L12: The bottom plate of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal ejection hole 15) for ejecting the game medium from inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine described in any of features L6 to L11, characterized in that the movable bottom plate is configured to be able to open and close the bottom of the auxiliary tank.

According to the above configuration, the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by the movable bottom plate, so that by opening the movable bottom plate, the gaming media from the storage section can be led directly to the bottom plate opening. This allows the auxiliary tank to be automatically collected while still installed inside the cabinet, eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the gaming hall, and also making it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost, etc.

Feature L13. The gaming machine described in Feature L12 is characterized in that it is provided with a guide means (extension plate 751, recess 754) that guides the installation position of the auxiliary tank to a predetermined position where the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion do not face each other when the movable bottom plate is in an open state.

When the movable bottom plate is in an open state, it cannot properly support the weight of the gaming medium, which may cause inconvenience when switching from an engaged state to a disengaged state. In this regard, with this configuration, when the movable bottom plate is in an open state, the installation position of the auxiliary tank is guided to a position where the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion do not face each other, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature L14. A storage state detection means (lower sensor unit 801, main control device 101) for detecting the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank;
an external signal output means (main control device 101) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the detection result of the accommodation state detection means is a predetermined result;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features L1 to L13, characterized in that the switching means disengages the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion before the specified signal is output by the external signal output means.

The above configuration allows the auxiliary tank to be removed before a specific signal prompts the player to collect the game media (remove the auxiliary tank). This allows the player to respond with ample time to the timing of the auxiliary tank removal, preventing problems with the collection of game media.

Feature L15: A storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, main control device 101) is provided to detect the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means has an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a) that is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through an insertion hole (upper sensor insertion hole 505a) provided in the auxiliary tank,
A gaming machine described in any of features L1 to L14, characterized in that when the insertion member is inserted into the insertion hole, the peripheral portion of the insertion hole and the insertion member abut or approach each other in a direction intersecting the insertion direction.

According to the above configuration, the peripheral portion of the insertion hole and the insertion member come into contact with or approach each other, thereby restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank. This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank in addition to the engagement of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion, and to further suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank. In this case, the storage state detection portion is utilized, making it possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A housing (housing 11) that is open to the front,
A door body (front door 12) for opening and closing a front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) that is installed in the housing and has a storage section (storage tank 52) that stores game media;
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the cabinet side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has an opening (upper opening 502) at its upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at its lower end.
A first engagement portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engagement portion (engagement portion 574) provided in the housing and engageable with the first engagement portion,
A gaming machine characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is set so that engagement and disengagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is achieved by sliding the auxiliary tank on the tank installation surface (bottom plate 11a) of the specified installation area.

From the perspective of preventing the loss of the auxiliary tank when transporting the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored inside the cabinet. However, if the auxiliary tank of the gaming machine is stored in a free state inside the cabinet, there is a problem in that if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank will move inside the cabinet and collide with the surrounding hopper device, door body, etc., causing damage.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a first engagement portion and a second engagement portion provided within the housing, and by engaging these, the movement of the auxiliary tank within the housing can be restricted. This prevents the auxiliary tank from moving within the housing and colliding with surrounding components, and prevents damage to the auxiliary tank and surrounding components during transport.

In this case, in this configuration, the auxiliary tank can be slid on the tank installation surface to engage and disengage the first and second engagement parts. Therefore, the first and second engagement parts can be engaged without directly operating them. This configuration also allows the first and second engagement parts to be placed in places that are difficult for workers to reach, improving the freedom of layout, making it an advantageous configuration for gaming machines with limited installation space for mounted components. In addition, when closing the door, it is essential to push the auxiliary tank to the rear of the gaming machine (deep inside the cabinet) so that the door and the auxiliary tank do not interfere with each other. However, with the above configuration, the operation of pushing the auxiliary tank and the operation of engaging the first and second engagement parts can be completed in a single operation, improving workability.

Feature M2. The gaming machine described in Feature M1, characterized in that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are arranged to be in an engaging relationship with each other in the front-to-rear direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank in the front-to-rear direction of the gaming machine is restricted by the engagement of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion. This prevents the auxiliary tank from moving inside the housing and hitting the door when the gaming machine is being transported. In addition, when the auxiliary tank is installed inside the housing, the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion, so that it can be known that the auxiliary tank has slid to a specified installation area inside the housing.

Feature M3. The first engagement portion is a hole portion (bottom through-hole 720) provided in the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank,
The second engagement portion is a movable portion (engagement protrusion 723) that can enter and exit the hole portion,
The movable part is biased by a biasing means (coil spring 729) so as to protrude from the tank installation surface of the predetermined installation area,
A gaming machine described in feature M1 or M2, characterized in that a guide portion (engagement inclined portion 745, arc-shaped portion 746) for guiding the movable portion under the bottom of the auxiliary tank is provided at the rear end of the auxiliary tank in the fore-and-aft direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the movable part can be inserted into the hole by the biasing force of the biasing means, and the first engagement part and the second engagement part can be appropriately engaged. However, there is a risk that the movable part will protrude from the tank installation surface, and the auxiliary tank and the movable part may interfere with each other in the process of sliding the auxiliary tank. In this regard, in this configuration, the movable part is guided under the bottom of the auxiliary tank by a guide part provided at the end of the auxiliary tank on the rear side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that it is possible to prevent the movable part from getting caught on the auxiliary tank. This makes it possible to smoothly slide the auxiliary tank to a position where the first engagement part and the second engagement part engage. It is also possible to prevent damage to the first engagement part and the like caused by the installation of the auxiliary tank.

Feature M4: The guide portion includes an inclined portion (engagement inclined portion 745) that intersects obliquely with the sliding direction of the auxiliary tank and abuts against the movable portion when the auxiliary tank is slid,
The gaming machine described in feature M3 is characterized in that the inclined portion is inclined so as to push the movable portion downward as the sliding movement progresses.

The above configuration allows the movable part to be guided under the bottom of the auxiliary tank along the slope of the inclined part, making this a practically preferable aspect for realizing the configuration of feature M3 above.

Feature M5: A guide means (right side plate 11c) is provided to guide the auxiliary tank so that the auxiliary tank follows a predetermined specific path when the auxiliary tank is slid on the tank installation surface,
A gaming machine described in any of features M1 to M4, characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is set so that the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion engage when the auxiliary tank passes through the specific path.

According to the above configuration, the first engagement part and the second engagement part can be easily engaged by sliding the auxiliary tank along the guide of the guide means. Therefore, for example, even if the engagement point is in a blind spot or is difficult to see from the worker installing the auxiliary tank, the engagement can be easily achieved, improving the workability of the engagement work.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. A housing (housing 11) that is open to the front,
A door body (front door 12) for opening and closing a front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) that is installed in the housing and has a storage section (storage tank 52) that stores game media;
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the cabinet side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
A bottom plate opening (a medal ejection hole 15) is provided on the bottom plate of the housing to eject game media from inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine.
The auxiliary tank is
A tank body (tank body 701) having an opening at an upper end and a bottom at a lower end;
An opening/closing means (bottom lid 704, 802) for opening and closing the bottom portion;
Equipped with
The opening/closing means opens the bottom by rotating inwardly of the tank body, and in the open state, the end portion on the rotating tip side is located above the tank body,
A gaming machine characterized in that an abutment member (induction plate 52a) is provided at a position above the tank body within the cabinet, which abuts against the opening/closing means in an open state at a predetermined open position.

With the above configuration, the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, so that the auxiliary tank can be made available for manual collection by closing the bottom, while it can be made available for automatic collection by opening the bottom. This allows the auxiliary tank to be installed inside the cabinet even during automatic collection, eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the gaming hall, and also making it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost, etc.

However, when the tank bottom is open and used, if a player hits the gaming machine and it receives shock or vibration, for example, the opening and closing means may tilt and close the bottom. In this case, if the player does not notice that it has been closed and continues playing, not only will the gaming media not be collected, but it may also lead to a situation where the gaming media overflows from the auxiliary tank and scatters inside the cabinet. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the opening and closing means is tilted due to shock or vibration, the abutting member can restrict the rotation of the opening and closing means, making it possible to prevent unintended closure of the tank bottom.

Feature N2. The gaming machine described in Feature N1, characterized in that the contact member is a guide portion (guidance plate 52a) that guides the gaming medium from the storage portion to the auxiliary tank, or a member provided at a position on the side where the rotation angle of the opening/closing means is larger than the guide portion.

According to the above configuration, when the rotation of the opening/closing means is restricted by the abutment member, the opening/closing means is prevented from blocking the discharge outlet for the game media in the induction section, and the opening/closing means is prevented from becoming interposed between the induction section and the bottom of the tank. This allows the game media from the storage section to continue to be guided to the bottom plate opening, preventing delays in the collection of the game media.

Feature N3. The gaming machine described in Feature N2, characterized in that the opening and closing means is rotatably provided on the bottom toward the front of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the opening/closing means in the closed state can be rotated toward the front of the gaming machine to open the state. In this case, the opening/closing means in the open state can be positioned on the door body side with respect to the induction section. This prevents the gaming medium supplied to the auxiliary tank from hitting the opening/closing means and flying towards the door body, preventing the gaming medium from hitting the door body. It also prevents the gaming medium from getting between the door body and the tank body.

Feature N4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features N1 to N3, characterized in that the opening/closing means is elongated and rotatably supported at the short side of the bottom.

The above configuration makes it possible to make the tank body deep enough to ensure an appropriate tank capacity, while positioning the end of the opening/closing means at the tip of the rotation higher than the upper end of the tank body when in the open state.

Feature N5. The gaming machine described in Feature N4, characterized in that the opening and closing means is rotatably supported on the short side that is the front side of the gaming machine when the auxiliary tank is installed in the specified installation area.

With the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing with the tank bottom open, the opening and closing means can be positioned on the front side. This makes it easier to support the opening and closing means with your hand when pushing the auxiliary tank in, making the installation process easier.

Feature N6: Equipped with a storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main control device 101) for detecting the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means has insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) that are inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 731a, lower sensor insertion hole 731b) provided in the rear wall portion (rear wall portion 701c) of the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine described in feature N5, wherein the abutment member is provided at a position where it can abut against the opening/closing means in a non-contact state between the opening/closing means and the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, when the opening/closing means is tilted, the abutting member restricts the rotation of the opening/closing means before it comes into contact with the insertion member. As a result, even if the opening/closing means is tilted unexpectedly, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing means from colliding with the insertion member.

Feature N7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features N1 to N6, characterized in that at least a portion of the portion located above the tank body when the opening/closing means is in an open state is transparent.

The above configuration makes it possible to visually observe the inside of the housing and the tank body through the opening and closing means, and although the configuration tends to increase the height dimension of the auxiliary tank due to a portion of the opening and closing means protruding, it is possible to prevent adverse effects on visibility inside the housing and the tank body.

Feature N8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features N1 to N7, characterized in that at least one of the opening/closing means and the abutting member is provided with a buffer means at the contact point between the opening/closing means and the abutting member.

The above configuration prevents the opening/closing means from being damaged by the impact when the opening/closing means comes into contact with the abutment member.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1. A housing (housing 11) that is open to the front,
A door body (front door 12) for opening and closing a front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) that is installed in the housing and has a storage section (storage tank 52) that stores game media;
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the cabinet side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has an opening (upper opening 502) at its upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at its lower end.
A first engagement portion (bottom side through hole 720) provided on the auxiliary tank;
A second engagement portion (engagement portion 721) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engagement portion;
an engagement operation means (a coil spring 729, an engagement drive portion 761) for bringing the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion into an engaged state or a disengaged state;
Equipped with
The engagement operation means disengages the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion when a predetermined power supply state is present in the gaming machine, and engages the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion when the predetermined power supply state is not present.

From the viewpoint of preventing the loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored within the housing. However, when manually retrieving the gaming media stored in the auxiliary tank of the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank needs to be removed from the housing, so it is required that the auxiliary tank be stored in a free state without being fixed. For this reason, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank will move within the housing and collide with the surrounding hopper device, door body, etc., causing damage.

In this regard, the present configuration is configured to have a first engagement portion provided on the auxiliary tank and a second engagement portion provided inside the housing, which are disengaged when a specified power supply state is in place for the gaming machine, and are engaged when the specified power supply state is not in place. Therefore, when no power is being supplied, such as when the gaming machine is being transported, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be engaged, whereas when the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall and power is being supplied, they can be disengaged. In other words, with this configuration, movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted when the gaming machine is being transported, while the auxiliary tank can be removed when the gaming machine is in operation, greatly improving convenience.

Feature O2. The gaming machine described in Feature O1, characterized in that the engagement operation means includes a means for bringing the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion into an engaged state based on the predetermined power supply state and the amount of gaming media contained in the auxiliary tank being equal to or less than a predetermined amount.

Even if the power line is connected to a gaming machine installed in an amusement hall or the like, if the auxiliary tank is empty, for example, during inspection or game setting before the hall opens or after the hall closes, there is no need to move the auxiliary tank, and it is desirable for the auxiliary tank to be immobile for work reasons. In this regard, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are brought into an engaged state based on the fact that the gaming machine is in a specified power supply state and the amount of gaming media contained in the auxiliary tank is equal to or less than a specified amount, so that when it is not necessary to move the auxiliary tank, unnecessary movement can be suppressed, and a configuration that is advantageous for work, etc. can be realized.

Feature O3. Equipped with a storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main control device 101) for detecting whether the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank is a predetermined state (full state),
The gaming machine described in feature O1 or O2, characterized in that the engagement operation means is provided with a means for disengaging the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion based on the specified power supply state and the detection of the specified state by the storage state detection means.

According to the above configuration, when the power line is connected to the gaming machine, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be put into a disengaged state in response to the gaming media storage state being in a predetermined state (e.g., full state). This makes it possible to allow the auxiliary tank to move in accordance with the timing of removal of the auxiliary tank.

Feature O4. Equipped with a storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main control device 101) for detecting the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detection means is
a first means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b) capable of detecting that the storage state is a first state (full state);
a second means for detecting that the storage state is a second state in which the storage amount is smaller than that of the first state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature O1 or O2, characterized in that the engagement operation means is provided with a means for disengaging the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion based on the specified power supply state and the second state being detected by the second means.

The above configuration allows the auxiliary tank to be removed before the game medium storage state reaches the first state (e.g., full state), making it possible to respond with ample time to the timing of removing the auxiliary tank.

Feature O5. One of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is a movable portion (engagement protrusion 723), and the movable portion is movable between an engagement position and a non-engagement position with respect to the other engagement portion (bottom-side through-hole 720);
The engagement operation means is
a drive unit (drive source of the engagement drive unit 761) that moves the movable unit between the engagement position and the non-engagement position;
A gaming machine described in any of features O2 to O4, characterized in that it is equipped with a drive control means (main control unit 101) that drives and controls the drive unit based on the amount of gaming media contained in the auxiliary tank.

According to the above configuration, when a power line is connected to the gaming machine, it is possible to switch between an engaged state and a disengaged state depending on the amount of gaming media contained in the auxiliary tank, which can be a practically preferable embodiment for realizing any of the configurations of features O2 to O4.

Feature O6. The engagement operation means includes a biasing means (coil spring 729) for biasing the movable part toward the engagement position,
The gaming machine described in feature O5 is configured such that when the drive unit is in a non-driven state, the movable unit is held in the engagement position by the biasing force of the biasing means.

According to the above configuration, the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be brought into an engaged state during transportation of the gaming machine when the gaming machine is not connected to a power line. This makes it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from rattling during transportation.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A through Feature Group O described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in each of the other configurations of Feature Group A through Feature Group O individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 341) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 410) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guide rail 400) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area, and various game components (nails 369, etc.) arranged within the game area (game area PE), and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning hole 361, etc.) of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type game machine (ball-operated reel-type game machine): A game machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... slot machine as a gaming machine, 11... cabinet, 15... medal discharge hole as a bottom plate opening, 32... reel as a rotating body, 41... start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... stop buttons as a stop operation means, 52... storage tank as a storage section, 54... auxiliary tank, 64... speaker constituting an auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary performance section, 81... display control device as a sub-control board, 101... main control device as a main control board, 102... lottery means or main control CPU constituting various control means such as means, 501, 601, 701...tank body, 504, 607, 705...supporting portion as supporting means, 514, 606, 704, 802...bottom lid as opening/closing means, 571c...right flange portion as first engaging portion, 574...engaging portion as second engaging portion, 617...coil spring as biasing means, 720...bottom through hole as first engaging portion, 721...engaging portion as second engaging portion, 801...lower sensor portion as first engaging portion, 836...standing portion as second engaging portion.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
An accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media;
a bet amount setting means for determining that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting a bet amount for a game up to a predetermined amount;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a payout means for executing a payout of a predetermined number of game media as a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A transition means for transitioning a game state to a specific state in which a winning probability of a predetermined role in the lottery by the lottery means is changed compared to a state before the transition, and when a specific pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped, the transition means transitions the game state to the specific state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The bet amount set by the bet amount setting means includes a first bet amount and a second bet amount different from the first bet amount,
a condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result is satisfied in a game that is played in a state where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount;
a first effect means for executing a first specific effect by a predetermined effect means in a game that is played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount;
a second effect means for executing a second specific effect different from the first specific effect by the predetermined effect means in a game that is played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount;
Equipped with
the specific condition may be established based on a result of a lottery by the lottery means for a game to be played in a situation where the first bet number is set;
a game can be executed in a state where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount when the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established;
The gaming machine further comprises a means for setting a presentation mode of the second specific presentation in accordance with a lottery result of a game played in a situation where the second bet number is reached.

Images